JP6967327B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine") or a rotating cylinder type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachislot machine").

In a conventional gaming machine, when a gaming ball launched into the gaming area of a gaming board enters the starting port (hereinafter also referred to as "starting winning prize"), a big hit lottery is executed with this starting winning prize as an opportunity, and if the winning is won. , Transition to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Further, in the conventional gaming machine, after the start condition triggered by the above-mentioned start winning is established, the symbol display device starts the variable display of the symbol, and the effect suggesting the result of the big hit lottery is executed together with the symbol variation. Further, in the conventional gaming machine, there is one that executes an effect of displaying the count number (for example, the remaining time until the effect is executed) until the effect with high expectation is executed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-192622

However, there is still room for ingenuity in the production of displaying the count, and there are not a few players who expect it.

Accordingly, the present invention provides a gaming machine for a display for counting down, to hide the indication display to countdown to count down before terminating, to provide a game machine capable of providing elation to the player The purpose.

In order to solve the above problems, one aspect of the present invention adopts the following configuration.

A random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number triggered by a winning of a game ball to a predetermined start port, a determination means for determining whether or not a hit is made based on the random number when the start condition for symbol variation is satisfied, and the determination means. Based on the determination result, the symbol control means that changes the symbol and displays the determination result by the determination means on the symbol display device, and the effect to appear from a plurality of effects based on the determination result by the determination means are determined. A game machine including an effect determining means for performing an effect, an effect executing means for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means, and an effect display device for displaying the effect executed by the effect executing means, and a display that counts down. Can be displayed in the countdown display area formed on the effect display device , and the countdown display gradually subtracts the value displayed when the countdown display is started, and the subtraction is displayed. It is terminated when the countdown is performed for the specified value, and the countdown end trigger display is displayed when the countdown display is terminated. The first aspect of hiding the countdown display displayed on the effect display device without displaying the countdown end trigger display, and hiding the countdown display displayed on the effect display device. a second aspect to continue displaying of the count down without, there is, than the second mode to continue displaying of the count down without the Hide to the count down is displayed on the effect display device, The first aspect, in which the countdown display displayed on the effect display device is hidden without displaying the countdown end trigger display, is said to have a higher degree of expectation for the hit. After hiding the countdown display displayed on the display device without displaying the countdown end trigger display, the hidden countdown display is displayed again when the symbol change is performed. When the first aspect is executed in which the countdown display can be displayed and the countdown display is hidden without displaying the countdown end trigger display, the countdown display is hidden while the countdown display is hidden. In order to execute a special effect whose hit expectation differs depending on the execution mode, the timing before the special effect is executed is a predetermined time. Hide display of the count-down display of the countdown is the special effect to be executed among which is hidden to the count down from the start of the symbol variation are displayed on the effect display device a presentation in which the display for a long time the countdown than the time until the Hide is performed in a state of being hidden, the special display of the countdown is performed among which is hidden director is, Ri production der the display to the countdown is performed longer time than the time from being a non-display without the display of the countdown end trigger display to the start of the special effect, the display of the countdown When hidden, the game machine is characterized in that not only the countdown display but also the countdown display area itself formed on the effect display device is hidden.

According to one aspect of the present invention, the player can be given an uplifting feeling by hiding the display that counts down.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front when the pressing operation part of an effect operation unit is in an ascending position. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the assembly under the outer frame of the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in the dish unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in the dish unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a top view which looked at the effect operation unit in the dish unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation part button unit. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit seen from the top front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring seen from the bottom front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the top front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. (A) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and looked at from the left front. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the front and bottom. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the descending position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in the plan view which saw the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of a pressing operation part. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation unit of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when is pressed. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front and bottom. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is a rear sectional view which cut the payout device of a payout unit at the center in the front-rear direction of a payout vane. (A) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the movable ball-extracting piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the board unit from the rear lower part. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main composition and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main composition and looked at from the back. It is an enlarged side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut in the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which shows the upper part enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side with a tank rail or the like assembled on a ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 10 (a) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101 (a) viewed from the front by disassembling. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame is distributed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which enlarges and shows the vicinity of a tank rail in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back on the hinge side. It is a front view of the game board which shows the inside of the game area where a game ball is distributed by making a game panel opaque in a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the vicinity of the attacker unit in the game board enlarged. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the game panel is transparent. It is a front view of the game board which shows the decorative pattern of the game panel and the obstacle nail in the state of showing. It is a front view of the front component and a game panel in a game board. It is a perspective view which looked at the front component and a game panel from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the front component and a game panel from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at from the front by disassembling the front component and a game panel. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the front component and a game panel and looked at from the back. (A) is a front view showing a panel board in a game panel, an upper left panel decorative board, and a lower left panel decorative board, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the panel board at a specific obstacle nail portion, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view. It is a partial cross-sectional view of a panel board in the part of an obstacle nail which overlaps with a decorative pattern. It is a front view of the game board which shows the relationship between a decorative pattern in a game panel and an obstacle nail. (A) is a front view showing the relationship between the decorative pattern in the panel board of a game panel and the back front decorative board of the back front effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is the panel decoration LED of the panel board and the panel decorative board. It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship with. It is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit of the game board and the front production unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is a front view which shows the state which the 1st picture is luminescent and decorated in the front effect unit. It is a front view which shows the state which the 2nd picture is luminescent and decorated in the front effect unit. It is a front view of the back unit of the game board which emphasizes the back front decorative board and the back front right decorative board. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit of a game board from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the back-rear effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front. It is a front view of the back-rear effect unit which emphasizes the back-rear movable mechanism in the normal position of the back-rear movable decorative body. It is a front view of the back-rear effect unit which shows the state which the back-rear movable decorative body is locked by the lock member from the state of FIG. 133. It is a front view of the back-rear effect unit which shows the state which the slide guide is moved downward from the state of FIG. 134 to the vicinity of the descending end. It is a front view of the back-rear effect unit which shows the state which the lock member was rotated to the release position by the slide guide from the state of FIG. 135, and the back-rear movable decorative body was dropped. It is a front view of the back-rear effect unit which shows the state which the back-rear movable decorative body is moved up and down by the slide guide. It is a front view of the back-rear effect unit which shows the state which the lock member is rotated from the lock position to the release position side by the upward movement of the back-rear movable decorative body by the slide guide. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear decoration effect unit in the back-rear effect unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear decoration effect unit in the back-rear effect unit as viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view. It is a front view which shows the state which the 5th picture is light-emitting decoration in the back-rear decoration production unit. It is a front view which shows the state which the sixth picture was luminescently decorated in the back decoration effect unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the back unit of the back unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and (b) shows the back unit of the back unit disassembled for each main member. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back. It is a front view which shows the state which the 3rd picture is luminescent and decorated in the back middle production unit. It is a front view which shows the state which the 4th pattern is luminescent decoration in the back middle production unit. It is a front view of the back right production unit in the back unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the back right effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is a front view of the back right effect unit which emphasizes the back right movable mechanism in a normal state in which the tip of the back right movable decorative body is rotated upward and the bearing slider is located at the rising end. It is a front view of the back right effect unit which shows the state which the bearing slider is located at the descending end with the back right movable decorative body as it is from the state of FIG. 147. It is a front view of the back right effect unit which shows the state which the tip of the back right movable decorative body rotates downward from the state of FIG. 148. It is a front view of the back right effect unit which shows the state which the bearing slider is located at the rising end with the back right movable decorative body as it is from the state of FIG. 149. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the back-rear movable decorative body of the back-rear effect unit in the back unit is moved from the evacuation position to the standby position. FIG. 15 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the rear-rear movable decorative body is dropped from the state of FIG. 151 to a descending position. FIG. 15 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the rear-rear movable decorative body is moved in the vertical direction between a standby position and a descending position by a slide guide from the state of FIG. 152. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the back right movable decoration body of the back right effect unit in the back unit is moved from the initial state to the first state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which moved the back right movable decorative body from the state of FIG. 154 to the second state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which moved the back right movable decorative body from the state of FIG. 155 to the third state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the movable decorative body on the back side of the back-up effect unit in the back unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the back lower movable decoration body of the back lower production unit in the back unit is moved from the lower position to the upper position. In the back unit, the back-rear movable decoration of the back-rear effect unit is moved to the descending position, the back-right movable decoration of the back-right effect unit is in the second state, the back-up movable decoration of the back-up effect unit is in the appearance position, and so on. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the movable decorative body under the back of the underside effect unit is moved to the ascending position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the 1st picture is light-emitting and decorated in the front light guide plate of a table effect unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the 2nd picture is light-emitting and decorated in the front light guide plate of a table effect unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the 3rd picture is light-emitting decoration in the back 1st light guide plate of the back middle production unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the 4th pattern is light-emitting decoration in the back 1st light guide plate of the back middle production unit. Back-rear decoration in the back-rear effect unit It is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the fifth pattern is luminescently decorated in the back second light guide plate of the back-rear effect effect unit. Back-rear decoration in the back-rear effect unit It is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the sixth pattern is luminescently decorated in the back second light guide plate of the back-rear effect effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission effect of the animation style by a plurality of patterns using the front light guide plate, the back first light guide plate, and the back second light guide plate. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the 1st picture is light-emitting decoration on the front light guide plate of a front effect unit, and the back right movable decoration body of a back right effect unit is moved to the 2nd state. It is the front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit. It is a front view of the peripheral control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the control composition of a pachinko machine schematicly. It is a figure which shows the structure of the frame ground board. (A) is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment, and (b) is an interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the pre-determination process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot determination process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for a lottery process for a jackpot, and (B) is a symbol determination table used for a lottery process for a type of jackpot. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st variation pattern setting process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot control processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big prize opening opening and closing processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd entrance opening / closing process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol process processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passing process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub-main process executed by the peripheral control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16ms steady process executed by the peripheral control MPU of the same embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the gray scale production. It is explanatory drawing following FIG. 194. It is explanatory drawing following FIG. 195. It is a time chart which shows the prohibition period of volume adjustment at the time of execution of the operation effect using a rotation operation part. It is a time chart which shows the prohibition period of volume adjustment at the time of execution of a drive effect using a rotation operation part. It is a time chart which shows the prohibition period of volume adjustment at the time of execution of the operation effect using a pressing operation part. This is an example of the effect display of the effect display device when the volume is adjusted by the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine of another embodiment from the right front. It is a front view which shows the plurality of light emitting regions in the back second light guide plate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change of the light emitting area at the time of execution of the light guide effect using the back second light guide plate. This is a specific example of the effect when the light guide effect using the back second light guide plate is executed. It is a side sectional view for demonstrating the positional relationship between an effect display device, a plurality of light guide plates, and a plurality of movable decorative bodies. It is a time chart which shows the light emitting state of a plurality of light guide plates and the operating state of a movable decorative body. It is a front view which shows the transmission area formed in the decorative body main body of the back right movable decorative body. It is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine. It is a front view of another example of the game board which shows the inside of the game area where a game ball is distributed by making a game panel opaque in a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows another example of the control composition of a pachinko machine. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a symbol determination table used for a lottery process for a big hit, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a symbol determination table used for a lottery process for a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a round distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the big prize opening opening pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern table at the time of a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern table at the time of a detachment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the look-ahead effect table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the L5 production promotion pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of the L5 production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of the L5 production. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the outline of L5 production. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the outline of L5 production. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the outline of L5 production. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the L5 production promotion pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of the end production of L5 production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of a secret timer notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the time table of the secret timer notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the outline of the secret timer notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the outline of the secret timer notice effect.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position. be. Further, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back after being disassembled into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is hit.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame in which the shape of the front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the hinge member 510 on the main body frame of the main body frame 4 and the main body are formed by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame and the hinge member 60 below the outer frame. The hinge under-frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is mounted so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to be a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated to the front, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. The player can participate in the production, and the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301 in addition to the game by the game ball B.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 having a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and a game. A ball launching device 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. Covers the payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 having the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501. It includes a back cover 640, an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and at the same time, pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is performed by an operation of a player, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into a substantially square shape in front view, and a front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and divides the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower part of the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 having the cage main control board 1310, the function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the periphery arranged behind the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12), an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a table unit 2000 mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. , A back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing movable effects and light emission effects according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by accepting or passing the game ball B ( For example, it is provided with a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005 for granting a predetermined number of game balls B). The obstacle nail N is planted in front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 are provided in the table unit 2000.

The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. In addition, it is possible to entertain the player with the driving operation of the handle 182.

Further, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state changed by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, or displays the front effect unit 2600 and the back effect. Unit 3100, back middle production unit 3200, back right production unit 3300, back top production unit 3400, back bottom production unit 3500, back front production unit 3600, etc. Can be entertained.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame in which the shape of the front view extends vertically.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated to the front.

In the outer frame 2, the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame can detachably support the hinge member 510 on the main body frame of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, and are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially and rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for mounting the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, in the outer frame left assembly 10, the outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extruded mold material. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the right side surface that is opposite to the concave portion 11a to the right. It includes a bulging portion 11b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 is increased by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. It is provided with a pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 12, the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is inserted into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, in the upper left connecting member 12, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-shaped upper side extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixed portion 13b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b, and the upper lateral fixing portion 13b to the right from the rear side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending shortly to. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower left connecting member 13, the rear surface of the contact portion 13d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b is in contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 to the outside. It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, in the lower left connecting member 13, the horizontal fixing portion 13a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, in the outer frame right assembly 20, the outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a certain width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. It is provided with a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extruded mold material. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the left side surface that is opposite to the concave portion 21a to the left. It includes a bulging portion 21b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 is increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. It is provided with a pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper right connecting member 22, the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the upper right connecting member 22, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-shaped upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, the flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and the left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d that extends shortly toward the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower right connecting member 23, the rear surface of the contact portion 23d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b is attached to the left surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and in a state where the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a is aligned with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the lower right connecting member 23, the horizontal fixing portion 23a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

The upper hook hook member 24 and the lower hook hook member 25 are for hooking the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction, and extends to the left from the front side of the flat plate-shaped mounting portion 24a mounted on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and the mounting portion 24a. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a mounted on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a extending from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left. A flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hook piece portion 25b in the front-rear direction. It has a mouth 25c and.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right. The width of the outer frame upper member 30 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a that is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction while penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutout portions 30a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. A hinge assembly 50 on an outer frame, which will be described later, is mounted on the mounting step portion 30b.

[2-3. Assembly under the outer frame]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front by disassembling it. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 has an outer frame lower member 41 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right and extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front curtain plate member 42 that is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends to the left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain plate member 42. A box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed on the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. It is equipped with a mechanism 44.

The width of the outer frame lower member 41 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with a notch 41a that is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction while penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and has a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and is removed from the position toward the rear in the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end side. The recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 as wide as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 has a length in the left-right direction extending to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 is closed on the open rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 to become a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. It forms a space 40a. The curtain plate front member 42 has an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates back and forth and extends left and right on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a tubular connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right and projects upward at the central portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so as to be positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting cylinder portion 43a in the left-right direction is formed to be about 1/3 of the length of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a to connect the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of the 620a and forms the enclosure 624.

In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Is to prevent being pinched.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and is a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the hinge member 60 under the outer frame, which will be described later, is highlighted, and a mounting portion. The first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a and the second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a are mounted. The vertical wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placement portion 44a, and the upper end protrusion protruding forward from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as the upper surface is directed backward. It is provided with a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an illegal tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it comes into contact with the forward protruding upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and further invades. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the hinge member 60 under the outer frame.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B that has fallen on the mounting portion 44a for some reason when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 is the standing wall portion. Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is prevented by the 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the mounting portion 44a. When the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or on the mounting portion 44a is first referred to as the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 arranged apart from each other on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46 and a port member 47 having two cylinders that are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46 and extend back and forth. A frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 is provided.

The pair of guide members 45 are such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Therefore, rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This is to prevent the sound in the speaker enclosure from leaking from between the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21. 21 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 21 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower surface. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided with a locking member 52 and a mounting screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing portion 51a that is horizontally extended and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion. The flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of the 51a and the end edge extending downward from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The hinge member 51 on the outer frame is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 described later of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 has a strip-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It is provided with an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending diagonally to the left front and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b behind the bearing groove 51c by the mounting screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock main body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space that can accommodate the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be removed from the inside of the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under the outer frame]
The hinge member 60 below the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion posterior to the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. It is provided with a hinge pin 60c under the outer frame protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size that allows only one game ball B to pass through the horizontal portion 60a up and down. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is columnar and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 60b and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

In the state where the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled on the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. It is fixed to the member 43 behind the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. As a result, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed. Since the distance from 4 is gradually narrowed, the ball is rolled to the rear side where the distance is wide, and the ball can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, since the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame can be easily prevented from rolling. The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically in front view, and the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Has been done. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a front view extending vertically, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and a door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame, the dish unit 200 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the dish unit 200 attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410. The door frame top unit 450, which is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame, is provided.

The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a square shape (rectangular shape) whose outer shape extends vertically and penetrates back and forth, and a front right of the door frame base 101. The handle mounting member 102 mounted below, the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the speaker duct 103 mounted near the right end of the rear view in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view. Covers the rear relay board 106 after the handle, the door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame rear relay board 106 from the rear side. It includes a relay board cover 108 after the handle and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached above the relay board 106 after the handle on the rear side of the door frame base 101. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which is launched by the ball launcher 540 and does not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player, and by operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing a game to be driven into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so that the left side of the front view can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed, and the game board attached to the main body frame 4 is closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a rectangular flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, and a handle mounting member 102. It is provided with a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 and a door frame main relay at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub-relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the rear view of the board 104, and the rear handle relay board mounted on the left side of the rear view of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame relay board cover 107, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. The rear relay board cover 108, which is attached to the rear side and covers the rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and the cable cover 109, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable, are attached. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached above the relay board 106 after the handle on the rear side of the door frame base 101. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Further, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. ..

[3-1-1. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 penetrates back and forth, and includes a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. As described above, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The cylinder lock 130 is recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, and penetrates back and forth between the insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted and the insertion recess 101c. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b penetrate the front and rear on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 101 is to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. The passage port 101f, the ball passage port 101g for the upper plate that penetrates back and forth so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end of the front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to the front, and the door. It is provided with a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 is formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage port 101 g), and is provided with a plurality of vertically long slits 101i that penetrate the front and rear. The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, in the plurality of slits 101i, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is rearward. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later is penetrated. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1-2. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a cylinder. With a plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire axial length of the cylinder portion 102a and are arranged at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 102a. The outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a are provided.

The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper portion of the tubular portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the tubular portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the tubular portion 102a only when the three protrusions 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 101.

Since the axis of the tubular portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the tubular portion 102a is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in the same tilted state.

[3-1-3. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. In the speaker duct 103, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the cylindrical portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. It can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side) of the pachinko machine 1 through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211.

Further, the speaker duct 103 is provided with a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged on the left side of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1-4. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, rear relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the rear-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner of the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the relay board 106 after the handle and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And a part of (see FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which the quadrangles extending to the left and right are combined on the right side of the front view of the upper part of the quadrangles extending vertically, and the outer shape of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is the handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the side of the door frame right side unit 410. The purpose is to relay the connection between the decorative board 413 of the decorative portion in the window, the decorative board 418 on the right side of the door frame, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are doors in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining portion of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The rear handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear-handle relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. Is for relaying. The rear side of the handle rear relay board 106 is covered with the handle rear relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1-5. Door frame relay board cover / rear relay board cover / cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear relay board cover 108 after the handle, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board (a portion extending up and down in an inverted L shape) are rear. It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side when viewed from the front open. In the state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The rear-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and has a wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and openings for passing wiring cables are formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1-6. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is provided on the left and right sides connecting the vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112, which are arranged apart from each other on the left and right, and the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extending to the right to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112 with the left end side attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of mounted cylinder mounting frames 115 vertically separated from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, and hooks 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 are hooked. The hooking member 116 is provided.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically at substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are separated in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends to the left and right in the vertical direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a which is notched downward from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b which penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the right end. The notch 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and has a pair of rear piece portions that are formed in a rectangular flat plate shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear piece portions that face each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a rear piece on the left side mounted on the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a rear piece on the right side mounted on the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115.

The hook member 116 is attached to the portion of the insertion hole penetrating the front and rear on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112. The hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 is hooked on these hook members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are punched out metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled so as to be along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. , Is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passage port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1-7. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is attached to the upper left corner of the front view of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a rectangular front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the mounting piece 121a is mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is a columnar metal rod bent into an L shape. In the state where the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, a portion extending vertically penetrates from below near the front end of the pair of projecting pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The flange member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the pair of projecting pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape and is placed around a portion extending vertically on the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame upward via the flange member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is in a state of being urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves the door frame upper hinge pin 122 as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 may be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, or may be pulled out downward. can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is hinged with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinged and rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1-8. Hinge member under the door frame]
The hinge member 125 under the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the front left lower corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a square flat plate-shaped mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) projecting downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b is provided.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the hinge member 125 under the door frame are formed by bending a metal plate. The hinge pin 126 under the door frame is a columnar metal rod having a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is located coaxially with the portion extending vertically of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b in a state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100. It is installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can be done.

[3-1-9. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locks. The cylinder lock 130 is a regular columnar cylinder body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a key hole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a key hole 132 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the key hole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 is inserted into the pair of notches to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the key hole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to be rotated.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is in a state of substantially coincident with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1-10. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A game ball that has entered from the entrance 141a of the box-shaped front cover 141 that is open and the front cover 141 that is open in the front and rear while closing the rear end of the front cover 141. The front cover is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 having a ball hitting supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, the rear cover 142, and the front cover 141. The rear cover 142 one by one a ball pulling member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a game ball B on the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. It is equipped with a ball feeding solenoid 145.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in the front view, and the ball feeding member 143 is ball feeding on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arcuate slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b when viewed from the front. From 141c, the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing rear unit 240 And the portion of the ball ejection taxiway 241c that is open to the rear on the upstream end side is closed from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a and a partition portion 143a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 144, which is below the entrance 141a and between the entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball ejection port 141b and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod portion 143b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b that is below the operating rod 143c. It is provided with a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The actuating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to project forward through the arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The actuating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 is after the blocking portion 144a and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-shaped plan view centered on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 143a of the entrance entrance 141a and the ball pulling member 143. It is provided with a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotation axis core side, and a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the axis of rotation. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotating shaft core by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft core in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to rotate between the holding position and the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hitting ball supply port 142a and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (striking ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a and stays on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a, and the end portion of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the ball hitting supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip swinging in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operating rod 146. It is provided with a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates a ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operation rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is rotatably attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 around the axis extending back and forth. Has been done. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is attracted to the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding operation rod 146 is centered on the right end portion. The left end side near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. It rotates in this way and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation rod 146, the left end portion (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is arranged on the opposite side to the side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35 (b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding operating solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in a state of being positioned at the feeding position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 168) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to apply a moment such that it rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the ball pulling member 143 rotatably supported by the shaft or the weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removing member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 operated by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the dish unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the ball pulling member 143, and the ball pulling port 141b side. The game ball B does not invade.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button of the plate unit downward, the upper plate ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission unit, and the operation rod 143c is moved downward with the operation transmission unit. Will move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball pulling member 143 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition. Is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the plate unit 200. It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

Since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 on which the working transmission portion 242b with which the working rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 abuts is formed is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the plate is vigorously supplied, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is the partition portion. It is possible to prevent it from bouncing off at 143a.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) recessed forward in the upper right corner when the ball striking port 142a in the rear cover 142 is viewed from the rear. The fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape of the front view extending to the left and right, and the upper piece portion 148a and the upper piece portion 148a which are separated vertically at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It is provided with a lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip end side (right end side in front view) of the side facing each other of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b. .. The upper piece portion 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent so that the right end of the front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same surface as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the ball striking supply port 142a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 148, the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launcher 540 from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 and attached to the fraudulent game ball B. The momentum of the illegal game ball B launched (struck) by the ball launcher 540 when an illegal act such as operating the string to move the illegal game ball B in and out of the first starting port or the like is performed. A string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b, and then a V-shape formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion of the ball, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached.

[3-1-11. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which is launched by the ball launcher 540 and does not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and the front side open, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. It is equipped with 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and communicates with the normal taxiway of the lower full tank path unit of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port of the dish unit, and the through ball passage 150a. The through-ball passage 150a is provided with a full-tan ball receiving port 150b that opens rearward on the lower right side of the front view and can communicate with the full-tan taxiway of the lower full-tan ball path unit of the main body frame 4. ..

Further, the foul cover unit 150 opened upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 150b, and did not reach the game area 5a even though it was launched by the ball launching device of the main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 150c that receives the game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B that is open forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c. It is provided with a ball discharge port 150d that discharges forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port of the dish unit.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving port 150c, and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. It is provided with a storage passage 150e having a possible size.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed on the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 and a movable piece 153 whose lower ends are rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. It is provided with a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In this foul cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the storage passage 150e is filled to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game ball B. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower plate 202 is full, the payout of the game ball B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, the person in charge of the game hall, or the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the full tank of the lower plate 202.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 described later in the main body frame 4. The actuating protrusion 613a of the 613 is provided with a door opening / closing contact portion 150f that can be contacted (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. When the actuating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to rotate the downstream end of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is detachably mounted. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and also makes the game visible. It closes the front of the region 5a.

The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. It is provided with a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 is a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b and. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161 respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 97).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 163b and a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted on the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To mount the glass unit 160 on the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit mounting member 163 mounted on the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the movement of the glass frame 161 to the rear. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally lifted, and the glass unit 160 does not naturally come off from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged so as to be separated from each other to the left and right by a flat plate-shaped main body portion 171 having a predetermined outer periphery and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward from the main body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body portion 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000, which will be described later, an out guide portion 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). As a result, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 172 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front component member 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and by being operated by the player, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181 and the front end side of the handle 182. Covers the disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181 and the handle decorative board 184 mounted on the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having multiple LEDs mounted on the front side, and the front side of the handle decorative board 184. The handle cover 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183 is provided.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and a handle 182 attached to the front end thereof, and is rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. The handle base 181 and the inner have a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end side is attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 and the other end side are attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is viewed clockwise through the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with an auxiliary spring 191 that is urging in the direction.

Further, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and the tip side of the handle unit 180 protrudes outward from the left side of the front outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 and is attached to the handle base 181. It is equipped with an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from a cylindrical base 181a extending back and forth, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and an outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. It also has three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a in the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102, and the ridges 102c can be inserted into the three groove portions 181c, respectively. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes in a state where it cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

The handle 182 has four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape as the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked. It is provided with a locking protrusion 182f and the like.

The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a has a side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182, which bulges outward so as to bulge outward, and is the opposite side of the anti-city area. The side surface in the direction of is dented (cut) so as to curve inward. In the second protrusion 182b, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and the second protrusion 182b is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges outward so that the side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side curves inward. It is recessed in the shape of the first protrusion 182a and is formed in a shape similar to that of the first protrusion 182a.

In the third protrusion 182c, the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the third protrusion 182a has a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It protrudes at about half the height. The side surfaces of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 182d, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and the fourth protrusion 182d is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d has side surfaces on both sides that are inclined in a substantially straight line, and is formed into a substantially isosceles triangle.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, which regulates the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 is rounded forward and has translucency. The handle cover 185 is provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member inside. The handle cover 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately causing the LED on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184 to emit light.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle mounting member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 is attached. The handle unit 180 attached via the slingshot unit 180 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 and perform the rotation operation without any discomfort.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

The steering wheel touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the steering wheel unit 180, and when the player comes into contact with the steering wheel 182 or the like, the static electricity acting from the player is detected and the static electricity acting on the steering wheel 182 or the like of the player is detected. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of the 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 by a method different from the original method to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 determines. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, before operating the single-shot button 193. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d on the handle 182, and rotates the handle 182 most in the front-view clockwise direction. When the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 182d of the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is almost the same as the position, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue of the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged under the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. It is provided with a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201, a plate base unit 210 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. It is provided with a plate decoration unit 250 having a plate decoration unit 250, and a production operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate main body 212. The mounting base 213 mounted on the mounting base 213 and protruding forward, the dish unit relay board 214 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213, and the ball rental operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 are provided.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the lower plate main body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the lower plate main body 251 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251. The dish unit main body 252, the lower dish ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251 and the dish upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit main body 252, respectively. It includes a plate upper right decoration unit 275, a plate upper left decoration unit 270, and a plate upper left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below each of the plate upper right decoration unit 275.

The effect operation unit 300 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. For an annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. It includes a transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably mounts the transmission gear 350 for an operation ring.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 that emits and decorates the effect operation ring 330, the decorative board cover 353 that covers the upper side of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibrating speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And have.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 has a ball lending operation unit 220 arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5-1. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides of the front view and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width in the left-right direction of the door frame 3 bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 201 recedes backward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Guidance passage portion 201a (FIG. 46). See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 201a is submerged below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper plate 201 is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a game ball from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. It is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e.

The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls) the game ball. The static electricity charged in B can be removed.

[3-5-2. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically through the bottom wall and is capable of discharging the game ball B. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed so as to be openable and closable by the lower plate ball extraction unit 260.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangle whose shape in a plan view extends to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom surface of the lower plate 202 is inclined so as to be lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c and below the effect operation unit 300 in a state of being assembled in the plate unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and at the same time, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is opened. The game ball B stored in the plate unit 200 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate ball supply port 211c is forward. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5-3. Plate base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached to the front surface.

The plate base unit 210 has a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. The main body 212, the mounting base 213 mounted on the right side of the upper dish main body 212 at the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and protruding forward, and the mounting base 213 mounted on the front side of the dish unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting base 213. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

Further, the plate base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213 and an upper plate ball pulling-out unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. The upper plate ball removal unit 240, which is attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230, is provided.

[3-5-3a. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (shallow with the rear open) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is formed in a box shape).

The plate unit base 211 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a and the upper plate ball supply port 211a extending rearward in a tubular shape. The speaker port 211b to which the punching metal is attached on the front side, the lower plate ball supply port 211c that penetrates back and forth at the lower part on the left side with respect to the center of the left and right sides of the front view and extends to the rear in a tubular shape, and the lower plate. A notch 211d cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right wall of a portion extending in a tubular shape to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear on the upper right side of the front view of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is provided with an upper plate ball feeding port 211e whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, and is on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is placed and the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. It penetrates back and forth under the plate body and penetrates back and forth at the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 in the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is inserted and in the lower right corner of the front view. Cylinder insertion through which the cylinder portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted and the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 which penetrates back and forth near the right corner of the front view. It is equipped with a mouth 211i.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled in the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower plate ball supply port 211c has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a tubular rear end having a lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. It penetrates and connects to the front end of the ball ejection port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 can be moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance / entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 222. After the plate ball is removed, the unit 240 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b, the ball removal guide path 241c, and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is a game ball in the upper plate 201. B is supplied to the ball feeding guide path 241b from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 after the upper plate ball is removed.

[3-5-3b. Precision plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The upper plate main body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger and bulges forward than the center of the left and right in the front view. The front end of the upper plate main body 212 is retracted backward from the most forward bulging portion toward the right side of the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed above the right end.

In the state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, the upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion where the upper part near the right end is closed is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, in the upper plate main body 212, an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed in an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5-3c. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the dish unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open upper part. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a that penetrates vertically near the left end and a through opening 213b that penetrates vertically at the right corner of the rear end.

The front slider 232 of the upper plate ball removal unit 230 is inserted into the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. Further, the through port 213b is inserted with a wiring cable for connecting the ball rental operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104.

[3-5-3d. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish lower left decorative board 283, and the dish lower right decorative board 288. , And to relay the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5-3e. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the mounting base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After inserting a prepaid card or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B can be rented into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine can be displayed, or the ball lending machine can be used. The purpose is to deduct the amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the rented game ball B and return them.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper plate ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221 and an upper plate ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 arranged on the right side of the pull-out button 222 and having translucency, a ball lending button 224 arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation. It includes a return button 225 arranged on the right side of the front part of the base 223, and a ball lending display unit (not shown) arranged below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223.

The upper plate ball pulling button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light emitting state.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card having cash or a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and then the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine is returned after deducting the amount of the rented game ball B. The ball lending display unit displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5-3f. Unit before removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, and the upper plate 201 This is for discharging the game ball B stored in the lower plate 202 to the lower plate 202.

The upper plate ball removal unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230.

The upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and has a vertically extending tubular front base 231 and a front that is movably inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 in the vertical direction. The slider 232 and the like are provided. The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 near the front of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends up and down, and the upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper plate ball removal button 222, and the lower end is the actuating receiving portion 242a of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 of the unit 240 after the upper plate ball removal. It is in contact with the upper surface.

The unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball has a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper plate ball pulling slider 242 mounted so as to be slidable to, a spring 243 for urging the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. It is equipped with.

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from the portion where the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward so that the ball receiving port 241a and the ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass can be used. A game from a position below the ball feeding taxiway 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and a ball feeding taxiway 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward. It is provided with a ball-extracting taxiway 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in the rear view.

The ball receiving port 241a is assembled in the plate base unit 210, and at the downstream end (right end in the front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201, the ball receiving port 241a is directed forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211. It is formed at the opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance / exit 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The portion extending to the left and right of the ball removal taxiway 241c protrudes to the right of the rear view from the portion where the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side of the rear view is lower. It is open on the right side of the rear view. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball removal taxiway 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. In the state where the ball feeding guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball feeding port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending to the left and right is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has a quadrangular shape in front view, and protrudes rearward from the actuating receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and the rear surface on the rear side of the actuating receiving portion 242a. The operation transmission unit 242b and the like are provided. The upper surface of the actuating receiving portion 242a is formed flat. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward toward the rear, and the lower surface thereof extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the actuating receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the actuating receiving portion 242a. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the above. Further, in the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled on the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b projects to the rear of the rear base 241 and operates on the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface. The door 143c is in contact with the door.

The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end is attached to the upper plate ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is located at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

In the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper plate ball removal button 222 is positioned upward at the moving end via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the actuating receiving portion 242a. Further, since the countersunk ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the working rod 143c which is in contact with the upper surface of the working transmission portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball ejection button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned between the entrance entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b, and is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launcher 540 side via the entrance entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that is open below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball ejection port 141b is guided into the lower plate ball supply port 211c from the notch portion 211d through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the plate 202, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressure of the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate is passed through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the actuating receiving portion 242a. As the ball pulling button 222 rises, the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the working rod 143c in contact with the working transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is located between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b. It will return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240. It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5-4. Dish decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211, and the plate unit base so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the 211, the lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and the plates attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit main body 252, respectively. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate, and the lower left decoration unit 280 and the lower right decoration unit of the plate attached below the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285 and.

[3-5-4a. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 cooperates with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower plate 202. The lower plate body 251 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in which the shape in a plan view extends to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower plate main body 251 is formed with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating up and down in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate main body 251 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate main body 251 is in a state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, in the state where the lower plate body is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5-4b. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is separated to the left and right, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. ..

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear open, and the upper left decorative unit 270 and the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate, the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the lower right decorative unit of the plate are formed on the front of each. 285 is attached. The right end of the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so as to become wider in the vertical direction toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

Further, the plate unit main body 252 has a front notch portion 252e cut upward from the lower front end of the portion covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decorative portion 252b, and the lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. It is provided with a bottom surface notch 252f, which is notched in a portion below the above. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and has a handle insertion port 252 g through which the cylinder portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252 g. It is formed between the cylinder insertion port 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b back and forth and the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and the pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are centered in the left-right direction. It is provided with an effect operation unit mounting portion 252i to which the 300 is mounted. The effect operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width in the left-right direction of the dish unit main body 252.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to completely cover the front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. .. Further, in the state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed so that the bottom surfaces are on the same surface.

[3-5-4c. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removing unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and opens and closes the lower plate ball removing hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower plate 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower plate 202. It is for letting you do it.

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and has a flat plate-shaped lower plate ball removal base 261 having a through hole penetrating up and down in the right front corner in a plan view, and a lower plate ball removal unit. A slider 262 that is slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower plate ball removal button 263 that is attached to the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 that urges the slider 262 forward. It is provided with a lower plate ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower plate ball removing lid 265 in an open state via the slider 262.

The lower plate ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and is vertically located at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (lower plate main body 251). A through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower plate ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is slidably attached to a portion of the lower plate ball removal base 261 to the left from the center in the left-right direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that projects upward in a columnar shape.

The lower plate ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower plate ball removal base 261 so that the left end side can rotate around the axis extending vertically at a position to the left of the slider 262, and the right end side is the slider 262. It extends to the right beyond the above, and the right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower plate ball removing lid 265 is formed with a slit extending to the left and right into which the protrusion pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

In the state where the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower plate ball removal base 261 is It is located on the same surface as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower plate ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the plate unit main body 252. In the lower plate ball removing unit 260, under normal conditions, the slider 262 is located at the moving end on the front side due to the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower plate ball removing lid 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) is closed.

In this normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front surface notch portion 252e in the front surface of the lower front surface decorative portion 252b.

In the normal state, when the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward and moved backward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves backward together with the lower plate ball removal button 263. It becomes. When the slider 262 moves backward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 pushes the lower plate ball removal lid 265 backward through the slit, and the lower plate ball removal lid 265 moves backward with the left end side as the center. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower plate ball removal lid 265 located directly above the through hole moves rearward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved backward by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the urging force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower plate ball removal lid 265 remains rotated backward, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is maintained in the open state, and the game balls B in the lower plate 202 are continuously played. It can be discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball extraction button 263, which is recessed from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. NS. Then, when the pressure of the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 returns to the state of matching the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower plate ball removal lid 265 is rotated so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball removal lid 265. As a result, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5-4d. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The dish upper left decorative unit 270 has a semi-cylindrical, left-right extending dish upper left decorative body 271 and a dish upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271. It is equipped with a dish upper left decorative board 273 which is attached to the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper left decorative body 271 has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end and the central axis extending left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The upper left decorative body 271 of the plate is formed to be milky white.

The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted from the rear inside the dish upper left decorative body 271, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper left decorative board 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper left decorative body 271 can be light-emittingly decorated.

In the state where the plate upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the plate upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the plate upper left decorative body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the plate upper left decorative body 271 is emitted. It can be decorated with light emission almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish upper right decorative unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical, left-right extending dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish upper right decorative body 276 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right reflector 277. It is equipped with a dish upper right decorative board 278, which is attached to the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, forming a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The upper right decorative body 276 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted from the rear inside the dish upper right decorative body 276, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper right decorative substrate 278. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper right decorative board 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper right decorative body 276 can be light-emitting and decorated.

In the state where the plate upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the plate upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the plate upper right decorative unit 276, when a plurality of LEDs of the plate upper right decorative substrate 278 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the plate upper right decorative body 276 is emitted. It can be decorated with light emission almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-4e. Lower left decorative unit of the plate and lower right decorative unit of the plate]
The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, respectively. Be done. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 cooperate with the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. ..

The lower left dish decorative unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending to the left and right to have translucency, a lower left dish decorative body 281, and a lower left dish reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left dish decorative body 281. It is equipped with a lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish, which is attached to the rear side of the lower left reflector 282 of the dish and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower left decorative body 281 of the dish extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view, and is on the left side. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the above. The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate. The shaft extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a semi-cylinder is bent. The left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The lower left dish reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left dish decorative body 281 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the lower left dish decorative substrate 283. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 281 on the lower left of the plate can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

The left end of the dish lower left decorative unit 280 is located below the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. Since the left end of the lower left decorative unit 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower left decorative unit 280 seems to have the left end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decorative body 281 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the plate are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is emitted. It can be decorated with light emission almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate has a semi-cylindrical shape extending to the left and right and has transparency, and the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate and the lower right of the plate attached to the rear side of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate. It includes a reflector 287 and a decorative substrate 288 on the lower right side of the plate, which is attached to the rear side of the reflector 287 on the lower right side of the plate and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower right decorative body 286 of the dish extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulge 252a on the right side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate. The central axis extends to the left and right, and the shape is such that the semi-cylinder is bent. The right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the dish is formed in a milky white color.

The lower right reflector 287 of the dish is inserted from the rear inside the lower right decorative body 286 of the dish, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the dish. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 286 on the lower right of the plate can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the left end is the lower right decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. Since the right end of the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower right decorative unit 285 seems to have the right end submerged in the door frame 3. Since the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the lower right decorative unit 286, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are made to emit light, the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate is emitted. The entire front surface of the plate can be decorated with light emission almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-5. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as viewed from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation button. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. It is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that allows the player to perform a rotation operation, and a pressing operation unit 303 that allows the player to perform a pressing operation. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. .. The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, and an outer circumference of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b arranged between the inner circumference and the inner circumference.

The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330. It includes a transmission gear 350 for an operation ring that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably attaches the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring to the operation unit base 320.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330. It includes an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320, and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320.

[3-5-5a. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in the shape of a container with the upper and rear sides open.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, and the front of the unit. A reflector 313 on the center of the dish mounted from the rear inside the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the reflector 313 on the center of the dish and capable of irradiating light toward the front are mounted. The dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear, and the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower reflector 315 and light toward the front. It is provided with a dish center lower decorative substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of illuminating the plate are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the rear side in the center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side of the unit lower cover 311 is the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to the 252i so as to be mounted from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis perpendicular to the virtual plane formed on the upper end edge extending in the shape of a semicircle at the front is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is tilted at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. When the lower cover 311 of the unit is assembled to the dish unit 200, a plurality of drain holes 311a are formed at the lowest portion.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular shape in which the plan view shape is bulged forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 and is formed on the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. It is installed. The unit front cover 312 has a semi-circular arc extending forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semi-circular shape, and the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the lower plate center upper decorative body 312a forward. It is provided with a dish center lower decorative body 312b in which a bulging semicircle extends in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by dividing a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) into half and extending the split surface toward the center in a semicircular shape. It is formed in such a bent shape. The dish center lower decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decoration 312a, and the dish center lower decoration 312b has a slightly thinner thickness than the dish center upper decoration 312a. It is formed in the shape of a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled in the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a protrudes forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Further, in the state of being assembled in the plate unit 200, the left and right ends of the plate center upper decoration unit 312a are continuous with the right end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the left end of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively, and the plate center lower decoration body. The left and right ends of the 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate and the left end of the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is formed in a milky white color.

Further, the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the front end of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. The reflector 313 on the center of the plate blocks the light from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate from leaking to the rear (inside). The decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is formed in a semicircular shape along the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the front (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated by emitting light.

The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 from leaking to the rear (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the front (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs of the decorative substrate 316 under the center of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 312b under the center of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated by emitting light.

Since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a rib for reinforcement in the middle of extending in a semi-arc shape in the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, the dish When the LED of the decorative substrate 314 on the upper center and the LED of the decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate are made to emit light, the whole of each can be light-emitting and decorated substantially uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly projected forward from the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the plate center upper decorative body 312a is continuous with the plate upper left decorative body 271 and the plate upper right decorative body 276, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is the plate lower left decorative body 281 and the plate right. It is continuous with the lower decorative body 286. As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5-5b. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the effect operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is the effect operation unit attachment of the upper plate body 212 on the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container with an open upper part.

The operation unit base 320 has a main body portion 321 whose outer shape is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and whose upper portion is open, and a main body portion 321 which extends outward from the upper end of the main body portion 321 and has a circular outer circumference. The flange portion 322, the plurality of legs (four in this case) protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321 and the upper mounting formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. It is provided with a portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that rotatably supports the transmission gear 350 for an operation ring, which is open upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321.

The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. The main body portion 321 has a vibration speaker 354 attached to the bottom wall from below, and a portion on the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, and the vibration can be amplified and the vibration can be converted into a sound such as voice or music and output. can.

The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body portion 321 is formed with a through hole on the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body portion 321. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the main body 321 and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The flange portion 322 has a diameter whose outer circumference substantially coincides with the inner circumference of the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish of the unit front cover 312. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 and the decorative board cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

The gear bearing portion 325 can rotatably mount the transmission gear for the operation ring around the axis extending to the left and right in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is a flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

When the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body portion 321 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface.

[3-5-5c. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from above and front, and FIG. 55 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from below and front. FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, and has a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player. The diameter (outer diameter) of the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is set to about 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring mounting base 331 mounted on the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the 332 and are rotatably mounted around the axis extending vertically on the ring mounting base 331, and the rotation base 332 that is mounted on the ring mounting base 331 and moves upward. It is equipped with a regulated ring retaining member 334.

Further, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 and the ring outer upper cover 335 which form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. The ring outer lower cover 336, which constitutes a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and the ring outer upper cover 335, which are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side, form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. It is equipped with a ring inner cover 337 and a cover. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape having translucency.

The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and the inner diameter is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is separated from the mounting portion 331a on which the rotary base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. The boss portion 331b, which protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from a plurality of (here, four) parts and for rotatably mounting the bush 333, and the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface are spaced outward from each other in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a through-hole 331c that penetrates up and down in a plurality of parts. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

The outer diameter of the rotary base 332 is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331a of the ring mounting base 331, and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotary base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed on the bevel gear so as to project downward toward the center side of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which the arcs constituting the outer and upper parts of the circle extend in an annular shape, and a plurality of rings are arranged in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a decorative portion 335b that is provided, and an outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center side and is arranged in a plurality of circumferential directions. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/4 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover mounting portion 335c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The outer lower cover 336 of the ring has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which an arc constituting the outer and lower parts of a circle extends in an annular shape, and the outer lower surface portion 336a projects upward and toward the center from the inside and in the circumferential direction. It is provided with an outer lower cover mounting portion 336b and a plurality of arranged portions. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the outer lower cover 336 of the ring is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover mounting portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The ring inner cover 337 is a cylinder having an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc constituting the inner and upper parts of a circle extends in an annular shape and a cylinder extending downward in parallel with the central axis from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a. It is provided with a cylindrical surface portion 337b and an inner cover mounting portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the tubular surface portion 337b and arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in the range of 1/8 of the circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner diameter of the cylinder surface portion 337b is the same as the inner diameter of the rotary base 332. The inner cover mounting portion 337c is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion in a range of 1/2 or more of the circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting decorated by the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

[3-5-5d. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57A is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for driving the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to rotate and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear portion of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects to the left. , A drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. A gear cover that rotatably mounts the 345, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. It is equipped with 346 and.

Further, the rotation drive unit 340 includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348, which are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and a first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and long in the front-rear direction and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and is formed with a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a gear portion 345a projecting to the left from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a in the circumferential direction. A plurality of detection pieces 345b, which are arranged in a row at regular intervals, are provided. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length as the interval in which the length in the circumferential direction is separated in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple with respect to the spacing between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them first detects the detection piece 345b. It has become like. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

In the assembled state of the rotary drive unit 340, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. To mesh with. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is entirely located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the transmission gear for the operation ring by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 can reciprocate and vibrate the rotation operation unit 302 by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation of the drive gear 343 by the operation ring drive motor 342 within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and can detect the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, it is possible to assist the player in the rotation operation. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling according to the content of the player participation type production, or to give a click feeling.

[3-5-5e. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring rotates integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a in the shape of a bevel gear that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the transmission detection of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles having the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above and then the gear mounting member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320. Be done.

In the state where the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotation drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and at the same time, the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5-5f. Production operation ring decorative board]
The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annulus is divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

The effect operation ring decorative board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a transparent decorative substrate cover 353 on the upper side. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form like the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. It is composed of a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, thereby passing through the decorative substrate cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring mounting base 331, and above the ring constituting the rotation operation unit 302. The cover 335, the outer and lower cover 336 of the ring, and the inner cover 337 of the ring can be decorated with light emission from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration as if an LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5-5 g. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. Is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output sounds such as voice, sound effects, and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Further, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. At this time, the player feels as if the effect operation unit 300 trembles. This vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present a more diverse effect to the player.

The vibration speaker 354 is intended to give sound information to vibrate the effect operation unit 301, and gives sound information so that vibration can be obtained by resonance. Here, in resonating, since it depends on the characteristics of the vibration speaker 354 attached to the game machine, the material and hardness of the member to which the vibration speaker is attached, and the attachment method, sound information of only a specific frequency should be input. In that case, vibration may not be obtained without resonance due to variations in characteristics. In the present embodiment, in order to absorb the variation of these characteristics, the frequency of the input sound information is not set as a single frequency but is input as a frequency having a width. Specifically, a sine wave of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz and 38 Hz to 42 Hz are changed (sweep) 8 times per second in 1 Hz units for each cycle. This is intermittently input by sweeping for 1 second, and then input again after 1 second, which is repeated.

In the assembly work of the gaming machine, the RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the gaming is operated for the inspection (operation check) of the vibration speaker at the time of shipment. It is supposed to be done based on. Specifically, when the inspector operates the RAM clear switch within a predetermined period when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (or when the inspector turns on the power of the gaming machine while operating the RAM clear switch), the main control board A command to the effect that 1310 clears and initializes the RAM is transmitted (output) to the peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500, which will be described later. Upon receiving this command, the peripheral control board performs a vibration speaker operation confirmation process for inspecting (operation confirmation) the vibration speaker. By this vibration speaker operation confirmation process, the inspector can confirm the sound (sound) such as voice and music by the vibration speaker 354, and can also confirm the vibration of the effect operation unit 300 by the vibration speaker 354. ..

[3-5-5h. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front and upper, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the front and lower. FIG. 62 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the descending position, and FIG. 62 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer circumference and is arranged on the target with the button unit base 361 mounted in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A disk-shaped guide shaft 362 that extends upward in a columnar shape and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is movably attached between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 by a pair of guide shafts 362 in the vertical direction, and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. It is provided with a disk-shaped elevating base 364 and a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted to urge the elevating base 364 upward.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 extending upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a columnar shape and having an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button elevating drive motor 367 mounted so as to project upward, the spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member rotatably mounted by inserting a central shaft 366 rotated by the driven gear 369. The 370, the elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are connected, and the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached. It includes a 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted vertically above the elevating base 364 by a pair of guide shafts 362. The center button body 373, the pair of button springs 374 that are arranged between the center button body 373 and the elevating base 364 and urge the center button body 373 upward, and the center button body 373 are substantially the same. The central button cover 375, which is formed in a bottomed cylinder shape with the upper end side closed by diameter and is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. It is equipped with a central button decorative substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the center button main body 373 and the center button cover 375 constitute a center pressing operation unit 303a.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion of the upper surface of the elevating base 364 outside the central button body 373, and has an annular outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface, and an outer circumference. The outer peripheral board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decorative board 377 and the outer periphery of the central button main body 373, and the portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer periphery of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer peripheral decorative lens 379 that is arranged above the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on the outer peripheral side and has a three-dimensional decoration and has translucency, and is moved up and down so as to cover the outer periphery and the upper surface of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379. It is attached to the base 364 and has a transparent outer peripheral button cover 380 in which the central button cover 375 faces upward in the center. The effect operation button unit 360 includes an outer peripheral substrate cover 378, an outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an outer peripheral button cover 380, and constitutes an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the push detection sensor 381 for detecting the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the elevating cam drive gear member 370. It is equipped with an elevating detection sensor 382 that detects the elevating and lowering of the elevating base 364 by detecting the rotation position.

The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 321 of the operation unit base 320. A pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevating cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevating detection sensor 382 are attached to the lower surface. Is attached. In the button unit base 361, the lower end of the leg portion 361b is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a, respectively. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the center shaft 366 are formed of metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, the lower end of which is in contact with the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, and the upper end of which is in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

The elevating base 364 is formed so that the outer diameter is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b in which the elevating cam member 371 is vertically penetrated in a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass therethrough. A vertical wall portion 364c projecting upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting into the central hole 364b so as to face each other near the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward by the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c abutting on the upper base 363, and at the same time, a space where the bottom portion 373b of the center button body 373 can move is provided between the elevating base 364 and the upper base 363. Is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevating detection piece 370c, which protrudes downward from the top in a cylindrical shape and has two notches facing each other and is detected by the elevating detection sensor 382. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 is provided with a pair of cam portions 371a that are separated by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar column and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

The cam portion 371a is one of a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and a first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward in parallel with the axis from the end, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end opposite to the second cam 371d of the first cam 371b. (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided with a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view. It is formed like this. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

The center button body 373 has a pair of guide shafts that penetrate the cylindrical cylinder portion 373a extending vertically, the bottom portion 373b that closes the lower end side of the cylinder portion 373a, and the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which the 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom 373b. It includes a pressing detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrudes rearward from the bottom 373b in a cylindrical shape and is inserted through the button spring 374.

The central button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed so that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the tubular portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending downward shortly, and the lower end abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364 to restrict the downward movement of the central button body 373. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 abuts on the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373.

The central button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that the lower end penetrates the elevating base 364 and extends downward, and a screw having a washer inserted is attached to the lower end. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f abuts on the lower surface of the elevating base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the center button body 373.

The press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is the elevating base when the bottom portion 373b (lower end of the central opening 373d) of the center button body 373 abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate 364 and project downward. The center button body 373 is formed opaquely. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker urging force than the elevating spring 365.

The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button main body 373, and a tubular peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have translucency. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. The lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b of the central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373.

In the central button decorative board 376, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can make the center button cover 375 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. In the outer peripheral button decorative board 377, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 can illuminate and decorate the outer peripheral decorative lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 has an annular substrate portion 378a that covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364, and a cylindrical portion 378a that extends upward from the inner circumference of the substrate portion 378a. It is provided with a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparently.

In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction toward the upward direction are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378a of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The lower end of the cylindrical portion 380a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular portion 380b is formed so that the inner diameter thereof is substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in a state where the elevating base 364 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365. It is inserted from below into the locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the descending position moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button main body 373 is located at the upward moving end due to the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

In this state (state of FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 is moved downward. The pressing detection piece 373e is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is detected. In the state where the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has a height substantially coincided with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65 (c)).

Further, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward in this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 presses. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

When the elevating drive gear 368 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 in this descending position, the elevating cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the elevating drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c to the third. One cam 371b rolls to the left portion of the locking portion 371c, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is located from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, the second cam Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 364d and the guide pin 364d. At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises and is in the ascending position.

In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62B, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevating base 364 is restricted. Further, in the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) in the lowered position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. The entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

When the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved to the ascending position in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of protruding more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (FIG. 65 (b) and the like). reference).

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. It moves downward against the force, and the center button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364. In the state where the center button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 is in a state of protruding downward from the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is the button unit base 361. The press detection piece 373e is not detected by the press detection sensor 381 because it is separated from the press detection piece 373e.

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374. After the center button body 373 abuts on the elevating base 364, the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

In this way, when the elevating base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361 while the center button body 373 abuts on the elevating base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364e. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the press of the center button cover 375 (center press operation unit 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward by a force higher than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 is moved to the elevating spring via the outer peripheral button cover 380. It moves downward against the urging force of 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364, but since the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) protrudes upward due to the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button main body The press detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the elevating base 364, and the press detection piece 373e is not detected by the press detection sensor 381.

To return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (pressing operation unit 303) from the ascending position to the descending position, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Then, in FIG. 62B, the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364, moves to the right (direction of the guide pin 364d), so that the third cam The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. Roll along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the original descending position is restored.

[3-5-5i. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 installed in the substrate box 391.

The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decorative board 314, a dish center lower decorative board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, an effect operation ring decorative board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevating drive motor 367, center button decorative board 376, outer peripheral button decorative board 377, press detection sensor 381, and elevating detection sensor 382, relaying the connection between the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210. There is.

[3-5-5j. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65A is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 65B is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 65C is a central pressing of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when the operation part is pressed.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 on the upper surface thereof, which can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a located at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit arranged between the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of 303b.

The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation unit 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral board cover 378.

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). ..

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Fig. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 in the left side view, the effect operation ring 330 is passed through the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. The rotation operation unit 302 of the above rotates in the clockwise direction in a plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. ..

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeatedly rotating forward and reverse within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotation operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated. This vibration is different from the vibration caused by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is not only rotated by the operation ring drive motor 342, but can also be rotated by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring and rotates. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting a plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 separated in the circumferential direction is equal to the distance between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , The interval is not an integral multiple. As a result, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured so as not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) in the order of detecting the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotationally driven in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. .. Alternatively, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342 to make the rotation operation heavier or give a click feeling.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, so that the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. ..

As a result, the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated and operated in a way that is easy for the player to do, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated. The sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated while the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the descending position or the ascending position. Since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the effect operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting and decorated by causing the LED of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light. Further, in the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a row are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to illuminate and decorate only a specific portion of the rotating rotation operation unit 302. This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating rotation operation unit 302.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface thereof more than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a descending position that protrudes slightly upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a (center button cover 375) descends to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380), and the pressing is detected. Pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

In this normal (lowering position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b in the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressing is detected. No pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

In a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the pressing operation unit 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the elevating base 364 to be in the ascending position (see FIG. 65 (b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 project significantly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, first, the central pressing operation unit 303a moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect the press. Further, the central pressing operation unit 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface (see FIG. 65 (c)). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects the press.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a remains projected upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). .. In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect the press.

As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the descending position or the ascending position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the effect operation unit 301 in the player participation type production. , Player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

The rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the pressing operation unit 303 may be used as a clue to facilitate the rotation operation, or the pressing operation unit 303 may be an obstacle to perform the rotation operation. The operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the front surface of the door frame left side base 401. The door frame left side decorative board 402 on which multiple LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and the left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402. A door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403 is provided.

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open to the front. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the door frame left side decorative board 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 can illuminate and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a formed in the front and rear at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semi-circular bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end of 453.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400, in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and makes it appear that a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and the side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. And, a plurality of light emitting side window interior decorative portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a are provided. The door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in the game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player playing a game with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 is a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration members 410b mounted on the front surface and extending forward in a cylindrical shape and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the portion corresponding to the window decoration portion 410b, and the side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413 mounted on the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and a plurality of side window decoration members 412. It is provided with an internal reflector 414 inserted into each of the side window interior decorative portions 410b.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right side reflector 415, which is arranged in front of the front end of the side window decorative member 412 and extends vertically, and the door frame right side base 411, and is attached to the door frame. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical and front-back directions so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and also has a through opening 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and constitutes a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flat plate in the vertical and front-back directions so as to cover the left side surface of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. It is provided with an inner panel on the right side of the door frame and 417, which extend in a shape and penetrate in the left-right direction to form a through opening 417a forming a side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. It is provided with a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear. The side window interior decorative member 412 has a flat plate-shaped connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (here, three) side window interior decoration members 410b arranged in a vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than that of the rear end side on the front end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The decorative member 412 in the side window is attached to a portion on the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame from a position lower to the center in the vertical direction to an upper portion. The decorative member 412 in the side window is formed in a milky white color having translucency.

The decorative substrate 413 for the decorative portion in the side window is attached to a portion on the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame, which is behind the connecting base 412a of the decorative member 412 in the side window. The plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrate 413 of the decorative portion in the side window are considered to be full-color LEDs. In the side window decorative portion decorative substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape up, down, left and right around the axis of the side window interior decorative portion 410b at a portion behind each of the plurality of side window interior decorative portions 410b. Has been done.

The internal reflector 414 has an X-shaped front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decorative portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the inside of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left, and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wavy shape that moves forward and then backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been done. The right side reflector 415 penetrates back and forth, and a plurality of through holes 415a through which the LED of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 faces forward are formed.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends vertically and back and forth, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. In the door frame right side outer panel 416, the through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction is formed in a variable elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The outer panel 416 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is flat and extends vertically and back and forth, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a variable elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the decorative member 412 in the side window and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. In the door frame right side decorative board 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 can illuminate and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The decorative body 419 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semi-circular bulging forward extends vertically in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 is formed so as to be continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The front end (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy shape so that the portion 1/4 from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed in a tsuitate shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front-rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 to emit light. Therefore, the decorative portion 410b in the side window can be decorated by light emission. Then, by illuminating the decoration portion 410b in the side window, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b is turned off, so that the side window The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side (the end of the island equipment) of the pachinko machine 1 through between the three side window decoration portions 410b in the 410a. Therefore, a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without having to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island equipment. It can be found in, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game with this pachinko machine 1 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity can be blocked by other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b. It is possible to make the entire game area 5a difficult for the player to see, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if it is being seen by another player, so that the other player can play the game without hesitation. ..

Further, when the three side window decoration portions 410b are made to emit light by the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let me. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are columnar, light is radiated in a band-like and radial manner. It is possible to make it difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players such as those next to each other to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the inside of the game area 5a to be seen, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, and the attention is paid to other players. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because he / she cannot concentrate on the game, or feeling lost due to the induction of mistakes, and by devoting the player to the game, he / she can enjoy the game more. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is a top bottom cover removed. It is the bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in this state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the left and right sides and the front upper portion of the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. The door frame top bottom plate 454, which is connected to the lower end of the door frame, is attached.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top central decorative board 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a door. Door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a door. A door frame top right decorative board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. I have.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 has a top center reflector 458 arranged between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and the door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459 arranged between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457. It is provided with a top right reflector 460, which is arranged in and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door. To cover the pair of speaker brackets 463 attached to the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, the pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 from below. The top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, the lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and the door frame top. The door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451 and the door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451 are provided. There is.

The door frame top base 451 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 451a extending left and right with the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the front surface of the main body portion 451a. It is provided with a front protruding portion 451b that protrudes forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape so that the lower side thereof is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is located upward. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so as to move backward as the front ends move downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open to the rear. The front protrusion 451b on the right side of the front view is also open upward.

The top top cover 452 is formed so that the front view shape is substantially the same as that of the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 is formed so as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect between the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top top cover 452 projects most forward in the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and backward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top top cover 452 has an opening 452a on the upper surface, which is largely cut out from the rear end toward the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which a semi-circular bulging forward extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top cover 452 while the curvature decreases toward the center in the left-right direction from both left and right ends. It is formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. It extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 penetrates vertically between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a, which are separated in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape, and the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a. It has a pair of central speaker openings 454b facing the top central speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating vertically on the outside of each of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the left-right direction and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top center decorative board 455, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top left decorative board 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top right decorative board 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Through holes penetrating back and forth are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs.

The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top center speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker, and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b in the door frame top base 451. The top-side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. The sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. The purpose is to relay the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, the front end is locked to the top top cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, forming an integrated decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially quadrangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish upper left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a of the effect operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

Plate upper left decorative body 271, plate upper right decorative body 276, plate center upper decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since the 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the dish upper left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the dish upper right decorative body 276, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decoration Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is arranged coaxially in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 consisting of a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semi-circular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is attached below the rotation operation unit 302. Two large-diameter donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) upper dish center upper decorative body 312a and dish center lower decorative body 312b are attached vertically apart from each other, and above the center of the dish. Door frame left side decorative body 404 of door frame left side unit 400 and door frame right side decorative body of door frame right side unit 410 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of decorative body 312a and dish center lower decorative body 312b. 419 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the plate unit 200, the rotation operation unit 302, the two plate center upper decorative bodies 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are arranged vertically with three donut-shaped members, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the outer circumference are arranged. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

Further, the dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, and the dish lower left decorative body 281, the dish lower right decorative body 286, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b arranged below the dish central upper decorative body 312a are half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, in the effect operation unit 300, the size increases from the lower end toward the upper side, so that it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 arranged on the upper side can be operated by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. can.

Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 has a front end side. Since the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are tilted so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face the direction of the player's head (face) seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation operation unit 302 rotates from the player. The entire operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look larger. Further, as described above, since it is easy to understand the whole picture of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, the player immediately rotates when the player participation type effect is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can entertain the player-participation-type production and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is in a state of protruding forward from the upper plate 201, and is on the plate center. Since the decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b should be greatly conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302 can be improved by the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate and the decorative body 312b on the lower center of the plate. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest and appeal to the player. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and at the same time, pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame, which is attached to the upper end of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably attached to the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2, and the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached, and the main body frame. Main body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. It is equipped with a three-dimensional 520.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game is played in the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launcher 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper side and the left side of the front view on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is openable and closable and is attached to the main body frame base 501, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. It also includes a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view shape extends vertically, and the connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. It includes a 502 and a game board lock member 505 for holding the game board 5 detachably.

The payout base unit 550 is a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right. The 552, the tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending to the left in a groove shape open upward, the first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the first rail. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 separated from the rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. It includes a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 to be paid out one by one, the upper full tank path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 are on the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, it is provided with a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the substrate unit to the 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. It includes a 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 has a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked to the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It is equipped with a lock spring 655 that is urging and urging the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 is inserted from the front to the rear into the frame of the outer frame 2, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape in which the shape of the front view extends vertically, and the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. It is provided with a connection cable guide member 502 to be connected, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth and for holding the game board 5 detachably. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a whose front view shape is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board that penetrates back and forth within the range of the height of the game board and forms the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and the game board insertion port 501b on which the game board 5 is placed. It includes a mounting unit 501c and a game board restricting unit 501d that projects upward from the center of the game board mounting unit 501c in the left-right direction and regulates the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and the launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540 and the launcher mounting portion 501e. The board unit penetrates back and forth on the right side of the front view of the portion 501e and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted and the game board mounting portion 501c. The circular speaker opening 501g and the main frame base 501, which face the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the 620 to the front, are recessed rearward and extend to the left and right below the speaker opening 501g. It is provided with a cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion port 501i that penetrates back and forth at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h when viewed from the front.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends from the right side of the game board insertion port 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j that is rotatably attached and is formed near both upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a to attach the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. It includes an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

The game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position on the right side of the speaker opening 501 g below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and around an axis extending back and forth. The game board lock member 505 makes it possible to restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right side of the speaker opening 501g to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. .. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an vertically extending axis.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the flat guide main body 502a extending to the left and right and the guide main body 502a, and extends to the right of the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are exposed, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a that penetrate back and forth and are left and right. It is provided with a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is rotatably mounted around a shaft whose mounting shaft 502c extends vertically near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side projects forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of the door frame 3 is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Subsequently, the action and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is rotatably attached in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. The left and right directions of the plurality of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being fastened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. Behind the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends to the left from the connection cable guide member 502, is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and covers the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 84 (b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases when the door frame 3 is opened, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes like this. In the present embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to be less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501, so that the connection cable guide member 502 By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pressed backward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring in the door.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can make a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is exerted due to the folding habit. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is placed closer to the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to be held by the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 126 under the door frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, is centered on the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and is closer to the door than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle between the tangent line tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 122 above the frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is used when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on the main body frame]
The hinge member 510 on the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k in the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3 is attached. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached.

The hinge member 510 on the main body frame has an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 511 projects upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 512 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame, is provided. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extended portion, and provides a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for axially supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to rotatably attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 and the door frame to the main body frame 4. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under the main body frame]
The hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 is attached. The hinge member 125 under the door frame is rotatably attached.

The lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent upward in an L shape. It is provided with a lower hinge second main body 522 in which the rear portion of a flat plate-like plate extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. In the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame, the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is arranged at an upward interval from the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and the lower portion is arranged. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 60c for the outer frame of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The lower hinge hole 521a for the outer frame is formed coaxially with the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 126 for the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion to regulate the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is equipped. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge main body 511 of the upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can cooperate with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U-shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 regulates the movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending to the right from the front end. Two left position restricting members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also enters the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 (the main body frame 4). It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. It is for driving into the game area 5a of 5. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 540 is attached to the flat plate-shaped launch base 541 attached to the launcher mounting portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 in front view and rotates. From the launch solenoid 542, which consists of a rotary solenoid whose shaft penetrates the launch base 541 and extends forward, the hitting mallet 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the launching solenoid 542, and the vicinity of the tip of the hitting mallet 543. It is equipped with a launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in this state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) are used. From between, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86A is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86B is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin and has a top plate portion 551a whose front-rear direction extends to the left and right with a substantially constant width, and a top plate portion whose width in the front-rear direction from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction is the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b having substantially the same width and extending downward long, and the right side plate portion 551c having a width in the front-rear direction from the front view right side of the top plate portion 551a extending downward with substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a. , The upper part of the back plate 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b are substantially constant to the right. A back plate left portion 551e extending to the vicinity of the lower end in width, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left plate portion 551b, and a left plate portion 551b. A connecting plate portion 551h that connects the bottom plate portion 551g extending from the front portion of the lower side to the right to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. And have. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view, and is formed in a box shape open to the front and inward of the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left side plate portion 551b extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends up and down with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, and the payout base 551 is provided at the portion. The unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 projects to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover mounting portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is mounted.

The payout base unit 550 is a box-shaped ball tank 552 that is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and is open upward in a box shape that extends to the left and right, and a portion that extends to the left and right of the payout base 551. It is provided with a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extending to the left in a groove shape open upward.

Further, the payout base unit 550 is located at the upper end of the tank rail 553, separated from the first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the upper end of the tank rail 555 in the left-right direction and leftward in the front view. The second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stop member 557 attached near the left end of the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate and is molded in an opaque black color, and the left-right direction is formed to be about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction. In addition, the length in the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin and is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 near the rear end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is diagonal to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is about one from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guidance passage 570a in the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is tilted so that the left end side is low at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, in the tank rail 555, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin, are molded in an opaque white color, and are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. .. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is made of a polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in an opaque white color, and is formed at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555. One end of the rail cover on the 554 side is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). The rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game ball B on the upper side of the game ball B that is distributed in two upper and lower stages, and rectifies the ball so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side. I try not to clog the ball even if the height becomes low.

The ball stop member 557 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin, is molded in an opaque red color, and is slidably attached to the left side in the vicinity of the left end of the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553. By sliding to, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 can be closed so that the game ball B does not flow from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

Further, in the payout base unit 550, a board accommodating portion 551aa for mounting the external terminal plate 558 and the frame grounding board 559 is formed on the left side of the front view of the ball tank 552 in the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The upper side of the external terminal board 558 is covered with a terminal cover 551k molded from a transparent synthetic resin. The external terminal board 558 has a mounting surface thereof and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, the external terminals XCN1 arranged in a row from the left side to the right side when the payout base unit 550 is viewed from the back). ~ XCN10 is provided with 10 external terminals.)) When the payout base 551 is viewed from the front so that the payout base 551 is exposed, the board is housed so that the mounting surface thereof is perpendicular to the rear of the payout base 551. It is attached to the portion 551aa. On the other hand, the frame ground board 559 is horizontal with the mounting surface on which a plurality of ground terminals (in this embodiment, five ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5) are mounted facing downward. When the payout base 551 is viewed from the front, the payout base 551 is arranged in front of the external terminal board 558, attached to the substrate accommodating portion 551aa, and covered with the terminal cover 551k. Therefore, the frame ground board 559 is housed in the space formed by the board housing portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k. Since the terminal cover 551k is molded of a transparent synthetic resin, the frame grounding substrate 559 housed in the space formed by the board accommodating portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k can be visually recognized from the outside of the terminal cover 551k. It has become.

Of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the height of the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is 13.4 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 18.6 mm). On the other hand, the height of the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is 7 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 9.8 mm). When the frame grounding board 559 is housed and mounted inside the board housing section 551aa and the external terminal board 558 is mounted on the rear surface of the board housing section 551aa, the frame grounding board 559 is viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1. Is hidden by the presence of the external terminal board 558 and difficult to see, but of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 of the frame ground board 559, only the ground terminals ECN2 and ECN4 are in a state of protruding from the lower side of the external terminal board 558, and the pachinko machine. It can be visually recognized from the back surface of No. 1 (see, for example, FIG. 77). Although the height of the ground terminal ECN3 is as high as 13.4 mm as described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, it is hidden by the presence of the ball rectifying member 556 and is difficult to see. The heights of the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 are as low as 7 mm as described above, and cannot protrude from the lower side of the external terminal board 558. When the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, it is hidden by the presence of the external terminal board 558. It is difficult to see. A detailed description of the frame grounding substrate 559 will be described later.

The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The frame grounding board 559 is for temporarily collecting electromagnetic noise generated in various places and grounding it to the island equipment of the game hall.

[4-7. Overall configuration of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. be. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 has a ball guidance unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guidance unit 570 and is guided by the ball guidance unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side.

The ball guidance unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a row by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guidance unit 570 can be distributed, and a ball ejection passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated from the ball pulling passage 580b to the upper full tank path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is discharged from the ball ejection passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7-1. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The ball guidance unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper part of the rear surface of the left side portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guidance unit 570 has a meandering guidance passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow, and closes a box-shaped guidance unit base 571 that is open forward and the front side of the guidance unit base 571. The flat plate-shaped guide passage front lid 572, the movable piece member 573 that is movable by the game ball B circulating in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is equipped with a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of a ball (see FIG. 92).

In the ball guidance unit 570, the shape of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front lid 572 in front view is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically. The guidance passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guidance unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide. It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly folding back between the widths of the unit base 571 in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a has a depth on the front-back right side and a width in the left-right direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a row.

In the ball guidance unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached in the vicinity of the upper portion so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guidance passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached around an axis whose upper portion extends back and forth at the right outer portion of the guide passage 570a in front view, and a part of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B abuts on the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a, so that the protruding portion is pushed by the game ball B and retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. It becomes.

When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When it is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the game ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled in the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a is the payout passage of the payout device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guidance unit 570, since the guidance passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering shape, the guidance passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guidance unit 570, and many games are played in the guidance passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence / absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, the presence / absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7-2. Payout device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. FIG. 90 (a) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the movable ball-extracting piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guidance unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e in the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear.

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a open to the rear and a ball ejection passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can be distributed, and a payout device main body 581. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped payout device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached to the payout motor 584, which is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581 and whose rotary shaft projects between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 that is attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. , The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587, which is meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, is meshed with the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588, the payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and project into the payout passage 580a, and the payout blade 589. It is equipped with a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and has a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, and a payout device main body 581 and after the payout device. A ball-extracting movable piece 592 attached so that the ball-extracting passage 580b can be opened and closed at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a by the lid 582, and a ball-extracting movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-extracting passage 580b is closed. It is provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582.

The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view shape extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guidance unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 89, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about 1/3 of the width of the left and right and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, on the upper side of the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is formed between the payout blade 589 and the outer circumference. It extends downward in an arc shape concentric with the payout blade 589 so as to form, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, the payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball-extracting passage 580b branches at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends diagonally downward from the upstream end and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side of the rear view, and is seen in the back view of the bottom surface. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is opposed to each other. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b, respectively. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a is provided. The guide wall 581a on the main body side and the guide wall 582a on the rear lid side branch from the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to form a side wall of the ball ejection passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the rear view of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is arranged between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B at a portion of the payout passage 580a extending from above toward the rotation axis and then extending to the right in the rear view. In addition, it protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed between the three blade pieces 589a with an arc having a radius younger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can be restricted from moving the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by the payout device rear lid 582 and the payout device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are formed. Through the gap between them, it is possible to project into the ball pulling passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view near the upper end of the ball pulling movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 penetrates the rear lid 582 of the payout device and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the descending end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction of the rear view can be restricted. The ball pulling passage 580b can be closed by the ball pulling movable piece 592. Further, by locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. FIG. See 90).

When the ball pulling lever 593 is raised to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state like a string of beads on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592, becomes a ball pulling movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball ejection passage 580b side beyond the above. At this time, since the ball ejection passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball ejection passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball ejection passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down soon.

In this way, in the state where the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball-extracting passage 580b at a high speed, so that the ball-extracting movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-extracting passage 580b. The game ball B vigorously abuts on the lower end side of the ball, but the ball-extracting movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear lid 582. Since the ball-pulling passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the ball-pulling movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball-pulling passage 580b due to the contact force, so that the ball-pulling movable piece 592 is a ball. It is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the pull-out passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball pull-out movable piece 592, and the ball can be pulled out by the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in durability and damage of the piece 592.

For this reason, since the movable ball-pulling piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, more game balls B can be discharged to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball-pulling passage 580b, so that the pachinko machine can be discharged more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball pulling movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a at a narrower interval than the game ball B, and the ball pulling passage 580b. In order to move to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, the game ball B comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592 protruding into the ball pulling passage 580b, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball pulling movable piece 592 when moving to the outside through the space, the space is larger than that of the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the space between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball. Since the movement of the movable ball-pulling piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable ball-pulling piece 592, and the movable ball-pulling piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, and the guide on the main body side. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball pulling passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably distributed to the downstream side of the ball pulling passage 580b.

[4-7-3. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the left side portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full-filled ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B downwardly from the payout device 580 to the lower full-filled ball path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically.

The upper full tank path unit 600 has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 attached to the payout base 551 and the rear side is open, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the front side is open. The upper full tank cover 602 and the payout device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the payout device 580 upward are provided. The upper full tank base 601 projects to the right from the right side of the front view, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 600 is open upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position at a height of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right of the front view by about 3/4 of the total width and downwards from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. The upper sphere storage passage 600b, the upper normal payout passage 600c extending downward from the left side in the front view from the center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper normal payout passage 600c adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. The upper full tank payout passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the front view from the center of the ball storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper full tank payout passage 600d opening upward near the right end of the front view on the upper surface and substantially vertical downward. It is provided with an upper ball-extracting passage 600e, which is open downward near the right end of the lower surface after extending to (see FIG. 92).

In the upper full tank path unit 600, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are opened downward in order from the left side of the front view on the lower surface. In the state where the upper full tank path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is open just below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upper ball is pulled out. The upstream end of the passage 600e is open just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B discharged (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. It is released downward from any of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball pulling passage 600e.

[4-7-4. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The lower full tank path unit 610 is mounted on the bottom plate portion 551 g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is low, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and is a lower full tank base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. The 611, the lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower normal payout passage 610a rotatably attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 around an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a payout passage opening / closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end opening of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. It is equipped with a closing spring 614, which is in force.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c are arranged in this order from the left when viewed from the front on the upper surface of the portion extending upward from the rear end. In the state, each upstream end opens upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball ejection passage 610c extends forward along the front right side surface of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in the clockwise direction in the front view by the closing spring 614. Under normal conditions, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are provided. The opening) is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an actuating protrusion 613a projecting forward. The front view of the actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is tilted so that it protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball ejection passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are each upper full. It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates in the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d circulates in the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball pulling passage 600e will circulate in the lower ball pulling passage 610c.

Further, in the state where the lower full tank ball path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front end (downstream end) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b penetrates the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball pulling guide portion 627 opened to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, in a normal state (a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in contact with the door opening / closing contact of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank receiver 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f. Is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7-5. Flow of game balls in the payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 92. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled on the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball ejection lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the descending end, and the ball ejection passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected by the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, for example, from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent to the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 in a state of being arranged in a row by the tank rail 555. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay on the upstream side of the payout blade 589. Will be.

Then, the game ball B in the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. As a result, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 584, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the rear view clockwise direction, and the payout blade 580a in the payout passage 580a moves. It is released to the downstream side of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 is normally arranged through the upper ball storage passage 600b and directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. It is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in the above.

When a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a, so that the payout device The game ball B paid out from the 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that is in communication. Then, when the game ball B is further discharged while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game ball B, the upper normal payout passage 600c is connected to the upper ball storage passage 600b which is connected to the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the full tank ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received by. After that, the game ball B received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharging port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper plate 201 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is further paid out, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

When the lower plate 202 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate B is further discharged. The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B (the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are full. The player is informed that the tank is full), and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 becomes a non-detection state.

When discharging the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, move the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 upward from the position of the lower end. Slide it to the position of the rising end. After that, the lower end side of the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction of the rear view, and the ball-extracting movable piece 592 becomes the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball ejection passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, at the portion of the ball-pulling movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B abuts more strongly on the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a than the ball-pulling movable piece 592, so that the ball-pulling movable piece 592 Is less likely to be damaged.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball pulling passage 600e of the upper full tank path unit 600 and the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hole). It is discharged to the island facility side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 93 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the lower rear. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the speaker unit 621 faces forward near the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. It is provided with a main body frame speaker 622 attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end of the front view, and is composed of a plurality of vertically extending slits, and is a circular speaker mounting portion 621a and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b, which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b, which protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, diagonally downward and backward. It is provided with an open connection portion 621c.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone type speaker that mainly outputs bass.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward. It is formed so that the protrusion of the speaker is small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the center of the front view of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connection portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a forms a part of an enclosure 624 in which the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 contain the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. Since the enclosure 624 has a front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the front view of the speaker mounting portion 621 in the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it goes to the right. Even if it is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount is small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

When the main body frame 4 of the speaker unit 620a is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The space of the above and the space 40a inside the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, an enclosure 624 in a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, and behind the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side of the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and the connection portion 621c are extended. Since the sound is communicated to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 does not particularly attenuate the bass range in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. It can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is a dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of the 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound in which deep bass sounds.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 Allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess for space 621b, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a that communicates with the through port 621d and extends in a tubular shape and penetrates back and forth is formed. In the state of being assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other and become independent from the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 has a front base 625 mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit mounted on the rear side of the front base 625. It is equipped with a rear base 626 to which the 620c is mounted.

Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball ejection guide portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that is open upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball ejection guidance portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. It is provided with a 628 and a ball discharge port 629 for downwardly discharging the game ball B that has passed through the ball ejection guidance unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628.

The ball ejection guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and a downstream end opening to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball pulling guide portion 627 faces the opening at the upstream end so as to coincide with the downstream end opening of the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610, and the lower portion. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the ejection ball receiving portion 628 has a left end in front view continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejection guiding portion 627, and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B ejected from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball ejection guiding portion 627 and the ejecting ball receiving portion 628, and then the ball. Since the space is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear the sound having richer bass than the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 has a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. It is equipped with 631 and.

The payout control unit 620d has a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (FIG. 97) and. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 and a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5. Then, the instructed number of game balls B is to be paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, it is possible to detect an unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, and the deterrent against the unauthorized activity is enhanced.

The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 mounted on the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 mounted on the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. It includes an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (main body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board, a peripheral control board, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right of the front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end where the right side in front view extends up and down the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 around the axis extending up and down, and the left side is the payout base 551. It is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i of the above and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 is formed in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same surface as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate back and forth and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of units that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3. Door frame hook 652, multiple outer frame hooks 653 that project rearward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the outer frame 2, and door frame that protrudes forward from the lower part of the front end of the unit base 651 depending on the direction of rotation. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

Further, the lock unit 650 is more than the lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is equipped with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled on the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It stands out. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion port 501f of the main body frame base 501, and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. Engages with the transmission member 133, and the rotation of the key inserted in the key hole 132 is transmitted and rotates.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and the outside of the plurality (two). The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the keyway 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of lock units 650 are inserted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in the front view, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved downward. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip side of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 is inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the hook 652 for the door frame and the hook 653 for the outer frame are replaced with the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the lock is locked by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 106. FIG. 99 (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 99 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in (a). FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper portion in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from behind. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side with a tank rail or the like assembled on a ball tank, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101 (a) as viewed from the front. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in which a game ball overflowing from a ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame is distributed. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of a game ball overflowing from the ball tank at the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and is removable and hinged to the outer frame 2 by the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. A frame-shaped main frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped base that is attached along the upper side and the left side of the front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. The payout base 551, the ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape (container shape) extending to the left and right, and the ball tank 552 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. The tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, the first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the 555, the ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at the position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and the tank rail 555. A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the payout base 551, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551 to pay out the game ball B to the player side. It is equipped with.

The ball tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a which is formed in a quadrangle whose shape in a plan view extends in the left-right direction and is inclined so that the left side is lowered in a front view, and the bottom wall 552a from the front side and the rear side, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape with the upper side open. Has been done. The ball tank 552 stores the game ball B supplied from the island equipment such as the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. This overflow portion 552f has a length of about 3/4 of the left-right length of the front wall 552b from the end side of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right side wall 552e side). It is formed over the length.

In the front view of the tank rail 553, the right end side (upstream side) communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. .. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can be distributed in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game ball B. Have. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so as to be lower toward the left side of the front view. Further, in the plan view, the main guide portion 553a extends to the left from the right end to a position of about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end side. It is formed in a crank shape that extends diagonally from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes toward it, and extends parallel to the axis line extending in the left-right direction to the left end. .. In the tank rail 553, a portion of the main guide portion 553a extending parallel to the axis extending from the left end to the right in the left-right direction extends to the upper end with the same width, and the first rail extends to the upper end of this portion. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. Is formed at a height at which only one can be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

Further, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the game balls B are mainly arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and that narrows in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side and changes to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. With this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B circulating in the bulging portion 553b so that the width directions become one line toward the downstream side and the downward side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has the center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is arranged above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 is slightly at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that abuts. It changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the generation of ball shavings in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends constantly, a reaction force always acts in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B circulating in the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, so that the game ball B is difficult to escape and ball clogging (ball shaving) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B, so that the reaction force flows inside. By distributing the pushing directions of the plurality of game balls B to be pushed, it is possible to make it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape, and it is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging (ball shavings) to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball jam (ball gummy) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the location where the ball is jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly cleared, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be achieved. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553, so that the game board 5 can be visually recognized. When a movable defect occurs in the movable production unit or the like, the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be checked with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. It is possible to play the action effect of.

The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in the front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B, which extends to the left and overflows forward from the ball tank 552, to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so that the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. It extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m and the overflow surface portion 501 m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. A part of the game ball B that overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m because it is tilted so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 is lowered in the left-right direction. It is equipped with a detour passage 552 g, which guides the vehicle.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on both outer sides of the detour passage 552 g in the left-right direction, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball and the bottom surface. It is provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501 m on the opposite side of the detour passage 552 g with the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open and the discharge portion 551j. It covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear and the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), and the upper surface is an overflow surface portion. It is equipped with a terminal cover 551k that extends horizontally at a position higher than 501 m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501 m has a flat plate shape from a position lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B by a distance of 2 to 4 times from the upper side on the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape with the shape of the front view extending vertically. It is extended to. The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in the front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. In the overflow surface portion 501m, a gap having a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. ..

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m, and has a flat plate-shaped left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. On both outer sides of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o in the left-right direction, the upper ends are higher than the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o and extend in a strip shape in the front-rear direction, and the outside of the game ball B in the left-right direction. It has a plurality of ribs 501p, which are arranged in a row at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left-stage portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined so that the right corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane in the front view. The right-stage portion 501o is formed to have a length in the left-right direction longer than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the left corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane in the front view.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. The gap between the ball and the ball B is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface portion 501 m. The left end of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left end of the detour passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right end wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552 g is integrally formed with the ball tank 552. In the following, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left in a flat plate shape, and the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is inclined so as to be low. And a weir portion extending upward from the end side of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. As for the rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g, the left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in the front view, and the left end side thereof. It extends diagonally so that it moves forward toward the right end. The passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be inclined in the left-right direction horizontally.

The detour passage 552g is assembled on the main body frame 4 so that the rear end of the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left-right direction is along the front end side of the portion extending diagonally in the left-right direction. It is extended. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552 g extends diagonally in the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552 g changes from the slanted rear end so that its distribution direction is perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the detour passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the distribution direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552g is discharged at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552 g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552 g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends diagonally in the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side, where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. By releasing it to a wide area of the tank rail 553, it is possible to suppress the generation of ball shavings in the tank rail 553.

Further, the portion for guiding the game ball B by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear portion of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the front left portion of the rear wall 552c in the tank rail 553. A game ball B that has submerged under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) is distributed from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, at the portion of the tank rail 553 behind the detour passage 552 g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552 k (of the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) will not be exceeded. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked on the upper side. The game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left side wall 552d inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. It has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. Further, the guide surface portion 552j has the right end side in the front view from the position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b, and the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. Approximately 1/9 of the total length extends diagonally backward from the front wall 552b to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the anteroposterior direction of the left side wall 552d, and then extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c. From there, it is formed in a shape extending parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the ball tank 552, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-mentioned shape in a plan view, the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side, and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The area surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 is a flat plate-shaped flange extending in the lateral direction and the vertical direction on the same surface as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the detour passage 552g, respectively. It has a portion 552 liters. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the portion of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edge of the two flange portions 552l is the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (main body frame base 501). It is formed higher than the left step portion 501n and the upper surface of the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 555 are assembled from each other, the upstream end (right end in the front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, in a plan view, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side thereof are located rearward (protruding) from the ball tank 552. )doing. The rear end side of the detour passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge portion 551j is in the ball tank 552 so as to be stepped rearward from a height lower than the detour passage 552 g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. After extending backward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side of the front view to the tank rail 553, a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 to the left along the tank rail 553 (center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to a nearby position) and then extends backward.

The external terminal board 558 is attached with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion can be opened by operating the lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the portion closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 on the upper side of the tank rail 555 in the state of being assembled on the main body frame 4. .. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558 (a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l in the ball tank 552.

Next, the action and effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g have the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g lower at the rear end side as shown by the white arrows in FIG. 103. The left corner portion 501n is inclined so that the rear end right corner is lowered, and the right stage portion 501o is inclined so that the rear end left corner is lowered. Further, the bottom wall 552a and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) of the ball tank 552 are inclined so that the left end side thereof is lower in the front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

Then, when the amount of the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 increases due to being supplied from the island facility, first of all, it exceeds the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest height of the outer peripheral upper edge. It can be discharged to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552, and the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface portion 501 m, and is also discharged from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501 m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by tilting the overflow surface portion 501 m (see FIG. 104). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from further increasing in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the strong pressing of the game balls B against each other (increase in the ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. , It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball shavings) due to the meshing of the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

Further, since the detour passage 552 g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501 m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is clogged. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m can be prevented from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the game ball B spilled on the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by suppressing the strong pressing of the game balls B against each other in the tank rail 553.

Further, since the height of the remaining upper end edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the game ball B, which overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m beyond the overflow portion 552f and is distributed from the overflow surface portion 501m to the detour passage 552g, is on the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the ball from returning from the detour passage 552 g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552 g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

Further, as described above, the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h where the game ball B in the detour passage 552g rolls). It is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552 g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) to the detour passage 552 g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552 g is rearward from the overflow surface portion 501 m on the front end side. The flow can be in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the detour passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 can be in a fixed direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing each other and biting each other due to the different directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B in the tank rail 553, and the game balls B are clogged. Can be prevented.

Further, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with a main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a in a row in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. Further, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up in a portion where the upper side is open, the game released from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g. The sphere B can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be reliably achieved.

Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is extended from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction is narrowed from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Since they are changed to match, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned so as to be aligned with respect to the width direction as the plurality of game balls B are directed toward the downstream side in the bulging portion 553b. Further, since the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (ball tank 552 side). By distributing a plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction to the downstream side through a portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced in a row. Can be aligned with. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide a plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Further, since the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulge portion 553 b. Therefore, since the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, an external terminal board 558 provided with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the detour passage 552 g and the discharge portion 551j in between. Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558) is provided, the electric wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be far from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the electric wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , There is no problem such as short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are directed to the rear and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be made difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 104) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. It can be prevented.

Further, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m, and rides on the left stage portion 501n and the right stage portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m. However, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g by their inclination, and the game ball B spills on the outside of the main body frame 4, which causes a problem. Can be prevented.

Further, since the game ball B is configured to pass under the guide surface portion 552j when the game ball B is distributed from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 552 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. , The game ball B guided by the detour passage 552 g can be reliably received.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, the game ball B can be dropped. The game ball B is not accepted by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the gaming board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 107 to 115. FIG. 107 is a front view of a gaming board showing the inside of a gaming area in which a gaming ball is distributed by making the gaming panel opaque in a pachinko machine. FIG. 108 is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the attacker unit in the game board. FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front right, FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front left, and FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board in a state where the game panel is transparent. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board showing the decorative pattern of the game panel and the obstacle nails.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is driven by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting port 2002, and a gate portion that give a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B. It is provided with 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a large winning opening 2005. Therefore, in the game board 5, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. The purpose is to perform a game that enjoys the driving operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a.

The game board 5 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into a front component 1000 having a substantially square shape in front view, and a rear end of the game area 5a attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. It is equipped with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 108) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. Further, the game board 5 is a game played by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and the board holder 1200. It comprises a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 97, 168, etc.) for controlling the contents.

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component 1000. The peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the 1100, the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. It further includes a drive board unit 1700, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. Further, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds a transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and a transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front constituent member 1000, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 113) to which the back unit 3000 is mounted on the rear side as well as being mounted on the rear side.

The drive board unit 1700 is provided in the panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and in the front unit 2000 and the back unit in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510. It includes an effect drive board 1720 for driving a decorative substrate and a drive motor, and a drive board box 1730 for accommodating a panel relay board 1710 and an effect drive board 1720. The drive board box 1730 is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the rear view on the left side side in the rear view, and is detachably attached to the rear surface on the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 on the right side side in the rear view.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that the game ball B driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are game areas. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a, and the gate portion 2003, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003. The large winning opening 2005, which enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B, and the game ball accepted in the large winning opening 2005 are distributed. It is provided with a receiving space 2006 having a predetermined size, and a first receiving entrance 2007 and a second receiving entrance 2008 for receiving a game ball in the receiving space 2006.

Further, the table unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a front surface of the start port unit 2100. The side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning openings 2001, and the side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the upper left of the front view of the side unit 2200. The side slope 2300 and the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a, are attached to the right side of the front view. 2005, the attacker unit 2400 having the receiving space 2006, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, and above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, in the center of the front view in the game area 5a. It includes a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that is attached slightly upward, and a front effect unit 2600 that is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. Further, the back unit 3000 has a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first start that detects the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. It includes a mouth sensor 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first starting port 2002 (see FIG. 168).

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back-rear effect unit 3100 attached to the rear part of the back box 3010, a back-middle effect unit 3200 attached to the front side of the back-rear effect unit 3100, and a back-middle effect unit 3200. The back right effect unit 3300 attached to the front right part, the back upper effect unit 3400 attached to the left side of the upper front part of the back middle effect unit 3200, and the back middle effect unit 3200 attached to the lower part of the front surface. It includes a back-bottom effect unit 3500, a back-right effect unit 3300, a back-up effect unit 3400, and a back-front effect unit 3600 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 in front of the back-bottom effect unit 3500.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 116 to 120. FIG. 116 is a front view of the front component and the game panel in the game board, FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the front component and the game panel disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of the front component and the game panel disassembled and viewed from the rear.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparently formed. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape from the lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the circumferential direction in the clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending to the upper right diagonally. A game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the front view of the out guide portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closing position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the outer rail 1001. Backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view in the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear projection piece 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1010 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch of the panel holder (not shown) in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball path penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed in the upper left corner in the front view, and includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 115 to 123 and the like. FIG. 121 (a) is a front view showing the panel board in the game panel, the upper left panel decorative board, and the lower left panel decorative board, and FIG. 121 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the panel board at the portion of the specific obstacle nail, (c). ) Is a partial cross-sectional view of the panel board at the part of the obstacle nail that overlaps with the decorative pattern. FIG. 122 is a front view of the game board showing the relationship between the decorative pattern on the game panel and the obstacle nail. FIG. 123 (a) is a front view showing the relationship between the decorative pattern on the panel board of the game panel and the back-front decorative board of the back-front effect unit in the back unit, and FIG. 123 (b) is the panel decoration of the panel board and the panel decoration board. It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship with LED for use.

The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, to which the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

Further, the game panel 1100 includes a panel decorative substrate 1130 on which a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a that irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 are mounted, and a substrate on which the panel decorative substrate 1130 is attached to the panel holder 1120. It is equipped with a cover 1135. The panel decorative substrate 1130 is composed of an upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 arranged in the upper left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120, and a lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 arranged in the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 in the front view. The board cover 1135 is composed of an upper left board cover 1136 for attaching the upper left panel decorative board 1131 to the panel holder 1120, and a lower left board cover 1137 for attaching the lower left panel decorative board 1132 to the panel holder 1120.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed to have a thin plate thickness because the panel plate 1110 is separated from each other in the left-right direction at the upper edge and the lower edge, and the plurality of positioning holes 1113 formed in the round holes penetrating the front and rear and the short elongated holes. It is provided with a plurality of engaging step portions 1114 and the like. The positioning hole 1113 is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting the protruding pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120. The engaging step portion 1114 is for being detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with the engaging claw 1125 or the engaging piece 1126 of the panel holder 1120.

As shown in FIG. 121A and the like, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500, which is offset to the upper right of the center in the front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and the width orthogonal to the distribution direction (circumferential direction of the frame shape) of the game ball B in the front view is a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center. The width is wide so that the balls B can be lined up, and the upper side and the right side have a narrow width where a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up. In the present embodiment, in the panel plate 1110, as surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 121 (a), the portion having a wide width is designated as the decorative pattern forming region 1101, and the portion having a narrow width is defined as the decorative pattern forming region 1101. The decorative pattern non-forming region 1102 is used.

The panel plate 1110 is provided with a decorative pattern 1150 in which a predetermined pattern is formed by a plurality of linear grooves (that is, a plurality of linearly recessed grooves) in the decorative pattern forming region 1101 on the rear surface. The decorative pattern 1150 of the present embodiment is a pattern in which the glass is cracked. The decorative pattern 1150 has a V-shaped cross section. The decorative pattern 1150 can be visually recognized from the front player side even when the panel decorative LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 is not emitted, and decorates the inside of the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 causes the panel decorative LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 to emit light, and when the light is incident on the inside of the panel plate 1110, the decorative pattern 1150 formed in a pattern such as a crack is emitted and decorated. Can be done.

The decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 has a radiation portion 1151 that mainly reflects the light radiated from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 to the inside and the light radiated from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 to the inside. It is composed of a radiation light guide unit 1152 that reflects and guides light along a line. The radiating light guide section 1152 satisfies at least one of a deeper groove depth and a longer peripheral length in cross section as compared with the radiating section 1151. The radiation light guide unit 1152 is formed so as to connect (or intersect) a plurality of radiation units 1151 and diffusely reflect the light emitted from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 to the inside in the panel plate 1110. , Can guide light in the direction in which the groove extends. That is, the radiating light guide unit 1152 plays a role of guiding light from one of the plurality of radiating units 1151 connected by itself to the other, whereby the arrangement portion and the number of arrangements of the panel decorative LED 1130a can be increased. Within the limited range, the photosensitivity (ratio of the amount of light radiated (reflected) forward) of the entire decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 is increased. More specifically, as shown by the two-point chain line in FIG. 121 (a), the radiating light guide unit 1152 is usually from the panel decorative LED 1130a of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and the panel decorative LED 1130a of the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132. Light is guided to the radiating portion 1151 arranged outside the range of the light guide region 1103, the radiating portion 1151 is made to emit light, and the photosensitivity of the entire decorative pattern 1150 is enhanced.

As a result, the radiation light guide portion 1152 has more radiation than the radiation portion 1151 of the decoration pattern 1150 formed in the portion where the light from the panel decorative LED 1130a is difficult to reach (usually the portion outside the light guide region 1103). The radiating portion 1151 can be radiated and decorated with a sufficient amount of light by allowing light to reach. Therefore, when the panel decorative LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 is made to emit light, the light incident on the inside of the panel plate 1110 is reflected forward from the radiating portion 1151 and the radiating light guide portion 1152 to form a crack-like pattern. The formed decorative pattern 1150 can be luminescently decorated with uniform brightness over substantially the entire area.

In the panel plate 1110, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement. The plurality of obstacle nails N have a specific obstacle nail N1 that has an important role for the game. As shown in FIG. 122, the specific obstacle nail N1 is arranged near the warp entrance 2501, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2002, and the gate portion 2003. If the specific obstacle nail N1 is distorted or bent due to contact with the game ball B, the probability that the game ball B will be accepted into the warp entrance 2501 or the general winning opening 2001 will change. It is a target for constant maintenance so that there is no distortion or the like.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 (b) and 122, the decoration prohibited area 1104 is set within a predetermined range (for example, a radius of 1.5 mm to 3 mm) centered on the specific obstacle nail N1. The radiating portion 1151 and the radiating light guide portion 1152 of the decorative pattern 1150 are not formed inside. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, the specific obstacle nail N1 can be easily seen, and it can be easily confirmed whether or not the specific obstacle nail N1 is distorted. Further, since the groove of the radiation unit 1151 and the radiation light guide unit 1152 is not formed in the decoration prohibited area 1140 around the specific obstacle nail N1, it is specified in order to adjust the specific obstacle nail N1 at the time of maintenance or the like. When the obstacle nail N1 is hit, the force is transmitted from the specific obstacle nail N1 to the radiation unit 1151 and the radiation light guide unit 1152, and it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1110 from cracking or cracking.

Further, among the obstacle nails N excluding the specific obstacle nail N1, the obstacle nail N planted at the portion overlapping the decorative pattern 1150 is planted on the panel plate 1110 as shown in FIG. 121 (c). The tip is projected inside the groove (radiating light guide portion 1152 in the figure) constituting the decorative pattern 1150. Therefore, when the panel decorative LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 is made to emit light and the light is incident on the inside of the panel plate 1110, the light is irradiated from the groove of the decorative pattern 1150 to the tip of the obstacle nail N protruding inside the groove. Then, the light is reflected by the inclined tip of the obstacle nail N, and the tip of the obstacle nail N can be made to shine. As a result, the obstacle nail N can be illuminated, and the player can be shown a light emitting effect that has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines. In the game area 5a, the decorative pattern 1150 may be intentionally overlapped with the obstacle nail N planted in the special portion, whereby the decorative pattern 1150 may be combined with the light emitting decoration. The obstacle nail N in a special part can be illuminated, the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the obstacle nail N in a special part, and the game ball B aimed at the special obstacle nail N can be driven. The operation can be performed.

Further, in the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110, a part of the radiating portion 1151 and the radiating light guide portion 1152 formed in the linear groove is in the back unit 3000 described later as shown in FIG. 123 (a). The back front decorative substrate 3603 of the back front effect unit 3600 is formed along the inner outer edge facing the center side of the front view game area 5a. As a result, when the decorative pattern 1150 (radiating unit 1151 and radiating light guide unit 1152) is made to emit light by the panel decorative LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130, the inner outer edge of the back front decorative substrate 3603 is seen from the player side. It can be luminescently decorated. Further, as a result, in the front view, the inner outer edge of the back front decorative substrate 3603 is luminescently decorated, so that the back front decorative substrate 3603 can be relatively darkened and hard to see, and the gaming area in the front view can be made difficult to see. The appearance in 5a can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the decorative pattern 1150 composed of linear grooves is formed by cutting the panel plate 1110. Further, the decorative pattern 1150 is formed before the formation of the planting hole for planting the obstacle nail N. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cutting debris discharged by the formation of the decorative pattern 1150 from clogging the planting hole, and the obstacle nail N can be planted in a good condition.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially square outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion 1123 which is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the holding step portion 1123 having substantially the same size as the game area 5a in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a penetrating through port 1121.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a cutout portion 1122 that is cut out upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch and lowers. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged outside the holding step portion 1123 and a plurality of protruding pins 1124 each protruding forward from the holding step portion 1123 and being inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110. Three engaging claws 1125 that elastically engage with the engaging step portion 1114 of the inclined portion on the upper side and the lower left of the panel plate 1110, and the panel protruding upward from the lower outside of the holding step portion 1123. It comprises a pair of engaging pieces 1126 that engage with each of the two engaging steps 1114 on the lower side of the plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 engages the engaging step portion 1114 on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece 1126 from diagonally above the front, and then moves the upper part of the panel plate 1110 to the rear to move the upper part and the lower left side. By elastically engaging the engaging step portion 1114 of the inclined portion with the engaging claw 1125, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being housed in the holding step portion 1123. At this time, the protruding pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

The panel holder 1120 has two board mounting recesses 1127 that are recessed from the front to the rear in the upper left corner and the upper right corner of the front view outside the holding step portion 1123, and the rear side of each board mounting recess 1127. It is equipped with two connect recesses 1128, which are recessed from the front to the front. The upper left board cover 1136 to which the upper left panel decorative board 1131 is attached and the lower left board cover 1137 to which the lower left panel decorative board 1132 is attached are attached to the two board mounting recesses 1127 from the front, respectively. The upper board mounting recess 1127 is located behind the function display unit 1400. Further, the lower substrate mounting recess 1127 is located behind the certificate stamp affixing portion 1012 in the front component 1000. In the lower substrate mounting recess 1127, the engaging claw 1125 that engages with the engaging step portion 1114 at the lower left diagonal portion of the panel plate 1110 protrudes from the boundary side with the holding step portion 1123.

In the connect recess 1128 of the panel holder 1120, the connector 1131a of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 mounted on the board mounting recess 1127 and the connector 1132a of the lower left panel decorative board 1132 penetrate the rear wall of the board mounting recess 1127. It is formed in such a size that a sufficiently large space is formed around the connector 1131b and the connector 1132b so that a finger can enter the connector 1131b and the connector 11132b in a state of protruding inward. This makes it possible to easily connect and disconnect the connection cable (not shown) to the connection connector 1131b and the connection connector 1132b.

The panel decorative substrate 1130 is composed of an upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and a lower left panel decorative substrate 1132. A plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a are mounted on the front surface of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131. The plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 are arranged along the upper left diagonal portion on the peripheral edge of the panel plate 1110, with the uppermost side facing right and the lowermost side facing downward. It is mounted so as to irradiate light, and is mounted so as to irradiate light toward the lower right so that the rest is perpendicular to the diagonal portion on the upper left of the panel plate 1110. The upper left panel decorative board 1131 has a connector 1131a projecting rearward attached to the rear surface thereof.

A plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a are mounted on the front surface of the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132. The lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 is cut out so as to avoid the lower engaging claw 1125 in the panel holder 1120, and the plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a are upward and right in a state where the cutout portion is avoided. It is mounted so as to irradiate light toward the upper right. The lower left panel decorative board 1132 has a connector 1132a projecting rearward attached to the rear surface thereof.

The panel decorative substrate 1130 is formed of a white member so as not to be conspicuous from the front. Further, the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 are side-view type wide-angle full-color LEDs, and can also irradiate light forward.

As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the panel decorative substrate 1130 is arranged so that the front surface (plate surface) on which the side view type panel decorative LED 1130a is mounted is parallel to the surface of the panel plate 1110. There is. As a result, the dimensions of the panel decorative board 1130 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner than the panel board 1110, the panel decorative board 1130 can be attached to the panel holder 1120 without any problem, and the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) can be attached. The decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 can be light-emitting decorated while suppressing the increase in the dimension in the front-rear direction.

Further, the panel decorative substrate 1130 has a plate surface parallel to the surface of the panel plate 1110, and is large enough to be larger than the size of the panel decorative LED 1130a mounted on the plate surface (front surface). It is the board surface of. In other words, the panel decorative substrate 1130 is the other area (surplus) in which the plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a having a size of 40 to 100 times larger than the LED mounting area occupied by the plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a to be mounted are not mounted. Area). As a result, the mounting strength of the panel decorative board 1130 can be increased, and even if vibration or impact generated during transportation, installation, maintenance, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 acts, the panel decorative board 1130 and the panel board 1110 It is possible to make it difficult for the positional relationship to be displaced, and it is possible to suppress the displacement of the optical axis of the panel decorative LED 1130a and prevent the incident of light into the panel plate 1110 from being defective.

Further, since the panel decorative board 1130 is mounted in the board mounting recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120 via the board cover 1135, vibrations and shocks generated during transportation, installation, maintenance, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 are performed. However, it is difficult to transmit to the panel decorative substrate 1130. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the vibration and the like acting on the panel decorative substrate 1130 (panel decorative LED 1130a), suppress the deterioration of the durability of the panel decorative LED 1130a, and similarly to the above, the panel decorative substrate 1130. It is possible to prevent the positional relationship between the panel plate 1110 and the panel plate 1110 from being displaced, and it is possible to suppress the displacement of the optical axis of the panel decorative LED 1130a and prevent the light from being incident on the panel plate 1110. ..

A panel decorative board 1130 is attached to the rear side of the board cover 1135. The substrate cover 1135 is formed to be frosted glass-like translucent so that the panel decorative substrate 1130 attached to the rear side is difficult to recognize, and is formed so as to diffuse the light from the panel decorative LED 1130a. There is. As a result, it is possible to reduce the fact that the light emitted (leaked) forward from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 illuminates the player and causes the player to feel glare. It is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable.

In the game panel 1100 of the present embodiment, the crack-shaped decorative pattern 1150 is formed in the decorative pattern forming region 1101 of the transparent panel plate 1110, and the decorative pattern 1150 is transparent and three-dimensional as compared with the conventional decoration by the printing sheet. You can show the player a certain decoration. Then, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is made to emit light, the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 can be made to emit light and be decorated, and the game ball B in the game area 5a which has not been seen in the conventional pachinko machines is generated. It is possible to show the player the luminous decoration of the distribution area.

Further, since the decorative pattern 1150 is formed only in the decorative pattern forming region 1101 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a circulates in various flow paths, the decorative pattern 1150 is formed in the entire game area 5a. Compared with the case where the decorative pattern is formed, the cost related to the formation of the decorative pattern 1150 can be reduced.

Further, in the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment, since the upper left panel decorative board 1131 is arranged behind the function display unit 1400, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 is made to emit light, the function display unit 1400 is displayed. It is possible to illuminate from the rear, and it is possible to show the player a light emission effect in which the function display unit 1400 (function display unit), which has not been found in conventional pachinko machines, is light-emitting and decorated.

Further, in the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment, since the lower left panel decorative board 1132 is arranged behind the certificate stamp sticking portion 1012, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the lower left panel decorative board 1132 is made to emit light, the certificate stamp sticking portion 1012 is used. The attached certificate stamp (not shown) can be illuminated from behind to emit light, and the player can be shown a light emission effect in which the certificate stamp is lit up and decorated, which is not possible with conventional pachinko machines.

Further, in the game panel 1100 of the present embodiment, a condenser lens, a diffuser lens, or the like is not arranged between the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 and the side surface of the panel plate 1110. As a result, the light from the panel decorative LED 1130a is directly irradiated to a wide range on the side surface of the panel plate 1110, and the light can be incident on a wide range inside the panel plate 1110, so that the decorative pattern 1150 can be formed. It can be beautifully luminescent and decorated.

Further, in the game panel 1100 of the present embodiment, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a panel decoration substrate 1130 (panel decoration LED 1130a) for luminescent decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. When changing to a panel board 1110 with other different decorative patterns in order to change the model of the game board 5 or make a minor change to the model, it can be handled only by replacing the panel board 1110. The holder 1120, the front component 1000, the panel decorative substrate 1130, and the substrate cover 1135 can be used as common parts. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has high versatility with other models having the panel plate 1110 to which the other decorative pattern 1150 is applied, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed. be able to.

Further, in the game panel 1100 of the present embodiment, the panel decorative board 1130 is mounted in the board mounting recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120 via the board cover 1135, and the panel decorative board 1130 and the panel board 1110 are separately mounted. I am trying to install it. As a result, the panel holder 1120 from which the board cover 1135 and the panel decorative board 1130 have been removed can be used for a pachinko machine (game board) having a normal panel board 1110 to which the decorative pattern 1150 is not applied. The 1120 and the front component 1000 can be common parts. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has high versatility with other models having the panel plate 1110 to which the other decorative pattern 1150 is applied, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed. be able to. When used for a model having a panel plate 1110 to which the decorative pattern 1150 is not applied, a dummy board cover 1135 may be attached to the board mounting recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120, or the panel holder 1120 may be used. The board cover 1135 and the panel decorative board 1130 may be used with the board cover 1135 attached.

[5-3. Board holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is on the rear surface. The main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the game ball B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game ball B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received, and the bottom surface can be received. It can be discharged from the discharge unit 1201 formed in the above to the discharge ball receiving unit 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 111 to 113 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 houses the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 168) that controls the game content, the payout of the game ball B, and the like, and the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And have.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent power against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second starting port sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, a first receiving / receiving sensor 2404, a second receiving / receiving sensor 2405, a starting port solenoid 2412, and an attacker. It is connected to a solenoid 2414, a distribution solenoid 2416, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, and a magnetic sensor 3003.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 107 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400 has a status display consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status, and two normal lottery results drawn by the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003. It includes a normal symbol display consisting of LEDs and a normal holding display consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400 has a first special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. The first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs indicating the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004. It is equipped with a second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs to display, and a second special holding number display consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. ing.

Further, the function display unit 1400 is a round composed of five LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the big winning opening 2005 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like. It is equipped with a display.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, the design, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LED provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 111 and 113. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 168) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1505. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the upper surface and a lower fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the lower surface. The effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the upper inner peripheral surface in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the 3010, the lower fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the lower fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 107, 108, 112, 113 and the like. The table unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. It penetrates through and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. A first starting port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. , To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which can accept the game ball B according to the normal lottery result drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B.

A plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged below the center in the vertical direction near the right end of the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged directly below the gate portion 2003. The large winning opening 2005 is arranged at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 on the upper right side of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction.

The table unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a front view left of the start port unit 2100. The side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 and has three general winning openings 2001, and the side slope, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 at the upper left of the front view of the side unit 2200. 2300 and one general winning opening 2001, gate portion 2003, second starting opening 2004, large winning opening 2005, which are attached to the right side of the front view of the starting port unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a. Above the attacker unit 2400 having the reception space 2006, the first reception entrance 2007, and the second reception entrance 2008, the start port unit 2100, and the side unit 2200, and slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a. It includes a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that is attached closer to the center accessory, and a front effect unit 2600 that is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500.

[5-8-1. Starting port unit]
The start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1008, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002, which is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be accepted. The start port unit 2100 is transparently formed except for the front surface of the first start port 2002, and the rear side (the back unit 3000 through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100) can be visually recognized.

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the panel plate 1110, the general winning opening 2001 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and is opened upward, and the first starting port 2002 is the center described later. It is located directly below the center of the stage 2503 of the accessory 2500. Therefore, when the game ball B is released downward from the center of the stage 2503, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability. The start port unit 2100 can guide the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 to the rear of the panel plate 1110 and deliver it to the taxiway of the back front effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000. The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3002 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 168).

[5-8-2. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be accepted at all times. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002.

In the side unit 2200, the rightmost general winning opening 2001 is open upward at the same height as the first starting opening 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, and the general winning opening 2001 on the intermediate side in the left-right direction is on the right side. The general winning opening 2001 on the leftmost side opens upward at a position higher than the general winning opening 2001, and the general winning opening 2001 on the leftmost side opens toward the upper left of the front view at a position higher than the general winning opening 2001 on the intermediate side. There is.

The side unit 2200 is transparently formed except for the front surface of the three general winning openings 2001, and the rear side (the back unit 3000 through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100) can be visually recognized. By attaching the side unit 2200 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the three general winning openings 2001 are in a state of protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110. The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel plate 1110 and deliver it to the taxiway of the back front effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 168).

[5-8-3. Side slope]
The side slope 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached along the inner rail 1002 at the upper left of the front view of the side unit 2200. The side slope 2300 includes a shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so that the right end is lowered in front view. The side slope 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the shelf portion 2301 projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

The side slope 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flowed down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right. The side slope 2300 is formed to be transparent as a whole, and the rear side (the back unit 3000 through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100) can be visually recognized.

[5-8-4. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side of the front view of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 from the front. This attacker unit 2400 has one of the four general winning openings 2001, the general winning opening 2001, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the receiving space 2006, the first entrance 2007, and the second. It is equipped with a reception port 2008 (see FIG. 108 and the like).

The attacker unit 2400 is formed in an L-shape in which the outer shape in the front view extends upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction to the upper end on the right side. In this attacker unit 2400, a gate portion 2003 through which the game ball B flows (passes) up and down is arranged in the upper right corner, and a second starting port 2004 that can be opened forward is arranged directly under the gate portion 2003. Has been done. In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a large winning opening 2005 that can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting port 2004, and is always open diagonally to the right at the lower left of the large winning opening 2005. One general winning opening 2001 is arranged. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, a receiving space 2006 having a predetermined size in which the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 is distributed is arranged below the large winning opening 2005. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, a first inlet / outlet 2007 that can be opened upward is arranged in the receiving space 2006, and the attacker unit 2400 is always open upward on the right side of the first inlet / outlet 2007. Two entrances 2008 are arranged.

In the attacker unit 2400, the general winning opening 2001 is opened with a size slightly larger than that of the game ball B, and the gate portion 2003 penetrates vertically with a size slightly larger than that of the game ball B. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, the second starting port 2004 is slightly larger than the game ball and opens toward the front, and the large winning opening 2005 is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball in the left-right direction. It is 5 times wider and opens upward.

The attacker unit 2400 has a gate sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a second start port sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004, and a large winning opening 2005. The large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the accepted game ball B, the first inlet sensor 2404 that detects the accepted game ball B in the first inlet 2007, and the game ball accepted in the second inlet 2008. It is equipped with a second inlet sensor 2405 that detects B (see FIG. 168).

The attacker unit 2400 opens and closes the second start opening door 2411 capable of opening and closing the second starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening door 2411 according to the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate portion 2003. The starting port solenoid 2412, the large winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the large winning opening 2005, and the large winning opening door 2413 are drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. (1) The attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to the result of the special lottery or the result of the second special lottery, and the game ball B that opens and closes the first entrance 2007 (the game ball B that is received by the large winning opening 2005 and circulates in the acceptance space 2006 is the first. (Distribute to either the reception port 2007 or the second reception port 2008) The distribution piece 2415 and the distribution piece 2415 are drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is provided with a distribution solenoid 2416 that opens and closes according to a special lottery result or a second special lottery result.

The attacker unit 2400 extends vertically in the upper right corner in the front view, and has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 at the upper end and the lower end, respectively, and has a gate passage 2421 through which the game ball B can be distributed. , The left side passage 2422 extending vertically below the second starting port 2004 on the left side of the gate portion 2003 and allowing the game ball B to flow, and the second starting port 2004 after extending vertically on the right side of the gate portion 2003. Above the right side passage 2423, which is bent so as to join the gate passage 2421 and through which the game ball B can flow, below the gate passage 2421 and the left side passage 2422, and above the large winning opening 2005. It extends to the left from the bottom of the gate passage 2421 so that the left end side is low, and extends to the left so that the attacker passage 2424 through which the game ball B can be distributed and the left end side of the grand prize opening 2005 are low. It is provided with a discharge shelf portion 2425.

As shown in FIG. 108, in the gate passage 2421, the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 communicates with the left side passage 2422 and the right side passage 2423 so that the game ball B can pass through, respectively. There is. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the gate passage 2421 from above passes through the gate portion 2003 and then flows down to the attacker passage 2424 through the front of the second starting port 2004. Further, the game ball B that has entered the left side passage 2422 from above has a pattern of flowing down to the attacker passage 2424 through the left side of each of the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004, and after passing through the left side of the gate portion 2003. There is a pattern that bends to the right, enters the gate passage 2421, passes in front of the second starting port 2004, and flows down to the attacker passage 2424. On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the right side passage 2423 from above bends to the left after passing through the right side of the gate portion 2003, enters the gate passage 2421, and passes in front of the second starting port 2004 to enter the attacker passage. It flows down to 2424. When the game ball B passes in front of the second starting port 2004, if the second starting port 2004 is open, the game ball B is accepted by the second starting port 2004.

The second starting port door 2411 allows the second starting port 2004, which is open to the front, to be closed from the front, and is rotatable around an axis whose lower side extends to the left and right near the lower end of the second starting port 2004. It is installed. The second starting port door 2411 is driven by the starting port solenoid 2412 to rotate (rotate) so that the upper side moves forward, thereby opening the second starting port 2004 and closing the gate passage 2421. , The game ball B that has flowed down in front of the second starting port 2004 can be guided to the second starting port 2004 side and accepted into the second starting port 2004. The second starting port door 2411 closes the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid is ON (when energized). Let me.

The big prize opening door 2413 is formed in a plate shape that extends back and forth and extends to the left and right so that the left end is lowered, and opens and closes the big winning opening 2005 that opens upward by advancing and retreating back and forth. It is possible. The large prize opening door 2413 can close the large prize opening 2005 by moving forward, and can guide the game ball B circulating in the attacker passage 2424 to the left and deliver it to the release shelf portion 2425. .. Further, the large winning opening door 2413 is retracted by the drive of the attacker solenoid 2414 to open the large winning opening 2005, and is distributed through any of the gate passage 2421, the left side passage 2422, and the right side passage 2423, and then the attacker. The game ball B that has circulated in the passage 2424 can be accepted into the large winning opening 2005. The large winning opening door 2413 closes the large winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the large winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when energized).

The distribution piece 2415 is formed in a plate shape extending back and forth in the receiving space 2006 and extending left and right so that the right end is lowered, and opens upward by moving back and forth. The first entrance 2007 (V winning opening) can be opened and closed. The distribution piece 2415 closes the first inlet 2007 by moving forward, guides the game ball B received in the grand prize opening 2005 to the right, and always opens upward at the second inlet. It can be accepted in 2008. Further, the distribution piece 2415 opens the first entrance 2007 by retreating by driving the distribution solenoid 2416, and the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 is highly likely to be the first entrance 2007. Can be accepted by. The distribution piece 2415 closes the first inlet / outlet 2007 when the distribution solenoid 2416 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the first inlet / outlet 2007 when the distribution solenoid 2416 is ON (when energized). Let me. In other words, the distribution piece 2415 can distribute the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 so that it can be received in either the first entrance 2007 or the second entrance 2008.

In the state where the attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the gate passage 2421 is located below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 described later (slightly to the left of the lower side). At the same time, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 are located above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500. Further, the general winning opening 2001 is located at substantially the same height as the first starting opening 2002. Further, in the state of being attached to the panel plate 1110, a plurality of obstacle nails N exist between the lower end of the right guide passage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 and the upper end (gate portion 2003).

Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. Since the gate portion 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 is located above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, even if the game ball B is released from the stage 2503, the gate portion 2003 Will not pass through. Therefore, only the game ball B that has flowed down the right side (right guide passage 2510) of the center accessory 2500 may pass through the gate portion 2003. The left side passage 2422, the gate passage 2421, and the right side passage 2423 are opened side by side from the left downstream of the right guide passage 2510, and the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 is any of them. It will enter the crab.

Then, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged from the gate passage 2421 to the attacker passage 2424 through the front of the second start opening door 2411 that closes the second start opening 2004 directly below the game ball B. At this time, if the second starting door 2411 is rotated forward and is in the open position, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 comes into contact with the back surface of the second starting door 2411. (2) It is guided to the start port 2004 side and is accepted by the second start port 2004. The second start door 2411 is in accordance with the normal lottery result drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 (the game ball B is detected by the gate sensor 2401) (the normal lottery result is "normal hit". By appropriately setting the lottery time of the normal lottery result, the opening / closing timing of the second start opening door 2411, etc. It can also be accepted by.

After being detected by the second starting port sensor 2402, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

In this gate passage 2421, since it communicates with the downstream end of the right side passage 2423 on the right side of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004, the gate portion 2003 is connected to the right side passage 2423 on the right side. The entered game ball B can be circulated to the front side of the second starting port 2004 without passing through the gate portion 2003. Therefore, in a state where the second starting port door 2411 has moved to the open position and the second starting port 2004 can be accepted, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 or the game that has circulated through the right side passage 2423. The ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 with an extremely high probability. Since the left side of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 communicates with the middle of the left side passage 2422, the gate passage 2421 is connected to the left side passage 2422 on the left side of the gate portion 2003. The entered game ball B may be received in the second starting port 2004.

If the game ball flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 is not received by the second starting port 2004, it is discharged from the lower end of the gate passage 2421 or the left side passage 2422 to the attacker passage 2424.

The game ball B released to the attacker passage 2424 is guided to the left along the slope thereof, and is released downward from the left end of the release shelf portion 2425 through the large prize opening door 2413 closing the large prize opening 2005. Will be done. At this time, if the large prize opening door 2413 that closes the large winning opening 2005 is retracted and the large winning opening 2005 is open, the game ball B released into the attacker passage 2424 has a high probability of winning a large prize. Accepted in mouth 2005. The game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 is sent to the receiving space 2006 after being detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403, and is either the first entrance 2007 or the second entrance 2008 by the distribution piece 2415. It is distributed to.

The game ball B received in the first reception port 2007 or the second reception entrance 2008 is detected by the first reception sensor 2404 or the second reception sensor 2405, and then downwards (the substrate) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. It is discharged to the holder 1200 top).

The game ball B discharged downward from the release shelf portion 2425 may be accepted by one general winning opening 2001 arranged below. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is guided to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 and then handed over to the taxiway of the back front effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000. On the other hand, the game ball not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 passes through the out opening 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a and is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

[5-8-5. Center role]
The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, etc., and slightly above the center of the front view, and is a panel plate of the game panel 1100. It is attached to the front of 1110. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and various effect units provided in the effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front through the frame. can.

In the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the entire circumference excluding the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is inside the frame. It is not possible to invade.

The center accessory 2500 has a frame on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view so that the warp entrance 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter and the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501 can be released. It includes a warp outlet 2502 that is open inside, and a stage 2503 that can roll the game ball B discharged from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction and then discharge it into the game area 5a.

The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and the position corresponding to directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel plate). When attached to 1110), it is formed in a wavy shape so that the position at the substantially center in the left-right direction is slightly higher than that on both the left and right sides. The stage 2503 is inclined so that the portion (top) slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center of the left-right direction and the lowest portion (valley) on both the left and right sides are lowered toward the front. Therefore, the game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (top) at the center of the stage 2503 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided with a right guide passage 2510 that guides the game ball B that has flowed down along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the front view slightly to the left and then discharges it downward. The right guide passage 2510 is formed so that the downstream end of the right guide passage 2510 is located slightly to the right of the gate portion 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. There is.

The center accessory 2500 is formed so that the outer peripheral surface on the right side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball from the right rail 1005 in the front component 1000 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. Therefore, when the game ball B circulates on the right side of the center accessory 2500, it circulates along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and all the game balls B circulating on the right side of the center accessory 2500 are on the right guide passage. You will be guided by entering 2510. As a result, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a (so-called right-handed) so as to circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B is passed through the gate portion 2003 with high probability. At the same time, it is possible to accept the game ball B for the large winning opening 2005 that is open (open) with a high probability.

[5-8-6. Table production unit]
Next, the table effect unit 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 124 to 126 and the like. FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit of the game board and the front effect unit as viewed from the front. FIG. 125 is a front view showing a state in which the first pattern is light-emitting decorated in the front effect unit, and FIG. 126 is a front view showing a state in which the second pattern is light-emitting decorated in the table effect unit.

The front effect unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500, and is directed toward the transparent flat plate-shaped front light guide plate 2610 that closes the frame of the center accessory 2500 and the right side surface of the front light guide plate 2610. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2611a capable of irradiating light are mounted, and light can be irradiated toward the upper surface of the first pattern substrate 2611 attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500 and the front light guide plate 2610. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2612a are mounted, and a second pattern substrate 2612 attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500 is provided.

The front light guide plate 2610 receives only the first pattern 2621 (see FIG. 125) formed by innumerable uneven first reflecting portions that reflect only the light from the vertical direction forward, and the light from the left and right directions. It is provided with a second pattern 2622 (see FIG. 126) formed by a myriad of uneven second reflecting portions that reflect forward. That is, when the front effect unit 2600 causes the light guide plate LED of the first pattern substrate 2611 to emit light 2611a, the first pattern 2621 can be emitted and displayed, and the light guide plate LED 2612a of the second pattern substrate 2612 emits light. Then, the second pattern 2622 can be displayed by light emission.

The front light guide plate 2610 has innumerable first reflective portions forming the first pattern 2621 and innumerable second reflecting portions forming the second pattern 2622, each of which has fine irregularities. When the light guide plate LED2611a of the first pattern substrate 2611 and the light guide plate LED2612a of the second pattern board 2612 are not emitted, they appear transparent and various types of the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side. The decorative body, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the like can be visually recognized in good condition.

As shown in FIG. 125, the first pattern 2621 is a pattern that imitates the circumference of one eye of a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. Further, as shown in FIG. 126, the second pattern 2622 is a pattern in which radial and concentric cracks are formed in the glass. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are full-color LEDs.

In the front effect unit 2600 of the present embodiment, the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 have their plate surfaces oriented parallel to the peripheral surface of the front light guide plate 2610, and the plate thickness thereof. Since the direction of is arranged in a direction parallel to the surface of the front light guide plate 2610, it is difficult to see the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 when viewed from the front (player side). It is possible to improve the appearance in the game area 5a.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 127 to 131 and the like. FIG. 127 is a front view of the back unit of the game board in which the back front decorative board and the back front right decorative board are emphasized. FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 129 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect display device 1600, and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. Further, the back unit 3000 has a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first start that detects the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. It includes a mouth sensor 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first starting port 2002 (see FIG. 168).

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back-rear effect unit 3100 attached to the rear part of the back box 3010, a back-middle effect unit 3200 attached to the front side of the back-rear effect unit 3100, and a back-middle effect unit 3200. The back right effect unit 3300 attached to the front right part, the back upper effect unit 3400 attached to the left side of the upper front part of the back middle effect unit 3200, and the back middle effect unit 3200 attached to the lower part of the front surface. It includes a back-bottom effect unit 3500, a back-right effect unit 3300, a back-up effect unit 3400, and a back-front effect unit 3600 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 in front of the back-bottom effect unit 3500.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a having an open front and a square penetrating the rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped projecting rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, the two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the upper fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. It is provided with a notch 3010d, which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached, near the center in the left-right direction of the lower side.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the effect display device 1600 into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the movable effect units and the like at appropriate positions.

[5-9-1. Back-to-back production unit]
Next, the back-back effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 to 141 and the like. FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the back-back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front. FIG. 133 is a front view of the back-rear effect unit in which the back-rear movable decoration body emphasizes the back-rear movable mechanism in a normal position. FIG. 134 is a front view of the back-rear effect unit showing a state in which the back-rear movable decorative body is locked by the lock member from the state of FIG. 133. FIG. 135 is a front view of the back-rear effect unit showing a state in which the slide guide is moved downward from the state of FIG. 134 to the vicinity of the descending end. FIG. 136 is a front view of the back-back effect unit showing a state in which the lock member is rotated from the state of FIG. 135 to the release position by the slide guide and the back-back movable decorative body is dropped. FIG. 137 is a front view of the back-rear effect unit showing a state in which the back-rear movable decorative body is moved in the vertical direction by a slide guide. FIG. 138 is a front view of the back-back effect unit showing a state in which the lock member is rotated from the lock position to the release position side due to the upward movement of the back-back movable decorative body by the slide guide.

FIG. 139 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear decoration effect unit in the back-rear effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. FIG. 140 is a front view showing a state in which the fifth pattern is light-emitting decorated in the back-rear decoration effect unit, and FIG. 141 is a front view showing a state in which the sixth pattern is light-emitting-decorated in the back-rear decoration effect unit.

The back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost portion in the back box 3010. The back-rear effect unit 3100 has a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The back-rear effect unit 3100 is a back-rear movable effect unit 3110 whose outer shape is formed in a rectangular frame shape, and a back-rear movable effect unit 3110 which is attached to the rear side of the back-rear movable effect unit 3110 and is attached to the back box 3010. It is equipped with a decorative effect unit 3150.

First, the back-back movable effect unit 3110 in the back-back effect unit 3100 will be described in detail. The rear-rear movable production unit 3110 extends in the left-right direction with substantially the same length as the total width in the left-right direction of the production display device 1600, and is formed in a shape imitating Nata as an item in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. It is provided with a back-rear movable decoration body 3120 and a back-rear movable mechanism 3130 to which the back-rear movable decoration body 3120 is movably attached in the vertical direction.

The back-rear movable decorative body 3120 extends in the left-right direction and protrudes outward from both the left and right ends of the decorative body main body 3121 that imitates Nata, and a pair of back-rear movable mechanism 3130 described later. It is provided with a left slider 3122 and a right slider 3123 that are slidably attached to the slide shaft 3132 in the vertical direction. Although not shown, the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is attached to the rear side of the decorative body main body 3121, and a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs) are mounted on the front and rear surfaces of the back-rear movable decorative body decoration. Before the light from the LED, which is attached between the substrate and the back-rear movable decorative body decorative substrate and the decorative body main body 3121, is diffused and radiated forward from the LED attached to the front of the back-rear movable decorative body decorative substrate. The part that becomes the lower part of the decorative body 3121 by guiding the light from the lens and the LED attached to the rear side of the back-rear movable decorative body decorative board and attached to the rear surface of the back-rear movable decorative body decorative board. It is equipped with a rear lens that illuminates from the rear to the front.

The decorative body 3121 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is formed in a shape imitating a machete, and the left end side is the tip of the machete and the lower side is the blade of the machete in front view. In the decorative body 3121, a portion imitating a machete blade is transparently formed. Further, the decorative body main body 3121 is formed with a crack-like decoration that spreads radially and concentrically around a portion near the lower end in the center in the left-right direction.

The left slider 3122 projects forward from the front surface, and includes a lock protrusion 3122a that can come into contact with the restricting portion 3141c and the guide portion 3141d of the lock member 3141 of the back-rear movable mechanism 3130, which will be described later. Further, although not shown, the left slider 3122 is provided with a pair of sliding bushes that are vertically separated and into which the slide shaft 3132 on the left side of the back-rear movable mechanism 3130 is slidably inserted. The sliding bush has a plurality of bearing steel balls in contact with the slide shaft 3132, and can smoothly slide with respect to the inserted slide shaft 3132 without rattling. The left slider 3122 can smoothly move the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 in the vertical direction only on the left side by a pair of sliding bushes. Further, although not shown, the left slider 3122 includes a detection piece projecting rearward. The detection piece of the left slider 3122 is detected by the decorative body detection sensor 3154 of the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150.

The right slider 3123 extends up and down with substantially the same length as the vertical dimension of the decorative body 3121, and has a cylindrical cross-section that sandwiches the slide shaft 3132 on the right side of the back-rear movable mechanism 3130 from the left and right. It is formed.

The back-back movable decorative body decorative substrate is attached above the portion of the decorative body main body 3121, which imitates the blade of a machete. Back and rear movable decorations The multiple LEDs mounted on the front of the decorative board are arranged concentrically around the lower side of the center in the left-right direction, and each LED radiates outward from the center. It is installed so that it is exposed to light. Further, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-rear movable decorative body decorative board are arranged in rows along the lower side and the right side of the rear view, and are parallel to the rear surface of the back-rear movable decorative body decorative board. It is installed so that the light is emitted toward the side.

The rear-rear movable decorative body 3120 can visually recognize the rear through a portion of the decorative body main body 3121 that imitates a blade of a machete. Further, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear movable decorative body decorative substrate, a crack pattern decoration on the front surface of the decorative body main body 3121 is formed via the front lens. When a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface are made to emit light, the tip of the nata and the blade portion of the decorative body 3121 can be luminescently decorated via the rear lens. ..

The back-rear movable mechanism 3130 in the back-rear movable production unit 3110 of the back-rear effect unit 3100 is formed of a metal plate and has a square outer shape and a frame-shaped unit frame 3131, which extends vertically and is separated in the left-right direction. A pair of slide shafts 3132, each of which is attached to the unit frame 3131, and a spiral groove are formed on the outer circumference while extending vertically in parallel on the left side of the slide shaft 3132 on the left side when viewed from the front. The spiral shaft 3133 rotatably attached to the unit frame 3131, the slide guide 3134 screwed to the spiral shaft 3133 and capable of contacting the lower surface of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3120, and the rotation axis upward. The rear rear drive motor 3135 mounted in the lower left corner of the front view of the unit frame 3131, the spur gear-shaped motor gear (not shown) mounted on the rotating shaft of the rear rear drive motor 3135, and the motor gear. It is provided with a spur gear-shaped drive gear (not shown) that is meshed and attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3133.

Further, the back-rear movable mechanism 3130 extends vertically and the unit frame together with a lock member 3141 rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at a portion slightly below the upper left corner of the front view of the unit frame 3131. A transmission slider 3142 that is slidably attached to the 3131 in the vertical direction to rotate the lock member 3141, a lock spring 3143 that urges the transmission slider 3142 upward, and a unit frame 3131 above the lock member 3141. The rotation restricting member 3144, which is attached to the lock member 3141 and regulates the rotation of the lock member 3141, is provided.

Further, the back-rear movable mechanism 3130 is a box-shaped gearbox 3145 in which the back-rear drive motor 3135 is attached to the lower surface of the unit frame 3131 and the motor gear and the drive gear are housed therein. It is provided with a damper 3146 attached to the gearbox 3145 upward and a protective stopper 3147 protruding upward from the gearbox 3145 so as to surround the outer periphery of the damper 3146.

The unit frame 3131 is formed in a frame shape by four strip-shaped members constituting each side. The vertical height of the unit frame 3131 is substantially the same as the height inside the back box 3010, and the left and right lengths are substantially the same as the left and right widths inside the back box 3010. The pair of slide shafts 3132 are columnar metal shafts extending up and down at substantially the same length as the height of the unit frame 3131. The upper end and the lower end of each of the pair of slide shafts 3132 are attached to the unit frame 3131.

The spiral shaft 3133 is rotatably attached to the unit frame 3131 at both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the slide shaft 3132 on the left side. The spiral shaft 3133 is made of metal.

The slide guide 3134 includes a guide main body 3134a into which the spiral shaft 3133 is screwed, and a guide protrusion 3134b that protrudes to the right in front view from the guide main body 3134a and can come into contact with the lower surface of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3120. I have. Although not shown, the slide guide 3134 is recessed from the tip surface of the guide protrusion 3134b to the left in the front view and penetrates vertically from the guide groove into which the slide shaft 3132 on the left side is inserted and from the guide body 3134a. It is equipped with a detection piece that protrudes rearward.

The slide guide 3134 is in a state where the slide shaft 3132 is inserted into the guide groove at the tip of the guide protrusion 3134b to prevent the rotation of the spiral shaft 3133 around the axis, and the slide guide 3134 responds to the rotation direction of the spiral shaft 3133. Can move upwards or downwards. Further, in the slide guide 3134, the lower surface of the left slider 3122 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 can be brought into contact with the upper surface of the guide protrusion 3134b. The detection piece of the slide guide 3134 is detected by a plurality (two) slide detection sensors 3155 provided in the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150.

The lock member 3141 has a main body portion 3141a extending vertically, a bearing hole 3141b penetrating in the front-rear direction at the base end portion which is the lower portion of the main body portion 3141a, and a right angle from the tip portion which is the upper portion of the main body portion 3141a. A planar restricting portion 3141c that protrudes to the right in the front view and faces upward, a guide portion 3141d that extends diagonally from the tip of the restricting portion 3141c toward the vicinity of the base end portion of the main body portion 3141a, and a main body portion. The stopper 3141e projecting upward from the upper end surface of the 3141a, the transmission protrusion 3141f projecting to the left in the front view from the base end portion of the main body 3141a, and the transmission protrusion 3141f penetrate and transmit in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a transmission elongated hole 3141g in which the protrusion 3141f extends in a projecting direction.

A shaft pin (not shown) of the unit frame 3131 is inserted into the bearing hole 3141b of the lock member 3141. As a result, the lock member 3141 is rotatably attached around the axis extending back and forth. In the restricting portion 3141c, the lock projection 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 can be brought into contact with the locking projection 3122a from above. The guide portion 3141d is designed so that the lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 can come into contact with the guide portion 3141d from below. The surface of the stopper 3141e facing to the right when viewed from the front is capable of contacting the rotation restricting member 3144. The transmission pin 3142a of the transmission slider 3142 is slidably inserted into the transmission slot 3141g.

The transmission slider 3142 is formed of a metal strip extending vertically, and is formed to be slightly shorter than the height within the frame of the unit frame 3131. The transmission slider 3142 is slidably attached in the vertical direction to a portion constituting the left side of the unit frame 3131. The transmission slider 3142 has a columnar transmission pin 3142a that projects in the front-rear direction near the upper end and is slidably inserted into the transmission slot 3141g of the lock member 3141, and a guide protrusion of the slide guide 3134 that is formed at the lower end. It is provided with a release contact portion 3142b capable of contacting the 3134b, and a locking portion 3142c formed at the upper end and to which the lower end of the lock spring 3143 is hooked. The release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142 is located below the height of the upper end of the protective stopper 3147.

The lock spring 3143 is a coil spring. The upper end of the lock spring 3143 is locked to the upper end of a portion constituting the left side of the unit frame 3131, and the lower end thereof is locked to the locking portion 3142c of the transmission slider 3142. The lock spring 3143 urges the transmission slider 3142 upward.

The damper 3146 is a columnar damper body 3146a attached to the gearbox 3145, a piston rod 3146b extending upward from the damper body 3146a, and a columnar column attached to the tip (upper end) of the piston rod 3146b. The contact receiving portion 3146c and the like are provided. Although not shown, the damper body 3146a of the damper 3146 has a columnar space extending in the vertical direction (axial direction) inside, and is slidable in the vertical direction (axial direction) in the space. A piston, a spring for urging the piston upward, and a viscous fluid filled in the space inside, and a piston rod 3146b extends upward and outward from the piston.

The damper 3146 is capable of contacting the contact receiving portion 3146c at the upper end with the left slider 3122 of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3120 from above. The damper 3146 has an elastic force due to a spring when the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 abuts on the contact receiving portion 3146c from above and the piston inside the damper main body 3146a moves downward via the piston rod 3146b. The impact can be absorbed by the viscous resistance of the viscous fluid. In the damper 3146, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is not in contact with the contact receiving portion 3146c (free state), the upper surface of the contact receiving portion 3146c is located above the height of the upper end of the protective stopper 3147. There is.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-rear movable effect unit 3110 will be described. In the normal state of the back-rear movable effect unit 3110, as shown in FIG. 133, the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is in the state of the most raised retracted position, and the lock member 3141 is viewed from the front. In the locked position, which is the end of rotation in the clockwise direction. In this state, the lower surface of the left slider 3122 of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3120 is in contact with the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134, and the lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 is larger than the restricting portion 3141c of the lock member 3141. It is located above.

Further, in a normal state, the detection piece of the left slider 3122 in the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is detected by the decorative body detection sensor 3154 of the back-rear decoration effect effect unit 3150, and the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 is on the back. It is detected by the upper slide detection sensor 3155 in the rear decoration effect unit 3150.

In the lock member 3141 in the locked position, the main body portion 3141a is vertical, and the transmission protrusion 3141f protruding to the left from the base end portion of the main body portion 3141a is horizontal. Further, in the lock member 3141, the restricting portion 3141c projecting to the right from the upper end of the main body portion 3141a is located directly below the lock projection 3122a of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3120, and the stopper 3141e projecting upward. Is in contact with the rotation restricting member 3144. The lock member 3141 is further restricted from rotating in the front clockwise direction because the stopper 3141e is in contact with the rotation restricting member 3144.

Since the stopper 3141e of the lock member 3141 abuts on the rotation restricting member 3144 to restrict the rotation of the transmission protrusion 3141f in the upward movement direction, the transmission length formed in the transmission protrusion 3141f. The transmission pin 3142a inserted in the hole 3141g does not move further upward. Therefore, the transmission slider 3142, which is urged upward by the lock spring 3143, is restricted from further upward movement via the transmission pin 3142a by the lock member 3141 at the lock position.

In this normal state, the downward movement (falling) of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is restricted by the slide guide 3134. If, in this state, the slide guide 3134 moves downward to some extent due to some reason such as malfunction, the lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 becomes the restricting portion of the lock member 3141. Since it comes into contact with the 3141c, it is possible to restrict the movement (fall) below the lock member 3141 (regulating portion 3141c). That is, under normal conditions, the slide guide 3134 and the lock member 3141 prevent the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 from falling.

In this normal state, when the spiral shaft 3133 is rotated in a predetermined direction (here, in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view) by the back-rear drive motor 3135, the guide body 3134a screwed to the spiral shaft 3133 causes the spiral shaft 3133 to rotate. The slide guide 3134 moves downward. By moving downward of the slide guide 3134, the back-rear movable decorative body 3120, which is in contact with the upper surface of the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134, moves downward together with the slide guide 3134.

Then, when the lock protrusion 3122a of the back-rear movable decoration 3120 moving downward together with the slide guide 3134 comes into contact with the restricting portion 3141c of the lock member 3141, the back-rear movable decoration 3120 moves downward. After being restricted, the movement of the movable decorative body 3120 after the back is stopped, and the state of the standby position is reached (see FIG. 134). In this standby position, the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 is located below the slide detection sensor 3155 on the upper side of the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150, and is in a non-detection state. On the other hand, the detection piece of the left slider 3122 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is in a state of being detected by the decorative body detection sensor 3154 of the back-rear decoration effect effect unit 3150. Although not shown, the detection piece of the left slider 3122 is moved up and down so that the rear movable decorative body 3120 is detected by the decorative body detection sensor 3154 of the back rear decorative effect unit 3150 from the retracted position to the standby position. Extends to.

After that, when the slide guide 3134 is further moved downward by the back-rear drive motor 3135, the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 is separated from the lower surface of the left slider 3122 of the back-rear movable decoration 3120, and the back-rear movable decoration 3120 is moved. Only the slide guide 3134 will move downward while remaining in the standby position (see FIG. 135).

In this state, the load of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3120 acts on the restricting portion 3141c protruding to the right of the lock member 3141. Therefore, the load applied to the restricting portion 3141c causes the lock member 3141 to have the bearing hole 3141b. Attempts to rotate clockwise around the front view. However, since the stopper 3141e of the lock member 3141 is in contact with the rotation restricting member 3144 from the left side, the rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted, and the lock protrusion 3122a of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is restricted. Does not deviate from the regulation section 3141c.

Then, when the lower surface of the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 moving downward abuts on the upper surface of the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142 (see FIG. 135), the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 becomes the back surface. It is detected by the slide detection sensor 3155 on the lower side of the rear decoration effect unit 3150. In this state, the upper surface of the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 is lower than the height of the upper end of the protective stopper 3147.

From this state, when the slide guide 3134 is further moved downward by the back-rear drive motor 3135 via the spiral shaft 3133, the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 presses the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142 downward. , The transmission slider 3142 slides downward against the urging force of the lock spring 3143.

When the transmission slider 3142 slides downward, the transmission pin 3142a of the transmission slider 3142 also moves downward, so that the transmission slot 3141g of the lock member 3141 into which the transmission pin 3142a is inserted is pressed downward by the transmission pin 3142a. The lock member 3141 rotates about the bearing hole 3141b in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 136).

When the lock member 3141 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the restricting portion 3141c to which the lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the rear-rear movable decoration 3120 abuts from above is on the tip side (right end side) thereof. ) Moves upward and rotates so as to move to the left. That is, with the rotation of the lock member 3141 in the counterclockwise direction, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3120 is raised via the lock protrusion 3122a by the rising tip side of the regulating portion 3141c, and the tip of the regulating portion 3141c is raised. The side slides to the left on the lower surface of the lock protrusion 3122a.

After that, when the lock member 3141 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction and the tip of the restricting portion 3141c moves to the left from the left end of the lock protrusion 3122a of the back rear movable decoration body 3120, the back rear movable decoration body The 3120 loses support from below by the restricting portion 3141c, and the back-rear movable decoration 3120 falls due to the acting gravity (see FIG. 136). That is, from the lock position where the upper surface of the restricting portion 3141c is in contact with the lower surface of the lock protrusion 3122a of the lock member 3141 to the position (release position) where the tip of the restricting portion 3141c is to the left of the left end of the lock protrusion 3122a. When rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the back-rear movable decoration 3120 whose downward movement was restricted (locked) was unlocked, and the back-rear movable decoration 3120 was placed in the standby position. Free fall from.

In the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 that has fallen from the standby position, the lower surface of the left slider 3122 abuts on the contact receiving portion 3146c of the damper 3146, and the piston rod 3146b sinks into the damper main body 3146a via the abutting receiving portion 3146c. The impact of the fall of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is absorbed by the spring and the viscous fluid in the damper main body 3146a. Then, before the lower surface of the left slider 3122 abuts on the upper surface of the protective stopper 3147, the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 stops falling and is in the lowered position.

When the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is in the lowered position, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the left slider 3122 and the upper surface of the protective stopper 3147, and the upper surface of the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 is on the left. It is located sufficiently below the lower surface of the slider 3122 (the upper end of the protective stopper 3147). That is, the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 that has freely fallen from the standby position to the descending position is configured so as not to come into contact with any member other than the damper 3146.

As a result, even if the large back-rear movable decorative body 3120, which has approximately the same length as the entire width of the effect display device 1600 and extends to the left and right, is freely dropped at the same height from the upper part to the lower part of the effect display device 1600, the damper 3146 It does not come into contact with other members, and the other members are not damaged by a large impact. Further, even if the damper 3146 cannot sufficiently stop the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 that has fallen freely, it abuts on the protective stopper 3147 in a state where the kinetic energy is attenuated by the damper 3146. Therefore, the fall of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 can be stopped without damaging the protective stopper 3147. Further, since the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 is located below the upper end of the protective stopper 3147, the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 that has fallen freely does not come into contact with the guide protrusion 3134b and is movable behind the back. It is possible to prevent the slide guide 3134 from being damaged due to the contact of the decorative body 3120.

After the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is dropped to the descending position, the spiral shaft 3133 is rotated in the direction opposite to the above (here, in the clockwise direction in a plan view) by the back-rear drive motor 3135, and the slide guide 3134 is rotated. Rise. When the slide guide 3134 is raised while the transmission slider 3142 is being slid downward by pressing the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142 downward by the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134, the transmission slider 3142 becomes a lock spring. Since it is urged upward by 3143, the transmission slider 3142 slides upward together with the slide guide 3134 (guide projection 3134b).

When the transmission slider 3142 slides upward, the transmission pin 3142a moves upward, so that the transmission slot 3141g of the lock member 3141 into which the transmission pin 3142a is inserted is pressed upward by the transmission pin 3142a, and the lock member 3141 is pressed. It will rotate in the clockwise direction in the front view around the bearing hole 3141b. Then, when the transmission slider 3142 further slides upward along with the slide guide 3134, the stopper 3141e of the lock member 3141 comes into contact with the rotation restricting member 3144, and the lock member 3141 is further rotated in the clockwise direction. Along with being restricted, the upward slide of the transmission slider 3142 is restricted. As a result, the lock member 3141 returns from the released position to the locked position.

When the slide guide 3134 is moved upward by the back-rear drive motor 3135 from this state, the transmission slider 3142 is restricted from moving upward as described above, so that the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142 The guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 separates upward, and only the slide guide 3134 moves upward. Then, the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 moving upward abuts from below on the left slider 3122 of the back rear movable decoration body 3120 in the lowered position, and the back rear movable decoration body 3120 via the left slider 3122. Will move upwards with the slide guide 3134 (see FIG. 137).

In this back-rear movable effect unit 3110, after the back-rear movable decoration 3120 is dropped, it is moved above the lower position by the slide guide 3134, and the back-rear movable decoration 3120 is between the standby position and the lower position. By appropriately changing the rotation direction of the back-rear drive motor 3135 while being positioned at, the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 can be arbitrarily moved in the vertical direction by the slide guide 3134 (see FIG. 137). ).

Then, the slide guide 3134 is moved upward by the back-rear drive motor 3135, and when the back-rear movable decorative body 3120, which is moving upward from the descending position together with the slide guide 3134, moves to a height near the standby position, The lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3120 abuts from below on the guide portion 3141d of the lock member 3141 in the locked position. From this state, when the lock protrusion 3122a (back-rear movable decorative body 3120) is further moved upward by the slide guide 3134, the guide portion 3141d of the lock member 3141 is slanted. A force to the left acts on the abutting portion.

Therefore, as the lock protrusion 3122a moves upward, the lock member 3141 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the front view around the bearing hole 3141b due to the leftward force acting on the guide portion 3141d. (See Figure 138). At this time, in the lock member 3141, the transmission protrusion 3141f protruding to the left from the base end portion of the main body 3141a moves downward due to the rotation in the counterclockwise direction, so that the transmission protrusion The lock member 3141 is counterclockwise against the urging force of the lock spring 3143 acting in the clockwise direction via the transmission pin 3142a of the transmission slider 3142 inserted into the transmission slot 3141g of the portion 3141f. Rotate to.

After that, when the lock protrusion 3122a moves further upward, the locking portion 3141c and the guide portion 3141d protruding to the right from the main body portion 3141a are locked by further rotation of the lock member 3141 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. It moves to the release position to the left of the protrusion 3122a, and the upper surface of the lock protrusion 3122a moves upward from the regulation portion 3141c. Then, when the lock protrusion 3122a moves further upward and the lower surface of the lock protrusion 3122a moves upward from the tip of the guide portion 3141d of the lock member 3141, the contact with the guide portion 3141d is released. As a result, the lock member 3141 is rotated in the front clockwise direction by the urging force of the lock spring 3143, and is in the locked position from the released position. When the lock member 3141 is rotated to the lock position, the lower surface of the lock protrusion 3122a is located above the upper surface of the regulation portion 3141c.

Then, the lock protrusion 3122a (back-rear movable decorative body 3120) is further moved upward by the slide guide 3134, and the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3155 on the upper side of the back-rear decoration effect effect unit 3150. Then, the drive of the back-rear drive motor 3135 is stopped, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is stopped at the retracted position. That is, the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 returns to the normal state.

In this way, when the slide guide 3134 is moved downward by the back-rear drive motor 3135, the lock member 3141 is rotated from the lock position to the release position via the transmission slider 3142, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 stands by. It can be freely dropped from the position to the descending position. As a result, it is possible to show the player a movable effect in which a large nata (back-rear movable decorative body 3120) straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction freely falls while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which the player is advantageous to the player occurs. It can make you think that it is, and you can raise the expectation for the game.

Next, the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150 of the back-rear effect unit 3100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 139 to 141 and the like. The back-rear decoration effect unit 3150 has a unit base 3151 having a square outer shape and a frame shape, and a transparent flat plate-shaped back second light guide plate attached to the front side of the unit base 3151 and closing the inside of the frame of the unit base 3151. The 3160 and the transparent frame-shaped back-rear decorative lens 3152 which is attached to the front side of the unit base 3151 in front of the back second light guide plate 3160 and is decorated in a shape like broken glass. Above the back second light guide plate 3160, the back rear upper decorative substrate 3153 attached between the unit base 3151 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 is provided.

Further, the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150 has two decorative body detection sensors 3154 that detect the detection piece of the left slider 3122 in the back-rear movable decoration body 3120 and two detection pieces of the slide guide 3134 of the back-rear movable mechanism 3130. It includes a slide detection sensor 3155 and a condenser lens 3156 arranged below the back second light guide plate 3160 and extending to the left and right.

Further, the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150 is attached between the unit base 3151 and the back-rear decorative lens 3152 on both the left and right outer sides of the back second light guide plate 3160, and faces the left and right both sides of the back second light guide plate 3160. Between the pair of left and right fifth pattern substrates 3171 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a capable of irradiating light are mounted, and the unit base 3151 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 below the back second light guide plate 3160. It includes a pair of sixth pattern substrates 3172 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3172a that are attached and capable of irradiating light toward the lower surface of the back second light guide plate 3160 are mounted.

The unit base 3151 of the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150 is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the unit frame 3131. The back-rear decorative lens 3152 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape is slightly smaller than the outer shape of the unit frame 3131. The unit frame 3131 has a transparent flat plate-shaped decorative lens portion that protrudes upward (inside) from the lower side and is formed in a shape such that the window glass is broken and glass fragments remain in the window frame. The inside of the frame-shaped back-rear decorative lens 3152 protrudes into the frame of the unit base 3151 when viewed from the front, and is formed in such a shape that the window glass is broken and glass fragments remain on the window frame. In the back-rear decorative lens 3152, the edge of the portion protruding inward is formed obliquely with respect to the front-rear direction.

The back-back upper decorative substrate 3153 is arranged in a row in the left-right direction, and a plurality of LEDs 3153a capable of irradiating light downward are mounted on the front surface. The back-rear-upper decorative substrate 3153 has the rear surface of the back-rear decorative lens 3152 in contact with the front surface, and a plurality of LEDs 3153a are formed on the back-rear decorative lens 3152 inward from the side surface side of the frame-shaped back-rear decorative lens 3152. It is mounted so that the inside is illuminated with light.

The decorative body detection sensor 3154 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the fifth pattern substrate 3171 on the left side so that the detection piece of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 located between the retracted position and the standby position can be detected. ing. The two slide detection sensors 3155 are the upper part of the front surface of the fifth pattern substrate 3171 on the left side and the slide guide 3134 so that the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 when the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is in the retracted position can be detected. Attached to the lower part of the front surface of the fifth pattern substrate 3171 on the left side so that the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 at the height at which the guide protrusion 3134b abuts on the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142 can be detected. Has been done.

The pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171 are mounted on the rear surface in a state where a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a are arranged in a row in the vertical direction. The pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction on the front surface, and a plurality of LEDs 3171b for illuminating and decorating the back-rear decorative lens 3152 are mounted. In the fifth pattern substrate 3171 on the left side, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a on the rear surface are mounted so as to be able to irradiate light toward the right, and a plurality of LEDs 3171b on the front surface illuminate the light toward the right. It is mounted so that it can be irradiated. The rear surface of the back-rear decorative lens 3152 is in contact with the front surface of the fifth pattern substrate 3171 on the left side, and a plurality of LEDs 3171b on the front surface are back-to-back from the side surface side of the frame-shaped back-rear decorative lens 3152. It is mounted so that the inside of the decorative lens 3152 is irradiated with light.

Further, in the fifth pattern substrate 3171 on the right side, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a on the rear surface are mounted so as to be able to irradiate light toward the left side, and a plurality of LEDs 3171b on the front surface are mounted toward the left side. It is mounted so that it can irradiate light. The rear surface of the back-rear decorative lens 3152 is in contact with the front surface of the fifth pattern substrate 3171 on the right side, and a plurality of LEDs 3171b on the front surface are backed inward from the side surface side of the frame-shaped back-rear decorative lens 3152. It is mounted so that the inside of the rear decorative lens 3152 is irradiated with light.

In the sixth pattern substrate 3172, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3172a are mounted on the rear surface so as to be able to irradiate light upward, and are arranged in rows in the left-right direction on the front surface to illuminate upward. A plurality of LEDs 3172b capable of irradiating the light are mounted. When the sixth pattern substrate 3172 is irradiated upward with light from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3172a on the rear surface, the sixth pattern substrate 3172 can be incident on the inside of the back second light guide plate 3160 via the condenser lens 3156. The rear surface of the back-rear decorative lens 3152 is in contact with the front surface of the sixth pattern substrate 3172, and the plurality of LEDs 3172b on the front surface are the back-rear decorative lenses from the side surface side of the frame-shaped back-rear decorative lens 3152 toward the inside. It is mounted so that the inside of the 3152 is illuminated with light.

With the above configuration, the back-rear decorative lens 3152 emits light from the LED 3153a of the back-rear upper decorative substrate 3153, the LED 3171b of the pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171, and the LED3172b of the sixth pattern substrate 3172. The light radiated to the lens can be reflected forward by the inclined portion of the edge protruding inward of the frame. As a result, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect as if the window glass is broken and the edges of the glass fragments remaining on the window frame are shining.

The back second light guide plate 3160 has a fifth pattern 3161 (see FIG. 140) formed by innumerable uneven fifth reflecting portions that reflect only light from the left-right direction forward, and light from the vertical direction. It is equipped with a sixth pattern 3162 (see FIG. 141) formed by a myriad of uneven sixth reflecting portions that reflect only forward. That is, when the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150 emits light from the light guide plate LED 3171a of the fifth pattern substrate 3171, the fifth pattern 3161 can be emitted and displayed, and the light guide plate LED 3172a of the sixth pattern substrate 3172 can be displayed. When the light is emitted, the sixth pattern 3162 can be emitted and displayed.

In the back second light guide plate 3160, the innumerable fifth reflecting portions forming the fifth pattern 3161 and the innumerable sixth reflecting portions forming the sixth pattern 3162 are each finely formed with irregularities. The light guide plate LED 3171a of the fifth pattern substrate 3171 and the light guide plate LED 3172a of the sixth pattern substrate 3172 appear transparent in a state where they are not emitted, and are displayed on the rear side effect display device 1600. It is possible to visually recognize the effect image and the like in good condition.

As shown in FIG. 140, the fifth pattern 3161 is a pattern having a guide (message) to the player consisting of the characters "Change!" In a pattern like a sandstorm as a whole. As shown in FIG. 141, the sixth pattern 3162 is a pattern in which broken pieces of glass are scattered. This sixth pattern 3162 has less scattered glass fragments than the third pattern 3211 of the back-to-back effect unit 3200, which will be described later.

As shown in the figure, the characters "Change!" In the fifth pattern 3161 are arranged in the center in the vertical direction. When only the characters are emitted, only the characters "Change!" Can be emitted and displayed. Alternatively, if the three light guide plate LEDs 3171a in the center in the vertical direction are turned off and the remaining light guide plate LEDs 3171a are made to emit light, the entire image can be displayed in a state in which the characters "Change!" Cannot be seen (difficult to see). ..

The LEDs mounted on the back-rear-upper decorative substrate 3153, the pair of fifth-pattern substrate 3171, and the sixth-pattern substrate 3172 in the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150 are all side-view type full-color LEDs. ..

In the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the back-rear upper decoration substrate 3153, the pair of the fifth pattern substrate 3171, and the sixth pattern substrate 3172 have the back and second plates. It is arranged parallel to the surface of the light guide plate 3160. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the dimensions of the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150 in the front-rear direction, and the fifth pattern 3161 and the sixth pattern 3162 of the back second light guide plate 3160, the back-rear decorative lens 3152, and the like are luminescently decorated. Can be made to.

Further, in the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150 of the present embodiment, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3172a for displaying the sixth pattern 3162 of the back second light guide plate 3160 by light emission are arranged only on the lower side of the back second light guide plate 3160. Although the number is smaller than that of the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a that emit and display the fifth pattern 3161, the condenser lens 3156 is arranged between the light guide plate LED 3172a and the back second light guide plate 3160. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the light spreading from the light guide plate LED 3172a from being condensed and unnecessarily diffused, and even if the number is small, the sixth pattern 3162 can be emitted and displayed with the optimum brightness. Can be done.

[5-9-2. Behind the scenes production unit]
Next, the back middle effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 144 and the like. FIG. 142 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back middle effect unit of the back unit disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 142 (b) disassembles the back middle effect unit of the back unit for each main member. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 143 is a front view showing a state in which the third pattern is light-emitting decorated in the back-middle effect unit, and FIG. 144 is a front view showing a state in which the fourth pattern is light-emitting-decorated in the back-middle effect unit.

The back-middle effect unit 3200 is attached to the front of the back-rear effect unit 3100 inside the back box 3010. The back middle effect unit 3200 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The back middle effect unit 3200 has a unit base 3201 having a square outer shape and a frame shape, and a transparent flat plate-shaped back first light guide plate 3210 which is attached to the front side of the unit base 3201 and closes the inside of the frame of the unit base 3201. The transparent frame-shaped back middle decorative lens 3202, which is attached to the front side of the unit base 3201 in front of the back first light guide plate 3210 and is decorated in a shape that makes the glass break, and the back. The back middle left decorative substrate 3203 attached between the unit base 3201 and the back middle decorative lens 3202 on the left side of the first light guide plate 3210, and the back middle left decorative substrate 3203 are arranged on the right side of the back first light guide plate 3210 and are arranged vertically. It is equipped with an extended condenser lens 3204.

Further, the back middle effect unit 3200 is mounted between the unit base 3201 and the back middle decorative lens 3202 on the right outer side of the back first light guide plate 3210, and emits light toward the right side surface of the back first light guide plate 3210. The third pattern substrate 3221 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3221a that can be irradiated are mounted, and the unit base 3201 and the back middle decorative lens 3202 are mounted on both the upper and lower outer sides of the back first light guide plate 3210. A pair of upper and lower fourth pattern substrates 3222 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3222a capable of irradiating light toward both upper and lower surfaces of the back first light guide plate 3210 are provided.

The unit base 3201 of the back-middle effect unit 3200 is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the unit frame 3131 of the back-rear effect unit 3100. The unit base 3201 has a transparent flat plate-shaped decorative lens portion that protrudes upward (inside) from the lower side and is formed in a shape such that the window glass is broken and glass fragments remain in the window frame. The back middle decorative lens 3202 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape is slightly smaller than the outer shape of the unit base 3201. The inside of the frame-shaped back middle decorative lens 3202 projects into the frame of the unit base 3201 when viewed from the front, and is formed in a shape such that the window glass is broken and glass fragments remain on the window frame. In the back middle decorative lens 3202, the edge of the portion protruding inward is formed obliquely with respect to the front-rear direction.

The back middle left decorative substrate 3203 is arranged in a row in the vertical direction, and a plurality of LEDs 3203a capable of irradiating light toward the right are mounted on the front surface. The rear surface of the back center decorative lens 3202 is in contact with the front surface of the back center left decorative substrate 3203, and the plurality of LEDs 3203a on the front surface are the back center decorative lenses from the side surface side of the frame-shaped back center decorative lens 3202 toward the inside. It is mounted so that the inside of the 3202 is illuminated with light.

A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3221a are mounted on the rear surface of the third pattern substrate 3221 so as to be able to irradiate light toward the left, and are arranged in a row in the vertical direction on the front surface so as to face to the left. A plurality of LEDs 3221b capable of irradiating light are mounted. When the third pattern substrate 3221 is irradiated with light to the left from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3221a on the rear surface, the third pattern substrate 3221 can be incident on the inside of the back first light guide plate 3210 via the condenser lens 3204. The rear surface of the back middle decorative lens 3202 is in contact with the front surface of the third pattern substrate 3221, and the plurality of LEDs 3221b on the front surface are the back middle decorative lens from the side surface side of the frame-shaped back middle decorative lens 3202. It is mounted so that the inside of the 3202 is illuminated with light.

A pair of fourth pattern substrate 3222s are mounted on the rear surface in a state where a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3222a are arranged in a row in the left-right direction. The pair of fourth pattern substrates 3222 are arranged in rows in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a plurality of LEDs 3222b for light-emitting decoration of the back middle decorative lens 3202 are mounted. On the upper fourth pattern substrate 3222, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3222a on the rear surface are mounted so as to be able to irradiate light downward, and a plurality of LEDs 3222b on the front surface are capable of irradiating light downward. It is implemented in. The rear surface of the back middle decorative lens 3202 is in contact with the front surface of the upper fourth pattern substrate 3222, and a plurality of LEDs 3222b on the front surface are back inside from the side surface side of the frame-shaped back middle decorative lens 3202. It is mounted so that the inside of the decorative lens 3202 is irradiated with light.

Further, on the lower fourth pattern substrate 3222, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3222a on the rear surface are mounted so as to be able to irradiate light upward, and a plurality of LEDs 3222b on the front surface illuminate upward. Is mounted so that it can be irradiated. The rear surface of the back middle decorative lens 3202 is in contact with the front surface of the lower fourth pattern substrate 3222, and a plurality of LEDs 3222b on the front surface are directed from the side surface side of the frame-shaped back middle decorative lens 3202 toward the inside. It is mounted so that the inside of the decorative lens 3202 in the back is illuminated with light.

With the above configuration, the back middle decorative lens 3202 emits light from the LED 3203a of the back middle left decorative substrate 3203, the LED 3221b of the third pattern substrate 3221, and the LED 3222b of the pair of fourth pattern substrates 3222. The light radiated to the lens can be reflected forward by the inclined portion of the edge protruding inward of the frame. As a result, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect as if the window glass is broken and the edges of the glass fragments remaining on the window frame are shining.

The back first light guide plate 3210 has a third pattern 3211 (see FIG. 143) formed by innumerable uneven third reflecting portions that reflect only light from the left-right direction forward, and light from the vertical direction. It is provided with a fourth pattern 3212 (see FIG. 144) formed by a myriad of concave and convex fourth reflecting portions that reflect only forward. That is, when the back middle effect unit 3200 emits light from the light guide plate LED 3221a of the third pattern substrate 3221, the third pattern 3211 can be emitted and displayed, and the light guide plate LED 3222a of the fourth pattern substrate 3222 emits light. Then, the fourth pattern 3212 can be displayed by light emission.

In the back first light guide plate 3210, innumerable third reflecting portions forming the third pattern 3211 and innumerable fourth reflecting portions forming the fourth pattern 3212 are formed with fine irregularities. The LED 3221a for the light guide plate of the third pattern substrate 3221 and the LED 3222a for the light guide plate of the fourth pattern substrate 3222 look transparent when they are not emitting light, and the back side of the back side effect unit 3100. The effect image displayed on the rear movable decorative body 3120 and the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized in good condition.

As shown in FIG. 143, the third pattern 3211 is a pattern in which the glass is split into a plurality of fragments after the glass has radial and concentric cracks. In the third pattern 3211, more scattered glass fragments are drawn as compared with the sixth pattern 3162 of the back second light guide plate 3160 in the back rear decoration effect unit 3150. As shown in FIG. 144, the fourth pattern 3212 is a pattern in which a plurality of light streaks extend diagonally upward or diagonally downward.

As shown in FIG. 144, the fourth pattern 3212 is formed so that the diagonally extending streaks correspond to the LED 3222a for each light guide plate mounted on the fourth pattern substrate 3222 on both the upper and lower sides. That is, when one light guide plate LED 3222a is made to emit light, the center of the back first light guide plate 3210 in the vertical direction starts from the portion of the upper side or the lower side of the back first light guide plate 3210 closest to the light emitting light guide plate LED 3222a. Two light streaks (V-shaped light streaks) that extend diagonally so as to separate from each other toward the direction of light are luminescently decorated.

Since the fourth pattern 3212 becomes farther from the light guide plate LED 3222a toward the center of the back first light guide plate 3210 in the vertical direction, the brightness of the V-shaped light streaks is that of the back first light guide plate 3210. It gets darker toward the center in the vertical direction. As a result, when the fourth pattern 3212 is viewed from the front (player side), the light streaks appear to extend backward toward the center of the back first light guide plate 3210 in the vertical direction, and the light is three-dimensional. It is possible to make the illusion that the light is radiated to the back, and it is possible to enjoy the light emission effect by the back first light guide plate 3210.

The LEDs mounted on the back middle left decorative substrate 3203, the third pattern substrate 3221, and the pair of fourth pattern boards 3222 in the back middle effect unit 3200 are all side view type full-color LEDs.

In the back middle effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the back middle left decorative substrate 3203, the third pattern substrate 3221, and the pair of fourth pattern substrates 3222 each guide the back surface first. It is arranged parallel to the surface of the light plate 3210. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the back-middle effect unit 3200, and the third pattern 3211 and the fourth pattern 3212 of the back first light guide plate 3210, the back-middle decorative lens 3202, and the like are light-emitting and decorated. be able to.

Further, in the back middle effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3221a for displaying the third pattern 3211 of the back first light guide plate 3210 by light emission are arranged only on the right side of the back first light guide plate 3210. Although the number is smaller than that of the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3222a that emit and display the fourth pattern 3212, the condenser lens 3204 is arranged between the light guide plate LED 3221a and the back first light guide plate 3210. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the light spreading from the light guide plate LED 3221a from being condensed and unnecessarily diffused, and even if the number is small, the third pattern 3211 can be emitted and displayed with the optimum brightness. can.

[5-9-3. Back right production unit]
Next, the back right effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 to 150. FIG. 145 is a front view of the back right effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 146 (a) is a perspective view of the back right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 146 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the back right effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 147 is a front view of the back right effect unit that emphasizes the back right movable mechanism in a normal state where the tip of the back right movable decoration body is rotated upward and the bearing slider is located at the rising end. Is. FIG. 148 is a front view of the back right effect unit showing a state in which the bearing slider is located at the descending end with the back right movable decoration as it is from the state of FIG. 147. FIG. 149 is a front view of the back right effect unit showing a state in which the tip of the back right movable decorative body is rotated downward from the state of FIG. 148. FIG. 150 is a front view of the back right effect unit showing a state in which the bearing slider is located at the rising end with the back right movable decorative body as it is from the state of FIG. 149.

The back right effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the upper right portion of the front surface of the back middle effect unit 3200 in the back box 3010. The back right effect unit 3300 includes a back right movable effect unit 3310 attached to the front of the back middle effect unit 3200 and a back front right decorative body unit 3350 attached to the front of the back right movable effect unit 3310. I have.

First, the back right movable effect unit 3310 of the back right effect unit 3300 will be described. The back right movable production unit 3310 extends with a length shorter than the total width in the left-right direction of the production display device 1600, and is formed in a shape that imitates Nata as an item in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. It includes a movable decorative body 3320 and a back right movable mechanism 3330 that is rotatably attached around the base end side of the back right movable decorative body 3320 and is movably attached in the vertical direction.

The back right movable decorative body 3320 extends in the left-right direction and is attached to the rear side of the decorative body main body 3321 which has a flat plate-like shape and has the same outer shape as the decorative body 3321. A transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body base 3322, and a back right movable decorative body decorative board 3323 mounted between the decorative body base 3322 and the decorative body main body 3321 and having a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the front and rear surfaces (Fig.) 145) and.

The decorative body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is formed in a shape imitating a machete, and the left end side is the tip of the machete and the lower side is the blade of the machete in front view. The decorative body 3321 has a transparent lower half portion in the vertical direction. Further, the decorative body 3321 is formed with a crack-like decoration that spreads radially around the central portion in the vertical direction near the tip.

The back right movable decorative body 3320 has a shaft hole 3324 penetrating in the front-rear direction on the base end side, which is the right end side in the front view of the decorative body main body 3321 and the decorative body base 3322, and a lower side on the left side of the shaft hole 3324. It is provided with a columnar decorative body-side link pin 3325 that projects rearward in the vicinity.

The back right movable decorative body decorative substrate 3323 is provided with a plurality of central LEDs 3323a that irradiate light toward the front at a portion on the front surface behind the central portion of the crack pattern that spreads radially on the decorative body main body 3321. The central LED 3323a is a high brightness LED. Further, the back right movable decorative body decorative substrate 3323 is provided with a plurality of peripheral LEDs 3323b that irradiate light on the front surface and the rear surface in a direction along the surface of the substrate.

The back right movable decorative body 3320 can be decorated by emitting light so that the central portion of the crack pattern of the decorative body main body 3321 shines by appropriately emitting light from the central LED 3323a of the back right movable decorative body decorative substrate 3323. By emitting light from the peripheral LED 3323b of the decorative body decorative substrate 3323, the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3321 and the crack pattern can be light-emitting and decorated.

The back right movable mechanism 3330 of the back right movable effect unit 3310 extends vertically and is attached to the upper right part of the front surface of the back middle effect unit 3200, and the unit base 3331 has a total height of about 3/4 from the bottom. A bearing that is movably mounted vertically at a height site and has a columnar bearing pin 3332a that projects in the front-rear direction and is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 3324 of the back right movable decoration 3320. The slider 3332 and the like are provided.

Further, the back right movable mechanism 3330 has a back right drive motor 3333 attached to the upper part of the unit base 3331 with the rotation shaft facing in the front-rear direction, and a spur gear shape attached to the rotation shaft of the back right drive motor 3333. 3334, a transmission protrusion 3335a that meshes with the motor gear 3334 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3331 and protrudes in the front-rear direction, and a detection piece (not shown) protruding in the front-rear direction. The spur gear-shaped link drive gear 3335 and the like are provided.

Further, the back right movable mechanism 3330 is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at a portion diagonally lower right in the front view of the link drive gear 3335 in the unit base 3331, and is mounted in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. A transmission link gear 3336 having a transmission arm 3336a extending and abutting on the transmission protrusion 3335a of the link drive gear 3335, and a transmission gear portion 3336b extending in an arc shape about a rotation axis, and a unit. A spur gear-like first spur gear that is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at a portion below the rotation shaft of the transmission link gear 3336 in the base 3331 and meshes with the transmission gear portion 3336b of the transmission link gear 3336. It includes a one-gear portion 3337a and a two-stage gear 3337 having a spur gear-shaped second gear portion 3337b that rotates integrally with the first gear portion 3337a and has a diameter larger than that of the first gear portion 3337a. ..

Further, the back right movable mechanism 3330 is slidably attached to the unit base 3331 in the vertical direction and is formed on the rack main body 3338a and the rack main body 3338a extending vertically, and is formed on the second gear portion 3337b of the two-stage gear 3337. A slide rack 3338 having a rack gear portion 3338b that meshes with and extends linearly in the vertical direction, and a columnar movable mechanism side link pin 3338c that protrudes in the front-rear direction at the lower part of the rack body 3338a. A link arm that extends up and down, and the upper end side is rotatably inserted with the decorative body side link pin 3325 of the back right movable decorative body 3320, and the lower end side is rotatably inserted with the movable mechanism side link pin 3338c of the slide rack 3338. It is equipped with 3339.

Further, the back right movable mechanism 3330 is attached to the unit base 3331, and is movable on the back right by detecting the impact absorbing rubber 3340 that can come into contact with the back right movable decorative body 3320 and the detection piece of the link drive gear 3335. It is equipped with two movable position detection sensors (not shown) that detect the position of the decorative body 3320.

Subsequently, the operation of the back right movable effect unit 3310 by the back right movable mechanism 3330 will be described. In the back right movable effect unit 3310, as shown in FIG. 147, in the normal state, the bearing slider 3332 and the slide rack 3338 of the back right movable mechanism 3330 are located at the rising ends, and the bearing pin 3332a of the bearing slider 3332 a. The back right movable decorative body 3320 to which the base end side is rotatably attached is inclined so that the tip end side is located above the base end side (initial state). Further, in this state, in the back right movable decorative body 3320, the center of the decorative body side link pin 3325 is located slightly above the center of the shaft hole 3324, and the detection piece of the link drive gear 3335 is located. It is detected by the movable position detection sensor of one eye.

In this normal state, the transmission protrusion 3335a of the link drive gear 3335 is located slightly above the center of rotation of the link drive gear 3335 on the right side of the front view, and the transmission link gear 3336 is transmitted to the transmission protrusion 3335a. The arm 3336a is in contact with the arm from the right side. More specifically, with respect to the straight line connecting the rotation center point of the link drive gear 3335 and the contact point between the transmission protrusion 3335a and the transmission arm 3336a, the rotation center point of the transmission link gear 3336, the transmission protrusion 3335a and the transmission arm The straight line connecting the contact point with the 3336a is orthogonal. As a result, the force acting on the transmission protrusion 3335a from the transmission arm 3336a passes through the rotation center of the link drive gear 3335. Therefore, even if a force acts on the transmission protrusion 3335a from the transmission arm 3336a, the link drive gear 3335 rotates. The transmission link gear 3336 does not rotate in the direction in which the transmission arm 3336a moves to the left in the front view (counterclockwise direction in the front view). That is, under normal conditions, the link drive gear 3335 regulates (locks) the rotation of the transmission link gear 3336 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

By the way, in the bearing slider 3332, the bearing pin 3332a is inserted into the shaft hole 3324 on the base end side of the back right movable decoration body 3320, so that the load of the back right movable decoration body 3320 acts via the bearing pin 3332a. doing. Since the bearing slider 3332 is located at the rising end in the normal state, a force that causes the bearing slider 3332 to move downward is exerted by the load of the back right movable decorative body 3320.

On the other hand, in the back right movable decorative body 3320, since the bearing pin 3332a of the bearing slider 3332 is inserted through the shaft hole 3324 on the base end side, the shaft hole 3324 (bearing pin 3332a) is due to the weight of the back right movable decorative body 3320. ), And a force is acting to rotate in the direction in which the tip side moves downward (counterclockwise in front view). Then, a force that tends to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back right movable decorative body 3320 acts on the movable mechanism side link pin 3338c from the decorative body side link pin 3325 via the link arm 3339. That is, the force that causes the back-right movable decoration body 3320 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to its own weight exerts a force that causes the slide rack 3338 to move downward via the link arm 3339.

The force for moving the slide rack 3338 downward is transmitted by the rack gear portion 3338b of the slide rack 3338 to the two-stage gear 3337 via the second gear portion 3337b meshing with the rack gear portion 3338b, and is transmitted to the two-stage gear 3337. It acts to rotate the gear 3337 in the clockwise direction in the front view. In this two-stage gear 3337, since the first gear portion 3337a meshes with the transmission gear portion 3336b of the transmission link gear 3336, the force acting to rotate the two-stage gear 3337 in the clockwise direction is exerted. The transmission link gear 3336 acts to rotate in the counterclockwise direction via the transmission gear portion 3336b. That is, the transmission link gear 3336 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the force that the back right movable decorative body 3320 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to its own weight.

Then, in a normal state, the transmission link gear 3336 meshes with the transmission gear portion 3336b of the transmission link gear 3336 because the rotation of the transmission link gear 3336 in the counterclockwise direction is locked by the link drive gear 3335 as described above. The two-stage gear 3337 is not rotated, and the slide rack 3338 is not moved downward by the rack gear portion 3338b that meshes with the second gear portion 3337b of the two-stage gear 3337.

As described above, since the downward movement of the slide rack 3338 is restricted, the link arm 3339 to which the lower end is attached to the slide rack 3338 does not move downward as a whole. Therefore, the back right movable decorative body 3320 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction so that the tip side moves downward with the upper end side (decorative body side link pin 3325) of the link arm 3339 as the center, but the back right Since the bearing slider 3332 attached to the base end side of the movable decorative body 3320 is located at the rising end, rotation in the counterclockwise direction around the decorative body side link pin 3325 is restricted, and the back right. The movable decorative body 3320 is maintained in an oblique state in which the tip end side is located above the base end side.

In this normal state, when the link drive gear 3335 is rotated in the front view clockwise direction by the back right drive motor 3333 via the motor gear 3334, the transmission projection 3335a of the link drive gear 3335 is moved to the left and downward. It will revolve in the direction of movement. Then, the transmission protrusion 3335a revolves in the clockwise direction to change the position, so that the transmission link gear 3336, in which a force acts in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back right movable decorative body 3320, transmits. As the protrusion 3335a slides with respect to the transmission arm 3336a, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction while changing the portion where the transmission arm 3336a and the transmission protrusion 3335a are in contact with each other (see FIG. 148). ).

When the transmission link gear 3336 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the slide rack 3338 moves downward via the two-stage gear 3337, and the link arm 3339 also moves downward together with the slide rack 3338. Will be done. Since the load of the back right movable decoration 3320 is supported by the bearing slider 3332 attached to the base end side, when the link arm 3339 moves downward, the bearing slider 3332 also passes through the back right movable decoration 3320. It will move downward together.

As a result, the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves downward from the normal state (initial state) with its tip side raised until the bearing slider 3332 reaches the descending end. .. That is, in the state where the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves downward from the initial state and the bearing slider 3332 reaches the descending end (first state), the tip end side thereof is higher than the base end side as in the initial state. It is in an oblique state.

Then, after the bearing slider 3332 reaches the descending end, when the link drive gear 3335 is further rotated in the front view clockwise direction by the back right drive motor 3333, the slide rack is passed through the transmission link gear 3336 and the two-stage gear 3337. The 3338 will move further downward. By moving the slide rack 3338 downward, the decorative body side link pin 3325 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is pulled downward via the link arm 3339, and the back right movable decorative body 3320 is the axis on the base end side. With the hole 3324 as the center, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction so that the tip side moves downward (see FIG. 149).

When the link drive gear 3335 is continuously rotated in the clockwise direction by the back right drive motor 3333, the back right movable decoration body 3320 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction around the shaft hole 3324, and the lower surface thereof is the unit. By abutting on the shock absorbing rubber 3340 attached to the base 3331, further rotation in the counterclockwise direction is restricted, and the tip side is in an oblique state below the base end side (second). In the state), the back right movable decorative body 3320 stops. At this time, the detection piece of the link drive gear 3335 is detected by the second movable position detection sensor, and the drive of the back right drive motor 3333 is stopped based on the detection by the second movable position detection sensor.

After the back right movable decorative body 3320 is in the second state, the back right drive motor 3333 rotates the link drive gear 3335 in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, which is the opposite direction to the above. When the transmission protrusion 3335a revolves in the counterclockwise direction together with the link drive gear 3335, the transmission arm 3336a in contact with the transmission protrusion 3335a causes the transmission link gear 3336 to rotate in the clockwise direction, and the two-stage gear 3337 The slide rack 3338 will move upward via the above.

When the slide rack 3338 moves upward from the descending end, the back right movable decoration 3320 is pressed upward by the link arm 3339, and the back right movable decoration 3320 moves upward together with the bearing slider 3332. It becomes. That is, the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves upward while the tip side remains low until the bearing slider 3332 reaches the rising end. Therefore, the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves upward together with the bearing slider 3332 from the second state, and in the state where the bearing slider 3332 reaches the rising end (third state), the same as in the second state. The tip side is in an oblique state below the base end side (see FIG. 150).

Then, when the link drive gear 3335 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back right drive motor 3333, the transmission link gear 3336 is further rotated in the clockwise direction and the slide rack 3338 is moved upward via the two-stage gear 3337. The link arm 3339 attached to the slide rack 3338 presses the link pin 3325 on the decorative body side of the back right movable decorative body 3320 upward, and the back right movable decorative body 3320 fills the shaft hole 3324 on the base end side. It will rotate clockwise around the center.

After that, when the detection piece of the link drive gear 3335 rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back right drive motor 3333 is detected by the first movable position detection sensor, the back right drive motor 3333 is driven. It is stopped and the rotation of the link drive gear 3335 is stopped. In this state, the bearing slider 3332 and the slide rack 3338 of the back right movable mechanism 3330 are located at the rising end, and the back right movable decorative body 3320 to which the base end side is rotatably attached to the bearing pin 3332a of the bearing slider 3332 is provided. , The tip side is inclined so as to be located above the base end side. That is, the back right movable decorative body 3320 has returned to the normal state (initial state).

In a normal state, when the back right drive motor 3333 rotates in the direction opposite to the above (clockwise direction in front view), the link drive gear 3335 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, so that the transmission protrusion 3335a Revolves so that the NS. As a result, the back right movable decorative body 3320 changes (moves) from the initial state to the second state at once.

When the back right movable decorative body 3320 is in the second state, as shown in FIG. 149, the transmission arm 3336a of the transmission link gear 3336 is located within the revolution range of the transmission protrusion 3335a in the link drive gear 3335, so that the back side is When the link drive gear 3335 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the right drive motor 3333, the revolving transmission projection 3335a comes into contact with the transmission arm 3336a from below. Then, when the transmission protrusion 3335a revolves in the counterclockwise direction, the transmission link gear 3336 is rotated in the clockwise direction via the transmission arm 3336a by the transmission protrusion 3335a. The movable decorative body 3320 returns from the second state to the initial state through the third state.

In this way, by driving the back right drive motor 3333, the back right movable decoration 3320 is rotated around the shaft hole 3324 on the base end side, so that the back right movable decoration 3320 imitates the swing. It is possible to show the player a movable effect that looks like it has been lowered. Further, since the movement of moving the back right movable decorative body 3320 from the initial state to the second state via the first state and the movement of returning from the second state to the initial state through the third state are different. , It is possible to show a plurality of movements to the player, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

Further, when the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves from the initial state to the second state in which the nata is swung down, the base end side (shaft hole 3324) having the rotation center is moved downward by the bearing slider 3332. Therefore, as compared with the case where the base end side is not moved downward, more back right movable decorations 3320 can be made to appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600, and the back right movable decorations 3320 stand out. be able to. Further, when the back right movable decoration body 3320 is moved to the position in the initial state, the base end side where the rotation center is located is moved upward by the bearing slider 3332, so that the rotation center of the back right movable decoration body 3320 By moving to the upper side of the effect display device 1600 in the front view, it becomes difficult for the back right movable decorative body 3320 in the initial state to block the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a display area that can be visually recognized well can be obtained. It can be made wider and the player can enjoy the production image more.

Next, the back front right decorative body unit 3350 of the back right effect unit 3300 will be described. The back front right decorative body unit 3350 is attached to the front of the unit base 3331 of the back right movable mechanism 3330 in front of the back right movable decorative body 3320, and has a flat plate-shaped decorative body base 3351 extending vertically and decoration. A transparent flat plate-shaped back front right decorative body 3352 attached to the front surface of the body base 3351 and formed in a shape like broken glass, and attached between the back front right decorative body 3352 and the decorative body base 3351. It is attached to the back front right decorative board 3353 (see FIG. 145) on which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of irradiating light to the left are mounted on the front surface, and the lower rear surface of the back front right decorative body 3352. It is equipped with a magnetic sensor 3003.

The back front right decorative body 3352 extends up and down in an arc shape so as to be located to the left as it goes upward. The front right decorative body 3352 has a jagged shape on the left side as if the glass is broken, and a cracked decoration is formed on the front surface. The back front right decorative body unit 3350 can illuminate the left edge and the crack pattern by emitting the LED mounted on the back front right decorative substrate 3353.

[5-9-4. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the back-up effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. The back-up effect unit 3400 is attached to the upper left side of the front surface of the back-inside effect unit 3200 in the back box 3010. The back-up effect unit 3400 is formed in a shape that imitates Nata as an item in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and extends in the left-right direction. It is equipped with a back-up movable mechanism 3420 that is rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the base end side, which is a side, and is attached to the front surface of the back-middle effect unit 3200. The back-up movable decoration body 3410 of the back-up effect unit 3400 is arranged in front of the back-back movable decoration body 3120 and behind the back-right movable decoration body 3320.

The movable decorative body 3410 on the back side is attached to the rear side of the decorative body main body 3411, which is a flat plate-shaped decorative body 3411 extending in the left-right direction and having the same outer shape as the decorative body main body 3411. A transparent flat plate-shaped decorative base 3412, a movable decorative substrate 3413 on the back surface mounted between the decorative base 3412 and the decorative main body 3411 and having a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the rear surface, and a decorative body. A cylindrical shaft pin (not shown) protruding rearward from the rear surface on the base end side of the base 3412, and a spur gear-shaped decorative gear that rotates integrally with the decorative base 3412 and is centered on the shaft pin (not shown). Omitted) and.

The decorative body 3411 of the back-up movable decorative body 3410 is formed in a shape like a combination of broken glass so as to imitate a machete, and the upper side and the lower side are formed in a jagged shape. The decorative body 3411 is entirely transparent. In the decorative body 3411, the peripheral surfaces of the upper and lower sides of the jagged edges are inclined so that the rear side protrudes from the front side, and the front side is formed with a dented decoration in a crack pattern.

The decorative body base 3412 has an outer shape formed in the same shape as the decorative body main body 3411, and the peripheral surfaces of the upper side and the lower side are inclined so as to be positioned forward toward the end side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the back-up movable decorative body decorative substrate 3413 so as to be able to irradiate light in a direction along the surface of the decorative body base 3412. The back-up movable decoration body 3410 can illuminate and decorate the peripheral edge of the decoration body main body 3411 by emitting the LED of the back-up movable decoration body decoration substrate 3413.

The back-up movable mechanism 3420 is attached to the front surface of the back-up middle effect unit 3200 and the unit base 3421 to which the shaft pin of the back-up movable decoration body 3410 is rotatably attached, and the rotation shaft which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3421. The back-up drive motor 3422 protruding rearward and the transmission gear that meshes with the decorative gear of the back-up movable decorative body 3410 while the rotation from the back-up drive motor 3422 is transmitted to rotate (not shown). And have.

In the normal state, the back-up effect unit 3400 is in a retracted position in which the back-up movable decoration body 3410 extends horizontally, and the back-up movable decoration is formed by rotating the transmission gear by the back-up drive motor 3422. The body 3410 can be in a state of an appearance position in which the tip side, which is the right end side thereof, is located below the base end side and extends diagonally.

[5-9-5. Backside production unit]
Next, the underside effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. The underside effect unit 3500 is mounted in the back box 3010 at the center of the lower part of the front surface of the underside effect unit 3200 in the left-right direction. The under-back effect unit 3500 is a movable under-back decorative body 3510 that imitates a flower having a plurality of petals, and a movable under-back effect unit 3200 that is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the under-back effect unit 3200 and moves the under-back movable decorative body 3510 in the vertical direction. It is equipped with a mechanism 3520.

The lower back movable decorative body 3510 is mounted with a decorative body body 3511 which is three-dimensionally formed and has a flower shape having a plurality of petals, and a plurality of full-color LEDs for luminescent decoration of the decorative body body 3511. It is provided with a lower movable decorative body decorative substrate 3512. The lower back movable decorative body 3510 is arranged in front of the back right movable decorative body 3320.

The under-back movable mechanism 3520 is attached to the front surface of the under-back effect unit 3200, and is attached to the lower part of the decorative body body 3511 of the under-back movable decorative body 3510 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. The under-back drive motor 3522, which is attached to the rear surface and has a rotating shaft protruding forward, and the under-back drive motor 3522 revolve around the axis extending in the front-rear direction to move the decorative body 3511 in the vertical direction. It is equipped with an elevating drive gear (not shown) having a drive pin.

In the normal state, the underside effect unit 3500 is in a state in which the underside movable decorative body 3510 is in the most lowered position, and the revolving drive pin of the up / down drive gear is located at the bottom dead center. In this state, when the lower back drive motor 3522 rotates the elevating drive gear to revolve the drive pin, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 rises together with the upward movement of the revolving drive pin. Then, when the drive pin reaches the top dead center, the drive of the underside drive motor 3522 is stopped, and the rotation of the elevating drive gear (revolution of the drive pin) is stopped. As a result, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is in the raised position where it has moved most upward.

[5-9-6. Back front production unit]
Next, the back front effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. The back front effect unit 3600 is formed in a C shape along the inner shape of the game area 5a, and is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. The front-back effect unit 3600 is formed in a substantially C-shape in front view, the outer periphery is formed so as to follow the inner shape of the game area 5a, and the inner circumference is left with debris on the window frame. A transparent flat plate-shaped back front decorative body 3601 formed in a jagged shape like broken glass, and a flat plate-shaped decorative body base 3602 attached to the rear side of the back front decorative body 3601. , Which is attached between the decorative body base 3602 and the back front decorative body 3601 and includes a back front decorative substrate 3603 for emitting and decorating the back front decorative body 3601.

The back front effect unit 3600 guides the game ball B, which is received by the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002 of the front unit 2000 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, downward and discharges it onto the substrate holder 1200. It is equipped with a taxiway (not shown). Further, the back front effect unit 3600 has a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 and a first starting port for detecting the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. A sensor 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects magnetism acting in the game area 5a are attached.

In the back front decoration body 3601 of the back front effect unit 3600, the inner peripheral surface is inclined so that the rear side protrudes from the front side, and the front side is formed with a dented decoration in a crack pattern. .. The back front decorative substrate 3603 is composed of a back front upper decorative substrate 3603a, a back front left decorative substrate 3603b, and a back front lower decorative substrate 3603c (see FIG. 127). A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the back front decorative substrate 3603 so as to face the center side of the C-shape. The back-front effect unit 3600 can illuminate the inner peripheral surface of the back-front decorative body 3601 and the crack pattern by emitting light of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-front decorative substrate 3603.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, the main movable effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 159 and the like. FIG. 151 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the back-rear movable decorative body of the back-rear effect unit in the back unit is moved from the retracted position to the standby position. FIG. 152 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the rear-back movable decorative body is dropped from the state of FIG. 151 to a descending position. FIG. 153 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear-rear movable decorative body is moved in the vertical direction between the standby position and the descending position by the slide guide from the state of FIG. 152. FIG. 154 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the back right movable decorative body of the back right effect unit in the back unit is moved from the initial state to the first state. FIG. 155 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back right movable decorative body is moved from the state of FIG. 154 to the second state. FIG. 156 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back right movable decorative body is moved from the state of FIG. 155 to the third state.

FIG. 157 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-up movable decorative body of the back-up effect unit in the back unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. FIG. 158 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the under-back movable decorative body of the under-back effect unit in the back unit is moved from a descending position to an ascending position. In FIG. 159, the back-rear movable decoration of the back-rear effect unit in the back unit is moved to the descending position, the back-right movable decoration of the back-right effect unit is in the second state, and the back-up movable decoration of the back-up effect unit appears. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which moved the movable decorative body under the back of a back-down effect unit to a position, and by moving it to an ascending position.

In the game board 5, the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the start port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the side slope 2300, the center accessory 2500, etc., which divide the rear end of the game area 5a, are substantially as a whole. Since it is formed transparently, under normal conditions, as shown in FIG. 114, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100, the back unit 3000, through them. The back front right decorative body 3352 of the back right effect unit 3300, the back front decorative body 3601 of the back front effect unit 3600, and the like can be satisfactorily visually recognized.

In this normal state, the back right movable decoration body 3320 of the back right effect unit 3300 is located in the initial state, and is located below the inside of the C-shaped back front decoration body 3601. The club is facing forward. Further, the back-up movable decoration body 3410 of the back-up effect unit 3400, which is arranged behind the back-right movable decoration body 3320, is in the retracted position and is located below the back-right movable decoration body 3320. A part of the lower part of the evacuation is facing forward.

Further, the back-rear movable decoration 3120 of the back-rear effect unit 3100 arranged behind the back-up movable decoration 3410 is in the retracted position, and is located below the back-up movable decoration 3410. A small part of the tip that imitates the machete is facing forward. That is, under normal conditions, the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is almost invisible. Further, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 of the lower back effect unit 3500 is in a descending position, and a part of the portion located above the inside of the C-shaped back front decorative body 3601 is formed. Facing forward.

The game board 5 produces a back-to-back effect of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The back-right movable effect unit 3110 of the unit 3100, the back-right movable effect unit 3310 of the back-right effect unit 3300, the back-up effect unit 3400, and the back-bottom effect unit 3500 perform a predetermined movable effect.

Specifically, as a movable effect using the back-rear movable effect unit 3110 in the back-rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 151, the back-rear drive motor 3135 is driven via the slide guide 3134. The large back-rear movable decorative body 3120 extending in the left-right direction so as to straddle the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is placed in a normal state (with the retracted position) and the lock protrusion 3122a is a restricting portion 3141c of the lock member 3141. It is reciprocated in the vertical direction between the state of the standby position that abuts on the surface and the state of the standby position. In this movable effect, most of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 cannot be seen well from the player side, so it is possible to make something feel as if something is shaking up and down at the upper part of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. It can make the player feel that something will happen.

Then, the slide guide 3134 is moved downward by the back-rear drive motor 3135 to come into contact with the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142, and then the release contact portion 3142b is pressed downward by the slide guide 3134. , The lock member 3141 is rotated from the locked position to the unlocked position, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 in the state of the standby position at the upper part of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the front view is displayed at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. (See FIG. 152). As a result, it is possible to show the player a movable effect in which a large nata (back-rear movable decorative body 3120) straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction freely falls while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which the player is advantageous to the player occurs. It can make you think that it is, and you can raise the expectation for the game.

After that, the slide guide 3134 is raised by the back-rear drive motor 3135 to return the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 in the lowered position to the normal retracted position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 153, by appropriately changing the rotation direction of the back-rear drive motor 3135, the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is moved to the vertical direction of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 via the slide guide 3134. It may be moved back and forth up and down near the center. As a result, the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 moves up and down while blocking the vertical center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the back-rear movable decoration body 3120. The movable decorative body 3120 can be noticed, and the movement of the movable decorative body 3120 after the back can be enjoyed.

As a movable effect using the back right movable effect unit 3310 of the back right effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. Move from the state of the state to the position of the first state. As a result, the entire back right movable decoration 3320 is located below the inside of the C-shaped back front decoration 3601, and the entire back right movable decoration 3320 imitating Nata is shown to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player excited and excited depending on whether or not the Nata (back right movable decorative body 3320) is swung down after this, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation.

Then, the back right drive motor 3333 is further driven to move the back right movable decorative body 3320 from the position of the first state to the position of the second state (see FIG. 155). As a result, it is possible to show the player a movable effect as if the Machete, which is modeled by the back right movable decorative body 3320, is swung down, so that the player can be surprised by the swinging down of the Nata. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the machete to the back right movable decoration body 3320, and at the same time, it is possible to make people think that there may be something good by swinging down the machete, which gives the player a sense of expectation for the game. It can be raised.

After that, the back right movable decorative body 3320 in the second state is returned to the initial state through the third state by the back right drive motor 3333. When the back right movable decoration body 3320 moves from the position of the second state to the position of the third state, as shown in FIG. 156, the back right movable decoration body 3320 is swung down by the Nata in the second state. The player moves upward in the same posture, and from the third state to the initial state, the back right movable decorative body 3320 rotates around the base end side so that the tip side of the nata moves upward, so that the player On the other hand, it is possible to recognize that it is a movement that is clearly different from when Nata is swung down, and it returns to the initial state with a movement different from the initial movement from the initial state to the second state. The movement of the right movable decorative body 3320 can be enjoyed.

In the back right movable effect unit 3310, the back right movable decorative body 3320 may be moved from the initial state to the second state at once without temporarily stopping in the first state, whereby Nata swings down at once. Since the movable effect can be shown to the player, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player.

As a movable effect using the back-up effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 157, the back-up movable decorative body 3410 in the retracted position is driven by the back-up drive motor 3422 to the base end side (left end). It is rotated around the side) so that it is in the state of the appearance position in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. As a result, the movable backside decorative body 3410 imitating Nata can show the player a movable effect appearing in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Since the movable backside decorative body 3410 is formed as if the machete was composed of broken glass fragments, it looks integrated with the back front decorative body 3601 in the normal evacuation position. Since it is difficult to notice its existence, by moving it to the appearance position, it is possible to make it appear that a part of the back front decorative body 3601 has moved, and it is possible to surprise and entertain the player.

As a movable effect using the back lower effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 158, the back lower movable decoration body 3510 is moved from the lower back position to the ascending position by driving the back lower drive motor 3522. As a result, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 behind the C-shaped back front decorative body 3601 rises, which makes it easier for the player to see the flowers modeled by the lower back movable decorative body 3510. It can make you think that there is something good, and you can raise the expectation for the game.

Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the back-back movable effect unit 3110 of the back-back effect unit 3100, the back-right movable effect unit 3310 of the back-right effect unit 3300, the back-up effect unit 3400, and the back-bottom effect unit 3500. It is also possible to perform a movable effect in which the above-mentioned movable effect using the above is appropriately combined. For example, first, the back-up movable decoration body 3410 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, then the back-right movable decoration body 3320 is moved from the initial state to the second state position, and further, the back-back movable decoration body 3120 is moved. After dropping to the descending position, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is moved to the ascending position (see FIG. 159). Due to this movable effect, all the movable decorative objects are located in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player is convinced that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) will occur. It can be made to enhance the interest of the player. Further, in this movable effect, since a plurality of movable decorative bodies are sequentially moved to the front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, after one movable decorative body is moved to the front of the display screen, the next movable decoration is next. Depending on whether or not the body moves to the front of the display screen, the player can be throbbing, the player's expectation can be raised, and the player can be less likely to get bored.

Subsequently, the main light emitting effect of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 160 to 166 and the like. FIG. 160 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the first pattern is luminescently decorated on the front light guide plate of the table effect unit. FIG. 161 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which a second pattern is luminescently decorated on a front light guide plate of a table effect unit. FIG. 162 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the third pattern is luminescently decorated on the back first light guide plate of the back middle effect unit. FIG. 163 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the fourth pattern is luminescently decorated on the back first light guide plate of the back middle effect unit. FIG. 164 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the fifth pattern is light-emitting decorated on the back second light guide plate of the back rear decoration effect unit in the back rear effect unit. FIG. 165 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the sixth pattern is light-emitting decorated on the back second light guide plate of the back rear decoration effect unit in the back rear effect unit. FIG. 166 is an explanatory diagram showing an animation-like light emission effect by a plurality of patterns using a front light guide plate, a back first light guide plate, and a back second light guide plate. FIG. 167 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the first pattern is luminescently decorated on the front light guide plate of the front effect unit and the back right movable decorative body of the back right effect unit is moved to the second state.

The game board 5 is a table production unit of the table unit 2000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. 2600, the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150 of the back-rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and the back-middle effect unit 3200 perform a predetermined light emission effect.

Specifically, as a light emitting effect using the table effect unit 2600 of the table unit 2000, for example, as shown in FIG. 160, it is mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 arranged on the right side of the front view of the table light guide plate 2610. The plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2611a are made to emit light, and the first pattern 2621 is made to emit light and decorate. As a result, the eyes of a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 are emitted and displayed in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, which can surprise the player and change the game state. It can make you think that you will do it, and you can raise the expectation for the game.

Further, as a light emitting effect using the table effect unit 2600, for example, as shown in FIG. 161, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2612a mounted on the second pattern substrate 2612 arranged on the upper side of the table light guide plate 2610 are used. It emits light to decorate the second pattern 2622 with light emission. As a result, the second pattern 2622 is emitted and displayed, so that the player can have the illusion that the glass with cracks is provided on the entire front surface in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Can be mysterious and entertaining. Further, for example, if the second pattern 2622 is displayed by light emission during the reach production, the player can be made to think that the reach will be developed, and the expectation for the game can be increased.

As a light emitting effect using the back middle effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 162, it is mounted on the third pattern substrate 3221 arranged on the right side of the front view of the back first light guide plate 3210. The plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3221a are made to emit light, and the third pattern 3211 is made to emit light and be decorated. As a result, a plurality of broken and scattered glass pieces as the third pattern 3211 are emitted and displayed in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player can be wondered and entertained.

Further, as a light emitting effect using the back middle effect unit 3200, for example, as shown in FIG. 163, a plurality of guides mounted on the fourth pattern substrate 3222 arranged on both the upper and lower outer sides of the back first light guide plate 3210. The LED 3222a for the light plate is appropriately made to emit light, and the fourth pattern 3212 is made to emit light and be decorated. As a result, a plurality of V-shaped light streaks having a perspective as the fourth pattern 3212 are emitted and displayed in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the front of the display screen can be clearly shown. , Can entertain the player with the luminous decoration.

As a light emitting effect using the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150 in the back-rear effect effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a mounted on the pattern substrate 3171 are made to emit light, and the fifth pattern 3161 is luminescently decorated. As a result, in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, a guidance (message) for the player consisting of the characters "Change!" As the fifth pattern 3161 is displayed in light, so that the guidance gives the player a chance. It is possible to suggest the arrival of the game and raise expectations for the game.

Further, as a light emitting effect using the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150, for example, as shown in FIG. 165, a plurality of mounted on the sixth pattern substrate 3172 arranged under the back second light guide plate 3160. LED3172a for the light guide plate is made to emit light, and the sixth pattern 3162 is made to emit light and be decorated. As a result, a plurality of broken and scattered glass pieces as the sixth pattern 3162 are emitted and displayed in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player can be wondered and entertained.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the front light guide plate 2610, the back first light guide plate 3210, and the back second light guide plate 3160 are sequentially luminescent and decorated with pictures related to each other, thereby moving like an animation. It is possible to produce light emission. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 166, the light emitting decoration is in the order of the second pattern 2622 of the front light guide plate 2610, the third pattern 3211 of the back first light guide plate 3210, and the sixth pattern 3162 of the back second light guide plate 3160. (Light emission display) makes it possible to show the player a moving light emission effect in which the broken glass pieces are scattered after the transparent glass is cracked. At this time, since the front light guide plate 2610, the back first light guide plate 3210, and the back second light guide plate 3160 are arranged rearward in this order, the broken glass pieces are scattered backward when viewed from the player side. It can be seen as a continuous luminescent decoration with a three-dimensional effect, and can entertain the player.

As a light emitting effect using the front effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 and the back right effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 167, the back right movable effect unit 3310 of the back right effect unit 3300 In, the back right movable decoration body 3320 is moved from the normal initial state to the position of the second state in which the back right movable decoration body 3320 is imitated by the back right drive motor 3333, and the front side is moved down. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2611a mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 arranged on the right side of the front view of the light guide plate 2610 are made to emit light, and the first pattern 2621 is light-emitting and decorated. In this state, as shown in the figure, the central portion of the radial crack pattern formed on the front surface of the back right movable decoration 3320 behind the pupil portion of the eyes of a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. Is located. Then, in this state, when the central LED 3323a of the back right movable decorative body decorative substrate 3323 is made to emit light, the pupil of the first pattern 2621 which is emitted and displayed shines so as to shine, which gives a strong impact to the player. At the same time, it is possible to make people think that an advantageous game state such as "big hit game" may occur, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game.

Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect and the light emission effect as described above can be appropriately combined, and also combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, various patterns of effects can be presented to the player by appropriately combining light emission effects, movable effects, display effects, etc., and the players can be less likely to get bored, and various effects can be used. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[6. Peripheral control unit configuration]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 12 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The overall configuration of the above will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 168 to 170. 168 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 169 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 170 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500.

As shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a cover body 1501 that is open at the rear and has a box shape that is longer in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction, and a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. Peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the effect based on the command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 that is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 and electricity. A liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and a base body 1502 for closing the opening of the cover body 1501 are provided. In the internal space of the cover body 1501, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached at predetermined positions, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. As a result, a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) is configured by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

[6-1. Cover body]
In addition to the peripheral control board 1510, various control information (peripheral data) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 can be stored in the various boards mounted in the internal space of the cover body 1501. There is a ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 capable of outputting drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having a region of about two-thirds when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back surface, and is arranged so as to be packed on the left side of the cover body 1501. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 have a square shape in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in the remaining one-third area when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back, and the upper right corner of the cover body 1501. On the other hand, the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a square shape that is twice as large as the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and is placed on the lower right side of the cover body 1501.

The boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later, and the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later. Is connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and are the same ground. (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the same as the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. Is connected.

The cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded into an opaque black color. When viewed from the front thereof, the upper side and the left side of a horizontally long rectangular cover flat plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm). The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are projected rearward (front side of the pachinko machine 1) on the lower side and the right side to form a box shape having an opening.

The cover flat plate 1501a is for mounting the air-cooled fan FAN at a position slightly on the upper right side of the center thereof when viewed from the front and corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to project toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. On the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa are formed along a plurality of concentric circles centered on the center in the vertical and horizontal directions of the bottom surface. Further, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a predetermined cylindrical shape to be inserted through the through holes th1 to th4 at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the air-cooled fan FAN having a square shape. Guide protrusions 1501aab1 to 1501ab4 having a height (distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air-cooled fan FAN) are formed so as to project toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501. By forming the arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of illegally taking out various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the cover flat plate 1501a is formed with a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 diagonally in the vicinity of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the air-cooled fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and mounted, the front surface of the air-cooled fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal countersunk head screw (a screw having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated), which is not shown, is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the pan head screw with a seat, comes into contact with the front surface of the air-cooled fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air-cooled fan FAN pops out from the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Can be prevented.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension between the front surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa ( In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

The cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and is located at a higher position than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The wiring drawer recess 1501ab is formed so as to project toward the opening of the cover body 1501. When the air-cooled fan FAN is attached to and fixed to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wires from the air-cooled fan FAN can be drawn out from the wiring extraction recess 1501ab.

The cover flat plate 1501a has a position corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510d attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side thereof when viewed from the front. The connector recess 1501ac is the FAN mounting recess 1501aa as two closed, almost horizontally long rectangular regions (to be exact, a convex region having the volume control switch 1510d and the connector CN1 at the top and the connector CN2 to the connector CN7 at the bottom). It is formed so as to project toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface (a position having a long distance dimension compared to the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). There is. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume adjustment holes 1501ac8 are formed at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510d, respectively. The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac generally occupies a region on the lower right side when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a countermeasure against insufficient strength and warpage of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac has connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume adjustment. Two reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 elongated in the vertical direction are formed so as to project forward at predetermined intervals at positions that do not interfere with the holes 1501ac8.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510d have connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. And the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 is exposed.

The cover flat plate 1501a is a horizontally long rectangular region having one closed position corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side thereof when viewed from the front. The opening of the cover body 1501 at a position where the connector recess 1501ad is lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). It is formed so as to project toward the side, and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad, connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530, respectively.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad, respectively. ..

Further, the cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring outlet opening 1501ae formed at a position corresponding to CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 along the left side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting recess 1501af for mounting the wiring cover body 1503 having a horizontally long rectangular shape that can communicate with the wiring outlet opening 1501ae and close the wiring outlet opening 1501ae is compared with the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa described above. It is formed at a high position (a position having a shorter distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501a) so as to project toward the opening of the cover body 1501. The mounting recess 1501af has a predetermined height of a cylindrical shape (a distance shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the wiring cover body 1503) inserted into the through hole 1503a at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503. The protruding portion 1501afa having a dimension) is formed so as to project toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the mounting holes 1501afb1 are formed at positions corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are formed, respectively.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. , The wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the wiring outlet opening 1501ae is closed and a plurality of wirings (to transmit drawing data to the effect display device 1600) connected to the connector CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover that protects the wiring from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color.

When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc are formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left side cover side wall 1501c and project upward and downward at predetermined intervals in the center. At the same time, a hinge hooking portion 1501cc arranged above the guide portion 1501ca and projecting outward and a hinge hanging portion 1501cd arranged below the guide portion 1501cc and projecting outward are formed. A chamfer is formed on the rear surface side of the left end of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc. On the other hand, L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda protruding forward are formed on the front side of the left end of the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd. Further, in the center of the cover body 1501 of the cover side wall 1501e on the right side, a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea protruding outward is formed.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the back surface so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged so as to be packed on the left side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At the positions, four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed so as to project from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. The periphery of the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is a copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, and peripheral control. Copper foils for soldering (so-called “lands”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 having a circular shape on the back surface side of the substrate 1510 are formed, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are peripheral control boards, respectively. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of 1510.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by arranging and inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other. The land 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control substrate 1510 via a metal pan head screw. Lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are electrically connected to each other. As a result, the cover body 1501 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is the same as the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, which are electrically connected to each other. Since the cover body 1501 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 via the metal pan screw, the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is used. The circuit will be grounded to the GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 and electricity. The cover body 1501 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the cover body 1501 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal pan head screw inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 opens the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inward from the end surface on the side (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end surface on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e).

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when viewed from the back surface so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1, 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss projecting portions 1501ai1, 1501ai2 are formed diagonally from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Has been done. The periphery of the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is a copper foil for soldering (so-called “land”) 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Copper foils for soldering (so-called “lands”) 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 having a circular shape are formed on the back surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are respectively formed. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520.

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is mounted on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through holes 1520r1, 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are provided in the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1, 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Insert and insert a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screw them toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the mounting surface (boss surface) and the mounting boss hole of the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 are in contact with each other, and the lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw. Are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 via a metal pan head screw. It is in a state of being electrically connected to the land 1520rf1 to 1520rf4, 1520rb1 to 1520rb4. As a result, the cover body 1501 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is the same as the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, which are electrically connected to each other. Since the cover body 1501 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan screw, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 is used. The circuit will be grounded to the GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 and electricity. The cover body 1501 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, so that the cover body 1501 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630.

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal pan screw inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 and screwed into the cover side wall 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end surface on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside from the end surface on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and on the back surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 to be fixed is arranged on the same plane.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 when viewed from the back surface so that the liquid crystal output board 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At the position, a pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1,1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss projecting portions 1501an1,1501an2 are formed diagonally so as to project from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. Around the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530, a copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and a liquid crystal output. Copper foils for soldering (so-called "lands") 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 having a circular shape on the back surface side of the substrate 1530 are formed, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are liquid crystal output substrates, respectively. A wiring pattern is formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of 1530.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is mounted on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1, 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output is output by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and screwing them toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the mounting surface (boss surface) and the mounting boss hole 1501am1 of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , 1501am2's mounting surface (boss surface) is in contact with each other, and the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw are respectively. It will be in a state of contact. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a metal pan head screw. Lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4, 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are electrically connected to each other. As a result, the cover body 1501 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the same as the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, which are electrically connected to each other. Since the cover body 1501 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a metal pan screw, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 is grounded. ) And the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the circuit will be grounded. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 and electricity. The cover body 1501 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, so that the cover body 1501 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630.

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal pan screw inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 opens the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end surface on the side (that is, so as not to protrude outside from the end surface on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and is fixed to the back surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane.

As described above, in a state where various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface of the various substrates (cover flat plate 1501a). A space having a predetermined height distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, there is a gap (2.3 mm in this embodiment) between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa having the above-mentioned predetermined distance dimensions. Is formed.

In the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes are formed on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, respectively. When the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 to control the peripherals. By taking in air from the outside of the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover body 1501 (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the up-down direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

[6-2. Base body]
The base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate and is molded into an opaque black color. The base side walls 1502b to 1502e are projected forward (on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1) on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, to form a box shape having an opening. The size of the openings formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is one size larger than the size of the openings formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. As a result, in a state where the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502 by covering the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. Is fitted and inscribed (surface contact).

When viewed from the front of the base flat plate 1502a, wiring is provided to the connectors CN2 to CN7 at positions that do not interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 at predetermined intervals along the lower side. The peripheral control board 1510 is warped by the force when the connector for connection is inserted, and the vertically elongated disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed to prevent the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being disconnected. The force for inserting the connector for connecting the wiring to the connector CN1 and the force for operating the volume adjustment switch 1510d at a position that does not interfere with the connector CN1 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is warped, and an elongated disconnection prevention rib portion 1502aa4 is formed in the left-right direction to prevent the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being disconnected.

When the base body 1502 is viewed from the front, an engaging portion 1502ca protruding outward is formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the base body 1502 of the base side wall 1502c on the left side. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cc and 1502cad are formed at the corresponding positions, respectively. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

The plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501 described above are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, and the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf described above. The hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cc and 1501cda formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. Then, with the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf in contact with the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda formed on the cover body 1501. By wrapping around, the hinge receiving portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd are hooked on the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. It is designed to be able to engage.

Further, in the center of the base side wall 1502e on the right side, a base-side sealing portion 1502ea is formed so as to project outward at a position corresponding to the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 are formed on the upper side and the lower side of the base side wall 1502e on the right side, respectively.

[6-3. Various connectors]
The peripheral control board 1510 mounted in the internal space of the cover body 1501 includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, a sound source, a serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Datachment, hereinafter referred to as “SATA controller”), and various I / O interfaces. Peripheral control IC1510a in which etc. are integrated on one semiconductor chip, and various programs and productions that can control the progress and demonstration of the game production (demo production performed while waiting for the player) are specified. SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) that can transfer and store various control information (peripheral data) stored in the control ROM 1510b that stores various schedule data in advance and the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Various types of DRAM 1510c composed of 1510c1 and 1510c2, a slide-type volume control switch 1510d that can adjust the volume, and a backup power supply 1510e that can supply power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when the power is turned off. It includes a power supply creation circuit (not shown) that creates a power supply voltage, and various connectors CN1 to CN7.

The control ROM 1510b provided in the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbit, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbit. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

As various I / O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510, there are various serial I / O, various parallel I / O, and the like. Examples of various serial I / O include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Synchronous Receiver Transfer) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

In this embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving a command from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5), various boards provided on the game board 5 side, and various boards provided on the door frame side. SPI communication or I2C communication is adopted as a communication method for transmitting control data to the connector (communication is performed via the corresponding connector among the connector CN3, the connector CN6, and the connector CN7).

In the present embodiment, using SPI communication or I2C communication, an electric drive source provided on the game board 5 side (for example, back-back effect unit 3100, back-right effect unit 3300, back-up effect unit 3400, back-down effect unit 3500). Various motors provided for Drive data is transmitted to a drive control IC that drives a motor 367 or the like, which communicates via the connector CN3, or communicates via a plurality of LEDs (connector CN7) provided on the game board 5 side. ) And various sensors provided on the game board 5 side, such as transmitting light emission data to an LED control IC that drives a plurality of LEDs (communication via the connector CN3) provided on the door frame 3 side. (For example, various detection sensors provided in the back-back effect unit 3100, the back-right effect unit 3300, the back-up effect unit 3400, the back-down effect unit 3500, etc., and communicate via the connector CN6). It receives as detection data, or receives signals from various sensors provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, various detection sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 and communicates via the connector CN3) as detection data. Or something. In the present embodiment, the transfer speed by SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer speed by I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

As various parallel I / O, there is GPIO (General Purpose Input / Output, general-purpose IO). In this embodiment, a signal from the air-cooled fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air-cooled fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), or is provided on the game board 5 side. No signals from various sensors that confirm the operation of the controlled object and the position of the origin are input to the GPIO (via the connector CN6), and control signals for the controlled object provided on the game board 5 side (connector CN6) are sent from the GPIO. It outputs (via) or outputs a signal from GPIO to the LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

In this embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to the connector CN1, SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to the connector CN3 (that is, the connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , Connector CN5 is assigned UART communication, connector CN6 is assigned SPI communication and GPIO (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and GPIO coexist), and connector CN7 is assigned SPI communication. Is assigned.

The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and realizes a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (supports up to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to the instruction of the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , It is possible to transfer data to the DRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed.

The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory), and can realize high-speed data communication speed. In the DRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

The peripheral control board 1510 further includes a special connector SCN1 for connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the boards, and a special connector SCN2 for connecting the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the boards. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a special connector SCN3 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards. The liquid crystal output board 1530 includes a special connector SCN4 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards.

The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in the form of a plurality of types of video signals. Examples of the plurality of types of video signal methods include a plurality of types such as an RGB method, an LVDS method, a MIPI (Mobile Indicator Interface) method, an eDP (Embedded DisplayPort) method, and a clockless method. In, four systems (a total of four systems) are adopted: one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system. Further, in the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. A peripheral control board that uses, for example, an eDP system instead of the MIPI system, one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and one eDP system. You can also create 1510.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 further includes an LEDML1 in the vicinity of the control ROM 1510b, an LEDML2 in the vicinity of the SDRAM 1510c, an LEDML3 in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1, and an LEDML4 in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2. As will be described later, the peripheral control board 1510 is directly supplied with various voltages (DC + 37V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The LEDML1 confirms (monitors) the state in which the direct current + 5V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which the direct current + 5V is supplied. The LEDML2 confirms (monitors) the state in which the direct current + 12V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which the direct current + 12V is supplied. The LEDML3 confirms (monitors) the state in which the direct current + 37V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which the direct current + 37V is supplied. The LEDML4 confirms (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the lighting state is maintained in the state where the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surface (cover) of the various boards is as described above. A space having a predetermined height distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the flat plate 1501a (the surface facing the back surface side) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The space formed in this way can be brightly illuminated by lighting the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in that they are provided with a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the connectors CN8 to CN10 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530. These connectors CN1 to CN10 are sockets, respectively, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing the plug of the corresponding connector in the direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 have a structure in which the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 do not move in the vertical direction when the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fitted.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, respectively, and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are sockets, respectively.

The socket and the plug are fitted by inserting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and pushing it in. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, the socket is viewed from the front of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) in the front-rear direction (the back and front of the pachinko machine 1). The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving in a predetermined distance range toward (direction). The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is a peripheral data ROM board 1520 in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum within the predetermined distance range described above when viewed from the front, the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 does not come into contact with the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501.

The socket and the plug are fitted by inserting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and pushing it in. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, the socket is in the front-rear direction (direction between the back surface and the front surface of the pachinko machine 1) when the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front. ), The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving within a predetermined distance range. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control) in a state where the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Special so that the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 does not come into contact with the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 even if the substrate 1510) is moved to the maximum within the predetermined distance range described above when viewed from the front. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the connector SCN4 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501.

Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is adopted for the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 is adopted for the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be briefly described. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a peripheral data ROM 1520a that can store various control information (peripheral data) that is the control target of the peripheral control board 1510. As various control information (peripheral data), image data such as a background image, a character image, a pattern image, etc. for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Light emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on the door frame 3, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, etc., on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Drive data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effectors provided can be mentioned.

The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND type flash (nonvolatile) memory, which is cheaper than the NOR type flash (nonvolatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high-speed transfer speed by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

In this way, by adopting a NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, it is possible to realize cost reduction, contribute to reduction of power consumption, and read out various stored data at a high transfer speed. can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can suppress power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is easily affected by noise due to its low operating voltage. Further, it is necessary to accurately and surely transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration of electrically connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness) is not adopted, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripherals are not adopted. By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector, the influence of noise invading the inter-board transmission line is reduced.

The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the peripheral data ROM board 1520 inserts the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided therein into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510. Since it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510, a plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket are formed. It is possible to reliably form a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 by preventing the damage of the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. be. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs during this operation, it is possible to prevent damage to the multiple connection terminals formed between the plug and the socket, and to provide a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It can be reliably formed.

The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 from the connector CN10, whereby the effect progresses to the effect display device 1600 (for example, for the player). An image telling that a jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state will occur, an image telling that the jackpot gaming state will not occur, and a state where the jackpot gaming state does not occur but the jackpot gaming state occurs compared to the normal state. It is an important board for drawing an image (such as an image that conveys that it is approaching) as an image. Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and surely transmit the drawing data of the image drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration of electrically connecting the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness) is not adopted, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board are not connected. By adopting a configuration in which the 1510 is electrically connected by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise invading the inter-board transmission path is reduced.

The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the liquid crystal output board 1530 inserts the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided in itself into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510. Since it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 after pushing in, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510, the connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket are connected. It is possible to prevent damage and reliably form a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530.

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. be. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. By absorbing the error in the front-back direction that occurs at the time, damage to the connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is surely established. Can be formed.

When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 Since the back surface and the back surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the same plane, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the peripheral control board 1510 with respect to the front surface. Compared to the case of three-dimensional arrangement, the distance dimension of the peripheral control unit 1500 in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) can be reduced. Therefore, for example, a large movable effect unit (movable effect body is operated on the game board 5). It can contribute to securing the distance dimension in the depth direction for arranging the electric drive source and the drive mechanism that can be used, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position).

[6-4. How to assemble the peripheral control unit]
Here, a method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed into the plug.

Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through holes 1520r1, 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are provided in the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting boss protrusions 1501an1, 1501an2 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side, and the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Insert in. As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in.

Subsequently, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to form the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the metal (not shown) is formed in the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a pan head screw made of metal and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As described above, among the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is finally fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrain the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the cover flat plate 1501a. By being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the above, the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is restricted, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted for restraining the vertical and horizontal directions. The boss protrusion is not formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the vertical and horizontal directions are constrained, and the dimensional error due to such restraint is suppressed by the peripheral control substrate 1510. Absorbed by the respective dimensional tolerances of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a when fixed to the back surface side of the 1501a. You can do it.

Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501 are provided. The guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502ca formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502ca, and the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinged hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the base body. It is inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of 1502.

Subsequently, a state in which the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. In a state where the base body 1502 is wrapped around the cover body 1501 so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is covered with the cover body 1501 as it is, the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 is made of metal (not shown). A metal one-way screw into which an anchor rivet is inserted is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward in the base side sealing portion 1502ea, so that the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are formed. The base-side sealing portion 1502ea and the sealed portion 1502ea are sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502, and are inscribed (surface contact). As a result, since the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are in a conductive state. In addition, in order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be broken by a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and the deterrent force against unauthorized acts on the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been enhanced.

Subsequently, the air-cooled fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501a formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooled fan FAN are connected from the wiring drawer recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal countersunk head screw (a screw having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated), which is not shown, is screwed into the drawer and the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively.

Subsequently, in order to connect a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 by inserting and attaching the connector. A metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. The 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way is attached to the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5, the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front and is on the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500). The engaging portion 1502ca side) formed in the game panel 1100 is inserted into a mounting groove (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is formed in the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. Is inserted and screwed into a mounting hole (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100 to fix it.

In the above-mentioned assembly method, in the procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, first, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is placed at the above-mentioned predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. (The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back surface.) The liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. After fixing the cover body 1501 to the above-mentioned predetermined position on the side (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back surface), the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided. The socket of the special connector SCN3 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, and the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is used as the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. It can also be inserted and pushed in to fix the peripheral control board 1510 to the above-mentioned predetermined position (the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged so as to be packed on the left side of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back surface). .. Even in the mounting procedure of various boards, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in is absorbed, and the plug and the socket can be used. It is possible to prevent damage to a plurality of connection terminals formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and reliably form a transmission path between the boards of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to reliably form a transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board.

By the way, there are a plurality of types of gaming boards mounted on pachinko machines with different gaming specifications. In the present embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be divided into three parts and attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common regardless of the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is the peripheral data ROM 1520a for each game specification of the game board. The peripheral data corresponding to the above is stored as a board that depends on the game specifications of the game board, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board that depends on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board and that does not depend on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and becomes a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused). Further, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 provided with the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which the peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the above-mentioned inter-board connector. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

As described above, there are a plurality of types of video signal systems input to a display device such as an effect display device, such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI system, an eDP system, and a clockless system. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these two types of methods are electrically connected by the above-mentioned inter-board connector. That is, the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be easily replaced according to the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, as described above, as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is used. Is adopted, the liquid crystal output board 1530 corresponding to the method (LVDS method) of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the above-mentioned inter-board connector.

Further, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed. When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side by metal pan screws, the circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of these various boards. It is configured in. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the same as the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Is connected. Therefore, the electromagnetic noise invading from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is used as the circuit ground, and the ground (GND) of various boards, the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, and FIG. 86 (b). It can be removed by guiding it from the frame grounding board 559 shown in the above to the grounding of the island equipment of the game hall. As a result, it is not necessary for each of the various boards (including the power supply board 630) to be provided with a dedicated filter for removing such electromagnetic noise, which contributes to cost reduction of the various boards (including the power supply board 630). Can be done.

Here, the arrangement of the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 will be described. As described above, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have a function of confirming the presence or absence of fraud.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 170, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided, the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, the part number, and the pin). (Number, etc.), that is, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed from multiple angles. As a result, they are distributed and arranged so as to have an area larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510b and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, since the LEDML1 arranged in the vicinity of the control ROM 1510b is maintained in a lighting state while the DC + 5V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied, the DC + 5V is originally supplied. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state of being printed, it also has a function as a spotlight to illuminate the control ROM 1510b brightly, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pin. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the peripheral control board 1510 and the improvement of the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 in the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and the peripheral data provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, the connector). The number of pins, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM board. The contents silk-printed on each of the 1520 and 1520 are distributed and arranged so as to be a large area where the contents can be substantially confirmed from multiple directions. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, and the contents silk-printed on the special connector SCN3 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In addition to the correspondence with, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, since the LEDML3 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lit state while the DC + 37V from the power supply board 630 of the substrate unit 620 is supplied, the DC + 37V is originally supplied. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the supplied state, it is a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. By further having the above-mentioned functions, the visibility of the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the state of the IC pin is improved, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. ..

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 in the liquid crystal output board 1530), and further, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The silk-printed contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) are arranged in a distributed manner so that they can be visually recognized. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the silk-printed contents on the peripheral control board 1510, and the silk-printed contents on the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. In addition to the correspondence relationship, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 shall be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Can be done. Further, since the LEDML4 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2 is maintained in a lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although it has a function, it has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 by the special connector SCN4. The visibility of the silk-printed contents on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is improved, and the visibility of the inter-board connector is improved by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. , Can be contributed to.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are the part numbers and models printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the DRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2. The state of the IC pins and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. The state of the IC pins and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are distributed and arranged so as to be a region larger than the shape of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 so that the silk-printed contents can be confirmed from multiple directions. ing. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. .. Further, the LEDML2 arranged in the vicinity of the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lighting state in a state where the direct current + 12V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Originally, it has a function to confirm (monitor) the state in which DC + 12V is supplied, but it also has a function as a spotlight to illuminate the SDRAM 1510c brightly, so that the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2) is further provided. It has become possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the IC pin, the improvement of the visibility of the state of the IC pin, the improvement of the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, and the improvement of the visibility of the IC pin. There is.

Further, among the plurality of blades constituting the blades of the air-cooled fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades by the inspector rotating the blades of the air-cooled fan FAN). The part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed from. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized substrate is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes.

In this embodiment, as the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a surface-mounted type having a wide angle of about 120 degrees and a type having weak directivity are adopted. It is also suitable for use as lighting. When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surface (cover) of the various boards is as described above. A space having a predetermined height distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the flat plate 1501a (the surface facing the back surface side) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. By lighting the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting, it is possible to brightly illuminate the space thus formed.

Further, the light emitted by the LEDML1 to LEDML4 is reflected again with respect to the region on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 facing the light emitting surface of the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and its surroundings. Reflecting portions (not shown) are formed so as to be directed to the peripheral control board 1510. As the reflective portion (not shown), a colored paint having a gloss may be used in addition to the colored paint having a bright color such as white, or a metal sheet having a gloss may be attached.

Further, in the vicinity of the peripheral control unit 1500 near the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and a payout unit 560 is arranged on the side of the game board 5. Are arranged, and in the ball path composed of these, the game balls rub against each other to be charged and electrostatically discharged, which becomes a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 on which the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are lined up opposite the island equipment in the game hall. As described above, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment that is extremely susceptible to electromagnetic noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, and the peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral data are used. A circuit ground configuration is adopted in which the ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected so as to have the same ground (GND). Further, in the present embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the grounds of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. By electrically connecting to the (GND) line, the same ground (GND) configuration was adopted.

As a result, the cover body 1501 and / or the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The electromagnetic noise that invades through the base body 1502 and the like is used as the circuit ground, and the ground (GND) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the ground of the power supply board 630 (GND). ), And it can be removed by guiding it from the frame grounding board 559 shown in FIG. 86B to the grounding of the island equipment of the game hall. In other words, the cover body 1501 and / or the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The electromagnetic wave noise invading through the base body 1502 can be removed by guiding it from the frame grounding board 559 shown in FIG. 86B to the grounding of the island equipment of the game hall as a circuit grounding called a circuit ground.

[7. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of the effect based on various commands from the main control board 1310. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls payout and the like of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 182.

[7-1. Main control board]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU, main control I / O port as input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit to input detection signals from various detection switches, and main control solenoid drive to drive various solenoids. It includes a circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and a second start for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. The mouth sensor 2402, the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, the gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003, and the game ball received in the large winning opening 2005. It is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects B, the first receiving entrance sensor 2404 that detects the game ball B received in the first receiving entrance 2007 after being detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403, and the large winning opening sensor 2403. After that, the detection signals from the second inlet sensor 2405 that detects the game ball B received in the second inlet 2008, the magnetic sensor 3003 that detects the illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and the like are the main control inputs, respectively. It is input to the main control I / O port via the circuit.

The main control MPU is driven to the start port solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, and the distribution solenoid 2416 by outputting a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals. A signal can be output, and the function display unit 1400 status display, normal symbol display, normal hold display, first special symbol display, first special hold number display, and second special can be output from the main control I / O port. A drive signal is output to a symbol display, a second special hold number display, a round display, and the like.

In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, the large winning opening sensor 2403, the first inlet / outlet sensor 2404, and the second inlet / outlet sensor 2405 are not included. While the contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, the contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2402 , And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401.

Further, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the big winning opening sensor 2403, first. The detection of the game ball B by the reception sensor 2404 and the second reception sensor 2405 also frequently occurs. For this reason, the large winning opening sensor 2403, the first inlet / outlet sensor 2404, and the second inlet / outlet sensor 2405 also use proximity switches having high durability and long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or something. Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the main control I / O port to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. When the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, these various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Various voltages (DC + 37V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is equipped with.). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control I / O port of the main control MPU, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[7-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game ball B is a payout control unit 633a that controls various payouts, a launch control by the launch solenoid 542, and a launch control by the ball feed solenoid 145. It includes a control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1, and an error canceling switch for clearing the error displayed on the error LED display.

[7.2-1. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is a micro with a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout serially at the payout control I / O port, or receives from the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch being input to the payout control I / O port via the payout control input circuit, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 and the detection from the ball cutout detection sensor 574. A signal, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control I / O port via the payout control input circuit.

The detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are payout control via the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control I / O port of the MPU.

Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch that detects the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are the payout control input circuits. Is input to the payout control I / O port of the payout control MPU via.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control I / O port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the payout control I / O to the payout motor 584 via the payout motor drive circuit, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. The signal for output is output from the payout control I / O port to the error LED display, and the command for indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted from the payout control I / O port to the main control board 1310 in a serial manner. Or, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output from the payout control I / O port to the external terminal board 558. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, which displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, it is a ball. Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that a "count switch error" has occurred (specifically, a defect has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , When the number "5" is displayed, a "retry error" is notified (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it means that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (meaning that the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the areas from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit). When the number "9" is displayed, it is informed that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of balls of the game ball B that has not been paid out has reached a predetermined number). ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port of the payout control MPU. .. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is used for ball lending. It is input to and displayed on the ball rental display unit of the operation unit 220.

[7-2-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b has a launch control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to launch, an oscillation circuit for outputting a clock signal at regular time intervals, and the clock signal. Based on this, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and a launch It is provided with a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on a reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects this is input to the firing control input circuit and then input to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit. The signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In this firing solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the firing reference pulse generates a driving current for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 182. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200 is stored. One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to move the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

Various voltages (DC + 37V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are directly supplied to the payout control board 633. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power cutoff process even when the power supply is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633.

[7-3. Peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of the effect based on various commands from the main control board 1310, such as a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, SATA controller, and various I / O interfaces. Peripheral control IC 1510a integrated on one semiconductor chip, control ROM 1510b that stores various schedule data that regulates the progress of various programs and effects in advance, and various types that are stored in peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The power is cut off to the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 that can transfer and store the control information (peripheral data), the slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d that can adjust the volume, and the real-time clock IC (not shown). It includes a backup power supply 1510e that can supply power even at any time, a power supply creation circuit (not shown) that creates various power supply voltages, and a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Examples of various I / O interfaces include various serial I / O ports, various parallel I / O ports, and the like.

[7-3-1. Peripheral control IC]
The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 when the power is turned on (including the case where the power is restored from a power failure). Controls the transfer. As described above, since the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the DRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 have a transfer rate of 2 Gbps, the control information stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a is transferred to the DRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2. Transferred at high speed. As the control information (peripheral data), as described above, image data such as a background image, a character image, a pattern image, a hold image, etc. for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, a door frame 3 and a game board. Light emission data that defines light emission modes (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided in 5, music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, and other sound data, door frame. It is drive data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effect bodies provided in 3 and the game board 5. The background image, character image, pattern image, hold image, and the like are full-color images.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a to temporarily store information or delete the information during processing. Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes starting its own system, the CPU reads various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the DRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 from the main control board 1310 based on various commands, and proceeds with the production. ..

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has started up its own system and received various commands from the main control board 1310, the CPU reads and reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on the various commands. Various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is read out according to the schedule data, and control is performed to draw an image on the effect display device 1600. Various effects are advanced by controlling the system so that sounds such as music and sound effects can be played according to the various effects.

The VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads image data from the DRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, generates drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600, and generates drawing data on the liquid crystal output board 1530. Controls the output. This drawing data is transmitted to the effect display device 1600 via the liquid crystal output board 1530, and various images are drawn on the effect display device 1600.

The frame buffer method is adopted for the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In this "frame buffer method", drawing data for one screen (one frame) is held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) of the corresponding peripheral control IC 1510a, and the frame buffer (built-in) of these peripheral control ICs 1510a is held. This is a method of outputting drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in VRAM) from the output channel of VDP of the corresponding peripheral control IC 1510a. There are four channels, channels CH1 to CH4, as output channels of the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In the present embodiment, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a controls to output drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 of the four channels to the liquid crystal output board 1530. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts its own system, it allocates and secures a frame buffer (built-in VRAM) area so as to correspond to these four channels.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts its own system, and the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a generates drawing data for one screen (one frame) in a predetermined area on the corresponding built-in VRAM to the outside. Upon output (transmission), the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a accepts screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a (which defines the configuration of the screen drawn (displayed) on various display devices such as the effect display device 1600). A V-blank signal indicating that the state is possible is output to the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a is a vibration speaker provided in the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, etc. by reading out sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, generating and outputting the sound data based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects are played from the 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. When the slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is operated, the volume adjustment operation signal is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a can adjust the volume according to the input volume adjustment operation signal based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side can be adjusted. Outputs acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) to the 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. By doing so, it is possible to provide a more realistic acoustic effect (acoustic effect) than before.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes booting its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on these various commands, and the read schedule data. A lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal is output to a color LED provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 or a light guide plate LED provided on each pattern board of the game board 5. The game board side light emission data for However, the game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to each drive motor and each drive solenoid provided in the game board 5 is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the effect drive of the game board 5 is performed from various serial I / O ports. Door side drive data for transmitting to the board 1720 and outputting drive signals to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3 and the operation button elevating drive motor 367, etc., and each decorative board of the door frame 3. The door-side drive light emission data composed of the door-side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided in the DRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 is read from the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 to read various serial I /. It may be transmitted from the O port to the door frame 3 side.

The detection signals from each detection sensor for detecting the position of the movable decorative body in the back-back effect unit 3100, the back-right effect unit 3300, the back-up effect unit 3400, and the back-down effect unit 3500 provided on the game board 5 are peripheral. It is received by various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the control input circuit. Further, the detection signal from the press detection sensor 381 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3, the detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the detection signal from the second rotation detection sensor 348 are peripheral control inputs. It is received by various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via a circuit. Further, signals from the air-cooled fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air-cooled fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 are input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. ..

Various voltages (DC + 37V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) are directly supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply creation circuit (not shown) provided in the peripheral control board 1510 has a plurality of control voltages corresponding to various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510 from one voltage (for example, DC + 12V) among various voltages from the power supply board 630. Kinds are created and supplied.

The peripheral control board 1510 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the external WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control.

[7-3-2. Control ROM]
As described above, the control ROM 1510b can store various schedule data that regulates the progress of various programs and effects in advance. In the various schedule data, a plurality of various data for advancing the production according to a plurality of types of production patterns are defined. The various schedule data include, for example, a plurality of types of screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn (displayed) on various display devices such as the effect display device 1600, and a plurality of types of light emission mode generation for generating light emission modes of various LEDs. There are schedule data, a plurality of types of sound generation schedule data for generating music, sound effects, and the like, and a plurality of types of electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as drive motors and drive solenoids. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets (determines) any pattern from a plurality of types of production patterns based on various commands from the main control board 1310, this setting (determined) from a plurality of types of schedule data ( Set (determine) various schedule data corresponding to the determined pattern.

Here, the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data will be briefly described. The screen data defines the configuration of the screen to be drawn (displayed). Specifically, the screen data is configured by arranging a command and a parameter for the command for each line. Some commands have no parameters. The sprites described here are composed of character data, and one sprite may be composed of one character data, or one sprite may be composed of a plurality of character data. For example, one figure including a background image may be composed of one character data, or may be composed of a plurality of character data arranged in an aligned manner.

The commands that compose the screen data include an object addition command, an object insertion command, an object movement command, an object processing command, an object deletion command, an object replacement command, an object replacement command, a one-frame end command, and the like.

The object addition command is a command for adding one sprite. Specify the add object command to specify one sprite information to add to the parameter (the name of the sprite, or a pointer to the address where the sprite was stored). When one sprite is added by the object addition command and the parameter, the value of the sprite index is given and registered as a number for individually identifying this one sprite. The value of the sprite index starts at a value of 0 (zero) and increases by a value of 1 for each sprite added. The smaller the value of this sprite index, the farther the screen is placed and displayed. That is, the screen in which the sprite having a large sprite index value is arranged and displayed on the foremost side is displayed.

The object insertion command is a command for inserting one sprite by specifying the value of the sprite index in the plurality of sprites when there are a plurality of sprites already added by the object addition command. Specify the object insertion command to specify one sprite information to insert in the parameter (the name of the sprite, or a pointer to the address where the sprite is stored), and the value of the sprite index to insert. When one sprite with the sprite index value specified by the object insertion command and parameter is inserted, the value equal to or greater than the value of the sprite index registered immediately before insertion corresponding to the specified sprite index value. Will be shifted one by one and become larger. For example, if eight sprites have already been added as multiple sprites by the object addition command, the sprite index value is in a state where values 0 to 7 are assigned and registered, and the object insertion command is executed. If you instruct the parameter to specify one sprite information and specify a value 6 as the sprite index value to insert, one new sprite will be inserted with the sprite index value as the value 6 and the specified sprite. The value of the sprite index 6, which is equal to or greater than the value of the sprite index registered immediately before the index value and the corresponding value inserted, and the value of the value 7 are shifted by one and the value increases to the value 7, and then It will be re-registered as a value of 8.

The object move command is a command for setting the coordinates and size of one sprite. Instruct the object move command to specify the value of the sprite index (that is, one sprite) as a parameter, and specify the coordinates and size of one sprite to be specified. The coordinates specify the XY coordinates of the screen, and the size specifies the size (width, height) of one sprite. One sprite whose sprite index value is specified by the object move command and parameters is moved (arranged) to the coordinates by the specified size.

The object processing command is a command for setting an arrangement (dramatization processing (crafting processing)). Specify the object processing command, specify the sprite index value (that is, one sprite) in the parameter, specify the arrangement (dramatization processing (crafting processing)) for one specified sprite, and specify various values for the arrangement. .. Arrangement (adaptation processing (crafting processing)) includes transmittance setting mode, noise addition setting mode, mosaic setting mode, oil painting style installation mode, sumi-e style setting mode, stereoscopic view setting mode, grayscale setting mode, and monochrome 2 gradations. There is a setting mode, etc.

For example, the transmittance setting mode will be briefly described. The transmittance setting mode includes a sprite individual transmittance setting mode, a specific area transmittance setting mode, a screen transmittance setting mode, and the like. In the sprite individual transparency setting mode, one sprite added by the object addition command is specified, and a value for setting the transparency (0 (zero)% to 100%) of this one sprite is specified. It is a mode that can be done. In the specific area transmittance setting mode, one sprite added by the object addition command is specified, and the screen area corresponding to this one sprite is set as a specific area, and the transmittance in this specific area (0 (zero)). It is a mode in which a value for setting% to 100%) can be specified. The screen transmittance setting mode is a mode in which a value for setting the transmittance (0 (zero)% to 100%) of the entire screen can be specified. In this screen transmittance setting mode, as described above, since the transparency of the entire screen is set, the sprite index value (that is, one sprite) is not specified in the parameter, and the arrangement (adaptation processing (crafting processing)) is performed. )) Specify the screen transmittance setting mode, and specify the transmittance (0% to 100%) of the entire screen. It should be noted that 0% is the smallest as the transmittance, the transmittance increases toward 100%, and when the transmittance is set to 0%, the light is not transmitted and becomes opaque, and the transmittance is set to 100%. And, almost all the light is transmitted and made transparent. The sprite or the entire screen on which the transmittance is set by this transmittance setting mode can express a sense of depth that the rear side thereof can be visually recognized, and thus is depicted three-dimensionally.

Further, for example, to briefly explain the noise addition setting mode, the noise addition setting mode specifies one sprite added by the object addition command, and the amount of noise (0.1%) for this one sprite. In this mode, it is possible to specify a value for setting (~ 50%), a distribution method (uniform distribution, Gaussian distribution), and ON / OFF setting of grayscale noise. As the amount of noise, 0.1% is the smallest and the amount of noise increases toward 50%, and as the amount of noise increases, the image becomes an image in which pixels are randomly arranged. When the grayscale noise is set to ON, the noise is expressed as grayscale, while when the grayscale noise is set to OFF, the noise is expressed as color noise. The sprite or the entire screen on which noise is set by this noise addition setting mode is depicted in two dimensions.

Further, for example, to briefly explain the mosaic setting mode, the mosaic setting mode specifies one sprite added by the object addition command, and the size of the mosaic (value 1 to value 15) for this one sprite. ), The shape of the mosaic area (the size of the rectangular area, the size of the elliptical area including the circular area), and the coordinates (X coordinate, Y coordinate) in the sprite. The value 1 is the smallest as the size of the mosaic, and the size of the mosaic increases toward the value 15. A value of 1 corresponds to a cell size of 1 square pixel and a value of 15 corresponds to a cell size of 15 square pixels. The larger the size of the mosaic, the coarser the image in the mosaic area at the coordinates specified in the sprite. The sprite or the entire screen on which the mosaic is set by this mosaic setting mode is depicted in two dimensions.

Further, for example, to briefly explain the oil painting style installation mode, the oil painting style installation mode specifies one sprite added by the object addition command, and the type of brush to be processed with a brush for this one sprite ( Value for setting narrow, standard, wide), value for setting brush size (value 1 to value 50), value for setting sharpness (value 0 (zero) to value 30) , And a mode in which you can specify the setting of the mesh effect. The value 1 is the smallest as the brush size, and the brush size increases toward the value 50. As the sharpness strength, the value 0 is the smallest (no sharpness strength), and the sharpness strength increases toward the value 30. The sprite specified by this oil painting style installation mode will be depicted in three dimensions with irregularities.

Further, for example, to briefly explain the sumi-e style setting mode, the sumi-e style setting mode specifies one sprite added by the object addition command, and the stroke width (value 1 to value) for this one sprite. In a mode in which you can specify a value for setting 15), a value for setting pen pressure (value 1 to value 15), and a value for setting contrast (value 0 (zero) to value 40). be. The value 1 is the smallest as the stroke width, and the stroke width increases toward the value 15. The value 1 is the smallest as the writing pressure, and the writing pressure increases toward the value 15. The value 0 is the smallest as the contrast, and the contrast increases toward the value 40. The sprite or the entire screen processed in the sumi-e style by this sumi-e style setting mode becomes a Japanese-style image as if drawn on Japanese paper, and is depicted two-dimensionally.

Further, for example, to briefly explain the stereoscopic vision setting mode, the stereoscopic vision setting mode includes a stereoscopic vision setting mode within a specific area, a screen stereoscopic vision setting mode, and the like. In the stereoscopic setting mode in a specific area, one sprite added by an object addition command is specified, the screen area corresponding to this one sprite is set as a specific area, and the inside of this specific area is an observer (player). By alternately arranging the right image, which is an image for the right eye of, and the left image, which is an image for the left eye of the observer (player), the observer (player) stereoscopically images the image in a specific area. It is a mode that can be seen. The image in the specific area designated by the stereoscopic view setting mode in the specific area is three-dimensionally depicted in a three-dimensional manner that is raised (protruded) in front of the display area of the screen. In the screen stereoscopic setting mode, the entire screen is alternately arranged with a right image which is an image for the right eye of the observer (player) and a left image which is an image for the left eye of the observer (player). This is a mode in which the observer (player) can see the entire screen in three dimensions. The image of the entire screen designated by this screen stereoscopic setting mode is three-dimensionally depicted in a three-dimensional manner that is raised (protruded) in front of the display area of the screen. When the stereoscopic setting mode is specified, it is necessary to further provide a switch liquid crystal behind the liquid crystal panel provided in various display devices such as the effect display device 1600. In this switch liquid crystal, a plurality of band-shaped parallax barriers having a predetermined width extending in the vertical direction corresponding to the strips constituting the TFT liquid crystal panel are arranged in a row in the left-right direction at predetermined intervals. It is a liquid crystal display, and the parallax barrier can be controlled to be transparent or opaque so that it can act as an optical shutter by switching between them. When the disparity barrier is controlled to be transparent, the illumination light from the backlight arranged behind the switch liquid crystal is uniformly illuminated by the TFT liquid crystal, whereas the disparity barrier is controlled to be opaque. If so, the illumination light from the backlight arranged on the rear side of the switch liquid crystal display is separated by the discriminant barrier. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be configured to directly control the parallax barrier of the switch liquid crystal to control it in a transparent state or an opaque state. Further, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be configured to directly control the parallax barrier of the switch liquid crystal by including the information for controlling the parallax barrier of the switch liquid crystal in the transparent state or the opaque state in the above-mentioned drawing data.

Further, for example, to briefly explain the grayscale setting mode, the grayscale setting mode specifies one sprite added by the object addition command and has a grayscale bit width (8 bits) for this one sprite. , 16 bits) is a mode in which a value for setting can be specified. Setting the grayscale bit width to 8 bits converts the image to an 8-bit wide grace scale, while setting the grayscale bit width to 16 bits converts the image to a 16-bit wide grace scale. The sprite or the entire screen converted to grayscale by this grayscale setting mode will be depicted in two dimensions.

Further, for example, to briefly explain the monochrome 2 gradation setting mode, in the monochrome 2 gradation setting mode, one sprite added by the object addition command is specified, and two monochrome colors are assigned to this one sprite. This mode allows you to specify a value to set. As the two monochrome colors, white and black can be specified, white and red can be specified, and green and black can be specified. These two colors are designated as full colors with a 24-bit width having 8 bits each for red (R), green (G), and blue (B). The sprite or the entire screen set to monochrome 2 gradation by this monochrome 2 gradation setting mode is depicted in 2D.

As described above, as the mode for three-dimensional depiction, a transmittance setting mode, an oil painting style installation mode, and a stereoscopic vision setting mode are prepared as described above. On the other hand, as the mode for drawing two dimensions, since one sprite added by the object addition command is processed in a plane, the noise addition setting mode, the mosaic setting mode, and the sumi-e described above are described. A wind setting mode, a gray scale setting mode, a monochrome 2 gradation setting mode, and the like are prepared. In addition, sprites for which no arrangement (adaptation processing (crafting processing)) is set by the object processing command for one sprite added by the object addition command are flat figures (pictures, photos, sentences, values, and figures). Etc.) and is depicted in two dimensions.

The object deletion command is a command for deleting one sprite added by the object addition command. Specify the add object command and specify the value of the sprite index of one sprite added by the add object command in the parameter. When one sprite specified by the object deletion command and parameter is deleted, the value of the specified sprite index and the corresponding value of the sprite index registered immediately before deletion are shifted by one. Becomes smaller. For example, if eight sprites have already been added as multiple sprites by the object addition command, the sprite index value is in a state where values 0 to 7 are assigned and registered, and the object deletion command is issued. If you instruct and specify the value 5 which is the value of the sprite index of the sprite added by the sixth object addition command in the parameter, one sprite with the value of the sprite index will be deleted and the sprite index will be deleted. The value 6 of the sprite index, which is larger than the value of the sprite index registered immediately before the value and the corresponding value to be deleted, and the value of the value 7 are shifted by one and the value becomes smaller, the value 5 and the value 6 Will be re-registered as.

The object replacement command is a command for replacing one sprite already added by the object addition command with another sprite when there are a plurality of sprites already added by the object addition command. Instruct the object swap command and specify the values of the two sprite indexes as parameters. When two sprites to be swapped are specified by the object swap command and the parameter, the values of the two sprite indexes are swapped with each other. For example, if eight sprites have already been added as multiple sprites by the object addition command, the sprite index value is assigned from the value to the value 7 and registered, and the object replacement command is executed. Instruct the parameter to have one sprite added by the first object addition command (the sprite index value of the first sprite added by the first object addition command is a value of 0) and the fifth object addition command. If you specify one sprite added by (the value of the sprite index of one sprite added by the fifth object addition command is a value of 4), and one sprite added by the first object addition command, The value of the sprite index is changed from the value 0 to the value 4 and re-registered, and the value of the sprite index of one sprite added by the fifth object addition command is changed from the value 4 to the value 0 and re-registered. It will be replaced with each other. As a result, the context of the first sprite added by the object addition command and the fifth sprite added by the object addition command are reversed.

The object replacement command is a command for replacing one sprite already added by the object addition command with another one sprite. Instruct the object replacement command to specify one sprite added by the object addition command and another sprite (one replacement sprite) in the parameter. The value of the sprite index is not changed by the object replacement command and the parameter, only the sprite is replaced. For example, if eight sprites have already been added as multiple sprites by the object addition command, the sprite index value is assigned from the value to the value 7 and registered, and the object replacement command is executed. Specify one sprite added by the 8th object addition command (the value of the sprite index of one sprite added by the 8th object addition command is a value of 7) and another sprite (replacement) in the parameters. If you specify (one sprite for), the value 7 which is the value of the sprite index is not changed, and only the sprite is replaced. As a result, if eight sprites have already been added as multiple sprites by the object addition command, the eighth sprite added by the object addition command will be placed and displayed in the foreground side. Therefore, one sprite arranged and displayed on the foremost side is replaced with another sprite (one sprite for replacement), so that, for example, when a number is used as a sprite, a countdown or a count is performed. It can be a screen having an area to be up.

The 1-frame end command is a command for instructing all the configurations of the screen data of 1 frame. The one-frame end command is a single command that does not require parameters to be set.

Next, an example in which commands are arranged as one frame of screen data will be briefly described. As described above, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data, from the first screen data each time a V blank signal is input. The screen data of one frame at a time, that is, one frame is output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Arrangement, movement, arrangement, and the like of sprites are performed in the work area provided in the built-in VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a based on the screen data of one frame, and the sprite data of each sprite is created. Then, the data superimposed as one screen from the sprite data of each sprite is written to the area (area for drawing data generation) of the built-in VRAM corresponding to the channels CH1 to CH4 of the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a. ..

Here, the configuration of one frame of screen data that defines the screen displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 will be briefly described. As the sprites described here, one sprite may be composed of one image data, or one sprite may be composed of a plurality of image data. The arrangement, movement, arrangement, etc. of sprites are performed based on the screen data of this one frame in the work area provided in the built-in VRAM corresponding to the channel CH1 of the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the sprite data of each sprite is created. .. Then, in this work area, the data superimposed as one screen for drawing from the sprite data of each sprite to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is in the area of the built-in VRAM corresponding to the channel CH1 of the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Drawing data is generated by being written. The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is drawn (displayed) in the display area of the effect display device 1600 as a screen as shown in FIG. 194 (a) described later, for example.

For example, one frame of screen data that defines a screen as shown in FIG. 194 (d) described later, which does not perform grayscale effect of switching from a full-color image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to a grayscale image, this grayscale. The one-frame screen data that defines the screen as shown in FIG. 194 (s), which will be described later, is actually displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the variable display by starting the variable display of the decorative symbol described later. Since it is drawn, the screen data of one frame on this screen is arranged in the hundreds or thousands of lines from the first line (first line) of the screen data, but here, for convenience of explanation, one frame. Assuming that the screens are arranged from the first line of the screen data of the above, the screen as shown in FIG. 194 (d) described later without performing the grayscale effect and the screen as shown with FIG. , Explained below. Further, since the same command is arranged a plurality of times in the screen data, for convenience of explanation, the command will be followed by a number and will be described below.

The effect display device 1600 has the origin coordinate (the origin of the X coordinate and the origin of the Y coordinate) at the upper left corner when the display area is viewed from the front, and the X coordinate increases from the origin coordinate to the right and the origin. An XY space is set in which the Y coordinate increases downward from the coordinates and the lower right corner of the display area is the maximum coordinate (maximum value of the X coordinate, maximum value of the Y coordinate) when viewed from the front. ..

A screen as shown in FIG. 194 (d), which will be described later, without performing the gray scale effect will be described. First, as the order of sprites arranged on the front side from the sprite arranged on the innermost side, the object addition command 1 is arranged on the first line of the screen data of one frame and is specified as a parameter. Information (the name of the background image or the pointer indicating the address where the background image is stored) of the background image (background image 1640 in FIG. 194 (d) described later) is arranged as one sprite information to be added. .. This background image is composed of image data created in advance as one background image (note that the background image may be configured by arranging drawing data of a plurality of original images). As a result, a value 0 (zero) is automatically assigned to the value of the sprite index and registered as a number for identifying the background image.

The object addition command 2 is arranged on the second line of the screen data of one frame, and the first reserved image (red color in FIG. 194 (d) described later) is specified as one sprite information to be added as a parameter. The information (the name of the reserved image or the pointer indicating the address where the reserved image is stored) of the first reserved display 1655a) is arranged. As a result, the value 1 is automatically assigned and registered as the value of the sprite index as the number for identifying the first reserved image. The object addition command 3 is arranged on the third line of the screen data of one frame, and the second reserved image (the second having white color in FIG. 194 (d) described later) as one sprite information to be added to the parameter. The information of the hold display 1655b) (the name of the hold image or the pointer indicating the address where the hold image is stored) is arranged. As a result, the value 2 is automatically assigned and registered as the value of the sprite index as the number for identifying the second reserved image. The object addition command 4 is arranged on the fourth line of the screen data of one frame, and the first symbol image (left decorative symbol 1650a in FIG. 194 (d) described later) is used as one sprite information to be added to the parameter. The information of the symbol 4) to be stopped and displayed (the name of the reserved image or the pointer indicating the address where the reserved image is stored) is arranged. As a result, the value 3 is automatically assigned and registered as the value of the sprite index as the number for identifying the first symbol image. The object addition command 5 is arranged on the fifth line of the screen data of one frame, and the second symbol image (the intermediate decorative symbol 1650b in FIG. 194 (d) described later) is used as one sprite information to be added to the parameter. Information (the name of the reserved image or the pointer indicating the address where the reserved image is stored) of the symbol 5) to be stopped and displayed is arranged. As a result, the value 4 is automatically assigned and registered as the value of the sprite index as the number for identifying the second symbol image. The object addition command 6 is arranged on the sixth line of the screen data of one frame, and the third symbol image (right decorative symbol 1650c in FIG. 194 (d) described later) is used as one sprite information to be added to the parameter. The information of the symbol 6) to be stopped and displayed (the name of the reserved image or the pointer indicating the address where the reserved image is stored) is arranged. As a result, the value 5 is automatically assigned and registered as the value of the sprite index as the number for identifying the third symbol image.

By setting the value of the sprite index in this way, the third symbol image having a large sprite index value is arranged on the foremost side, and the second symbol image, the first symbol image, and the first symbol image are arranged toward the rear. 2 The reserved image, the first reserved image, and the background image are arranged in this order (the background image having the smallest sprite index value is the innermost image).

The object movement command 1 is placed on the 7th line of the screen data of 1 frame, and the value 0, which is the value of the sprite index of the background image specified as a parameter, the coordinates, and the size (width, height). ) Is placed. The object movement command 2 is placed on the 8th line of the screen data of 1 frame, and the value 1, the coordinate, and the size (width,) which are the values of the sprite index of the first reserved image specified as parameters are arranged. Height), is arranged. The object movement command 3 is placed on the 9th line of the screen data of one frame, and the value 2, the coordinates, and the size (width,) which are the values of the sprite index of the second reserved image specified as parameters are arranged. Height), is arranged. The object movement command 4 is arranged on the 10th line of the screen data of one frame, and the value 3, the coordinate, and the size (width,) which are the values of the sprite index of the first symbol image specified as parameters are arranged. Height), is arranged. The object movement command 5 is arranged on the 11th line of the screen data of one frame, and the value 4, the coordinate, and the size (width,) which are the values of the sprite index of the second symbol image specified as parameters are arranged. Height), is arranged. The object movement command 6 is placed on the 12th line of the screen data of one frame, and the value 5, the coordinate, and the size (width,) which are the values of the sprite index of the third symbol image specified as parameters are arranged. Height), is arranged. The 1-frame end command 1 is arranged on the 13th line of the 1-frame screen data, and conveys that the configuration of the 1-frame screen data is instructed.

As a result, the first symbol image, the second symbol image, the third symbol image, the first reserved image, and the second reserved image are arranged in the display area of the effect display device 1600 without interfering with each other. A screen of a full-color image as shown in FIG. 194 (d), which will be described later, without performing a gray scale effect is displayed.

Next, a screen as shown in FIG. 194 (s), which will be described later, for performing a gray scale effect will be described. The first line of the screen data of one frame to the twelfth line of the screen data of one frame are the screen data of one frame constituting the screen as shown in FIG. 194 (d) described later without performing the above-mentioned gray scale effect. Since they are the same, the description is omitted, and the contents of the 13th to 19th lines of the screen data of one frame will be described below.

Of the contents of the 13th to 19th lines of the screen data of this 1 frame, the contents of the 13th to 18th lines are not actually incorporated in the screen data of the 1 frame in advance, and a grayscale effect is produced. Peripheral control between the 12th and 13th lines of the above-mentioned 1-frame screen data among the 1st line of the 1-frame screen data to the 13th line of the 1-frame screen data when not performed. The CPU of the IC1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC1510a to arrange (adjustment processing (working processing)) independently selected in real time. Specifically, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not to perform the gray scale effect by lottery, and when the gray scale effect is performed, the above-mentioned one-frame screen data when the gray scale effect is not performed is performed. Select the grayscale setting mode as an original arrangement (adaptation processing (crafting processing)) of the contents from the 13th line to the 18th line following the 12th line of the screen data of the 1st line to the 1st frame. Instruct the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

When performing a grayscale effect, the CPU of the peripheral control IC1510a first selects the grayscale setting mode as an arrangement (adaptation processing (crafting processing)), and the content of the 13th line of the screen data of one frame is object processing. Along with the placement of command 1, the value 0, which is the value of the sprite index of the background image specified as a parameter, and the grayscale setting mode, bit width as an arrangement (adaptation processing (crafting processing)) for one specified sprite. (16 bits), is arranged. The object processing command 2 is arranged in the content of the 14th line of the screen data of one frame, and the value 1 which is the value of the sprite index of the first reserved image specified as a parameter and one sprite to be specified. A grayscale setting mode and a bit width (16 bits) are arranged as an arrangement (adaptation processing (working processing)) for. The object processing command 3 is arranged in the content of the 15th line of the screen data of one frame, and the value 2 which is the value of the sprite index of the second reserved image specified as a parameter and one sprite to be specified. A grayscale setting mode and a bit width (16 bits) are arranged as an arrangement (adaptation processing (working processing)) for. In the content of the 16th line of the screen data of one frame, the object processing command 4 is arranged, the value 3 which is the value of the sprite index of the first symbol image specified as a parameter, and one sprite to be specified. A grayscale setting mode and a bit width (16 bits) are arranged as an arrangement (adaptation processing (working processing)) for. In the content of the 17th line of the screen data of one frame, the object processing command 5 is arranged, and the value 4 which is the value of the sprite index of the second symbol image specified as a parameter, and one sprite to be specified. A grayscale setting mode and a bit width (16 bits) are arranged as an arrangement (adaptation processing (working processing)) for. In the content of the 18th line of the screen data of one frame, the object processing command 6 is arranged, the value 5 which is the value of the sprite index of the third symbol image specified as a parameter, and one sprite to be specified. A grayscale setting mode and a bit width (16 bits) are arranged as an arrangement (adaptation processing (working processing)) for. On the 19th line of the 1-frame screen data, the 1-frame end command 1 which is the content of the 13th line of the above-mentioned 1-frame screen data when the grayscale effect is not performed is arranged, and the 1-frame screen is arranged. It tells you that you have instructed all the data composition.

As a result, the first symbol image, the second symbol image, the third symbol image, the first reserved image, and the second reserved image are arranged in the display area of the effect display device 1600 without interfering with each other. Grayscale effect is not performed. While using the same screen data as the screen data of one frame constituting the screen as shown in FIG. 194 (d) described later, grayscale is specified by specifying the object processing command corresponding to the grayscale setting mode. A screen of a grayscale-converted image as shown in FIG. 194 (s), which will be described later, is displayed.

[8. Ground wire system]
As described above, the frame grounding substrate 559 shown in FIG. 86 can once collect electromagnetic noise generated in various places and ground (earth) to the island equipment of the game hall. Here, the system of the ground wire by the frame ground substrate 559 will be described with reference to FIG. 172. 172 is a diagram showing the configuration of the frame grounding board 559, FIG. 172 (a) is a side view of the frame grounding board 559, and FIG. 172 (b) is a mounting surface of the frame grounding board 559, FIG. 172 ( c) is a circuit diagram of the frame ground board 559, and FIG. 172 (d) is a table showing a description of each ground terminal provided on the frame ground board 559. As shown in FIG. 172 (a), the frame ground board 559 has its mounting surface facing downward (that is, the connector insertion ports of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are facing downward). It is housed and mounted inside the substrate housing portion 551aa formed on the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 shown in FIG. 86 (b).

As shown in FIG. 172 (b), the frame ground board 559 has ground terminals ECN1, ECN5, ECN4, and ECN2 arranged in a row from the right side to the left side along the upper side thereof, and the center of the left side thereof. The lower ground terminal ECN3 is arranged. Briefly explaining the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, as shown in FIG. 172 (d), the ground terminal ECN1 is provided as an interface ground on the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 94. It is electrically connected to the connection terminal via the interface ground wire, and the ground terminal ECN2 is electrically connected to the ground terminal ECN2 via the ground connection terminal and the island equipment ground wire in the island equipment of the game hall as the island equipment ground. The ground terminal ECN3 is connected to the ball tank 552 (specifically, outside the side wall of the ball tank 552 near the substrate accommodating portion 551aa) as a ball tank ground as a ball tank ground. One end of the ball tank ground wire is attached by a metal screw (not shown), and the other end of the ball tank ground wire is electrically connected. The ground terminal ECN4 is shown in FIG. 81 as a main body frame metal ground. One end of the main body frame metal ground wire is attached to the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 (specifically, the upper side of the main body frame reinforcing frame 530) in the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 by a metal screw (not shown). The other end of the main body frame metal ground wire is electrically connected, and the ground terminal ECN5 is provided as a power supply ground on the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 95. It is electrically connected to the connection terminal via the power supply ground wire.

In the circuit of the frame ground board 559, as shown in FIG. 172 (c), the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER1, and the other end of the resistor ER1 is used as the power supply ground. The ground terminal ECN5, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground, and the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground are each electrically connected, and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER2. At the same time, the other end of the resistor ER2 is electrically connected to the ground terminal ECN5 as the power supply ground, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground, and the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground. That is, the other end of the resistor ER1 and the other end of the resistor ER2 are electrically connected. In this embodiment, 510 ohms (Ω) and 2 watts (W) are used as the resistors ER1 and ER2.

The electromagnetic noise flowing through the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground is guided to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire, and is removed, and is grounded as the ball tank ground. The electromagnetic noise flowing through the terminal ECN3 is guided to the ground of the island equipment in the game hall via the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire, and is removed, and flows to the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground. The electromagnetic noise is removed by being guided to the ground of the island equipment in the game hall via the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire, and the electromagnetic noise flowing through the earth terminal ECN5 as the power supply ground is the island equipment. It is guided to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed via the ground terminal ECN2 as the ground and the island equipment ground wire.

As shown in FIG. 82, a ball tank 552, a payout unit 560, and the like are attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. The ball tank 552 is supplied with the game ball B from the island facility of the game hall, and the game ball B is supplied from the ball tank 552 to the payout unit 560. The game ball B is polished in the island equipment of the game hall or rubs against each other in the circulation between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, and is charged and electrostatically discharged to emit electromagnetic noise. Therefore, static electricity tends to accumulate in the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where the game ball B can be retained and the surrounding area thereof.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the frame grounding substrate 559 is arranged in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate, and as a result of the tendency for static electricity to accumulate, the ball tank 552 and the payout unit are strongly affected by electromagnetic noise. In contrast to the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 which is in the vicinity of the unit 560, in the frame grounding board 559, the ground terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground and the main body frame metal The ground terminal ECN4 as the ground and the ground terminal ECN2 as the ground are used to suppress the instantaneous discharge of high voltage by gradually flowing and attenuating electromagnetic noise through the resistors ER1 and ER2, respectively. It is possible to lead to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the ground wire. In other words, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 or the payout unit 560, where static electricity tends to accumulate, is used as the frame ground called the frame ground from the frame ground board 559 via the ball tank 552 or the metal body frame reinforcement frame 530. By guiding to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall, the electromagnetic noise invading from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 can be sent to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall to be removed.

On the other hand, when electromagnetic noise enters the cover body 1501 and / or the base body 1502 constituting the peripheral control board box 1505 shown in FIG. 168, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board are used. It invades the ground (GND) line of 1530, flows into the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630, and is the ground terminal as the power supply ground in the frame ground board 559 from the ground connection terminal of the power supply board 630 via the power supply ground wire. It flows to ECN5 and is removed from the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground by being guided to the ground of the island equipment in the game hall via the island equipment ground wire. In other words, the cover body 1501 and / or the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The electromagnetic wave noise that enters through the base body 1502 leads the cover body 1501 and / or the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall as a circuit ground called a circuit ground. Electromagnetic wave noise that invades through the game hall can be removed by flowing it to the ground of the island equipment in the game hall.

In the present embodiment, among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground are in a region strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise as described above. Since it corresponds to (around it), a large ground terminal is adopted, and as described above, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground collects electromagnetic noise flowing into the frame ground board 559 in the game hall. A large ground terminal is used because it is guided to the ground of the island equipment and removed. The ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 that employ this large ground terminal are squares with a cross-sectional shape of 1.14 mm on each side, and have a rated current of 7A (when using AC / DC, AWG # 18) and a rated voltage: It has a general specification of 250V (AC / DC) and applicable current range: AWG # 22 to # 18, and its height is 13.4 mm as shown in FIG. 172 (a) (earth terminal ECN2 to 2). When the housing corresponding to the ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 18.6 mm).

On the other hand, the electromagnetic noise flowing into the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground and the ground terminal ECN5 as the power supply ground is smaller than the above-mentioned ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4, and the current is small. As for the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5, small ground terminals are adopted. The ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 that employ this small ground terminal are squares with a cross-sectional shape of the terminal having a side of 0.64 mm, and have a rated current of 3A (when using AC / DC, AWG # 22) and a rated voltage: It has a general specification of 250V (AC / DC) and applicable current range: AWG # 30 to # 22, and its height is 7 mm as shown in FIG. 172 (a) (ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5). When the corresponding housing is inserted, the mounting height will be 9.8 mm).

In the present embodiment, each ground wire (island equipment ground wire, ball tank ground wire, main body frame ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. Since the current due to electromagnetic noise is larger than each ground wire (interface ground wire, power supply ground wire), each ground wire electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 (island equipment ground wire, ball tank) The thickness of the ground wire (ground wire, main body frame ground wire) is thicker than the thickness of each ground wire (interface ground wire, power supply ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 172 (a), 1.6 mm is adopted as the plate thickness of the frame grounding substrate 559.

In this way, the electromagnetic noise generated in various places is once collected on the frame ground board 559 and guided from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island equipment in the game hall to be removed. The substrate 559 has a function of exerting a static elimination action.

Further, since the electromagnetic noise generated in various places is once collected on the frame ground board 559 and guided from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island equipment in the game hall to be removed, the pachinko machine 1 is used. The ground wire (wiring) from the ball tank 552 arranged on the upper side is routed to the power supply board 630 arranged on the lower side of the pachinko machine 1, and the electromagnetic noise is once collected on the power supply board 630 to form the island facility of the game hall. Compared to the configuration that leads to the ground and removes it, the wiring of the ground wire (wiring) becomes extremely easy.

Further, since the external terminal board 558 and the frame ground board 559 are configured to be arranged in the board accommodating portion 551aa of the payout base 551 in a state of being close to each other, a plurality of electric wires connected to the external terminal board 558 are connected. Terminals 558a (A plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, the payout base unit 550 is provided with 10 external terminals called external terminals XCN1 to XCN10 arranged in a row from the left side to the right side when viewed from the back).) ) And the hall computer provided in the game hall, respectively, with wiring, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground on the frame ground board 559, and the ground connection terminal provided in the island equipment in the game hall. , Can be performed as a series of work, such as electrically connecting the island equipment ground wire (wiring), which can contribute to the improvement of workability.

Further, since the frame ground board 559 is configured so that it can be arranged in the board accommodating portion 551aa of the payout base 551, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground of the frame ground board 559 and the island equipment of the game hall can be used. Various control boards (for example, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game) provided with the island equipment ground wire (wiring) that electrically connects the provided ground connection terminal to the game board 5. Various control boards because they can be arranged so as to be separated from the peripheral control board 1510 capable of controlling the progress of the peripheral data, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530, etc.). It is possible to eliminate adverse effects on the electronic components (including the connector) provided in the above.

Further, by arranging the frame grounding substrate 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates, the ball tank 552, which is strongly affected by electromagnetic noise, and the main body frame 4 in the vicinity of the payout unit 560. The metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame base unit 500, and the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground in the frame grounding board 559, respectively. The length of the electrically connected ground wire (ball tank ground wire, main body frame metal ground wire) should be made extremely short, and electromagnetic noise should be removed by guiding it from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island equipment in the game hall. Can be done.

Further, by arranging the frame grounding board 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 where static electricity easily accumulates and the dispensing unit 560, the ball tank 552 where static electricity easily accumulates and the frame grounding board 559 which exerts a static elimination action are electrically connected. The length of the ball tank ground wire (wiring) is the length of the metal ground wire (wiring) of the main body frame that electrically connects the metal main body frame reinforcement frame 530 and the frame ground board 559 that exerts the static elimination effect, and the power supply. The length of the power supply ground wire (wiring) that electrically connects the board 630 and the frame grounding board 559 that exerts the static elimination action, and the interface that electrically connects the interface board 635 and the frame grounding board 559 that exerts the static elimination action. It can be configured to be the shortest compared to the length of the ground wire (wiring).

Further, by arranging the frame grounding substrate 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates, the ball tank 552, which is strongly affected by electromagnetic noise, and the main body frame 4 in the vicinity of the payout unit 560. In contrast to the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame base unit 500, and the ground terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as a main body frame metal ground in the frame grounding board 559, Although a large current flows, it is reduced by the resistors ER1 and ER2 of the frame ground board 559, so that the operation of the power supply board 630 is not affected. It can be removed by guiding it to the ground of the island equipment in the game hall via the ground wire.

Incidentally, as previously disclosed in, each ground is once integrated on the power supply board arranged on the CR unit side at the bottom of the main body frame so that the power supply AC24V of the CR unit can be easily supplied, and the grounds are once integrated via the power supply board. A gaming machine that is connected to the ground of the island equipment and grounded has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-120593 (paragraph [0335], FIG. 68, FIG. 69)). Since the power supply board is generally heavy, it is often placed below in the gaming machine. Therefore, in order to consolidate the ground on the power supply board, it is necessary to route the ground wire from the ball tank on the upper part of the gaming machine, the prize ball device, or the like toward the lower power supply board. By routing the ground wire in this way, electromagnetic noise may be transmitted to various control boards existing in the middle and have an unexpected effect. In addition, since the ground wire is concentrated on the power supply board, if any problem occurs on the power supply board, the ground may be affected, or conversely, current may flow through the ground wire, which may affect the operation of the power supply board. there were. In addition, when the grounding point of the island equipment is above the gaming machine, it may be complicated because it is necessary to route the ground wire collected by the power supply board from the bottom to the top again.

[9. Game content]
The content of the game by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated. However, the game board 5 is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the more the handle is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the striking can be. That is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball B abuts on the obstacle nails N. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movements can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a wind turbine (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N while abutting against the plurality of obstacle nails N. It will flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2502 to the stage 2503.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth from side to side, and is discharged from the center in the left-right direction to the front. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2503, it is received by the first start port 2002 with a high probability because the portion is located directly above the first start port 2002. When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first starting port 2002 or the general winning opening 2001 of the starting port unit 2100.

By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it is moved toward the center side in the left-right direction by the side slope 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Alternatively, it may be accepted by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed strike). , It is discharged from the right guide passage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400. Below the downstream end of the right guide passage 2510, the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are provided, and pass through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

Then, when the game ball B hit to the right passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and if the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the second starting port is closed. The 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are transferred from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. It will be paid out.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example, 0). 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time.

If the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit") that is advantageous to the player. The lottery of the special lottery result to generate is performed. Then, the lottery special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). The special lottery results drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include "loss", "15R jackpot A", "15R jackpot B", and the like. ..

The special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is the result of the special lottery that causes an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the special fluctuation time has elapsed, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball B can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the large winning opening 2005 when the large winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is received from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. The game ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 allows the game ball B to be accepted, by accepting the game ball B in the large winning opening 2005, a large number of game balls B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained. can.

When the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted, or a predetermined time to the big winning opening 2005. An opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) in which the game ball B is in an unacceptable closed state when any of the conditions of accepting the number (for example, 10) of the game balls B is satisfied. Repeat a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, in the case of "15R jackpot", 15 rounds are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In the "big hit", when the big winning opening 2005 is open due to the big hit game state, the game ball received in the big winning opening 2005 is distributed to the second entrance 2008 by the distribution piece 2415, and the big hit game is played. After the end of the state, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous gaming state. This ST is a probability change that changes the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" is drawn during a predetermined specific number of fluctuations, and a time saving that changes the display time of a production image that suggests a special lottery result. It maintains the state of.

In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the period from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the lottery special lottery result due to the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. It is put on hold. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off a plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lighting LEDs.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the suggestion of the special lottery result is performed as the effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the effect display device 1600 is a pattern sequence in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and each pattern sequence is varied to display the pattern. Are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the three picture rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three picture rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, 15R jackpot game A, 15R jackpot game B, etc.) is generated according to the special lottery result.

It should be noted that the time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern sequence fluctuates and the confirmed image is displayed). It is different from the time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is performed according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type production, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated or vibrated by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be assisted, the rotation operation can be hindered, and the operation button elevating drive motor can be used. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised to stand out by 367, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, each decorative board provided in the game board 5, front effect unit 2600, back unit 3000, back effect unit 3100, and back inside. It is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, etc. by appropriately using the effect unit 3200, the back right effect unit 3300, the back top effect unit 3400, the back bottom effect unit 3500, the back front effect unit 3600, and the like. It is possible to entertain the player by the production, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type production in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, the correct operation is performed when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation to be operated. Notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is required, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect display device 1600 may display to that effect.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the table effect unit of the table unit 2000 on the game board 5 according to the lottery special lottery result. 2600, back-to-back effect unit 3100, back-to-back effect unit 3200, back-right effect unit 3300, back-up effect unit 3400, back-to-back effect unit 3500, back-front effect unit 3600, etc. , Movable effects, display effects, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[10. Main control board control process]
Next, an example of the control process executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 173 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 173 (a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment is first stored in various registers or RAM as the process of step S1 on condition that the RAM clear switch is operated. Initialize the data that has been created. The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. Further, the RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 according to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the power-on, and the main control MPU inputs the clear signal when the power is turned on. When it is determined, the initialization process (step S1) is executed to initialize the data stored in the RAMs of various registers and the main control MPU.

Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed in which information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) is stored in the RAM of the main control MPU. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). , Execute a recovery process to restore the state according to the information. Further, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

Next, as the process of step S2, the random number, which is the number to be updated within the predetermined numerical range, is updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and the special symbol used for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. Reach with the variable random number used for the lottery process for the predetermined time (variable time) required for the variable display control of, and the variable display of the decorative symbol executed by the effect display device 1600 in response to the variable display of the above special symbol. (The left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and the middle decorative symbol is not yet stopped and displayed, or the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are all displayed in a variable manner so that they are the same symbol. Reach random number used for lottery processing to determine whether or not to perform), and symbol random number used for lottery processing to determine the type of big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the above special random number (first It is equipped with a random number counter that holds random numbers such as a random number (a symbol random number, a second symbol random number), a random number (ordinary random number) used for a lottery process for winning a hit that triggers the operation of the second starting door 2411, and the like. ..

In this example, the same reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first starting port 2002 is started and the starting prize is won, the second starting port 2004 is started and won. Even in this case, the reach random number is configured to be acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the execution ratio of the reach effect is determined by acquiring from counters that have different ranges of random numbers that update the reach random number. It may be different, or it corresponds to the first reach judgment table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol as the reach judgment table to be compared with the acquired reach random numbers, and is different from the first reach judgment table. By providing a second reach determination table in which a determination value is set, the execution ratio of the reach effect may be different.

In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed so that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) that are not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 ms.

FIG. 173 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 173 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 2401, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, the big winning opening sensor 2403, the first inlet sensor 2404, and the second inlet sensor. Detection signals from various switches such as 2405 and the general winning opening sensor 3001 are input. Next, as the process of step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of this step S13, among the above-mentioned random numbers, the random numbers (special random numbers, ordinary random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol is stopped are updated in the random number counter. A counter operation is performed.

Then, after the random numbers are updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process relating to the display mode when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped as the process of step S14. To execute. This special symbol process process will be described later, but here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, first special symbol process flag, first) indicating the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU. (Ii) The corresponding process will be selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process for winning a hit that triggers the operation of the second start door 2411 as the process of step S15. Even in this normal symbol process process, the corresponding process is basically selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is configured to execute the lottery process so that the driving frequency of the second starting door 2411 becomes higher within a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state. (So-called time saving state). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased only within a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the time required for controlling the variation display of the normal symbol is shortened, and the lottery of the normal symbol is performed. When the result is a hit, the opening time of the second starting door 2411 is extended to realize such a time saving state.

Further, when the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is then subjected to the special symbol process process as the process of step S16. A process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed. Next, as the process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to, for example, the peripheral control board 1510 is performed.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is an information output process for outputting data such as hit information (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B) supplied to a hall management computer, for example, as the process of step S18. I do.

Next, as the process of step S19, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, the large winning opening sensor 2403, and the general winning opening sensor 3001. When the detection signals such as the above are in the ON state, a payout control command is output to the payout control board 633 so that the prize balls corresponding to those signals are paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 633 outputs a drive signal from the payout control unit 633a to the payout motor 584, and pays out the prize ball to the player.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then executes a storage process for checking an increase / decrease in the number of start storages as the process of step S20. Next, as the process of step S21, a test terminal process, which is a process of outputting a test signal so that the control state of the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that always operates is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24), this control ends. It becomes.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only the flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process process (step S14).

Assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is first driven by the first start port sensor 3002, as shown in FIG. 174. On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first start port 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the above random number counter and this is the first of the RAM. (I) Execute a first start port passing process such as storing in a special symbol hold storage area (step S32). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second start port sensor 2402 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second start port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the above random number. A second start port passage process such as acquiring from a counter and storing it in the second special symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S34).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is controlled is set (step S35), and if the jackpot executing flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. The jackpot control process (step S39) is executed. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is a mode suggesting "15R jackpot A". 15R A distribution piece 2415 that controls the opening and closing of the big winning opening 2005 according to the big hit game state A and distributes the game ball B accepted in the big winning opening 2005 to either the first entrance 2007 or the second entrance 2008. Drive control is performed, and a process of setting the game ball B to the effective state in the 15th round in which the game ball B can be distributed to the second entrance 2008 is executed. Further, when the mode suggesting "15R jackpot B", the opening and closing control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed according to the 15R jackpot gaming state B, and the game ball B accepted by the big winning opening 2005 is the first entrance. The distribution piece 2415 to be distributed to either 2007 or the second reception 2008 is driven and controlled, and a process of setting the game ball B to the valid state in the 15th round in which the game ball B can be distributed to the second reception 2008 is executed.

Here, the "valid state" and the "invalid state" will be described. First, in the present embodiment, the game ball B has an "effective state" as a state when the game ball B is received in the second entrance 2008. Here, the "valid state" is high after the end of the jackpot gaming state due to the acceptance of the game ball B in the second reception 2008 in the 15th round in which the game ball B can be distributed to the second reception 2008. It is a state that is allowed (enabled) to be controlled to a stochastic state. Therefore, by accepting the game ball B at the second entrance 2008 in the "valid state", the game ball B is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball B has an "invalid state" different from the "valid state" as a state in which the game ball B is not accepted in the second entrance 2008. Here, the "invalid state" is a state in which the game ball B is not accepted in the second entrance 2008 in principle, such as in the 1st to 14th rounds in which the game ball B is distributed to the first entrance 2007. (Ii) Even if the game ball B is accepted at the entrance 2008, it is not allowed (invalidated) to control the game ball B to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Therefore, even if the game ball B is accepted at the second entrance 2008 in the "invalid state", it is not controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. In addition, the "invalid state" enables the hall management side to be notified of information regarding the occurrence of such an abnormality when the game ball B is accepted at the second entrance 2008 due to an abnormality such as fraudulent activity. Therefore, it is set as a period during which it is monitored whether or not the game ball B is accepted at the second entrance 2008. In this embodiment, the game ball B is set to the "valid state" in a predetermined round (15th round) that enables the game ball B to be distributed to the second entrance 2008, and the game is played in the second entrance 2008. Whenever the ball B is accepted, it is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, although the "invalid state" is set in the predetermined rounds (1st to 14th rounds) in which the game ball B is not distributed to the second entrance 2008, it may be set in the "valid state". In this way, even if the "valid state" is set in all rounds during the jackpot game state, the game ball B is not accepted in the second entrance 2008 in principle in the 1st to 14th rounds, so 1 to 1 As in the case of setting the "invalid state" in the 14th round, it is important whether or not the game ball B is accepted in the second entrance 2008 in the 15th round set in the "valid state".

Further, in the big hit control process (step S39), after the opening control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed, each set process of the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving number counter is executed. The high probability flag is a flag indicating that the state is in a high probability state. During the execution of the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B), it is possible to distribute the game ball B to the second entrance 2008 in the 1st to 15th rounds in which the jackpot 2005 is opened. If the game ball B is accepted at the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round, the high probability flag is set because it is controlled to the high probability state (high probability time saving state) after the end of the big hit game state. Although it is set, if the game ball B is not accepted at the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round, it is controlled to a high probability state (high probability time saving state) after the end of the big hit game state. Since it does not, the high probability flag is not set. Then, when the high probability flag is set, the first special symbol stop processing or the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. The high probability flag is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown).

Further, the time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving state is reached, and is a big hit (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) that controls the time saving state (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state) after the end of the big hit gaming state. Set at the end of the based jackpot game state. Then, when the time saving flag becomes a big hit next time, or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes "0", the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 126 described later or the second special symbol stop not shown is shown. It is reset by the process.

Further, the time reduction counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of fluctuation displays of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuations of the time reduction state, and is a time reduction state (high probability) after the end of the jackpot game state. When the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B) controlled to the time saving state (low probability time saving state) is ended, the number of continuations of the time saving state is set, and the time saving number counter is set. , The counter value is counted down every time the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed until the counter value becomes "0", but when the next big hit occurs before the counter value becomes "0", FIG. 126 described later. It is reset by the first special symbol stop processing shown in (1) or the second special symbol stop processing (not shown) (counter value is returned to "0").

If the jackpot executing flag is not set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is "0". (Step S36), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S37), and the second special symbol is stored in the reserved storage area. On condition that the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S36), the second special symbol including the lottery process relating to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. The process process is executed (step S38). As described above, in this example, when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0", the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S32).

Now, assuming that the first start port sensor 3002 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball B has entered the first start port 2002 in the process of step S31, it is shown in FIG. 175. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S41.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires a counter value by the first special hold number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol hold storage area from the main control built-in RAM. Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is "4", which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S42). In the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S43 to S43 to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S45 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S44, each random number acquired in step S41 is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a display result of the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variation random number acquired in step S41. Whether or not to make a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( After executing the effect pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information (type of variation pattern) before starting the variation display according to the start winning prize (step S45), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S43 to S45, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the first hold storage number changes based on the game ball B entering the first start port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is first held. In addition to updating to correspond to the number of storages, a command (first holding number designation commands 0 to 4) for instructing the first number of reserved storages is set in the above storage process (step S20) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. It is designed to do. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the effect pre-determination process (step S45). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S41, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation. Whether or not a big hit is achieved by comparing with a random number, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S61).

Then, the specified pre-judgment information (whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. Depending on the type of the game effect to be played, the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of reserved storages (value of the pending number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process relating to the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first start port passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reserved storage number (first hold storage number). (1) The value of the special hold number counter) and the first special symbol pre-determination command according to (step S62).

Then, in the special symbol command control process (step S16), the pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and is stored corresponding to the first start port 2002 in which the start winning is generated. In addition to the number of reserved memories, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol based on the generated start prize is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, it is executed by the effect display device 1600. Peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before starting the variable display according to the start winning prize, such as whether to execute the reach effect as the game effect to be performed or the mode type of the game effect to be executed. Will be able to grasp.

When the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC 1510a stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing prior determination information regarding the variation display of the first special symbol.

Further, the first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved storage areas, and the peripheral control IC 1510a stores the first (earliest) pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Store in order from the area. Then, when the pre-determination command is received when the pre-determination information is stored in the n-th (n = 1-3) storage area, the pre-determination information notified to the n + 1-th (n = 1-3) storage area is received. Is stored and is stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the received first variation pattern command when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received. The determination information is discarded and the pre-judgment information stored in the Nth (N = 2-4) storage area is moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area (to the reserved storage area). Shift the stored pre-judgment information). As a result, the pre-judgment information of the first special symbol is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the hold for starting the variable display occurs, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-judgment information.

At the time when the fluctuation display control is put on hold in this way, the jackpot expectation degree (pseudo-winning probability) of the fluctuation display control is maintained even though the fluctuation display control is maintained in the unexecuted state (holding state). ) Will be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, for example, at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display of the hold display according to the hold digestion. ..

FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S34).

Now, assuming that the second start port sensor 2511 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball B has entered the second start port 2004 in the process of step S33, it is shown in FIG. 177. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the second hold storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) based on this counter value. ) Is determined to be "4" (step S52). In the process of step S52, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S53 to S53 to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S54, each random number acquired in step S51 is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

On the other hand, in the process of step S52, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S53 to S54, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the second reserved storage number changes based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is second-held. In addition to updating to correspond to the number of storages, a command (second hold number designation command 0 to 1) for instructing the number of second hold storages is set in the above storage process (step S20) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. It is designed to do. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 may execute the same effect pre-determination process as in step S45 in the first start port passage process after step S54. By replacing "first" with "second" in the description of FIG. 176, the effect pre-determination process in the second starting port passing process is realized.

FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S37). The first special symbol process process executed in step S37 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for determination. Since only the tables and tables are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S37 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. 1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Design normal processing (step S80)
2. 2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which the process of determining the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped. )
3. 3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed in the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol. First fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82) in which a lottery process or the like is performed.
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S83) that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. The mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing (step S84) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol so as to be performed.

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 173).

FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S80).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 179, first steps S101. As the process of, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is then stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU as the process of step S102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) is read from the RAM. .. Next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special hold number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stored in each storage area. Random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped are shifted by the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning prize are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a start prize is generated when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1-3) storage area, and the first one is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display control hold of the first special symbol occurs is identifiable and stored, and the hold of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (the earliest hold). become.

Then, as the process of step S105, a jackpot determination process, which is a lottery process for winning the jackpot, is performed based on the first special random number of the first special symbol read out. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), this process is terminated.

FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S105).

If the current gaming state is a high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state) (step S111), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 may be in the high-probability time shown in FIG. 181 (A). If the jackpot determination table is selected (step S112) and the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 181 (A) is selected (step S113) and selected. The big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S114).

The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 181 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and time saving state (low probability time saving state)). It is provided with a jackpot determination table at the time of low probability used for, and a jackpot determination table at the time of high probability used when the gaming state is a high probability time (high probability time saving state). Then, in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability, it matches the jackpot determination value indicating that one type of first special random number has won the jackpot, and the deviation determination indicating that the 299 types of first special random numbers are out of the above. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the values (big hit probability at low probability: 1/300). In the second special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process, the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number is compared with the first special random number. Similar to the low-probability jackpot determination table referenced for this, it matches the jackpot determination value indicating that one type of second special random number has won the jackpot, and 299 types of second special random numbers are out of the above. The above-mentioned second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that (the jackpot probability at the time of low probability: 1/300).

Further, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, 10 kinds of first special random numbers including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability match the jackpot determination value. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so that the 290 kinds of first special random numbers match the deviation determination value (big hit probability at high probability: 1/30). As described above, in this embodiment, in the high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state), the jackpot determination values indicating that the jackpot has been won are the low-probability time (normal state (low-probability non-time-saving state)) and the time-saving state (low). Probability time saving state)) is increased to 10 times. In the second special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process, the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number is compared with the first special random number. Similar to the high-probability jackpot judgment table referred to for, 10 types of second special random numbers including the same second special random number as the second special random number set in the low-probability jackpot judgment table will be the jackpot. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the jackpot judgment value indicating that the winner has been won and the loss judgment value indicating that the 290 types of second special random numbers are out of line (at the time of high probability). Big hit probability: 1/30).

When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison between the selected jackpot determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S115). ), The jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the jackpot is set, the process is terminated (step S116), and the selected jackpot determination table and the first special read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process are performed. If it is determined that the result is out of alignment as a result of comparison with the random number, the reach determination table (not shown) is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S117). Then, as a result of comparison between the reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S102, if it is determined that the reach is out of reach (step S118), a reach flag indicating that the fluctuation is reach is set and processing is performed. It ends (step S119).

FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 182, first. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S121).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 181 (B). (Step S122), the type of the jackpot is determined, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined (step S123). On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is not set in step S121, the first special symbol is determined to be an out-of-order symbol as the mode when the fluctuation is stopped (step S124).

As shown in FIG. 181 (B), a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) is stored in the symbol determination table in a form associated with each determination result (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). ing. In the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, the type of jackpot is determined by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the probability of determining the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the probability of determining the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different. ing.

In particular,
1.15R The big winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close according to the big hit game state A, and the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time in the 15th round (opening where the game ball B is difficult to enter. For example, 0. 5 seconds) and open for a long time (opening that allows the game ball B to enter (easily). For example, 20 seconds). If the game ball B is accepted at the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round, it is special after the end of the big hit game state. While the variable display of the symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is controlled to a high probability time saving state until it is executed 100 times, the game ball B is placed at the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round. If it is not accepted, the 15R jackpot A that controls the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) to a low probability time saving state until the variable display is executed 100 times after the end of the jackpot game state.
2.15R The opening and closing of the big winning opening 2005 is controlled according to the big hit game state B, and the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time in the 15th round (opening where the game ball B is difficult to enter. For example, 0. It is set to the valid state (a state in which the game ball B is accepted at the second entrance 2008 and is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state) at the time of 5 seconds), and is valid in the 15th round. If the game ball B is accepted at the second entrance 2008 during the state, it is high until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 100 times after the end of the jackpot game state. While controlling to the probability time reduction state, if the game ball B is not accepted at the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round, the special symbols (first special symbol and first special symbol and first) after the end of the jackpot game state. (2) One of the two types of jackpots, 15R jackpot B, which controls the variable display of the special symbol) to a low probability time saving state until it is executed 100 times, is determined.

In the 15R big hit game state A of this example, the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds) as the operation schedule of the big winning opening 2005 in the 15th round, and the predetermined time (4.5 seconds) is set as the interval time in the round. It is set to open the big prize opening 2005 for a long time (20 seconds) after the lapse of seconds). In addition, as the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 in the 15th round, when the short-time opening (0.5 seconds) of the large winning opening 2005 is started, the short-time operation (0.2 seconds) of the distribution piece 2415 is started. Then, when the long-time opening (20 seconds) of the large winning opening 2005 is started, the long-time operation (10 seconds) of the distribution pieces 2415 is started, and the second inlet 2008 is started during the operation period of the distribution pieces 2415. The game ball B is set to be acceptable. In addition, as a state setting schedule for the second entrance 2008 in the 15th round, an effective state (a state in which the game ball B is accepted in the second entrance 2008 and is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state). ) Is set.

On the other hand, in the 15R big hit game state B of this example, the big winning opening 2005 is set to open for a short time (0.5 seconds) as the operation schedule of the big winning opening 2005 in the 15th round. In addition, as the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 in the 15th round, when the short-time opening (0.5 seconds) of the large winning opening 2005 is started, the short-time operation (0.2 seconds) of the distribution piece 2415 is started. However, the game ball B is set to be acceptable at the second reception port 2008 during the operation period of the distribution piece 2415. In addition, as a state setting schedule for the second entrance 2008 in the 15th round, an effective state (a state in which the game ball B is accepted in the second entrance 2008 and is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state). ) Is set.

As described above, both the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B are in the valid state in the 15th round (the game ball B is accepted in the second entrance 2008, so that the high probability state is reached after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Although it is set to the state to be controlled), in the 15R big hit game state A, the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (20 seconds) when the big winning opening 2005 is opened for the second time in the 15th round. It is extremely easy for the game ball B to be accepted, and since the distribution piece 2415 is operated for a long time (10 seconds) during the period when the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (20 seconds), the large winning opening 2005 is used. It is extremely easy for the accepted game ball B to be distributed (accepted) to the second entrance 2008. In this way, in the 15R jackpot game state A, the probability that the game ball B will be accepted by the second entrance 2008 in the 15th round set to the valid state is extremely high, so that the high probability state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. The probability of doing so is also extremely high. On the other hand, in the 15R big hit game state B, since the big winning opening 2005 is only opened for a short time (0.5 seconds) in the 15th round, it is extremely difficult for the game ball B to be accepted in the big winning opening 2005, and further. Since the distribution piece 2415 is operated only for a short time (0.2 seconds) during the period when the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds), the game ball B accepted by the big winning opening 2005 is the second. It is extremely difficult to distribute (accept) to the entrance 2008. In this way, in the 15R jackpot game state B, the probability that the game ball B will be accepted by the second entrance 2008 in the 15th round set to the valid state is extremely low, so that the high probability state is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The probability of doing so is also extremely low.

As for the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415, the distribution piece 2415 is operated for a short time (0.2 seconds), and after a predetermined time (4.8 seconds) has elapsed, the distribution piece 2415 is opened for a long time (10). It has a single motion schedule set to (seconds), and the motion of such a distribution piece 2415 when starting the 15th round in the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B. I try to start the schedule. In this way, by setting the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 as a single operation schedule, the amount of data related to the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 is not increased as much as possible.

In the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B of this example, the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (20 seconds) as the operation schedule of the big winning opening 2005 in each of the 1st to 14th rounds. Is set to. Further, as the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 in each of the 1st to 14th rounds, the distribution piece 2415 is not operated, and the game ball B is not operated at the second reception 2008 but at the first reception 2007 during that period. Is set to be accepted. In addition, as a state setting schedule for the second entrance 2008 in each of the 1st to 14th rounds, an invalid state (in principle, the game ball B is not accepted in the second entrance 2008, and after the end of the big hit game state). It is set to a state that will not be controlled to a high probability state). In this way, in both the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, the game ball B is distributed to the second entrance 2008 when the big winning opening 2005 is opened as in the 15th round. It does not play a game of whether or not it is (accepted), but simply plays a game of whether or not the game ball B is accepted when the big winning opening 2005 is opened.

In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. Then, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the determination values is set to be different from that of the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, so that the determination ratio of each jackpot is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 181 (B), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, among the 15R jackpot A and the 15R jackpot B, the 15R jackpot A (15 rounds) which is relatively advantageous to the player. Distribution of 50 judgment values to the jackpot (big hit) where the probability that the game ball B is accepted at the second entrance 2008 during the valid state by the eye and the probability of controlling to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state is high). Is set, but 15R jackpot B, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player (the probability that the game ball B will be accepted at the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round is low, and the jackpot game state ends. Distribution of 50 determination values is set for a jackpot with a low probability of controlling to a high probability state later). On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, 65 determination values are set for the 15R jackpot A, which is relatively advantageous to the player, among the 15R jackpot A and the 15R jackpot B. On the other hand, 35 determination values are set for the 15R jackpot B, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. In this way, at the time of the big hit on the first special symbol side, since either the 15R big hit A or the 15R big hit B having different degrees of advantage of the player is determined, what kind of big hit is determined at the time of the first big hit? Can be noticed. Further, in the time saving state controlled after the end of the big hit game state, the game on the second special symbol side (the game that allows the game ball B to enter the second starting port 2004) is performed, but the second special. At the time of the big hit on the symbol side, the 15R big hit game A is decided with a higher probability than at the time of the big hit on the first special symbol side, so it is important to pay attention to how much prize ball amount can be obtained at the time of consecutive villas. can. Therefore, the game is not monotonous because the game characteristics change between the first big hit and the consecutive villas.

Further, when the type of the jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of the jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the 15R jackpot A is determined, the 15R jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and when the 15R jackpot B is determined, the 15R jackpot B symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when the 15R jackpot A is determined, the 15R jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as the process of step S125, any of these lottery results (type of jackpot, missed reach, or missed) is instructed (the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is specified). A determination result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results is set so that the instruction)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, as the process of step S126, this process ends when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82). The peripheral control IC 1510a starts variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command, and stops and displays in the order of left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol. The display control of the effect display device 1600 is performed.

Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a is a mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, and is 15R out of the jackpots related to the first special symbol from the received determination result notification command. When the jackpot A is specified, it is determined to be the 15R jackpot A symbol (combination of the same decorative symbols), and when the 15R jackpot B is specified, it is determined to be the 15R jackpot B symbol (common to the 15R jackpot A symbol) and varies. When the variation time specified from the pattern command elapses (at the end of the reach effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600. In this way, when the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is variable-stopped by either the 15R jackpot A symbol or the 15R jackpot B symbol, it can be determined from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that it is a jackpot. However, since a common symbol is used as the 15R jackpot A symbol and the 15R jackpot B symbol, it is not possible to discriminate between the 15R jackpot A and the 15R jackpot B.

Further, the peripheral control IC 1510a is a mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600. When the reach loss is specified from the received determination result notification command, the loss symbol accompanied by the reach. (Combination of decorative symbols that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative symbols are the same), and if the deviation is specified, the missing symbol without reach (combination of decorative symbols that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative symbols are the same). Is not the same), and the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600 when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect).

FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, the jackpot flag is set in the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 183. If so (step S141), the type of jackpot determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and the variation pattern table at the time of jackpot according to the current gaming state are selected (step S142) to reach. If the flag is set (step S143), the variation pattern table at the time of reach according to the current gaming state is selected (step S144), and if neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, normal. In the case of a loss (a loss that does not execute the reach effect), the variation pattern table at the time of the loss is selected (step S145).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S146), and the determination variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S147). Further, the main control MPU sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S148). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 for the fluctuation time determined in this way.

The fluctuation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). Further, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. It is stored in a form associated with each variable random number. Then, the main control MPU includes the selected variation pattern table from the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number, and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing. By comparing the above and acquiring the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. .. For example, among the reach effects, the super reach effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state is increased.

Further, when the variation display control of the first special symbol is started, the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is set so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) as the process of step S149. This process ends when the update is made.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of off, the fluctuation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second at the time of shortening is associated with the above special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol), but not. The variation pattern of the special symbol is set in such a form that the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds at the time reduction is associated with the above-mentioned special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol). That is, the special symbol is selected so that the time required for controlling the variation display of the special symbol is extremely short as compared with the variation pattern at the time of deviation selected at the time of non-time reduction. The fluctuation time information of the symbol is set.

FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation processing (step S83).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 184, first steps S171. As the process of, the variation timer in which the variation time according to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is set is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of this step S173, this process ends when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 185, first steps S181. As the process of, display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed, and the effect display device 1600 is used. A stop display command instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the counter value of the time reduction counter for which the time reduction flag is set and the number of continuations of the time reduction state is set is "0". (Step S183). Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time reduction counter (step S184), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous reduction counter is "0" (step S185). .. As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving flag is reset, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset (step S186). If it is determined in the process of step S183 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is "0", or if it is determined in the process of step S185 that the time reduction counter is not "0". At that point, the process proceeds to step S187.

When the jackpot flag is set (step S187), a jackpot start command indicating to start the jackpot gaming state is set (step S188), and the jackpot game state is started (big hit round start command is set). The waiting time (the period for displaying the start of the big hit game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S189). Then, when the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, when the time saving flag is set, the time saving flag is reset, and the counter value of the time saving count counter is set. If it is not "0", the counter value is reset (returned to "0"), and then the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being executed is set (step S190), and the first special symbol process is performed. This process ends when the flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value (step S191).

The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). In step S188, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot A start command, 15R jackpot B start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot is set. As a result, the effect corresponding to the type of the jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S39).

In step S189, the waiting time until the start of the big hit game state is set in the interval timer. However, in the process of step S401, after the waiting time set in the interval timer has elapsed, FIG. 186 shows the figure. As shown, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 controls the opening and closing of the big winning opening 2005, and is in an effective state in the 15th round (a big hit game state by receiving the game ball B in the second entrance 2008). The large winning opening opening / closing process (step S402) to be set to the high probability state after the end of the game, and the game ball B accepted in the large winning opening 2005 in the 15th round are set to the second entrance 2008. The distribution piece 2415 is driven and controlled so that it can be distributed, and the opening and closing of the second entrance is monitored to monitor whether or not the game ball B is accepted by the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round. The process (step S403) and the process (step S403) are executed in order.

FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the above-mentioned large winning opening opening / closing process (step S402).

Now, assuming that the large winning opening 2005 is determined to be in the open state in the process of step S411, as shown in FIG. 187, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is the large winning opening 2005. When a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds when opening for a long time and 0.5 seconds when opening for a short time) has elapsed from the open state of the large winning opening 2005 (step S412), or according to the operation schedule of When the game ball B wins the maximum number of winnings (for example, nine) in the open large winning opening 2005 (step S413), the open large winning opening 2005 is controlled to be closed (step S414). Then, when it is determined that the current round is ended by controlling the big winning opening 2005 in the closed state (step S415), the type of big hit and the current number of rounds are sent as commands to the peripheral control board 1510. The jackpot round end command corresponding to is set (step S416), and the process proceeds to step S428.

Further, assuming that the large winning opening 2005 is determined to be in the closed state in the process of step S411, as shown in FIG. 187, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is the large winning opening 2005. When it is time to open the big winning opening 2005 according to the operation schedule of (step S417), when it is determined that a new round is started by controlling the big winning opening 2005 to the open state. (Step S418) sets a jackpot round start command according to the type of jackpot and the number of new rounds as a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S419). Then, when it is determined that it is time to set the valid state flag according to the state setting schedule of the second entrance 2008, that is, the 15th round out of the 1st to 15th rounds in which the large winning opening 2005 is opened. If it is the start time (step S420), the valid state flag is set (step S421). If the valid state flag is set at the start of the 15th round in step S420, it is necessary to reset the valid state flag at the end of the 15th round. Then, the closed state of the large winning opening 2005 or the large winning opening 2005 is controlled to be open (step S422), and the process proceeds to step S428. In addition, when it is determined that a new round will not be started by controlling the above-mentioned big winning opening 2005 to the open state (second opening in the same round, etc.) (step S418), or the valid state flag. When it is determined that it is not the timing to set (step S420), the above-mentioned large winning opening 2005 in the closed state is controlled to the open state (step S422), and step S428 is performed. Move to. Thereby, the effect according to the type of the jackpot and the current number of rounds instructed by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command can be executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

It should be noted that the valid state flag is set to the valid state (a state in which the game ball B is accepted in the second entrance 2008 and is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state). It is a flag to indicate. In the 15th round of the 1st to 15th rounds in which the large winning opening 2005 is opened, the game ball B accepted by the large winning opening 2005 in the second entrance opening / closing process (step S403) described later is the first entrance 2007. Alternatively, by driving and controlling the distribution piece 2415 to be distributed to any of the second inlets 2008, the game ball B can be accepted by the second acceptor 2008 and is set to the effective state.

Further, if it is determined in the process of step S428 that the game ball B has been accepted in the large winning opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 187, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a peripheral control board. A large winning opening ball entry command is set as a command to be transmitted to 1510 (step S429), and this process is terminated. As a result, when the big winning opening command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the effect corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball B to the big winning opening 2005 is produced by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, etc. Can be executed by.

Further, if it is determined in the process of step S417 that it is not the timing to open the large winning opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 187, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is the large. When the total number of rounds is completed by repeating the open state and the closed state of the winning opening 2005 (step S423), the jackpot executing flag is reset (step S424). Then, when it is determined that the second entrance passage flag, which will be described later, is set (step S425), the high probability flag is set (step S426), the time reduction flag is set, and the counter value of the time reduction count counter is set. This process ends when the initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of continuations of the time saving state (step S427). If it is determined that the second entrance passage flag is not set (step S425), the high probability flag is not set, the time reduction flag is set, and the time reduction counter value is set to the time reduction state. This process ends when the initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of continuations of (step S427). In this way, when it is determined that the second entrance passage flag is set (the game ball B is accepted in the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round), the high probability flag is set. And the time saving flag is set to control the time saving state with high probability, but the second entrance passage flag is not set (the game ball B is not accepted in the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round). If it is determined that the time is reduced, only the time saving flag is set and the time saving state is controlled with a low probability.

FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second entrance opening / closing process (step S403).

Now, assuming that in the process of step S431, it is determined that the second receiving port 2008 is in an open state (a state in which the game ball B is distributed to the second receiving port 2008 side by the distribution piece 2415), FIG. 188. As shown in, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds when the second inlet 2008 is open) from the open state of the second inlet 2008 according to the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415. , 0.2 seconds when opening for a short time) (step S423), or when the current round (15th round) is completed by controlling the above-mentioned large winning opening 2005 to the closed state (step). S433), the open second inlet 2008 is controlled to be closed (a state in which the game ball B is distributed to the first inlet 2007 side by the distribution piece 2415) (step S434).

Further, if it is determined in the process of step S431 that the second receiving port 2008 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 188, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is the distribution piece. According to the operation schedule of 2415, when it is time to open the second inlet 2008 (step S435), the closed second inlet 2008 is controlled to be open (step S436).

Next, if it is determined in the process of step S437 that the game ball B has been accepted by the second entrance 2008 in the open state, as shown in FIG. 188, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is determined. Determines whether or not the game ball B has been accepted by the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round in the setting of the valid state flag (step S438). If it is determined that the game ball B has been accepted in the second receiving entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round (step S438), the second receiving is received during the valid state in the 15th round. When the second inlet / outlet passage flag indicating that the game ball B has been accepted is not set at the entrance 2008 (step S439), the second inlet / outlet passage flag is set (step S440), and the peripheral control board 1510 is set. This process ends when the second entrance passage command is set as the command to be transmitted (step S441). As described above, unless the game ball B is accepted in the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round, the second entrance passage flag is not set and the high probability flag is set in step S426. Is not set, so it is not controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, when the command for passing through the second inlet / outlet is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the effect corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second inlet / outlet 2008 is produced by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, etc. Can be executed by.

FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol process process (step S15).

Now, assuming that the detection signal by the gate sensor 2401 is in the ON state in the process of step S801 and it is determined that the game ball B has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 189, the above As the process of step S802, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs a gate portion passing process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM. Run.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. 1. A normal symbol normal process (step S803) in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number.
2. 2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S804) in which a lottery process is performed for the fluctuation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. 3. Normal symbol fluctuation processing (step S805) that waits until the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
4. The mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped, is displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Normal symbol stop processing (step S806) to stop the variable display of the symbol
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "hit the normal figure", the second starting door 2411 rotates to play the game to the second starting port 2004. Ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S807) for executing a process for controlling the acceptance of the ball B.

The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 173).

FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate portion passing process (step S802).

Now, assuming that in the process of step S801, the detection signal by the gate sensor 2401 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball B has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 190. As the process of step S811, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved symbols is "4", which is the maximum value.

If it is determined in the process of step S811 that the number of reserved symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are used to newly put the fluctuation display control of the ordinary symbols into the pending state. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S812, the normal hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S813, the ordinary random number and the normal random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, as the process of step S814, each random number thus acquired is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU.

However, in the process of step S811, when it is determined that the reserved number of the ordinary symbols is the maximum value, the variation display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S821 to S814, the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

The gate portion passing process (step S802) may be performed by another example described below. For example, assuming that the detection signal by the gate sensor 2401 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball B has passed through the gate portion 2003, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first has the above. The ordinary random number and the above-mentioned normal random number are acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter and stored in the provisional storage area. After that, the counter value by the normal hold number counter is acquired from the RAM of the main control MPU, and based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the hold storage number of the normal symbol is the maximum value "4". conduct. Then, when it is determined that the hold storage number of the normal symbol is not the maximum value, the normal hold number counter is counted up (1 addition) in order to newly put the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol into the hold state. ), Then, the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned ordinary random number (the above-mentioned ordinary random number stored in the provisional storage area and the above-mentioned ordinary figure fluctuation random number) are stored in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU. It is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the above-mentioned normal hold number counter. On the other hand, as a result of acquiring the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU, when it is determined that this counter value is "4" which is the maximum value (the hold storage number of the normal symbol is the hold storage number). In the case of the maximum value), the previously acquired normal random number and the normal symbol fluctuation random number are discarded without being stored in the normal symbol hold storage area, and the fluctuation display control of the acquired normal symbol is newly performed. You may decide not to put it on hold.

FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal processing (step S803).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as the processing of step S821, as shown in FIG. 191. Based on the counter value of the normal hold number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the hold state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, then, as the process of step S822, the normal symbol is normally stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. Random numbers stored in the earliest storage area among random numbers related to the display mode of the symbol (for example, ordinary random numbers and random numbers with variable figures) are read from the same RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, when the normal hold number counter is counted down and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stopped. Random numbers (ordinary random numbers, random numbers that fluctuate in the normal map) related to the display mode in the above are shifted by the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003 are extracted from the first (first) area. Memorize in order. Then, when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 when the random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) storage area, the random number extracted in the n + 1st (n = 1-3) storage area. Is stored, and when the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage is performed. Various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the fluctuation display control hold of the normal symbol occurs is identifiable and stored, and the hold of the fluctuation display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). ..

Next, if the current gaming state is a time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state) (step S826), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a normal drawing hit determination table (not shown). ) Is selected (step S826), and if the current gaming state is a non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state) (step S825), a non-time saving hit determination table (not shown) is selected (step). S827), the selected normal figure hit determination table is compared with the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S828).

The normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and is used when the game state is the time saving time (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state). It is equipped with a non-time saving time hit determination table used when the game state is non-time saving time (low probability non-time saving state). Then, in the time-saving normal figure hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the normal random number, all 251 kinds of normal random numbers match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that the normal random number was won, and the normal figure is used. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to match the deviation determination value in the normal figure indicating the deviation. In this way, in the short time, when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, the player always wins the game, and the second start door 2411 rotates to the second start 2004. It controls the acceptance of the game ball B of.

In addition, in the non-time saving normal figure hit determination table referred to for comparison with ordinary random numbers, it is possible that all 251 types of ordinary random numbers match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that the normal random numbers have been won. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value of the normal map, which indicates that the normal figure is out of order. As described above, in the non-time saving time, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, the game ball B is not won in the normal drawing, so that the second starting door 2411 rotates to the second position. (Ii) It is not possible to control the acceptance of the game ball B into the starting port 2004.

When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a normal figure hit as a result of comparison between the selected normal figure hit determination table and the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S829). ), After setting the normal symbol hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won per normal symbol (step S830), the normal symbol hit as a mode (normal symbol stop symbol) when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped. The symbol is determined (step S831), while the normal symbol changes when it is determined to be out of order as a result of comparison between the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal processing. A symbol that is out of the ordinary as a mode (stop symbol of a normal symbol) at the time of control stop is determined (step S832). Then, when the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S804) (step S833), this process is terminated.

In this example, in the control of the time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 251/251, the lottery result of the normal symbol is always a hit, and the time required for the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is extreme. It is shortened to a short predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). Then, when the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit, the second starting port 2004 is controlled by an opening / closing pattern in which the second starting port 2004 is closed in an open state for an extremely long predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds). .. That is, during the control of the time saving state, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be a hit is extremely high, the time required for the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is constant and short, and the second starting port 2004 is in the open state. It is much easier to win the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 due to the long time, etc., and it is more efficient to aim at the second starting port 2004 than the first starting port 2002. B can be won. In the control of the non-time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0/251, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is not always a hit, and the second starting port 2004 is aimed at. Also, the game ball B cannot be won in the second starting port 2004.

As described above, during the control of the non-time saving state, even if the second starting port 2004 is aimed at, the game ball B cannot be won by the second starting port 2004, so that the first starting port 2002 The game ball B must be launched (so-called "left-handed") aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B wins the prize. Further, in the game area 5a on the left side of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in front of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball B is the obstacle nails. By abutting on N, various movements are given to the game ball B so that the game ball B flows down. Therefore, even if the game ball B is driven into the left side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the first starting port 2002, the first starting port 2002 is not always won, and the first starting port 2002 is won. The game ball B that has not been played is discharged to the outside from the out port 1008 provided at the lower center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, during the control of the time saving state, it is possible to win the game ball B more efficiently by aiming at the second starting port 2004 than at the first starting port 2002. The game ball B must be launched (so-called "right-handed") aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that the ball B wins a prize. Further, due to the structure of the game board 5, when the second starting port 2004 is opened, when the game ball B is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2004, the gate portion 2003 is opened. The passing game ball B is designed to win a prize in the second starting port 2004 with an extremely high probability. Therefore, during the control of the time saving state, the game ball B driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 is hardly wasted (is discharged to the outside from the out port 1008), and the control of the non-time saving state is controlled. Compared to the first starting port 2002 in the game ball B, the game ball B wins the second starting port 2004 extremely efficiently.

Further, during the control of the time saving state, in addition to the structure of the game board 5, there is an extremely high probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be a hit when passing through the gate portion 2003, and the variation display of the normal symbol is performed. The time required for control is constant and short, and the open state of the second starting port 2004 is long, so that the game ball B can easily win a prize in the second starting port 2004, and further to the second starting port 2004. When the game ball B wins a prize, the time required for controlling the fluctuation display of the special symbol is set to about 1 second, which is extremely shorter than the range of 10 to 120 seconds during the control of the non-time saving state, so that the time is short. The variable display control of the special symbol (holding of the variable display control of the special symbol) can be digested. That is, when the time reduction state is controlled after the end of the big hit game state, the game ball B is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second start port 2004, and the big hit is achieved again in a short time. It is possible to control the game state to a big hit and expect to acquire many game balls B. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls B paid out by winning the game ball B to the second start port 2004 is one, so that the game to the second start port 2004 is performed. Even if the winning of the ball B occurs frequently, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side while enhancing the interest of the player.

[11. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, the processing executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for the control performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 192, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, for example, various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred to the DRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, the loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control IC 1510a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady state process. In the 2ms steady processing, a process of counting up the 16ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16ms progress monitoring counter becomes 8, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, 16 ms has elapsed. The flag T is set, and the process of resetting (setting to 0) the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is executed. As described above, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady processing, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), after resetting the 16 ms elapsed flag (step S503), 16 ms steady processing is performed (step S504).

In this 16 ms steady-state process, a process of controlling the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like is executed based on the command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 ms steady processing is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-mentioned steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing an example of a 16 ms steady state process executed every 16 ms in the sub-main process. In the 16 ms steady-state process, the peripheral control IC 1510a executes the process of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process of step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the variation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first variation pattern setting process, the process corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second variation pattern setting process)). The control process related to the effect display device 1600 is executed based on the reception of the variation pattern command transmitted by being set.

Further, in the sound control process of step S603, the control process related to the speaker or the like is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, the control process related to the lamp / LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the effect drive board 1720 is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating a random number used for various settings (for example, a random number used for a hold look-ahead related effect) in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

The processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16ms steady processing is completed within 16ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady-state process to the end of the 16 ms steady-state process, the 16 ms steady-state process is immediately started from the beginning (command of step S601) 16 ms after the start of the 16 ms steady-state process. Do not execute (from the analysis process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during the execution of the 16 ms steady state process, only the 16 ms progress flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms progress flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady state process, the 16 ms steady state process is performed. To start.

Further, in this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing and the 16ms steady processing in the sub-main processing.

[12. Production related to pending changes]
In this embodiment, when the hold display before digestion (hold display before digestion) is executed by the effect display device 1600 based on the hold number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the hold display is digested. , The post-digestion hold display (post-digestion hold display) is executed on the decorative body body 3511. That is, the "hold display" of this embodiment includes a "pre-digestion hold display" indicating a pre-digestion hold that has not yet been used for the game, and a "digestion hold display" that represents the digested hold that is currently used for the game. It is a general term that includes "post-hold display", and by executing post-digestion hold display, the hold display is continuously displayed even after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol). , It can be used for the production that suggests the degree of expectation of big hits.

Specifically, the hold display of this embodiment is the hold number (hold memory) specified from the hold number designation command when the game ball wins a prize (start condition is satisfied) in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. As the number) increases, one additional hold display before digestion (hold display before digestion) is added to the effect display device 1600 and displayed. On the other hand, when starting the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) based on the hold display (the start condition is satisfied) and digesting one hold display before digestion, the hold specified by the hold number specification command is used. The main body of the decorative body is used to reduce the number (number of reserved memories) by 1 to erase one pre-digestion hold display in the effect display device 1600 and to display the hold display to be digested as a post-digest hold display. The luminescent decoration of 3511 will be updated. In this embodiment, the hold display before digestion is represented by displaying a circular display body (see FIG. 194) in the hold display area set in the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 1600. As the hold display after digestion, the luminescent decoration of the decorative body 3511 is represented by luminescent display in a predetermined color. As for the circular display body (see FIG. 194) displayed in the hold display area, the color of the decorated part is expressed by a plurality of antique-like colors, so the color of the part excluding the decorated part is used. Is one of the four colors.

Further, in this embodiment, the display mode of the hold display is changed from the execution of the pre-digestion hold display as the hold display to the end of the execution of the post-digestion hold display, based on the hold display. It is possible to execute a hold notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit for the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols).

In this embodiment, a hold number designation command and a pre-determination command are transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize (starting condition is satisfied) in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. .. Then, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a receives the hold number designation command and the advance determination command in the command analysis process of step S601, the hold notice determination table corresponding to those commands, that is, the hold specified from the hold number designation command. A hold notice determination table corresponding to the number (number of hold storages) and the advance judgment information (big hit, reach loss, loss, etc.) specified from the advance judgment command was selected, and the judgment value set in the hold notice decision table was read out. By comparing with the random number for the hold notice determination, the hold change pattern (hold change scenario) set in the hold notice determination table is determined, and the hold notice effect is performed based on the determined hold change pattern. In the hold notice determination table, the distribution of the judgment value for each hold change pattern is different for each advance judgment information (big hit, reach loss, loss, etc.) specified from the advance judgment command, and the appearance rate of each hold change pattern is different. Is different.

As described above, in the hold notice effect, the hold change pattern (hold change scenario) during the display period from the display of the pre-digestion hold display on the effect display device 1600 until the hold display changes to the post-digestion hold and ends. ) Is updated, and the display mode of the hold display is updated, and every time the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) based on the hold display different from the hold display is started (the start condition is satisfied), the hold is held. The display mode of the display can be changed.

Next, the hold notice determination table will be described. In the hold notice determination table, a plurality of types of hold change patterns are set for each hold number (holding storage number) specified from the hold number designation command, and are stored in the control ROM 1510b of the peripheral control board 1510. The hold notice determination table includes a hold notice determination table 1 used when hold 1 is lit (pre-digestion hold number = 1), a hold notice decision table 2 used when hold 2 is lit (pre-digestion hold number = 2), and a hold. A hold notice determination table 3 used when 3 is lit (number of hold before digestion = 3) and a hold notice determination table 4 to be used when hold 4 is lit (number of hold before digestion = 4) are provided. A plurality of types of hold change patterns are defined in the hold notice determination tables 1 to 4, respectively, and these hold change patterns are used in the effect display device 1600 and the decorative body 3511 each time the hold display is digested. How the display mode of the hold display changes (what kind of display mode changes, at what timing) is set.

For example, the hold notice determination table 1 used when the hold 1 is lit (the number of hold before digestion = 1) includes a hold change pattern 1A in which the display mode of the hold display in the effect display device 1600 does not change from the initial mode. When the hold display in the effect display device 1600 is digested and the hold display is displayed after digestion on the decorative body main body 3511, the hold change pattern 1B or the like that changes only once from the initial mode is provided. Further, the hold notice determination table 2 used when the hold 2 is lit (the number of hold before digestion = 2) includes a hold change pattern 2A in which the display mode of the hold display in the effect display device 1600 is digested without changing from the initial mode. , When the mode of hold display changes only once when changing from pre-digestion hold to post-digestion hold, and when the state of pre-digestion hold number = 2 changes to the state of pre-digestion hold number = 1. The hold change pattern 2C, in which the mode of the hold display changes only once, and the hold display mode changes when the state of the pre-digestion hold number = 2 changes to the state of the pre-digestion hold number = 1, and the pre-digestion hold changes. There is provided a hold change pattern 2D or the like in which the mode of the hold display further changes when the state changes from to hold to hold after digestion. Similarly, the hold display is also displayed on the hold notice determination table 3 used when the hold 3 is lit (pre-digestion hold number = 3) and the hold notice determination table 4 used when the hold 4 is lit (pre-digestion hold number = 4). There are a plurality of hold change patterns in which the display mode of the hold display is set to change by a predetermined number of times before the holding change pattern is exhausted.

In addition, as the display mode (including the initial display mode) of the hold display set in the hold change pattern, four hold displays are displayed so that the hold display is displayed in white (basic color), blue, yellow, or red. A display mode is prepared. Then, when determining the hold change pattern from the hold notice determination table, as a result of the display mode of the hold display changing to the end, the jackpot expectation increases in the order of white (basic color) → blue → yellow → red. Is set to. That is, when the lottery result is specified as a big hit as the pre-judgment information, a hold change pattern having a high expectation of big hit (for example, red) is determined with a high probability as the final display mode of the hold display, and the pre-judgment is made. When the lottery result is specified as a loss (loss, reach loss) as information, a hold change pattern having a low expectation of big hit (for example, white) is determined with a high probability as the final display mode of the hold display. When the display mode of the final hold display is displayed in the display mode with high expectation of big hit, the player's expectation for the big hit game is increasing.

In the hold change pattern, the display mode of the hold display does not change in the reverse order of white → blue → yellow → red, and is the display mode of the hold display maintained when the hold display is exhausted? , Or the following display mode is set to be a display mode with a high expectation of a big hit. Therefore, even if the display mode of the hold display is displayed in the display mode with a low jackpot expectation, there is a possibility that the display mode may change to the display mode with a high jackpot expectation when the hold display is exhausted. The aspect can be noticed with expectation until the end.

Further, in the hold change pattern, it is not always necessary to change the display mode of the hold display in the order of blue → yellow → red after the display mode of the hold display is displayed in white (basic color), and the display mode in the middle of not being white (basic color). Start from (for example, start in yellow from the beginning due to the hold change pattern when hold 1 is lit), or skip one or more display modes and change to the next display mode (for example, hold change pattern when hold 2 is lit). It is also set to change from white (basic color) to red). Therefore, even if the chance of changing the display mode of the hold display (the number of holds) is small, it is possible to display the display mode of the hold display in the display mode with a high expectation of big hit. Further, even if the display mode of the hold display is displayed in the display mode with a low expectation of big hit, it is not possible to predict which display mode the next display mode will change to, and the display mode of the hold display is changed to the end. You can draw attention with expectations.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a changes the display mode of the hold display, the CPU instructs the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a to produce various sound effects corresponding to the display mode of the hold display after the change. The sound is emitted from a speaker (for example, a vibration speaker 354 provided in the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, a main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like). In this embodiment, the sound effect is set in advance so as to be different depending on the display mode (color) of the hold display after the change. For example, it is effective when the display mode of the hold display after the change is blue. A sound effect of "pee" is output, and when the display mode of the hold display after the change is yellow, a sound effect of "pee, pico" is output as the sound effect, and the display mode of the hold display after the change is displayed. When is red, the sound effect is output as "picopico".

Further, in this embodiment, the initial color of the hold display is preset to white as described above. This white color is the same as the white color set as the color of the hold display when the hold change suggestion effect is not performed.

Further, in the hold notice determination table, a special hold change pattern having a rainbow color may be determined as the display mode of the final hold display only when a big hit is specified as the advance judgment information from the advance judgment command. By determining such a special hold change pattern, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in rainbow color, it is confirmed that the lottery result will be a big hit at the time of digesting the hold display, and the big hit game. The expectations of players for the game are increasing.

Further, in the hold notice determination table, when a loss is specified as the advance judgment information from the advance judgment command, a hold change pattern that becomes white (basic color) or blue as the final display mode of the hold display is determined. , When a jackpot or reach is specified as pre-judgment information from the pre-judgment command, it is possible to determine a hold change pattern that is yellow or red as the final display mode of the hold display. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in yellow or red, it is confirmed that the reach effect is at least reached after the hold display is exhausted, and the player's expectation for the big hit game is increased. It has become like.

In the present embodiment, the hold change pattern is determined when the hold display before digestion is added, so that a series of changes until the display mode of the hold display is finally changed is determined. As the determination method, at the start of the display of the hold display, only the display mode of the hold display at the start and the final display mode of the hold display may be determined. Then, when the display mode of the hold display at the start and the display mode of the final hold display are different, the display mode of the final hold display is at least before the target hold display is digested. May be displayed, and each time the timing at which the display mode of the hold display can be changed arrives, it may be determined how the display mode of the hold display changes. Even with such a determination method, the display mode of the hold display can be sequentially changed until the hold display on the effect display device 1600 or the decorative body main body 3511 is completed.

Next, the hold change suggestion effect performed in addition to the hold notice effect will be described. The hold change suggestion effect is an effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display may change during the display period of the hold display (pre-digestion hold display, post-digestion hold display). That is, in the above-mentioned hold notice effect, every time the change display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol) is started (the start condition is satisfied) during the display period of the hold display, the hold display is displayed based on the hold change pattern. Although the display mode can be changed, it is possible to execute a hold change suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display may change at the timing when the display mode of the hold display changes.

Specifically, in the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, when the variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol) is started (the start condition is satisfied), the display mode of the hold display changes based on the hold change pattern. Whether or not it is determined, the pending change suggestion effect determination table corresponding to the determination result is selected, and the judgment value set in the pending change suggestion effect determination table is compared with the read random number for the pending change suggestion effect determination table. By doing so, one suggestion effect pattern is determined from the plurality of suggestion effect patterns set in the pending change suggestion effect determination table.

A plurality of types of suggestion effect patterns are set in the hold change suggestion effect determination table, and none of the hold change suggestion effects is executed. Suggestion effect pattern 1 (only the display mode of the hold display is changed according to the update display due to the hold digestion). (Effect pattern), a suggestion effect pattern 2 (a specific character image prior to the change in the display mode of the hold display) in which a hold change suggestion effect is performed in which a specific image or the like appears prior to the change in the display mode of the hold display. Etc. are set to appear, and an effect that suggests the possibility of changing depending on the type of the character image, etc.) is set. The pending change suggestion effect determination table is stored in the control ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. Further, in the hold change suggestion effect determination table, the distribution of the judgment values for each of the above-mentioned suggestion effect patterns is about the same, and the appearance rate of each hold change suggestion effect is about the same. However, the appearance rate of each pending change suggestion effect may be different.

[13. Grayscale production]
Next, as an example of the effect displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 by various commands from the main control board 1310, the gray scale by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a described above. A grayscale effect in which a setting mode is expanded and various image elements displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are switched from a full-color image to a grayscale image will be described. Hereinafter, an example of an effect displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when performing a grayscale effect will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 194 to 196. FIG. 194 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of grayscale effect, FIG. 195 is an explanatory diagram following FIG. 194, and FIG. 196 is an explanatory diagram following FIG. 195. Here, it is shown in FIG. 113 based on various commands from the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 113 based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 107. Peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a shown in FIG. 171) has a hold change suggestion effect without a gray scale effect (hold notice effect), and peripheral control board 1510 has a hold change suggestion effect with a gray scale effect. (Hold notice production) and will be briefly explained.

The grayscale effect is executed by performing a grayscale effect availability lottery to determine whether or not to perform the grayscale effect at a predetermined time and determining that the grayscale effect is to be performed. Specifically, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has a hold number designation command and a hold number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize (starting condition is satisfied) in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. When the pre-judgment command is received, the above-mentioned hold notice determination table is selected, the type of the hold change pattern set in the hold notice determination table is determined, and the suggestion effect pattern is determined, regardless of the determination result. A lottery will be held to determine whether or not grayscale production is possible. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the present embodiment can set the execution of the gray scale effect at the same time as the setting of the hold notice effect and the hold change suggestion effect, and in parallel with the various hold change suggestion effects described above. It is possible to proceed with the grayscale effect, or to proceed with the grayscale effect independently of the various pending change suggestion effects described above. Further, in this embodiment, the probability that some kind of pending change suggestion is determined is set to 1/20, whereas the probability that the grayscale effect is determined by the grayscale effect availability lottery is set. Is set to 1/50, and the probability that the grayscale effect will be performed in parallel with the hold change suggestion effect will be less frequent than the probability that the grayscale effect will not be performed in parallel with the hold change suggestion effect. Is set to.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a decides to perform the gray scale effect by the gray scale effect enable / disable lottery, the gray scale effect flag indicating the execution of the gray scale effect is set to ON, and the main control board 1310 is next. The grayscale effect is started when the hold digestion of is started. When the grayscale effect is started, various image elements displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are instructed to the VDP of the peripheral control IC1510a so that the grayscale setting mode by the VDP of the peripheral control IC1510a is expanded. Switch from a full-color image to a grayscale image, and change all the emission colors of the various LEDs to white when controlling the emission of various LEDs provided on the door frame 3 including the decorative body 3511 and the game board 5. To start. Since various processes related to the gray scale effect are continuously performed while the gray scale effect flag is set to ON, the gray scale effect flag is set to ON in the process of the gray scale setting mode by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a. It will be repeated when each frame is generated for the set period. The end time of the gray scale effect is explained in the effect example described later, but a predetermined end time is set, and when the end time arrives, the gray scale effect flag is set to OFF and the gray scale is set. The production will end.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a draws a lottery as to whether or not to perform the hold change suggestion effect by adding the hold when the main control board 1310 is holding and digesting when the grayscale effect is already performed. When performing a hold change suggestion effect, it is set not to perform a new grayscale effect lottery. This is because the grayscale production is already in progress, so it prevents the grayscale production from being overwritten and extended unnecessarily, and if it is lost in the grayscale production lottery, it will be erroneously gray. This is to prevent the scale effect from being canceled.

Next, an example of the effect in which the hold change suggestion effect and the grayscale effect proceed in parallel or not in parallel will be described. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the present embodiment starts the progress of the effect displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 based on various commands from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a. As shown in FIG. 194 (a), a background image 1640 in which the space (earth and moon) is represented is displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and is on the front side of the background image 1640. The left decorative symbol 1650a is on the left side of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the middle decorative symbol 1650b is in the center of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the right decorative symbol 1650c is on the right side of the display area of the effect display device 1600. Start each variable display. At this time, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a recognizes that there are two game balls (two reserved balls) that have not been used for the game yet, and does not perform the hold change suggestion effect. , Instructing the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, as a hold display, the first hold display 1655a which is on the front side of the background image 1640 and has white color from the upper center to the upper right side of the display area of the effect display device 1600. , And the second hold display 1655b having white color is displayed in a row in this order. Further, at this time, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a emits and decorates the decorative body body 3511 with any of white, blue, yellow, and red so as to correspond to the variable display of the current decorative pattern. It controls a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the lower back movable decorative substrate 3512 shown in FIG. 130.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is so translucent that the background image 1640 can be visually recognized when the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c are variablely displayed by instructing the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a. As an embodiment, the left decorative symbol 1650a is from the upper left side to the lower left side of the display area, the middle decorative symbol 1650b is from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative symbol 1650c is from the upper right side to the right of the display area. The variable display is performed as if the reels are rotating toward the lower side.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop and display the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c, before the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. When various commands from the main control board 1310 based on the acceptance of the game ball to the game are received, a hold display is performed to tell the number of hold balls that have not been used for the game yet.

For example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop and display the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c, and the number of reserved balls increases from two to one. If it is recognized that there are 3 balls and it is determined that the hold change suggestion effect is not performed for the hold addition that is increased by 1 ball, the hold display is displayed on the right side of the second hold display 1655b. The third hold display 1655c having a white color is displayed. As a result, the three holding balls have the first holding display 1655a having white, the second holding display 1655b having white, and the second holding ball having white from the upper center to the upper right side of the display area of the effect display device 1600. 3 Hold display 1655c is displayed in a row in this order.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to further stop and display the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c, and the number of reserved balls increases from three to one. When it is recognized that there are 4 balls, a specific hold change pattern (for example, white → blue → yellow → red →) that makes the final color of the hold display red for the hold addition that increases by 1 ball. When it is decided to perform the hold change suggestion effect (the effect of the suggestion effect pattern 1) according to the hold change suggestion effect (the effect of the suggestion effect pattern 1) corresponding to the change of red), the white color is displayed on the right side of the third hold display 1655c as the hold display. The fourth hold display 1655d having is displayed. As a result, the four holding balls have the first holding display 1655a having white, the second holding display 1655b having white, and the third holding ball having white from the upper center to the upper right side of the display area of the effect display device 1600. The hold display 1655c and the fourth hold display 1655d having white color are displayed in a row in this order. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and then, as shown in FIG. 194 (b), the left decorative symbol 1650a is stopped and displayed at the symbol 1, and the middle decorative symbol 1650b is stopped at the symbol 2. It is displayed, and the right decorative symbol 1650c is stopped and displayed at symbol 3 to indicate that it is out of alignment.

[13-1. Hold change suggestion production without grayscale production]
Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to instruct the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a when the hold change suggestion effect is performed and the gray scale effect is not performed, and as shown in FIG. 194 (c), the main control board. With the reserved digestion by 1310, the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c are displayed in a variable manner, and it is recognized that there are 4 to 3 reserved balls, which is shown in FIG. 194 (b). The second hold display 1655b to the fourth hold display 1655d are moved one by one to the left side, and the first hold display 1655a having white color and white color are displayed from the upper center to the upper right side of the display area of the effect display device 1600. The second hold display 1655b having and the third hold display 1655c having blue color are displayed in a row in this order. That is, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the third hold display 1655c to perform the hold change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 194 (b), the final color of the hold display is When the color of the fourth hold display 1655d determined to be red is variablely displayed on the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c, the effect is changed from white to blue to proceed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and then stops and displays the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c, and informs that it is out of order.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to display the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c in a variable manner as the main control board 1310 suspends digestion. Recognizing that there are 3 to 2 holding balls, the second holding display 1655b and the third holding display 1655c shown in FIG. 194 (c) are moved one by one to the left side of the effect display device 1600. From the upper center of the display area to the upper right side, the first reserved display 1655a having white and the second reserved display 1655b having yellow are displayed in a row in this order. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the second hold display 1655b, and changes the color of the third hold display 1655c shown in FIG. 194 (c) from blue to yellow. Proceed with the production. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and then stops and displays the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c, and informs that it is out of order.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to display the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c in a variable manner as the main control board 1310 suspends digestion. Recognizing that there are two to one reserved balls, the above-mentioned second reserved display 1655b is moved one to the left, and the first reserved display having red color is in the upper center of the display area of the effect display device 1600. 1655a is displayed. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the first hold display 1655a, and changes the color of the second hold display 1655b described above from yellow to red to proceed with the effect. At this time, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a increases the number of reserved balls by 1 to 2 when the main control board 1310 is held and digested, and instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as a hold display. The second hold display 1655b having white color is displayed on the right side of the first hold display 1655a (here, it is assumed that the lottery for the hold change suggestion effect for this hold addition is lost (the hold change suggestion effect is not performed)). .. As a result, the two reserved balls are arranged in a row from the upper center of the display area of the effect display device 1600 toward the upper right side in the order of the first reserved display 1655a having red color and the second reserved display 1655b having white color. Is displayed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and then, as shown in FIG. 194 (d), the left decorative symbol 1650a is stopped and displayed at the symbol 4, and the middle decorative symbol 1650b is stopped at the symbol 5. It is displayed, and the right decorative symbol 1650c is stopped and displayed at symbol 6 to indicate that it is out of alignment.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to perform the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, as shown in FIG. And the right decorative symbol 1650c is variablely displayed, and the second reserved display 1655b shown in FIG. 194 (d) is moved one to the left, recognizing that there are two to one reserved balls, and the effect display device. In the upper center of the display area of 1600, the first hold display 1655a having white color is displayed. At this time, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is mounted on the lower back movable decorative body decorative substrate 3512 shown in FIG. 130 so as to be red, which is the color of the first hold display 1655a shown in FIG. 194 (d). A plurality of full-color LEDs are controlled to start red emission decoration of the decoration body 3511. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is the decorative body main body so as to be the red color of the fourth hold display 1655d determined as the final color of the hold display in the case of performing the hold change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 194 (b). The luminescent decoration of 3511 is started.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop and display the left decorative symbol 1650a and the right decorative symbol 1650c with the same symbol (symbol 7) as shown in FIG. 195 (f). The reach is formed, and the variable display of the intermediate decorative symbol 1650b is continued.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to represent outer space (earth and moon) in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. 195 (g). It develops into super reach by switching from the background image 1640 to the background image 1645 that expresses warp navigation that can move between stars. In this embodiment, since a plurality of types of super reach are set in advance (the background images are different, some of them take a long time to develop into super reach, and some of them are short, so they are set to be different. When the reach is formed and develops into a super reach, it corresponds to the type of super reach from the background image 1640 in which outer space (earth and moon) is represented in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600. Background images (for example, the representation of the Earth's supply base, the representation of docking to the supply ship, the representation of the lunar base, the representation of escape from the black hole, the approach of a giant meteorite Can be mentioned, such as those expressing the above, and those expressing the encounter with an unidentified ship, etc.).

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to display the pressing operation unit 303 shown in FIG. 1 in the center of the display area of the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. 196 (h). A button effect in which the imitated button figure 1647 moves upward is displayed. At this time, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to move the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c toward the lower left side of the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is reduced while moving, and the left decorative symbol 1650a and the right decorative symbol 1650c are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (symbol 7), and the variable display of the middle decorative symbol 1650b is continued. After that, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop and display the intermediate decorative symbol 1650b with the symbol 6 to notify that the peripheral control IC 1510a is out of alignment.

Here, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to use the intermediate decorative symbol 1650b as a symbol (design) different from the left decorative symbol 1650a and the right decorative symbol 1650c as shown in FIG. 196 (i). A normal background image 1640 that expresses space (earth and moon) from a background image 1645 that displays a stop display in 6) and expresses warp navigation that can move between stars in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600. The left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c, which are stopped and displayed on the lower left side of the display area of the effect display device 1600, are placed in their original positions while switching back to (returning to the original normal background image 1640). The display is stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 while expanding to. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to changely display the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c as the main control board 1310 holds and digests.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop and display the intermediate decorative symbol 1650b with the symbol 7 in FIG. 196 (h) to notify that it is a big hit. After that, a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state will occur. Further, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to not develop into the super reach shown in FIG. 195 (g) described above, the effect shown in FIG. 196 (i) described above is performed. proceed.

[13-2. Hold change suggestion production with grayscale production]
Returning to FIG. 194, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to indicate the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c as shown in FIG. 194 (b) described above. Was stopped and displayed, and when the hold change suggestion effect was subsequently performed and the grayscale effect was not accompanied, the effect shown in FIG. 194 (c) was in progress. On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the hold change suggestion effect and the gray scale effect is performed in parallel, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to expand the gray scale setting mode. Following 194 (b), as shown in FIG. 194 (r), all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a are grayed out due to the hold digestion by the main control board 1310. In addition to converting to a scale, when controlling the light emission of various LEDs provided on the door frame 3 including the decorative body 3511 and the game board 5, the process of changing all the light emission colors of the various LEDs to white is started. Here, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to convert the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c into gray scale in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Is displayed in a variable manner, and it is recognized that there are 4 to 3 reserved balls, and the 2nd reserved display 1655b to the 4th reserved display 1655d shown in FIG. From the upper center of the display area of the display device 1600 to the upper right side, the first reserved display 1655a having a color converted from white to grayscale, the second reserved display 1655b having a color converted from white to grayscale, and blue. Is displayed in a row in the order of the third hold display 1655c having the color converted into gray scale. That is, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the third hold display 1655c to perform the hold change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 194 (b), the final color of the hold display is When the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c are displayed in a variable manner, the color of the fourth hold display 1655d that determines the red color is produced by the color converted from white to blue and converted to gray scale. To proceed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and then stops and displays the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c, and informs that it is out of order.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to display all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a in accordance with the hold digestion by the main control board 1310. Convert to grayscale. Here, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to variablely display the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Recognizing that there are 3 to 2 holding balls, the second holding display 1655b and the third holding display 1655c shown in FIG. 194 (r) are moved one by one to the left to display the effect display device 1600. From the upper center of the area to the upper right side, the first hold display 1655a having the color converted from white to gray scale and the second hold display 1655b having the color converted from yellow to gray scale are displayed in a row in this order. do. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the second hold display 1655b, and changes the color of the third hold display 1655c shown in FIG. 194 (r) from blue to yellow. The production progresses with the color converted to gray scale. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and then stops and displays the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c, and informs that it is out of order.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to display all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a in accordance with the hold digestion by the main control board 1310. Convert to grayscale. Here, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to display the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c in a variable manner, and has two to one reserved balls. The above-mentioned second hold display 1655b is moved to the left side by one, and the first hold display 1655a having a color obtained by converting red to gray scale is displayed in the upper center of the display area of the effect display device 1600. do. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the first hold display 1655a, and the color of the second hold display 1655b described above is changed from yellow to red and converted into gray scale. To proceed with the production. At this time, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a increases the number of reserved balls by 1 to 2 when the main control board 1310 is held and added, and instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as a hold display. To the right of the first hold display 1655a, the second hold display 1655b having a color obtained by converting white to grayscale is displayed (here, the lottery for the hold change suggestion effect for this hold addition was rejected (hold change suggestion effect). Do not do). As a result, the two reserved balls are the first reserved display 1655a having a color obtained by converting red to gray scale, and white being converted to gray scale from the upper center to the upper right side of the display area of the effect display device 1600. The second hold display 1655b having the colored color is displayed in a row in this order. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and then, as shown in FIG. 194 (s), the left decorative symbol 1650a is stopped and displayed at the symbol 4, and the middle decorative symbol 1650b is stopped at the symbol 5. It is displayed, and the right decorative symbol 1650c is stopped and displayed at symbol 6 to indicate that it is out of alignment.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and as shown in FIG. Converts all images displayed in the display area to grayscale. Here, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to display the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c in a variable manner, and has two to one reserved balls. The second hold display 1655b shown in FIG. 194 (s) is moved to the left side by one, and has a color obtained by converting white to gray scale in the upper center of the display area of the effect display device 1600. 1 Hold display 1655a is displayed. At this time, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is shown in FIG. The plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the lower back movable decorative body decorative substrate 3512 shown in 130 are controlled to start the light emitting decoration of the decorative body main body 3511. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a changes the color to white instead of the red color of the fourth hold display 1655d determined as the final color of the hold display in the case of performing the hold change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 194 (b). The light emitting decoration of the decorative body 3511 is started.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop and display the left decorative symbol 1650a and the right decorative symbol 1650c with the same symbol (symbol 7) as shown in FIG. 195 (u). The reach is formed, and the variable display of the intermediate decorative symbol 1650b is continued. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and then ends the gray scale effect just before developing into the super reach shown in FIG. 195 (g). In this embodiment, the predetermined timing after the end of the normal reach and before the development to the super reach is set to the end time of the gray scale effect, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is set to the end time of the individual end time. The grayscale effect flag is turned off, the process of converting all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to grayscale by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is completed, and the pending change shown in FIG. 194 (b) is completed. In the case of performing the suggestion effect, the process of changing the color of the fourth hold display 1655d, which is determined as the final color of the hold display, to white as the light emitting decoration of the decorative body 3511 is completed instead of the red color. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a ends the process of changing all the emission colors of the various LEDs to white when controlling the emission of the various LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5.

In the present embodiment, as described above, since a plurality of types of super reach are set in advance (the background images are different, some of them take a long time to develop into super reach, some of them are short, and they are different. When the reach is formed and develops into super reach, the type of super reach from the background image 1640 in which outer space (earth and moon) is represented in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600. And the corresponding background image (for example, the one that expresses the supply base of the earth, the one that expresses the docking to the supply ship, the one that expresses the lunar base, the one that expresses the escape from the black hole, the huge It can be said that the approach of a meteorite is expressed, the encounter with an unidentified ship is expressed, etc.). As a result, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set a plurality of times when the grayscale effect is ended, and a full-color image in which the player can identify the color depending on the time when the grayscale effect is ended. It is possible to make different types of production images.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to proceed to the effect of developing into the super reach shown in FIG. 196 (g) described above. As a result, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the background image 1645 of the full-color image, the left decorative symbol 1650a of the full-color image, the medium-decorative symbol 1650b of the full-color image, and the full-color image are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The right decorative pattern 1650c of the above is switched to the first hold display 1655a having the white color of the full-color image, and the whole is returned to the original full-color image. In the case of performing the hold change suggestion effect shown in 194 (b), the color is switched to the red color of the fourth hold display 1655d determined as the final color of the hold display and returns to the original color. In addition, all the emission colors of the various LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 correspond to the production of this super reach from the white color until the gray scale production is completed when the production progresses to the production of super reach. It switches to the emission color (full-color emission mode).

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to proceed to the button effect shown in FIG. 196 (h) described above, proceed to the effect shown in FIG. 196 (i), and then proceed to the effect shown in FIG. 196 (i). The left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c are variablely displayed as the main control board 1310 holds and digests.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop and display the intermediate decorative symbol 1650b with the symbol 7 in FIG. 196 (h) to notify that it is a big hit. After that, a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state will occur. Further, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to not develop into the super reach shown in FIG. 195 (g) following FIG. 195 (u) described above, a gray scale effect is produced. finish. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the process of converting all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 into grayscale by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the pending change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 194 (b). In this case, the process of changing the color of the fourth hold display 1655d, which is determined as the final color of the hold display, to white as the light emitting decoration of the decorative body 3511 is completed, and the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are completed. The process of changing all the emission colors of the various LEDs provided in the above to white is completed, and the process proceeds to the effect shown in FIG. 196 (i) described above by instructing the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

As described above, in the hold change suggestion effect for which the grayscale effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 194 (r) to 195 (u), the grayscale effect is not performed for all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. All the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIGS. 194 (c) to 195 (f) in the hold change suggestion effect are converted into gray scale, and the color of the hold display is changed from what color. It is difficult to determine what color the color has changed (pending change). This makes it possible to hide the suggestion of the expected value due to the hold display in the grayscale effect.

Further, in the hold change suggestion effect with the grayscale effect shown in FIGS. 194 (r) to 195 (u), the hold change without the grayscale effect is displayed as all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. All the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIGS. 194 (c) to 195 (f) in the suggestion effect are converted into gray scale. As a result, in the case where one of a plurality of predetermined hold change patterns is set and the hold change is performed, even if the hold change is performed using the same hold change pattern, the above-mentioned screen is displayed. In the case of promoting the production with a full-color image without specifying the grayscale setting mode as an object processing command (that is, without performing the grayscale effect) in the screen data of one frame that specifies Depending on the case where the grayscale setting mode is specified as an object processing command in the screen data (that is, the grayscale effect is performed) and the effect is promoted by the grayscale image, it is possible to create another effect that gives a completely different impression to the player. can.

Further, when the gray scale effect is finished, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a ends the process of converting all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 into gray scale by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and also ends the process of converting to gray scale (FIG. 194). In the case of performing the hold change suggestion effect shown in b), the process of changing to white as the light emitting decoration of the decorative body 3511 is completed instead of the red color of the fourth hold display 1655d determined as the final color of the hold display. As a result, when the production progresses to the super reach shown in FIG. 196 (g), the display area of the effect display device 1600 has a background image 1645 of a full-color image from an image whose entire display is converted to gray scale. The left decorative symbol 1650a of the full-color image, the medium decorative symbol 1650b of the full-color image, the right decorative symbol 1650c of the full-color image, and the first hold display 1655a having the white color of the full-color image are switched to, and the whole is returned to the original full-color image. The light emitting decoration of the decoration body 3511 is the red color of the fourth hold display 1655d determined as the final color of the hold display in the case of performing the hold change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 194 (b) from the color changed to white. It switches to and returns to the original color. In other words, while the grayscale effect is in progress, the suggestion of the expected value due to the hold display is hidden, whereas in the effect that the grayscale effect ends and develops into super reach, the expectation due to the hold display hidden by the grayscale effect is hidden. By releasing the value, it is possible to proceed with an extremely novel effect that the expected value by the hold display can be suggested.

Further, in the pending change suggestion effect in which the grayscale effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 195 (t) to 195 (u), the decoration in blue shown in FIG. 195 (e) in the hold change suggestion effect in which the grayscale effect is not performed. Luminous decoration of the body body 3511, decoration by yellow shown in FIG. 195 (f) Since the luminescent decoration of the body body 3511 is changed to white and the luminescent decoration of the decorative body 3511 is started, the decoration is started. It is difficult to determine the color of the hold display based on the color of the body body 3511 due to the light emitting decoration. This makes it possible to hide the suggestion of the expected value due to the light emitting decoration of the decorative body body 3511 in the gray scale effect.

Further, when the color of the hold display is changed, various speakers (for example, a vibration speaker 354 provided on the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 or the like, a top center speaker 462, and a top side) produce sound effects corresponding to the color of the hold display. Since it flows from the speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, etc.), the player himself hears and compares what color the hold display color has changed due to the flowing sound effect. You can enjoy the progress of the game, and you can suppress the deterioration of the player's interest even in the gray scale production.

Further, in the hold change suggestion effect in which the grayscale effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 194 (r) to 195 (u), the hold change in which the grayscale effect is not performed is performed as all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIGS. 194 (c) to 195 (f) in the suggestion effect are converted to gray scale, the image data converted to gray scale is used. By eliminating the need to store in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 shown in FIG. 171 in advance, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect without increasing the capacity of the image data.

[14. About volume adjustment]
Next, the volume adjusting function mounted on the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described below.

First, as a volume adjusting means that can be operated by the game management side (hall side) (cannot be operated by the player side), the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a main set value of volume in a predetermined stage (for example, large, medium, small). A slide-type volume control switch 1510d that can be adjusted in three stages) is provided. When the game management side (hall side) operates the volume adjustment switch 1510d, the volume adjustment operation signal is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a is a vibration speaker provided on the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 or the like with the main set value of the volume corresponding to the input volume adjustment operation signal based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The effect sound can be output from speakers such as the 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4.

Further, as a volume adjusting means that can be operated by the player, the effect operation unit 300 is subjected to a rotation operation by the player to set a sub-set value of the volume in a predetermined step (for example, 6 steps of 1 to 6; 6 is the maximum). The rotation operation unit 302 of the rotation drive unit 340, which can be adjusted to the above, is provided. This sub-set value can be adjusted to 6 stages regardless of the setting stage of the main set value, but the volume actually audible by the player is displaced based on the setting stage of the main set value. That is, the volume that the player can actually hear is based on the value obtained by multiplying the main setting value and the sub setting value, and the maximum volume is when the main setting value is "large" and the sub setting value is "6". When the main setting value is "low" and the sub setting value is "1", the minimum volume is set. When the player operates the rotation operation unit 302, the detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347 provided in the rotation drive unit 340 and the detection signal from the second rotation detection sensor 348 pass through the peripheral control input circuit. Is input to various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The peripheral control IC 1510a monitors whether or not the rotation operation unit 302 has been operated, and when it is determined that the rotation operation unit 302 has been operated to the right, a sub-set value of the volume is set according to the operation amount. A process of raising the volume is performed, and when it is determined that the rotation operation unit 302 has been operated to the left, a process of lowering the sub-set value of the volume is performed according to the operation amount.

Then, in the peripheral control IC 1510a, the volume adjustment process by the rotation operation unit 302 is performed during a period (a period during which a demo display or the like can be performed) before the game is started because the symbol change according to the jackpot determination has not yet been performed. ), But also during the period when the game is started and the symbol change according to the big hit judgment is executed, the reception by the player is allowed, and the volume is set when a more important effect appears. By making it possible to change the value flexibly, we are trying to maintain the interest of the game. In addition, the volume adjustment process by the rotation operation unit 302 is executed in the period before the game is started (the period in which the demo display etc. can be performed) because the symbol change according to the big hit judgment has not been performed yet. When the volume sub-setting value is changed, the setting confirmation sound (for example, the "pi" sound effect) corresponding to the changed volume sub-setting value is output from various speakers, while the game is played. When the volume adjustment process by the rotation operation unit 302 is executed and the sub-set value of the volume is changed during the period when the symbol change according to the jackpot judgment is executed after the start, the setting confirmation sound is not output. It is supposed to be. This is because there is a possibility that no production sound is output during the period when the demo display etc. can be performed, so it is necessary to make the player recognize the volume by the setting confirmation sound, while the symbol change is executed. Since there is a high possibility that one of the production sounds is output during the period, the player can be made to recognize the volume by the change of the production sound itself, and rather the setting confirmation sound obstructs the production sound. I try to prevent it from getting stuck.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the player can adjust the volume (change the sub-set value) by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 during the period in which the symbol change is being executed. During the period during which the symbol variation is executed, at least during the period during which a specific effect using the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302 or press operation unit 303) that can be operated by the player is executed, Even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the volume is restricted so that the volume is not adjusted.

First, as an effect during execution of the symbol variation, a case where an operation effect capable of giving a change to the effect by the player rotating the rotation operation unit 302 will be described with reference to FIG. 197. As an operation effect using such a rotation operation unit 302, for example, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 from among a plurality of types of selected images displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600. One example is an effect in which one of the selected images is selected, and after a lapse of a predetermined period, the selected image selected by the player is changed to an image suggesting a jackpot expectation.

As shown in FIG. 197, during the period from the timing t1 after the start of the symbol variation to the timing t3 after the lapse of a predetermined period, a plurality of types of selected images are displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600, and eventually. An instruction effect is performed in which the player instructs the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 in order to select one of the selected images. Further, in the period from the timing t2 after the start of the instruction effect to the timing t3 which is the end time of the instruction effect, the effect operation acceptance period in which the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is allowed to be accepted is set. In this effect operation acceptance period, the player can switch the selection of the selected image by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 without confirming the selection of the selected image.

Then, at the timing t3, which is the end time of the instruction effect, the selection of the selected image is confirmed with the end of the effect operation acceptance period. Further, during the period from the timing t3, which is the end point of the instruction effect, to the timing t4 after the lapse of a predetermined period, the operation-compatible effect is performed in which the confirmed selected image changes to an image suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit. .. That is, in the operation corresponding effect, it is possible to know what kind of jackpot expectation is suggested as a result of the player selecting the selected image by rotating the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, when the operation effect including the instruction effect and the operation corresponding effect is executed, the volume adjustment is performed in the period from the timing t0 before the start of the instruction effect to the timing t5 after the end of the operation corresponding effect. The volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be on. That is, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be on for a period longer than the period from the timing t1 to the timing t4 when the operation effect is executed. In the peripheral control IC 1510a, when the volume change prohibition flag is in the off state, the player performs a process of changing the volume sub-set value by rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and the volume change prohibition flag is in the on state. And, even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the process of changing the sub-set value of the volume is not performed. In this way, the player does not intend by prohibiting the volume adjustment by the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 at least during the period in which the operation effect consisting of the instruction effect and the operation corresponding effect is being executed. It is possible to prevent the volume adjustment from being performed. In the peripheral control IC 1510a, when the volume change prohibition flag is on, even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the process of changing the volume sub-set value is not performed. Even during such sub-setting value change restriction, when the game management side (hall side) operates the slide type volume adjustment switch 1510d, the process of changing the volume main setting value is performed. There is.

More specifically, the volume is changed not only from the period from the timing t1 to the timing t4 when the operation effect is executed, but also from the timing t0 (for example, 2 seconds before) before the timing t1 which is the start time of the operation effect. The prohibition flag is controlled to be on. For example, if the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be on from the timing t1 which is the start time of the operation effect, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated and operated before and after the start of the operation effect in order to adjust the volume. In the operation effect, there is a possibility that the selected image is selected unintentionally by the player. On the other hand, since the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be on from the timing t0 before the timing t1 which is the start time of the operation effect, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 before and after the timing t0. Even if this is done, it becomes possible to notice that the volume cannot be adjusted during the period from timing t0 to timing t1, and it is possible to prevent the player from selecting an unintended selection image in the operation effect. can.

Further, the volume is changed not only during the period from the timing t1 to the timing t4 when the operation effect is executed, but also over the period until the timing t5 (for example, 2 seconds later) after the timing t4 which is the end time of the operation effect. The prohibition flag is controlled to be on. For example, if the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be off from the timing t4, which is the end time of the operation effect, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated before and after the end of the operation effect, and after the end of the operation effect. In, there is a possibility that the volume adjustment not intended by the player is performed. On the other hand, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to the ON state for a period from the timing t4, which is the end time of the operation effect, to the timing t5, so that the player can rotate the operation unit 302 before and after the timing t4. Even if the rotation operation is performed, the volume adjustment is not performed, and it is possible to prevent the volume adjustment that is not intended by the player after the operation effect is completed.

Next, a case where the player performs a drive effect of rotationally driving the rotation operation unit 302 without rotating the rotation operation unit 302 as an effect during execution of the symbol variation will be described with reference to FIG. 198. .. Even when such a drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302 is performed, the player has a longer period than the period in which the drive effect is executed, as in the case of the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 described above. Does not adjust the volume even if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated.

As shown in FIG. 198, a drive effect for rotationally driving the rotation operation unit 302 is performed during the period from the timing t1 after the start of the symbol variation to the timing t2 after the elapse of a predetermined period. The drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302 is performed as an effect suggesting that the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the drive effect is not performed.

Further, when the drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302 is executed, it is prohibited to adjust the volume during the period from the timing t0 before the start of the drive effect to the timing t3 after the end of the drive effect. The volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be on. That is, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be on for a period longer than the period from the timing t1 to the timing t2 in which the drive effect is executed. In this way, by prohibiting the volume adjustment from being performed at least during the period in which the drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302 is being executed, the player drives the rotation operation unit 302 by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 or the like. It is possible to prevent the execution of the production from being hindered.

More specifically, the volume is changed not only from the period from the timing t1 to the timing t2 when the drive effect is executed, but also from the timing t0 (for example, 2 seconds before) before the timing t1 which is the start time of the drive effect. The prohibition flag is controlled to be on. For example, if the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be on from the timing t1 which is the start time of the drive effect, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated and operated before and after the start of the drive effect in order to adjust the volume. The execution of the drive effect may be hindered. On the other hand, since the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be on from the timing t0 before the timing t1 which is the start time of the drive effect, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 before and after the timing t0. Even if this is done, it becomes possible to notice that the volume cannot be adjusted during the period from the timing t0 to the timing t1, and it is possible to prevent the execution of the drive effect from being hindered.

Further, the volume is changed not only during the period from the timing t1 to the timing t2 when the drive effect is executed, but also over the period until the timing t3 (for example, 2 seconds later) after the timing t2 which is the end time of the drive effect. The prohibition flag is controlled to be on. For example, when the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to the off state from the timing t3 which is the end time of the drive effect, the rotation operation unit 302 is operated even though the rotation drive of the rotation operation unit 302 is temporarily stopped by the drive effect. There is a possibility that the rotation operation will hinder the execution of the drive effect. On the other hand, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to the ON state for a period from the timing t2, which is the end time of the drive effect, to the timing t3, so that it is recognized that the drive effect is after the end. Later, the player can rotate the rotation operation unit 302 to adjust the volume, and it is possible to prevent the execution of the drive effect from being hindered.

Next, as an effect during execution of the symbol variation, a case where an operation effect that can give a change to the effect by the player pressing the pressing operation unit 303 will be described with reference to FIG. 199. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the pressing operation unit 303 is provided in the vicinity of the rotation operation unit 302 so that the rotation operation unit 302 is located around the pressing operation unit 303. Even when the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed, the player can use the operation effect for a longer period than the period in which the operation effect is executed, as in the case of the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 described above. Does not adjust the volume even if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated. Further, as the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303, for example, the player may press the pressing operation unit 303 a predetermined number of times (one time or a plurality of times) on the screen of the effect display device 1600. ) When the player is instructed to perform the pressing operation and the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 the number of times instructed, an image suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit is displayed. In the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303, the pressing operation unit 303 may be projected before the player instructs the pressing operation unit 303 to perform the pressing operation a predetermined number of times. The effect of projecting the pressing operation unit 303 is performed as an effect suggesting that the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of the case where the pressing operation unit 303 does not project.

As shown in FIG. 199, during the period from the timing t1 after the start of the symbol variation to the timing t3 after the elapse of the predetermined period, the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 a predetermined number of times on the screen of the effect display device 1600. (It may be once or multiple times.) An instruction effect for instructing the pressing operation is performed. Further, in the period from the timing t2 after the start of the instruction effect to the timing t3 which is the end time of the instruction effect, the effect operation acceptance period in which the press operation of the press operation unit 303 is allowed to be accepted is set. This effect operation acceptance period shall end when the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 the number of times instructed on the screen of the effect display device 1600, or when a predetermined period elapses. Along with this, the instructional production is also finished.

Then, during the period from the timing t3, which is the end point of the instruction effect, to the timing t4 after the lapse of a predetermined period, an operation-compatible effect for displaying an image suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600. Will be done. That is, in the operation-compatible effect, it is possible to know what kind of jackpot expectation is suggested as a result of the player pressing the pressing operation unit 303 the number of times instructed on the screen of the effect display device 1600.

Further, when the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 including the instruction effect and the operation corresponding effect is executed, the period from the timing t0 before the start of the instruction effect to the timing t5 after the end of the operation corresponding effect. , The volume change prohibition flag that prohibits volume adjustment is controlled to the on state. That is, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be on for a period longer than the period from the timing t1 to the timing t4 when the operation effect is executed. Here, the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are integrally configured as the effect operation unit 301, and since the rotation operation unit 302 is located around the pressing operation unit 303, the player presses the product. There is a possibility that the rotation operation unit 302 may be erroneously operated when the operation unit 303 is pressed. However, it is prohibited to adjust the volume even if the player erroneously operates the rotation operation unit 302 at least during the period in which the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 including the instruction effect and the operation corresponding effect is being executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the volume adjustment that is not intended by the player.

More specifically, not only the period from the timing t1 to the timing t4 in which the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is executed, but also the timing t0 (for example, 2) before the timing t1 which is the start time of the operation effect. Since (seconds ago), the volume change prohibition flag has been controlled to the on state. For example, if the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be on from the timing t1 which is the start time of the operation effect, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated and operated before and after the start of the operation effect in order to adjust the volume. After the start of the operation effect, there is a possibility that the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 unintentionally performed by the player may be performed due to an erroneous operation. On the other hand, since the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be on from the timing t0 before the timing t1 which is the start time of the operation effect, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 before and after the timing t0. Even if this is done, it becomes noticed that the volume cannot be adjusted during the period from timing t0 to timing t1, and after the start of the operation effect, the player unintentionally presses the pressing operation unit 303 due to an erroneous operation. It can be prevented from being done.

Further, not only the period from the timing t1 to the timing t4 in which the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is executed, but also the timing t5 (for example, 2 seconds later) after the timing t4 which is the end point of the operation effect. The volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be on for the period up to. For example, when the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to the off state from the timing t4 which is the end time of the operation effect, the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed before and after the end of the operation effect, and after the end of the operation effect. In the above, there is a possibility that the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated by an erroneous operation to adjust the volume unintentionally by the player. On the other hand, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to the ON state for a period from the timing t4, which is the end time of the operation effect, to the timing t5, so that the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 before and after the timing t4. Even if the pressing operation is performed, the rotation operation unit 302 is not rotated due to an erroneous operation after the operation effect is completed, and it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally adjusting the volume.

As described above, when the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is executed, the player rotates in the period from the timing t0 before the start of the instruction effect to the timing t5 after the end of the operation corresponding effect. Although it is prohibited to adjust the volume even if the operation unit 302 is rotated, if the player continues to rotate the rotation operation unit 302, the effect display device 1600 is displayed on the screen. Certain notifications such as "Volume cannot be changed" are sent to. For example, during the period from timing t1 to timing t4 when the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is executed, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated when the player presses the pressing operation unit 303. There is a possibility that the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in an attempt to adjust the volume without noticing that the volume adjustment is prohibited, rather than a mere erroneous operation such as. However, even in such a case, by giving the above-mentioned specific notification, the player can clearly recognize that the volume adjustment is not performed even if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, and the rotation operation unit It is possible to prevent the rotation operation of 302 from being unnecessarily performed.

Next, a specific example of the effect when the volume is adjusted by the player rotating the rotation operation unit 302 during the period in which the symbol variation is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 200. ..

First, when a command related to the variation pattern is transmitted from the main control board 1310 side to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started on the screen of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 200 (A)). Then, when it is determined that the rotation operation unit 302 has been operated to the right during the period during which the variation display of the decorative symbol is being executed, a process of increasing the volume sub-set value according to the operation amount is performed. conduct. At this time, a volume adjustment bar is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the effect display device 1600 so that the display amount increases or decreases according to the increase or decrease of the volume sub-set value, and the operation amount of the rotation operation unit 302 is displayed. The sub-set value of the increased volume is displayed on the volume adjustment bar (FIG. 200 (B)). In addition, on the screen of the effect display device 1600, the area where the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed and the area where the volume adjustment bar is performed are divided, and the volume that appears by rotating the rotation operation unit 302. The adjustment bar prevents the variable display of the decorative pattern from being hidden, and prevents the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern from being reduced.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the rotation operation unit 302 has been operated to the left during the period during which the variation display of the decorative symbol is being executed, a process of lowering the volume sub-set value according to the operation amount is performed. conduct. At this time, at the lower part of the screen of the effect display device 1600, a volume adjustment bar is displayed so that the display amount increases or decreases according to the increase or decrease of the volume sub-set value, and the operation amount of the rotation operation unit 302 is displayed. The sub-set value of the volume lowered accordingly is displayed on the volume adjustment bar (FIG. 200 (C)).

Then, after the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is stopped, the sub-set value of the changed volume is displayed at the lower part of the screen of the effect display device 1600 until a predetermined period (for example, 1.8 seconds) elapses. The volume display bar to be displayed is continuously displayed (FIGS. 200 (D) and (E)).

As described above, when the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, the drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed during the period in which the symbol variation is executed. Turns on the volume change prohibition flag at a time before the start of those effects (for example, 2 seconds before), and even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the volume is adjusted. I try not to. In this regard, after the volume change prohibition flag is turned on, the sub-set value of the volume displayed on the volume adjustment bar on the screen of the effect display device 1600 does not increase or decrease, but FIG. 200 (D), As shown in (E), the volume display bar on which the sub-set value of the changed volume is displayed is continuously displayed for a predetermined period. Therefore, even when the volume adjustment is suddenly prohibited, it is possible to know at which volume sub-set value the volume adjustment is prohibited, and it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player.

Further, in the above, when the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, the drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed, those effects are not started. From the time when the previous volume change prohibition flag is turned on (for example, 2 seconds ago), the volume adjustment bar that displays the sub-set value of the changed volume is continuously displayed. The volume adjustment bar is erased before the production starts. That is, even after the volume change prohibition flag is turned on, the above-mentioned effect (rotation operation unit 302) is performed after the volume change prohibition flag is turned on during the period when the volume adjustment bar is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600. It is shorter than the period until the operation effect using the above, the drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303) are started. As a result, at the start of the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, the drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303, the volume adjustment bar is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to prevent the visibility of those effects from being lowered.

In the present embodiment, the volume can be adjusted by the player rotating the rotation operation unit 302 during the period during which the symbol change is being executed. However, as described above, the symbol change is being executed. If an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, a drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302, or an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed during the period, from the period during which these effects are executed. For a long period of time, the volume change prohibition flag is turned on so that the volume adjustment is not performed even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302. In addition to this, during the volume adjustment prohibition period in which the volume change prohibition flag is on, the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, the drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation using the pressing operation unit 303 are again performed. When any of the productions is performed, the volume change prohibition flag that was planned to be turned off after the end of the initial production is continued in the on state so that the volume adjustment prohibition period is extended. .. As a result, during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed, one of the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, the drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed. Later, even when the same effect is performed again, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from performing unintended volume adjustment.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation effect (operation) is performed regardless of whether the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 or the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed during the period in which the symbol variation is executed. Until the timing t5 after the end of the corresponding effect), the volume change prohibition flag is turned on so that the volume adjustment is not performed even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, but as another example. Of the operation effects, the volume change prohibition flag may be turned off at a timing after a predetermined period has elapsed from the end of the instruction effect in which the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated. That is, the volume change prohibition flag may be controlled to be on for a period longer than the period during which the instruction effect is executed in the operation effect, and if the timing is after a predetermined period has elapsed from the end of the instruction effect. It may be controlled to the off state before the operation correspondence effect after the instruction effect ends. Of the operation effects, the instruction effect requires the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, whereas the operation response effect after the instruction effect requires the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. However, since the results for those operations are only notified, even if the volume adjustment prohibition period is only set for a period longer than the period in which the instruction effect is executed in the operation effect, the player's It is possible to prevent unintended volume adjustment.

Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol change is executed not only when the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed during the period when the symbol change is executed. If either the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 or the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed even during the period during which the game is not performed or during the period when the jackpot game is being executed, those effects are performed. The volume change prohibition flag is turned on for a period longer than the period during which is executed, so that the volume adjustment is not performed even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302. For example, when the above-mentioned hold notice effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display can be changed every time the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) is started (the start condition is satisfied). , One of the plurality of types of selected images displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600 by the player rotating the rotation operation unit 302 before the symbol variation is started. When the selected image is selected and the symbol variation is started, the operation effect is enabled so that the selected image selected by the player changes to the display mode of the hold display based on the hold change pattern. In such a case, the volume change prohibition flag is turned on during the period spanning the execution of continuous symbol fluctuations so that the period during which the symbol fluctuations are not executed is included, and the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302. Even if it does, the volume is not adjusted. Further, for example, when a jackpot game is executed, in a specific round (for example, the first round), the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 to select one of the songs (selected images). However, it is possible to execute an operation effect in which the music selected by the player is played from the speaker. In this way, either the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 or the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 even during the period spanning the execution of continuous symbol fluctuations or the period during which the jackpot game is being executed. When the above is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally adjusting the volume by providing a period for prohibiting the volume adjustment for a period longer than the period during which the effects are executed.

After a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed without the symbol change being performed again after the symbol change is completed, the player can only rotate the rotation operation unit 302 to adjust the volume. Instead, the player can rotate the rotation operation unit 302 to adjust the amount of light in the effect display device 1600. For example, in the peripheral control IC 1510a, in addition to monitoring whether or not the rotation operation unit 302 is operated, whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 is operated is monitored, and the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during the volume adjustment. When it is judged to that effect, it is switched to the light intensity adjustment. Then, when it is determined that the rotation operation unit 302 has been operated to the right during the light amount adjustment, a process of increasing the set value of the light amount (luminance) according to the operation amount is performed, and the rotation operation unit 302 is left. When it is determined that the operation is performed in the direction, a process of lowering the set value of the light amount (luminance) is performed according to the operation amount. On the other hand, during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed, even if it is determined that the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated, the light amount adjustment is not switched, and the light amount adjustment not intended by the player is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect during execution of the symbol variation from becoming difficult to see.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the player presses the rotation operation unit 302 during the period from the timing t0 to the timing t5 when the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 (see FIG. 199) is executed. When the rotation operation is performed, it is decided to make a specific notification on the screen of the effect display device 1600, such as "The volume cannot be changed", to recognize that the volume adjustment is prohibited. Such a specific notification may also be given when the operation effect used is performed. For example, when an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 (see FIG. 197) is performed during the period in which the symbol variation is executed, the operation effect is executed from the period (timing t1 to t4). For a long period (timing t0 to t5), the volume change prohibition flag is turned on so that the volume adjustment is not performed even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, but the volume adjustment is prohibited. During the period (timing t0 to t2, timing t3 to t5) that is not the above-mentioned effect operation valid period, the player recognizes that the volume adjustment is prohibited when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated. You may want to give a specific notification. Did you notice that during the period (timing t0 to t2, timing t3 to t5) that is not the effect operation valid period, the volume adjustment is prohibited, not the period in which the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is required for the operation effect. There is a possibility that the rotation operation unit 302 is being rotated in an attempt to adjust the volume, but by performing the above-mentioned specific notification, it is clearly recognized that the volume adjustment is not performed, and the rotation operation is performed. It is possible to prevent the rotation operation of the unit 302 from being unnecessarily performed. In addition, as a specific notification in such a case, not the sound output from the speaker but the light emitted from various decorative boards or the display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 so that the effect sound related to the operation effect is not disturbed. It is preferable to do this by (such as displaying "Volume cannot be changed"). Similarly, in the case of the drive effect (FIG. 198) in which the rotation operation unit 302 is rotationally driven, a period (timing t0 to t1) that is not a drive period (a period in which the drive effect is executed) is included in the volume adjustment prohibition period. At the timings t2 to t3), the above-mentioned specific notification may be given.

Further, in the present embodiment, when either the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 or the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed during the period in which the symbol change is being executed, the operation effect (operation) is performed. Until the timing t5 after the end of the corresponding effect), the volume change prohibition flag is turned on so that the volume is not adjusted even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302. On the other hand, when various movable bodies are operated following the operation effect by performing the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, a predetermined period from the end of the operation period of the movable body is performed. It is preferable to keep the volume change prohibition flag on until the timing after the elapse of. In this way, by prohibiting the volume adjustment by the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 during the operation period of the movable body following the operation effect, it is possible to concentrate on the operation of the movable body. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, when the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 is performed during the period in which the symbol change is executed, the volume is longer than the period in which the operation effect is executed. The change prohibition flag is turned on so that the volume is not adjusted even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302. However, regarding the special operation effect as the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, The volume can be changed and reflected in the effect in parallel by the player rotating the rotation operation unit 302 without turning on the volume change prohibition flag during the period when the special operation effect is being executed. It may be done. Examples of such a special operation effect include an effect in which the player is required to raise or lower the volume by rotating the rotation operation unit 302.

[15. About the common operation unit]
Next, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 have been described, but as an example different from the above-mentioned embodiment, the following is described. It may be configured. FIG. 201 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as another embodiment as viewed from the front right.

As shown in FIG. 201, the door frame 3 of the present configuration is provided with a push-in type common operation unit 255 (combined button) in the depth direction on the right side of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. The common operation unit 255 is provided at a position where the player can press the handle 182 in the depth direction with his / her index finger when the player properly rotates the handle 182, and the common operation unit 255 is more conspicuous than the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. There is no light emission decoration by a large number of LEDs such as the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, and it is configured with a modest appearance mode in which the area of the operation receiving unit is smaller than that of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. ing. The common operation unit 255 is not limited to the door frame 3, and may be provided in another portion as long as it can be operated when the handle 182 is rotated. Further, the common operation unit 255 may not be able to change the sub-set value of the volume related to the effect sound.

The above-mentioned common operation unit 255 is effective when an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 and an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed. Specifically, in this configuration, when the player operates the common operation unit 255, the detection signal from the common operation unit detection sensor is input to various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. It has become like. In the peripheral control IC 1510a, the operation status of the common operation unit 255 is monitored during the effect operation valid period in the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, and the detection signal from the common operation unit detection sensor is input and common. When it is determined that the operation unit 255 has been operated, the effect period of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 is terminated, and it is considered that the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 have been operated. Perform the corresponding operation-corresponding effect. That is, in this configuration, when performing an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303, if the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of pressing the pressing operation unit 303, the operation is regarded as operating the pressing operation unit 303. Corresponding production will progress. Further, if the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of pressing the pressing operation unit 303 in the protruding state, the operation corresponding effect is advanced as if the pressing operation unit 303 was operated. In this case, the operation corresponding effect is advanced. Based on the operation of the common operation unit 255, a process of driving the pressed operation unit 303 that has not been operated to return to the normal state (a state that is not a protruding state) is performed. Further, when performing an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, if the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of rotating the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in a specific direction (for example, clockwise (right direction)). )), It is considered that the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right so as to show the same behavior as when the rotation operation is performed, and the operation corresponding effect is advanced. As described above, in this configuration, a plurality of operation units (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) having different operation modes can be shared by the common operation unit 255, and the player operates the handle 182 to play the game. It is possible to proceed with various operation effects with one hand while firing the ball B, which enhances convenience.

More specifically, when performing an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 in the protruding state, if the pressing operation unit 303 in the protruding state is not pressed, the pressing operation unit after a predetermined effect time has elapsed. The process of driving the 303 to return to the normal state (the state in which it is not in the protruding state) is performed. However, if the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of pressing the pressing operation unit 303 in the protruding state, the pressing operation unit is pressed. It is considered that the operation of 303 is performed, and the operation corresponding effect is advanced. In this case, even before the predetermined effect time elapses, the operation is performed when the common operation unit 255 is operated. A process of driving the pressing operation unit 303 to return it to a normal state (a state that is not a protruding state) is performed. Similarly, when performing an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, a predetermined portion of the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated by a predetermined vibration means (driving of a vibration speaker, a vibration motor, etc.) to perform a rotation operation. The player does not rotate the rotation operation unit 302 when the vibration effect that gives the player a feeling of vibration is performed through the unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, or when the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed. When a drive effect is performed in which the rotation operation unit 302 is rotationally driven (self-propelled), if the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are not operated, vibration or drive by the vibration effect is performed after a predetermined effect time has elapsed. The process of ending the rotation drive by the effect is performed, but if the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, it is considered that the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated. In this case, even before the predetermined effect time elapses, when the common operation unit 255 is operated, the vibration due to the vibration effect and the rotation due to the drive effect are advanced. The process of terminating the drive will be performed. As a result, when the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, the protruding state of the pressing operation unit 303, the vibration due to the vibration effect, and the rotation drive due to the drive effect continue carelessly. The player can recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are considered to have been operated without being performed.

Further, when performing an operation effect of changing to the protruding state when the pressing operation unit 303 in the normal state (not in the protruding state) is pressed, if the pressing operation unit 303 is not pressed, the predetermined effect time is set. After the lapse of time, the process of driving the pressing operation unit 303 to the protruding state is performed, but if the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of pressing the pressing operation unit 303, it is regarded as the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 and the operation corresponding effect is produced. In this case, even before the predetermined effect time elapses, when the common operation unit 255 is operated, the unoperated pressing operation unit 303 is driven to the protruding state. Processing will be performed. Similarly, when the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, a predetermined vibration means (such as driving a vibration speaker or a vibration motor) vibrates a predetermined portion of the pachinko machine 1 to vibrate the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation. When a vibration effect that gives the player a feeling of vibration is performed through the unit 303, or when a drive effect is performed in which the rotation operation unit 302 is rotationally driven (self-propelled) without the player rotating the rotation operation unit 302. If the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are not operated, a process of starting the vibration by the vibration effect or the rotation drive by the drive effect is performed after the lapse of a predetermined effect time. If the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of operating the operation unit 303, it is considered that the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, and the operation corresponding effect is advanced. In this case, a predetermined effect is achieved. Even before the lapse of time, when the common operation unit 255 is operated, the process of starting the vibration by the vibration effect or the rotational drive by the drive effect is performed. As a result, when the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, the pressing operation unit 303 changes to the protruding state at that time, and the vibration or driving effect due to the vibration effect is generated. Since the rotation drive is started, the player can recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are considered to have been operated.

In addition, in the progress of the game, as an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, a continuous hitting effect requiring a plurality of pressing operations on the pressing operation unit 303 and a left-right direction with respect to the rotation operation unit 302 A specific operation mode such as a mutual rotation effect that requires a small rotation operation, or a long operation effect (long press effect, long rotation effect, etc.) that requires a long operation for the same operation unit of the pressing operation unit 303 or the rotation operation unit 302. Even when the operation effect requiring The operation of the common operation unit may be reflected in the required operation effect.

In addition to the above, when the player operates the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 in an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, a predetermined vibration means (driving of a vibration speaker or a vibration motor) is performed. When the predetermined part of the pachinko machine 1 vibrates due to (such as) to give the player a feeling of vibration through the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, even when the above-mentioned common operation unit 255 is operated. Similar to when the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, the predetermined portion of the pachinko machine 1 vibrates by the vibration means (driving of a vibration speaker, vibration motor, etc.) and vibrates to the player through the common operation unit 255. You may give a feeling. Thereby, the game effect that the above-mentioned convenience can be enhanced can be realized more effectively.

Instead of the above, the common operation unit 255 may be able to change the sub-set value of the volume related to the effect sound. For example, when changing the volume sub-setting value, if the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of rotating the rotation operation unit 302, it is the same as when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise (to the right). Shows behavior. Further, similarly to the above-described embodiment, when the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, the drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed, the volume change prohibition flag is performed. May be turned on, and the role of the common operation unit 255 may be switched from the volume operation to the effect operation to the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303. That is, during the volume adjustment prohibition period in which the volume change prohibition flag is turned on, it is considered that the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated without the volume adjustment being performed even if the common operation unit is pressed. You may make the operation correspondence production progress. In this way, by prohibiting the volume adjustment not only for the rotation operation unit 302 but also for the common operation unit 255, it is possible to prevent the volume adjustment that is not intended by the player.

Further, the common operation unit 255 described above is effective when an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 and an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed, but as another example, the rotation operation unit 302 is used. After providing a plurality of types of operation effects using the operation effect and the pressing operation unit 303, the operation effects having a high occurrence frequency (occurrence rate) among the plurality of types of operation effects (for example, relatively about 1/3). When an operation effect used to advance the pre-reach variation dialogue effect with a high effect execution probability is performed, the common operation unit 255 is enabled and the operation effect with a low occurrence frequency (for example, about 1/100) is performed. When the operation effect used for the progress of the cut-in effect during reach for which a relatively low effect execution probability is set) is performed, the common operation unit 255 may be invalidated. As a result, when an operation effect with a high frequency of occurrence is performed, if the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 can be operated. The operation effect progresses (the operation response effect is performed), but when the operation effect that occurs infrequently is performed, even if the common operation unit 255 is pressed, the rotation operation unit 302 or It is not considered that the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated, and the operation effect does not progress (the operation corresponding effect is not performed). That is, when the operation effect with a low occurrence frequency is performed, the operation effect progresses only when the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated instead of the common operation unit 255. As a result, when performing an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 and an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303, the originally required operation unit can be operated according to the frequency of occurrence of the operation effect. It is possible to make the player experience the original fun of the operation production in a rare mode as much as possible, and to give a sharp participation to the operation production. In the case of such a form, the following may be used. For example, even if the operation effect is infrequently generated, the operation effect can be performed only when the number of executions reaches a predetermined number of times (one or more times) after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. If the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, it is considered that the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, as in the operation effect having a high frequency of occurrence. The operation effect may be advanced. As described above, by changing the conditions under which the common operation unit 255 functions as a substitute for the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 according to the progress of the game, the common operation unit 255 can be used more preferably.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the application avoidance of the common operation unit 255 is switched according to the frequency of occurrence of the operation effect, but the following may be used. For example, after providing a plurality of types of operation effects using the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 were operated among the plurality of types of operation effects. Occasionally, the common operation unit 255 may be invalidated when an operation effect to which a predetermined operation is given is performed, and the common operation unit 255 may be enabled when an operation effect to which a predetermined operation is not given is performed. .. It should be noted that the operation effect to which the predetermined operation is given is an operation effect of changing to the protruding state when the pressing operation unit 303 in the normal state (not the protruding state) is pressed, or a rotation operation as described above. When the unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, a predetermined part of the pachinko machine 1 vibrates by a predetermined vibration means (driving of a vibration speaker or a vibration motor, etc.), and the player passes through the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303. Examples include a vibration effect that gives a feeling of vibration, and a drive effect that causes the rotation operation unit 302 to be rotationally driven (self-propelled) without the player rotating the rotation operation unit 302. As a result, of the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303, the operation effect in which a predetermined operation is given when the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated is performed. In such a case, since the common operation unit 255 is invalid, it is possible to perform the operation of the operation unit originally requested and perform a predetermined operation given in the operation effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the application avoidance of the common operation unit 255 is switched according to the frequency of occurrence of the operation effect, but the following may be used. For example, when a plurality of types of operation effects using the rotation operation unit 302 and operation effects using the pressing operation unit 303 are provided, and among these multiple types of operation effects, an operation effect with a low expectation of a big hit is performed. May enable the common operation unit 255, and disable the common operation unit 255 when an operation effect with a high expectation of a big hit is performed. As a result, when performing an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 and an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303, the originally required operation unit can be operated according to the degree of expectation of the operation effect. It is possible to give a sharp impression to the participation in the operation production. Further, among the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303, when the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed, the common operation unit 255 is enabled and the rotation operation is performed. When the operation effect using the unit 302 is performed, the common operation unit 255 may be invalidated. As described above, in the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303, even if the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of pressing the pressing operation unit 303, the same operation feeling can be given, but the rotation operation unit can be given. In the production using 302, if the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of rotating the rotation operation unit 302, the operation feeling will be different. Therefore, by enabling only the rotation operation for the rotation operation unit 302, it is originally given. It is possible to maintain a feeling of operation. Further, apart from the common operation unit 255 as an alternative to the pressing operation unit 303, a position similar to that of the common operation unit 255 (a position where the player can properly press the handle 182 in the depth direction with the index finger when the player properly rotates the handle 182). ) May be provided with an alternative rotation operation unit as an alternative to the rotation operation unit 302. As an alternative rotation operation unit as an alternative to the rotation operation unit 302, the player can use the same configuration as the rotation operation unit 302 but having a small and conservative appearance. Allows the rotation operation to be performed, and when the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 is performed, the alternative rotation operation unit may be enabled. In this case, instead of rotating the rotation operation unit 302. Even if the alternative rotation operation unit is rotated, the same rotation operation can be given.

In addition, whether or not the common operation unit 255 is valid during the period before the game is started (the period during which the demo display etc. can be performed) because the symbol change according to the big hit determination has not been performed yet. Alternatively, when the common operation unit 255 is enabled, the player may be able to switch the setting of the operation unit to be effective among the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. For example, during a period in which a demo display or the like can be performed, a predetermined selection screen can be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600 by operating the pressing operation unit 303, and the "rotation" displayed as the selection screen is displayed. "The common operation unit 255 is valid only for the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303", "The common operation unit 255 is valid only for the rotation operation unit 302", and "For the pressing operation unit 303". Only the common operation unit 255 is enabled "and" the common operation unit 255 is invalidated for both the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 ", so that the player selects the desired option. May be good. As described above, by changing the operation unit in which the common operation unit 255 functions as a substitute for the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 according to the preference of the player, the common operation unit 255 can be used more preferably. ..

[16. Light guide effect using light guide plate]
Next, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of light guide plates, each of which can emit and display a pattern, and a light guide effect using these light guide plates will be described below.

As described above, as the plurality of light guide plates, a transparent flat plate-shaped table that is attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500 in order from the front side in the front-rear direction (depth direction) and closes the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500. The light guide plate 2610, the transparent flat plate-shaped back first light guide plate 3210 attached to the front side of the unit base 3201 and closing the inside of the frame of the unit base 3201, and the front side of the unit base 3151 attached to the unit base 3151. A transparent flat plate-shaped back second light guide plate 3160 that closes the inside of the frame is provided.

[16-1. Light guide effect using the back second light guide plate]
First, the back second light guide plate 3160 has a fifth pattern 3161 (see FIG. 140) formed by innumerable uneven fifth reflecting portions that reflect only light from the left-right direction forward, and a vertical direction. It is equipped with a sixth pattern 3162 (see FIG. 141) formed by innumerable uneven sixth reflecting portions that reflect only light from the front, but a back second light guide plate 3160 is used. As a light guide effect, FIG. 202 shows a light guide effect for displaying the fifth pattern 3161 by emitting light of the light guide plate LEDs 3171a of a pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171 provided on the left and right of the back second light guide plate 3160. This will be described with reference to FIG. 204.

As shown in FIG. 202, 21 light guide plate LEDs 3171a on each of the left and right sides are mounted on the pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171 in a state of being arranged in a row in the vertical direction. Of the 21st to 21st, for at least 3 light guide plates of 1st to 3rd, 4th to 6th, 7th to 9th, 10th to 12th, 13th to 15th, 16th to 18th, and 19th to 21st, respectively. The LED 3171a is an individual group, and it is possible to independently emit / turn off the light guide plate LED 3171a in each group unit. Then, when displaying the fifth pattern 3161 on the back second light guide plate 3160 by emitting light, when the first to third light guide plate LEDs 3171a in the pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171 are made to emit light, the back second light guide plate 3160 is emitted. Of the light emitting regions divided into 7 areas that are substantially equal in the vertical direction, the first light emitting region A can be displayed as light emitting, and when the 4th to 6th light guide plate LEDs 3171a are made to emit light, the second light emitting region B is emitted. When the 7th to 9th light guide plate LEDs 3171a are made to emit light, the third light emitting area C can be made to emit light, and when the 10th to 12th light guide plate LEDs 3171a are made to emit light, the fourth light emission can be made. When the area D can be displayed in light emission and the 13th to 15th light guide plate LEDs 3171a are made to emit light, the fifth light emitting area E can be made to emit light and display, and when the 16th to 18th light guide plate LEDs 3171a are made to emit light. , The sixth light emitting area F can be made to emit light, and when the 19th to 21st light guide plate LEDs 3171a are made to emit light, the seventh light emitting area G can be made to emit light.

The fifth pattern 3161 emitted and displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160 is provided on substantially the entire surface of the back second light guide plate 3160, and has a light guide decoration consisting of the characters "Change!" In the central part and its "Change!" A light guide decoration (book) that is provided around the characters of "Change!" In the embodiment, it is composed of a sandstorm-like background pattern). In this embodiment, in order to make the characters of "Change!" Stand out while the fine fifth reflection parts are concentrated, the character portion of "Change!" And the background pattern portion on the sandstorm are used. The formation mode of the fifth reflective portion (for example, the depth of carving on the light guide plate, the width of the carving, etc.) is different so that the light guide decoration is emphasized only in the fifth reflective portion of the character part. .. Further, as shown in the figure, the character "Change!" Of the fifth pattern 3161 is the fourth light emitting position located in the center of the light emitting region obtained by dividing the back second light guide plate 3160 into seven substantially equal areas in the vertical direction. Since it is arranged in the area D, when the 10th to 12th light guide plate LEDs 3171a among the 1st to 21st from the upper side are made to emit light, the characters "Change!" Can be emitted and displayed. On the other hand, when the 10th to 12th light guide plate LEDs 3171a are turned off and the light guide plate LEDs 3171a other than the 10th to 12th lights are turned off, the characters "Change!" The background pattern can be displayed by light emission.

As shown in FIG. 203, in the light guide effect in which the fifth pattern 3161 is emitted and displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160, the effect proceeds so that the light emitting region of the back second light guide plate 3160 increases when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Finally, the fourth light emitting area D is light-emitting and displayed so that the characters "Change!" Of the fifth pattern 3161 can be visually recognized. Specifically, when the light guide effect for displaying the fifth pattern 3161 with light emission is started, first, as shown in FIG. 203 (a), for the light guide plates 1 to 21 out of the 1st to 21st in order from the upper side. By making the LED 3171a emit light, the first light emitting region A is made to emit light, and by making the 19th to 21st light guide plate LEDs 3171a emit light, the seventh light emitting region G is made to emit light. That is, in the first light emitting region A and the seventh light emitting region G, a sandstorm-like background pattern appears by displaying the light emitting regions, and the screen display of the effect display device 1600 located on the rear side is difficult to see. However, in the second light emitting region B, the third light emitting region C, the fourth light emitting region D, the fifth light emitting region E, and the sixth light emitting region F, those light emitting regions are not displayed as light emitting, and the effect is produced. The screen display of the display device 1600 is in a visible state. The light guide plate LEDs 3171a mounted on the pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171 are all side-view type full-color LEDs. At this stage, the light guide plate LEDs 3171a are made to emit white light to be white. The light emission display is made.

In addition, in the back-rear decoration effect unit 3150 of the present embodiment, only for a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3172a for displaying the sixth pattern 3162 of the back second light guide plate 3160 by light emission, between the back second light guide plate 3160. A condenser lens 3156 is arranged in the light guide plate 3156, and similarly, a condenser lens is arranged between the light guide plate LED 3171a for displaying the fifth pattern 3161 and the back second light guide plate 3160. You may. Such a condensing lens can condense the light spreading from the light guide plate LED 3171a and suppress it from being unnecessarily diffused. For example, the 1st to 21st of the 1st to 21st in order from the upper side. When the light guide plate LED 3171a is made to emit light and the 19th to 21st light guide plate LEDs 3171a are made to emit light, other light emitting regions (light emitting regions other than the first light emitting region A and the seventh light emitting region G) are caused by light leakage. It is possible to prevent the light emission display. Further, among the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a for displaying the fifth pattern 3161 by light emission, a condensing lens may be arranged between the back second light guide plate 3160 only for a part of the light guide plate LEDs 3171a. .. For example, when the fourth light emitting region D is caused to emit light by emitting light from the 10th to 12th light guide plate LEDs 3171a, which will be described later, among the 1st to 21st from the upper side, the back second light guide plate 3160 is abbreviated. Since it is necessary to prevent light leakage from the 10th to 12th light guide plate LEDs 3171a in order to display the entire light emitting region with light emission, it is not necessary to prevent light leakage from the other 1st to 9th and 13th to 21st light guide plate LEDs 3171a. Only, a condenser lens may be arranged between the back second light guide plate 3160 and the back second light guide plate 3160.

As shown in FIG. 203 (b), after the first light emitting region A and the seventh light emitting region G are light-emitting and displayed, the predetermined conditions for displaying the remaining light-emitting regions are satisfied, and these light-emitting displays are displayed. In addition, by making the 4th to 6th light guide plate LEDs 3171a emit light from the 1st to 21st in order from the upper side, the second light emitting region B is emitted and displayed to enlarge the sandstorm-like background pattern, and 16 to 18 By emitting light from the second light guide plate LED 3171a, the sixth light emitting region F is emitted and displayed, and the sandstorm-like background pattern is enlarged. That is, in the first light emitting region A, the second light emitting region B, the sixth light emitting region F, and the seventh light emitting region G, a sandstorm-like background pattern appears by displaying the light emitting regions in light emission, and is located on the rear side. The screen display of the effect display device 1600 is difficult to visually recognize, but in the third light emitting region C, the fourth light emitting region D, and the fifth light emitting region E, those light emitting regions are not displayed as light emitting. The screen display of the effect display device 1600 is in a visible state. Even at this stage, the light emitting LED 3171a for the light guide plate is made to emit white light, so that the light emission display is made in white.

As shown in FIG. 203 (c), after the first light emitting region A, the second light emitting region B, the sixth light emitting region F, and the seventh light emitting region G are light-emitting and displayed, the remaining light-emitting area is light-emitting and displayed. When the conditions are satisfied, in addition to these light emission displays, the 7th to 9th light guide plate LEDs 3171a of the 1st to 21st from the upper side are made to emit light, so that the third light emission region C is emitted and displayed in a sandstorm. By further enlarging the background pattern of the shape and causing the 12th to 15th LED for the light guide plate to emit light, the fifth light emitting region E is emitted and displayed, and the background pattern of the sandstorm is further enlarged. That is, in the first light emitting region A, the second light emitting region B, the third light emitting region C, the fifth light emitting region E, the sixth light emitting region F, and the seventh light emitting region G, those light emitting regions are displayed as light emitting. A sandstorm-like background pattern appears, and the screen display of the effect display device 1600 located on the rear side is difficult to see. However, in the fourth light emitting area D, those light emitting areas are not displayed by light emission. The screen display of the effect display device 1600 is in a visible state. Even at this stage, the light emitting LED 3171a for the light guide plate is made to emit white light, so that the light emission display is made in white.

As shown in FIGS. 203 (d) and 203 (e), after the emission display of the emission region excluding the fourth emission region D is emitted and displayed, the predetermined condition for displaying the remaining emission region by emission is satisfied. In addition to these light emission displays, the fourth light emitting region D is made to emit light by causing the 10th to 12th light guide plate LEDs 3171a among the 1st to 21st from the upper side to emit light. That is, by displaying substantially all the light emitting areas of the back second light guide plate 3160, substantially all of the screen display of the effect display device 1600 located on the rear side becomes difficult to see due to the sandstorm-like background pattern. In addition to this, in the fourth light emitting region D, the characters "Change!" Of the fifth pattern 3161 are displayed by light emission. At this stage, the light guide plate LED 3171a is made to emit light in any of the emission colors such as white, blue, red, and multiple colors, so that the entire light emitting region of the back second light guide plate 3160 is emitted in a predetermined emission color. It is possible. The term “multicolor” can be exemplified by making the light guide plate LED 3171a emit light in a different color for each light emitting region, or causing each of the three light guide plate LEDs 3171a in each light emitting region to emit light in a different color.

By the way, the light guide effect of displaying the fifth pattern 3161 on the back second light guide plate 3160 by light emission is a part of the hold change suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display may change as described above. It is performed in combination with the suggestion production. Specifically, in the present embodiment, as a hold notice effect, a variable display of a decorative symbol (variable display of a special symbol) is started (started) during the display period of the hold display (pre-digestion hold display, post-digestion hold display). Each time the condition is satisfied), the display mode of the hold display can be changed based on the hold change pattern. Then, the post-digestion hold display related to the variable display of the decorative pattern is light-emitting and displayed by the LED mounted on the under-back movable decorative body decorative substrate 3512 (the decorative body of the under-back movable decorative body 3510). Although it is performed using the main body 3511), at the timing when the display mode of the hold display after digestion changes, a light guide effect is performed to display the fifth pattern 3161 on the back second light guide plate 3160 by emitting light, and the hold after digestion is performed. It is intended to suggest the possibility that the display mode of the display may change.

More specifically, when it is determined that the hold display does not change after digestion, it is suggested that the light emitting region excluding the fourth light emitting region D among the plurality of types of suggestion effect patterns is light-emitting and displayed and ended (turned off). The effect pattern A (A1 to A3 described later) can be determined. For example, as the suggestion effect pattern A for displaying the light emitting region excluding the fourth light emitting region D by emitting light, after displaying the first light emitting region A and the seventh light emitting region G for light emission, the predetermined extinguishing time (for example, 2 seconds) is set. The suggestion effect pattern A1, the first light emitting region A and the seventh light emitting region G, and the second light emitting region B and the sixth light emitting region F, which are turned off with the lapse of time, are arranged in this order for a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds). The emission display is expanded for each time, and then the suggestion effect pattern A2, the first emission region A and the seventh emission region G, and the second emission region B are turned off after a predetermined extinguishing time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses. The sixth light emitting region F, the third light emitting region C, and the fifth light emitting region E are expanded in this order at predetermined time intervals (for example, 1.5 seconds), and then the predetermined extinguishing time (after that). For example, there is a suggestion effect pattern A3 that turns off them after the passage of 2 seconds). On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold display is changed after digestion, the first light emitting region A and the seventh light emitting region G, and the second light emitting region B and the sixth light emitting region B and the sixth light emitting region B are among the plurality of types of suggested effect patterns. The light emitting region F, the third light emitting region C, the fifth light emitting region E, and the fourth light emitting region D are expanded in this order at predetermined time intervals (for example, 1.5 seconds) to expand the light emitting display. (Ii) After displaying substantially all the light emitting regions of the light guide plate 3160 by emitting light, it is possible to determine the suggestion effect pattern B for turning off the light after a predetermined extinguishing time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed. That is, in the light guide effect in which the fifth pattern 3161 is emitted and displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160, it is suggested that the hold display does not change after digestion when the fourth light emitting region D is not emitted and displayed. On the other hand, when substantially the entire light emitting region of the back second light guide plate 3160 including the fourth light emitting region D is light-emittingly displayed, it is suggested that the hold display after digestion changes. As a result, after the start of the light guide effect, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the characters "Change!" Of the fifth pattern 3161 are emitted and displayed by emitting and displaying the fourth light emitting region D.

Further, in the present embodiment, when substantially all the light emitting regions of the back second light guide plate 3160 including the fourth light emitting region D are displayed as light emitting to change the hold display after digestion, the back second including the fourth light emitting region D is included. At the same time that substantially all the light emitting regions of the light guide plate 3160 are turned off (with the passage of a predetermined turn-off time), the hold display is changed after digestion. As a result, in addition to paying attention to whether or not the characters "Change!" Of the fifth pattern 3161 are emitted and displayed, after the emission region of the back second light guide plate 3160 is turned off, what kind of post-digestion is performed. It is possible to pay attention to whether or not the hold display appears, and it is possible to maintain the expectation of the player until the light emitting region of the back second light guide plate 3160 is turned off. Further, as another example instead of this, when substantially all the light emitting regions of the back second light guide plate 3160 including the fourth light emitting region D are displayed as light emitting to change the hold display after digestion, the back including the fourth light emitting region D is included. After almost all the light emitting regions of the second light guide plate 3160 are turned off, the hold display may be changed after a predetermined delay time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed. In this case, the back second guide may be changed. It is possible to maintain the expectation of the player even after the light emitting region of the light plate 3160 is turned off.

Further, when the light emitting region of substantially the entire light emitting region of the back second light guide plate 3160 is light-emitting and displayed, the light-emitting region is light-emitting and displayed in any of white, blue, red, and multicolored light-emitting colors. The suggestion effect pattern is determined so that the post-digestion hold display changes to a display mode with a high expectation of a big hit in the order of blue, red, and multicolored emission colors. That is, for example, when substantially all the light emitting regions of the back second light guide plate 3160 are displayed in white, the probability that the post-digestion hold display will change to a display mode with a high expectation of a big hit is low, whereas the back side is low. When substantially all the light emitting regions of the second light guide plate 3160 are displayed in red, there is a high probability that the post-digestion hold display will change to a display mode with a high expectation of a big hit. As a result, when displaying substantially the entire light emitting region of the back second light guide plate 3160, the light emitting color plays a role of suggesting in advance, and is the light emitting region emitted and displayed in a highly expected light emitting color? Can also be noticed. It should be noted that the color of the light emitting region already displayed may be changed in the process of displaying light emission in substantially all the light emitting regions of the back second light guide plate 3160 (for example, the first light emitting region A and the seventh light emitting region A and the seventh light emitting region). When the region G was emitted and displayed, it was white emission, but when the second emission region B and the sixth emission region F were subsequently emitted and displayed, the first emission region A and the seventh emission region G were included. By making all of them emit red light, etc.), this causes not only whether the next light emitting area expands until almost all the light emitting area of the back second light guide plate 3160 is displayed as light emission, but also the color of the light emitting area. You can expect changes.

As another example, when displaying substantially the entire light emitting area of the back second light guide plate 3160, the light emitting color may be displayed in a light emitting color corresponding to the display mode after the change of the post-digestion hold display. .. For example, when substantially all the light emitting regions of the back second light guide plate 3160 are displayed in red, the display mode of the post-digestion hold display is changed by changing the display mode of the post-digestion hold display to red. Before that, it becomes possible to grasp the display mode after the change.

Further, as another example, the light guide effect for displaying the fifth pattern 3161 on the back second light guide plate 3160 by light emission may be performed not as a hold change suggestion effect but as an effect suggesting a jackpot expectation degree. For example, after the start of the light guide effect, the higher the light emitting region displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160, the higher the expectation of a big hit, and further, the light emission of almost all of the back second light guide plate 3160. When displaying a region by light emission, the light emission region is configured so that the higher the light emission color of the jackpot expectation is, the higher the jackpot expectation is, so that the light guide effect is attracted with expectation. be able to. Further, in the case of such another example, for example, "the effect display in which the enemy character is gradually crushed" is displayed on the screen display of the effect display device 1600 which can be visually recognized through the light emission area where the light emission is not displayed. The combination display may be performed according to the light emission display and the non-light emission area of 3160. In this way, by displaying a special effect image that matches the expansion of the light emitting area of the back second light guide plate 3160, it is possible to further enhance the light guide effect that gradually emits and displays the fifth pattern 3161. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the light emitting area displayed by light emission on the back second light guide plate 3160 is expanded every time a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses, but as another example, the pressing operation unit After displaying an instruction image such as "press a button!" So that the player presses the 303, the pressing operation unit 303 may be enlarged each time the player presses the operation unit 303. For example, when it is determined to expand the light emitting area displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160 as a suggestion effect pattern, the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 to perform the light emitting area. If it is determined not to expand the light emitting area displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160, even if the player presses the pressing operation unit 303, the light emitting area is not expanded. .. In this way, unless the player presses the pressing operation unit 303, the light emitting area displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160 is not expanded, so that the pressing operation unit 303 is actively participated in the pressing operation. This makes it possible to further enhance the light guide effect in which the fifth pattern 3161 is gradually emitted and displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160.

As described above, in the light guide effect in which the fifth pattern 3161 is emitted and displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160, a predetermined condition is satisfied (elapsed of a predetermined time) after the emission display of the light emitting region excluding the fourth light emitting region D. Based on the above, the fourth light emitting area D, which has a smaller area than the light emitting area, is light-emitting and displayed, so that the characters "Change!" Of the fifth pattern 3161 are emitted and displayed. As described above, although the back second light guide plate 3160 is configured to emit light in substantially the entire light emitting region, the light emitting region is not suddenly displayed in almost all of the light emitting region, and the fourth light emitting region D is excluded. Since the light emitting region can be emitted and displayed in advance, the characters "Change!" Of the fifth pattern 3161 emitted and displayed in the fourth light emitting region D can be focused on, and useful information for the player is not overlooked. Can be done.

Further, in the light guide effect in which the fifth pattern 3161 is emitted and displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160, the first light emitting region A and the seventh light emitting region G and the seventh light emitting region G are displayed before the fourth light emitting region D is emitted and displayed. The second light emitting region B and the sixth light emitting region F, and the third light emitting region C and the fifth light emitting region E are sequentially displayed by light emission. As described above, before the fourth light emitting area D is light-emitting and displayed, the light-emitting area excluding the fourth light-emitting area D can be light-emitting and displayed so as to gradually increase. Therefore, the screen of the effect display device 1600. Even a player who is paying attention to the display can smoothly shift to the visual recognition of the light emission display of the back second light guide plate 3160 located on the front side thereof, so that the player does not feel stress. can. Further, before the fourth light emitting region D is emitted and displayed, whether or not the light emitting region excluding the fourth light emitting region D is light-emitting and displayed so as to gradually increase, that is, the fourth light emitting region D is emitted. You can expect to pay attention to whether or not you have a chance to display it.

Next, a specific example of the effect in which the fifth pattern 3161 is light-emittingly displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160 will be described with reference to FIG. 204.

First, when a command related to the variation pattern is transmitted from the main control board 1310 side to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started on the screen of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 204 (A)). At this time, on the underside effect unit 3500 (decorative body main body 3511 of the underside movable decorative body 3510), the post-digestion hold display related to the change display of the decorative pattern is light-emittingly displayed based on the hold change pattern.

Then, when the hold change pattern in which the hold display changes after digestion is determined, and as the hold change suggestion effect, the suggestion effect pattern for displaying substantially the entire light emitting region of the back second light guide plate 3160 is determined. If so, first, of the substantially all light emitting regions of the back second light guide plate 3160, the light guide plate LEDs 3171a corresponding to the first light emitting region A and the seventh light emitting region G are made to emit white light. The first light emitting region A and the seventh light emitting region G are displayed in white (FIG. 204 (B)). Further, after the emission display of the first emission region A and the seventh emission region G, the light guide plate LED3171a corresponding to the second emission region B and the sixth emission region F is based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (elapsed of the predetermined time). Is emitted in white, and the second light emitting region B and the sixth light emitting region F are displayed in white, and then the third light emitting region C and the fifth light emitting region E are based on the establishment of predetermined conditions (elapsed of a predetermined time). By causing the light guide plate LED 3171a corresponding to the above to emit light in white, the third light emitting region C and the fifth light emitting region E are emitted and displayed in white. As described above, the light emitting area displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160 is gradually increased, so that the screen display of the effect display device 1600 that can be visually recognized by the player is gradually reduced.

Then, after the light emission display of the light emitting region excluding the fourth light emitting region D, the light guide plate LED 3171a corresponding to the fourth light emitting region D is made to emit light based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (elapsed of a predetermined time). The characters "Change!" Of the fifth pattern 3161 are emitted and displayed in the fourth light emitting region D (FIG. 204 (C)). As a result, substantially all the light emitting regions of the back second light guide plate 3160 are emitted and displayed, and the emission colors displayed by emission in substantially all the light emitting regions are white, blue, and red determined by the suggestion effect pattern. , Rainbow color and other emission colors are used for emission display.

Further, when substantially all the light emitting areas of the back second light guide plate 3160 are displayed by light emission, almost all of the screen display of the effect display device 1600 located on the rear side is difficult to see, but the effect display. On the screen of the device 1600, a screen display substantially the same as the character of the fifth pattern 3161 "Change!" Displayed in the fourth light emitting area D is displayed at a position behind the character. .. In this way, by assisting the characters of "Change!" Of the fifth pattern 3161 emitted and displayed in the fourth light emitting area D by using the screen display of the effect display device 1600, the characters can be made to stand out. It is possible to improve the visibility of the light emission display. In addition, the light guide plate LED 3171a corresponding to the fourth light emitting area D fails, and the characters "Change!" Of the fifth pattern 3161 are not displayed in the fourth light emitting area D, and the light emission display can be visually recognized. Even if it is not present, by visually recognizing the screen display of the effect display device 1600, it is possible to recognize that there is a chance that the hold display will change after digestion.

Then, substantially all the light emitting regions of the back second light guide plate 3160 are emitted and displayed, and after the above-mentioned predetermined extinguishing time has elapsed, all of the light guide plate LEDs 3171a are turned off, and the emission display for substantially all the light emitting regions is completed. On the other hand, on the screen of the effect display device 1600, the characters "Change!" Of the fifth pattern 3161 are displayed from the end of the light emission display until the predetermined extension time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses. The substantially same screen display is continuously displayed (FIG. 204 (D)). In this way, even after the light guide effect of displaying the fifth pattern 3161 on the back second light guide plate 3160 by light emission is completed, the characters of "Change!" Of the fifth pattern 3161 are substantially the same on the screen of the effect display device 1600. By continuously displaying the screen display, the player paying attention to the light emission display of the back second light guide plate 3160 can smoothly shift to the visual recognition of the screen display of the effect display device 1600 located on the rear side. It can be visually recognized without any discomfort when proceeding to the subsequent production. Further, with the light emission display of the fifth pattern 3161 on the back second light guide plate 3160, the back bottom effect unit is used from the end of the light emission display until a predetermined extension time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses. The post-digestion hold display related to the change display of the decorative symbol that is light-emittingly displayed on the 3500 (the decorative body 3511 of the movable lower back decorative body 3510) is changed based on the hold change pattern, and the change of the decorative symbol is made. It is designed to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit for the display.

[16-2. Light guide effect using multiple light guide plates and movable ornaments]
Next, on the front side of the effect display device 1600, as a plurality of light guide plates, each of which can emit and display a pattern, the front light guide plate 2610 and the back first light guide plate 3210 are sequentially displayed from the front side in the front-rear direction (depth direction). And the back second light guide plate 3160 are provided, but in addition to these light guide plates, a plurality of light guide plates that can appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600 and each of which can emit and decorate the decorative body. As movable decorative bodies, the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 in the back right movable effect unit 3310, the decorative body main body 3411 of the back upper movable decorative body 3410 in the back upper movable effect unit 3400, and the back rear movable effect unit. The decorative body main body 3121 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 in the 3110 and the decorative body main body 3511 of the back lower movable decorative body 3510 in the back-underward effect unit 3500 are provided. A light guide effect using the plurality of light guide plates and the plurality of movable decorative bodies will be described with reference to FIGS. 205 to 207.

FIG. 205 shows a side sectional view for explaining the positional relationship between the effect display device 1600, the plurality of light guide plates, and the plurality of movable decorative bodies. As shown in FIG. 205, the front light guide plate 2610, the back first light guide plate 3210, and the back second light guide plate 3160 are provided on the front side of the effect display device 1600.

Further, between the front light guide plate 2610 and the back first light guide plate 3210, the decorative body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 in the back right movable effect unit 3310 and the back upper movable decorative body in the back upper effect unit 3400. The decorative body main body 3411 of 3410 and the decorative body main body 3511 of the back lower movable decorative body 3510 in the back lower effect unit 3500 are provided. Then, the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is located between the front light guide plate 2610 and the back first light guide plate 3210 from above so as to be located on the front side of the effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing. It can appear (see FIG. 155). Further, the decorative body main body 3411 of the back-up movable decorative body 3410 is located between the front light guide plate 2610 and the back first light guide plate 3210 from above so as to be located on the front side of the effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing. Although it is possible to appear, when it appears at the same time as the decorative body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320, it is located on the rear surface side of the decorative body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 (Fig.). See 159). Further, the decorative body main body 3511 of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is located between the front light guide plate 2610 and the back first light guide plate 3210 from above so as to be located on the front side of the effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing. It can appear (see FIG. 158).

Further, between the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160, a decorative body main body 3121 of the back rear movable decorative body 3120 in the back rear movable effect unit 3110 is provided. Then, the decorative body main body 3121 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is located between the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160 so as to be located on the front side of the effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing. It can appear from above (see FIG. 153).

By the way, the light guide effect using a plurality of light guide plates and a plurality of movable decorative bodies is a part of the hold change suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display may change as described above. It is done in combination with. Specifically, in the present embodiment, as a hold notice effect, a variable display of a decorative symbol (variable display of a special symbol) is started (started) during the display period of the hold display (pre-digestion hold display, post-digestion hold display). Each time the condition is satisfied), the display mode of the hold display can be changed based on the hold change pattern. Then, the post-digestion hold display related to the variable display of the decorative pattern is light-emitting and displayed by the LED mounted on the under-back movable decorative body decorative substrate 3512 (the decorative body of the under-back movable decorative body 3510). Although it is performed using the main body 3511), at the timing when the display mode of the post-digestion hold display changes, a light guide effect using a plurality of light guide plates and a plurality of movable decorative bodies is performed, and the post-digestion hold display is displayed. It is intended to suggest the possibility that the display mode may change.

As a plurality of movable decorative bodies, the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 in the back right movable effect unit 3310, the decorative body main body 3411 of the back upper movable decorative body 3410 in the back upper movable effect unit 3400, and the back rear movable effect. When a suggestion effect pattern is executed in which the decorative body main body 3121 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 in the unit 3110 and the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 can appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600. Will be described with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206 is a timing chart showing a light emitting state of a plurality of light guide plates and an operating state of the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320.

As shown in FIG. 206, first, on the screen of the effect display device 1600, an instruction image such as "press a button!" Is displayed as an image instructing the player to press the pressing operation unit 303. .. Then, the LED mounted on the second pattern substrate 2612 causes the front light guide plate 2610 to emit and display the second pattern 2622 (see FIG. 126). Further, when displaying the second pattern 2622 on the front light guide plate 2610 by light emission, the back unit 3000 has a back-back effect unit 3100, a back-center effect unit 3200, a back-right effect unit 3300, a back-up effect unit 3400, and a back-front effect unit. By performing the light emitting effect of the effect unit 3600 or the like (see FIG. 127), not only the front light guide plate 2610 but also the decorative pattern of the game panel 1100 in the game board 5 provided around the surface light guide plate 2610 is emitted and decorated. .. Further, the decorative pattern of the game panel 1100 is the same color as the second pattern 2622 light-emittingly displayed on the front light guide plate 2610, and is light-emitting decorated for the same period. As the decorative pattern of such a game panel 1100, a decoration that can be integrated with the second pattern 2622 that is emitted and displayed on the front light guide plate 2610 provided on the frontmost side of the plurality of light guide plates is provided. By displaying the light emission of both the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100 in the same color and during the same period, it is possible to realize a light emitting decoration having continuity. As a result, at the start of the light guide effect, the entire game board 5 is decorated with light emission, which can give a great impact to the player and pay attention to the progress of the subsequent effect.

When the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 and proceeds to the subsequent production, the light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern of the game panel 1100 on the game board 5 is completed, and the third light guide plate 3210 on the back is used. The player can concentrate on the light emission display of the picture 3211 and the light emission display of the sixth picture 3162 on the back second light guide plate 3160 so that the player can pay attention to whether or not the hold display changes after digestion. In addition to the light guide effect in this effect example, an effect of displaying either the front light guide plate 2610 or the game panel 1100 by light emission, for example, the decorative pattern of the game panel 1100 is not light-emitting and decorated on the front light guide plate 2610. The effect of emitting and displaying the two patterns 2622, the effect of emitting and decorating the decorative pattern of the game panel 1100 without displaying the second pattern 2622 on the front light guide plate 2610, and the mere light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern of the game panel 1100 in normal times. , Can also be executed.

Then, when the player presses the pressing operation unit 303, whether or not to proceed to the subsequent production differs depending on whether or not it is determined that the hold display changes after digestion. That is, when it is determined that the hold display does not change after digestion, even if the player presses the pressing operation unit 303, the decorative body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is the effect display device 1600. It does not appear on the front side, and the hold display does not change after digestion.

If the player does not press the pressing operation unit 303, the decorative body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 does not appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600, but after that, the hold display after digestion is displayed. If it is determined that the display will change, the post-digestion hold display using the decorative body 3511 of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 will be changed, and the post-digestion hold display will not change. The hold display does not change after digestion. In this way, depending on whether or not the player presses the pressing operation unit 303, whether or not to proceed to the subsequent effect is different, thereby encouraging the player to participate in the light guide effect. Can be done.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold display changes after digestion when the player presses the pressing operation unit 303, first, the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is displayed as an effect display device. Appear on the front side of 1600. Then, triggered by the appearance of the decorative body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320, the second pattern 2622 is emitted and displayed on the front light guide plate 2610, and the back first located on the rear surface side of the front light guide plate 2610. The light guide plate 3210 is switched to a state in which the third pattern 3211 is light-emittingly displayed. That is, the light emission display of the second pattern 2622 on the front light guide plate 2610 is finished, and the third pattern 3211 (see FIG. 143) is emitted on the back first light guide plate 3210 by the LED mounted on the third pattern substrate 3221. Display. After that, from the state in which the third pattern 3211 is continuously displayed on the back first light guide plate 3210, the sixth pattern 3162 is emitted on the back second light guide plate 3160 located on the rear surface side of the back first light guide plate 3210. Switch to the displayed state. That is, the light emission display of the third pattern 3211 on the back first light guide plate 3210 is finished, and the sixth pattern 3162 (see FIG. 141) is formed on the back second light guide plate 3160 by the LED mounted on the sixth pattern substrate 3172. Is displayed by light emission.

In this way, with the appearance of the decorative body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320, the second pattern 2622 is emitted and displayed on the front light guide plate 2610, and the back surface side located on the rear surface side of the front light guide plate 2610. After switching to a state in which the third pattern 3211 is light-emittingly displayed on the light guide plate 3210 and a state in which the sixth pattern 3162 is light-emitting on the back second light guide plate 3160 located on the rear surface side of the back first light guide plate 3210. , The decorative body 3511 of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is made to appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600, and the post-digestion hold display displayed by light emission on the decorative body 3511 of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is changed. It changes based on the pattern, and suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit for the variable display of the decorative pattern. Further, when the decorative body main body 3511 of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 appears on the front side of the effect display device 1600, the light emission display of the sixth pattern 3162 on the back second light guide plate 3160 is terminated.

In the above, when the player presses the pressing operation unit 303, the decorative body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 may appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600 among the plurality of movable decorative bodies. Although the case where the pattern is executed is described, the decorative body main body 3411 of the back-up movable decorative body 3410, the decorative body main body 3121 of the back-back movable decorative body 3120, or a plurality of them appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600. There is also a possible suggestion effect pattern. Specifically, in addition to the suggestion effect pattern in which the decorative body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 may appear, the suggestive effect pattern in which the decorative body main body 3411 of the back upper movable decorative body 3410 may appear, the back right movable decoration A suggestion effect pattern in which the decorative body 3321 of the body 3320 and the decorative body 3411 of the movable backside decorative body 3410 can appear, and a suggested effect pattern in which the decorative body 3121 of the rear movable decorative body 3120 can appear are provided. ing. The timing at which these movable decorative bodies appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600 is the same as the timing at which the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 appears.

In addition, the appearance of the decorative body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320, the appearance of the decorative body 3411 of the back right movable decorative body 3410, the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 and the back upper movable decorative body 3410. It is suggested that the expectation that the post-digestion hold display will change to the display mode with high expectation for big hits will be higher in the order of the appearance of all of the decorative body 3411 and the appearance of the decorative body 3121 of the back-movable decorative body 3120. I try to decide the production pattern. That is, for example, when the decorative body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 appears by the player pressing the pressing operation unit 303, the post-digestion hold display is a display mode with high expectation of a big hit. On the other hand, when the decorative body 3121 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 appears, there is a high probability that the post-digestion hold display will change to a display mode with a high expectation of a big hit. It has become. As a result, when the player presses the pressing operation unit 303, it is possible to pay attention to which of the plurality of movable decorative bodies appears. As another example, the order of the movable decorative bodies that may appear on the front side of the above-mentioned effect display device 1600 may be performed as suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Further, at the start of the light guide effect, both the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100 are displayed in the same color and emit light during the same period, but the emission colors are white, blue, red, and multicolor. In the order of colors, the suggestion effect pattern is determined so that the post-digestion hold display changes to a display mode with a high expectation of big hits and the degree of expectation increases. That is, for example, when the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100 are light-emittingly displayed in white, there is a low probability that the post-digestion hold display will change to a display mode with a high expectation of a big hit, whereas the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100 are displayed. When the game panel 1100 is light-emittingly displayed in red, there is a high probability that the post-digestion hold display will change to a display mode with a high expectation of a big hit. As a result, when the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100 are emitted and displayed at the start of the light guide effect, the emission color plays a role of suggesting in advance, and these regions are emitted and displayed in the emission color with high expectation. You can also pay attention to it. In the wake of the appearance of the decorative body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320, the second pattern 2622 is emitted from the front light guide plate 2610, and the third pattern 3211 is emitted from the back first light guide plate 3210. In the process of switching between the displayed state and the state in which the sixth pattern 3162 is light-emitting and displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160, the light emitting colors of the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100 that have already been light-emitting are continued. .. However, in the process, the emission color of the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100 that have already been light-emitting may be changed (for example, when the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100 are light-emitting and displayed, white light is emitted. However, following that, when the back first light guide plate 3210 emits light, it emits red light, etc.), so that the sixth pattern 3162 is emitted and displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160. You can expect changes.

As another example, when the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100 are light-emittingly displayed at the start of the light-guiding effect, the light-emitting color is set to correspond to the display mode after the change of the hold display after digestion. May be good. For example, when the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100 are displayed in red, the display mode of the post-digestion hold display is changed to red before the display mode of the post-digestion hold display is changed. , It becomes possible to grasp the display mode after the change.

As described above, in the light guide effect using a plurality of light guide plates and a plurality of movable decorative bodies, after displaying the second pattern 2622 on the front light guide plate 2610 by light emission, for example, the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 Is displayed on the front side of the effect display device 1600, and the third pattern 3211 is emitted and displayed on the back first light guide plate 3210, and the sixth pattern 3162 is emitted and displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160. It is switching in order to. That is, since the decorative body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is provided between the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160, the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is straddled. Then, the state in which the second pattern 2622 is emitted and displayed on the front light guide plate 2610 is switched to the state in which the third pattern 3211 is emitted and displayed on the back first light guide plate 3210. As a result, at the stage when the second pattern 2622 is emitted and displayed on the front light guide plate 2610, the decorative body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 can be visually recognized through the front light guide plate 2610. At the stage when the light emission display of the second pattern 2622 is finished, the light emission is displayed on the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 located on the rear surface side of the front light guide plate 2610 and the back first light guide plate 3210. Since the three patterns 3211 are switched to a state in which they can be clearly seen, the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610 is gradually revealed, which is a novel effect and can improve the entertainment of the game.

By the way, as described above, the decorative body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is formed in a shape imitating a machete, and the left end side is the tip of the machete in the front view, and the lower side is the blade of the machete. It is supposed to be. The blade of Nata on the lower side is painted silver. Further, the decorative body 3321 is formed with a crack-like decoration that spreads radially around the central portion in the vertical direction near the tip. Then, the back right movable decorative body 3320 can be decorated with light emission so that the central portion of the crack pattern of the decorative body main body 3321 shines by appropriately emitting light from the central LED 3323a of the back right movable decorative body decorative substrate 3323. By emitting light from the peripheral LED 3323b of the right movable decorative body decorative substrate 3323, the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3321 and the crack pattern can be light-emitting and decorated.

In addition, the decorative body 3321 has a transparent region shown by a diagonal line in FIG. 207. That is, the decorative body 3321 is surrounded by a region in which a crack-patterned decoration is formed in the upper half portion in the vertical direction and a region in which a nata blade is formed on the lower side. The lower half is transparent. Therefore, in the light guide effect using a plurality of light guide plates and a plurality of movable decorative bodies, for example, the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 appears on the front side of the effect display device 1600, and the decoration is performed. When the third pattern 3211 is light-emittingly displayed on the back first light guide plate 3210 located on the rear surface side of the body main body 3321, the light is displayed on the back first light guide plate 3210 through the transmission region formed in the decorative body 3321. The third pattern 3211 can be visually recognized. Further, when the decorative body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 appears on the front side of the effect display device 1600, light emission is displayed on the back first light guide plate 3210 through the area where the decorative body 3321 is not located. The third pattern 3211 can be visually recognized. As described above, not only the area where the decorative body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is not located but also the transparent region formed in the decorative body 3321 is passed through the back surface side of the decorative body 3321. By being able to visually recognize the third pattern 3211 that is emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 3210, the front-back relationship between the third pattern 3211 that is emitted and displayed on the back first light guide plate 3210 and the decorative body 3321 is emphasized. It is possible to realize a three-dimensional effect.

Further, in the light guide effect using a plurality of light guide plates and a plurality of movable decorative bodies, for example, when the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 appears on the front side of the effect display device 1600, the back right movable decoration By appropriately emitting light from the central LED 3323a of the body decoration substrate 3323, the central portion of the crack pattern of the decoration body 3321 is illuminated and decorated, and by emitting light from the peripheral LED 3323b of the back right movable decoration decoration substrate 3323. The outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3321 and the crack pattern are luminescently decorated. Therefore, at the stage where the second pattern 2622 is emitted and displayed on the front light guide plate 2610, the light emission display of the second pattern 2622 and the light emitting decoration of the decorative body main body 3321 located on the rear surface side of the front light guide plate 2610 are displayed. Are overlapped in a visible state, and at the stage where the third pattern 3211 is light-emittingly displayed on the back first light guide plate 3210, the light-emitting display of the third pattern 3211 and the front side of the back first light guide plate 3210 are displayed. The light emitting decoration of the positioned decorative body main body 3321 and the light emitting decoration are all overlapped with each other in a visible state. In this way, the light emitting display of the second pattern 2622 on the front light guide plate 2610, the light emitting decoration of the decorative body 3321, and the light emitting display of the third pattern 3211 on the back first light guide plate 3210 are overlapped with each other, so that the light emitting display and the light emitting decoration are overlapped. Can be visually recognized in multiple layers, and it is possible to realize a production with a sense of depth.

Further, the front side of the effect display device 1600 is provided with a front light guide plate 2610, a back first light guide plate 3210, and a back second light guide plate 3160 in this order from the front side in the front-rear direction (depth direction). However, even if the light emitting is displayed on the light guide plates, the screen of the effect display device 1600 located on the rear surface side can be visually recognized through the light guide plates. Similarly, on the front side of the effect display device 1600, the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320, the decorative body main body 3411 of the back upper movable decorative body 3410, and the decorative body main body 3121 of the back rear movable decorative body 3120. And the decorative body body 3511 of the movable under-back movable decorative body 3510 are provided so that they can appear. The screen of the effect display device 1600 located on the rear surface side can be visually recognized through the watermark. Then, by displaying an image related to the light emission display for the plurality of light guide plates and the light emission decoration for the plurality of movable decorations on the screen of the effect display device 1600, the plurality of light guide plates and the plurality of movable decorations are used. It will be possible to assist the light guide effect that was there.

Further, in the light guide effect using a plurality of light guide plates and a plurality of movable decorative bodies, after the second pattern 2622 is light-emittingly displayed on the front light guide plate 2610, for example, the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 displays the effect. With the appearance on the front side of the device 1600, the state is switched in order from the state in which the third pattern 3211 is light-emitting and displayed on the back first light guide plate 3210 and the state in which the sixth pattern 3162 is light-emitting on the back second light guide plate 3160. ing. That is, in such a light guide effect, light emission display for a plurality of light guide plates and light emission decoration for a movable decorative body are performed in order from the front side in the front-rear direction (depth direction). As a result, it is possible to smoothly shift the visual recognition to the light emission display of the light guide plate that is switched one after another, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling stress. Further, in the light guide effect, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the light emission display of the light guide plate located on the rear surface side can be switched.

Further, in the light guide effect using a plurality of light guide plates and a plurality of movable decorative bodies, for example, the appearance of the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 triggers the appearance of the second pattern 2622 on the front light guide plate 2610. After switching to the state of light emission display, the state of light emission display of the third pattern 3211 on the back first light guide plate 3210, and the state of light emission display of the sixth pattern 3162 on the back second light guide plate 3160, the back lower movable decorative body The post-digestion hold display displayed on the decorative body body 3511 of the 3510 is changed. Further, as a plurality of movable decorative bodies, all of the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320, the decorative body main body 3411 of the back upper movable decorative body 3410, and the decorative body main body 3121 of the back rear movable decorative body 3120 are displayed as effects. When it appears on the front side of the device 1600, it is made to operate toward the decorative body 3511 of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 in which the post-digestion hold display is displayed by light emission, and these movable decorative bodies are used for the post-digestion hold display. By acting, it looks as if the hold display has changed after digestion. As a result, in the light guide effect, whether or not any of the plurality of movable decorative bodies operates before the post-digestion hold display displayed on the decorative body main body 3511 of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 changes. Can be noticed with expectation.

[17. Big hit game]
[17-1: Another example of the game area]
Hereinafter, an example of the jackpot game of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 209 is a front view showing another example of a gaming board showing the inside of a gaming area in which a gaming ball is distributed by making the gaming panel opaque in a pachinko machine. Differences from FIG. 107 will be described.

The game area 5a is provided with a normal drawing start port 2010, which is a start port for starting a normal lottery, in place of the gate portion 2003. When the right-handed game ball B wins the normal drawing start opening 2010, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and further, a large winning opening is performed from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. A smaller predetermined number (for example, 1, 2, or 3) of the game balls at the time of winning the game balls in 2005 is paid out to the upper plate 201.

In the processing by the CPU of the main control MPU and the peripheral control IC 1510a when the game ball B wins the game ball B in the normal drawing start port 2010, the game ball B enters the gate portion 2003 except for the above-mentioned payout of the game ball. This is the same as the processing by the CPU of the main control MPU and the peripheral control IC 1510a in the case.

Further, the game area 5a is further provided with a jackpot start gate portion 2009 which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. The jackpot start gate portion 2009 is arranged substantially in the center in the vertical direction near the right end of the front view in the game area 5a. As will be described later, in the jackpot start gate portion enabled state, the jackpot game starts when the game ball B passes through the jackpot start gate portion 2009. In order to smoothly shift to the jackpot game in the jackpot start gate portion enabled state, the jackpot start gate portion 2009 has various winning openings and out openings 1008 on the path on which the game ball B flows down in the game area 5a and on the path. It is desirable that it is arranged at a position that precedes it (that is, upstream from various winning openings and out openings 1008).

[17-2: Another example of control configuration]
FIG. 210 shows another example of a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1. Differences from FIG. 171 will be described. The main control board 1310 is connected to the normal drawing start port sensor 3005 for detecting the game ball B received in the normal drawing start opening 2010 instead of the gate sensor 2401. Further, the main control board 1310 is connected to the jackpot start gate sensor 3004 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the jackpot start gate portion 2009. The detection signals from the jackpot start gate sensor 3004 and the normal start port sensor 3005 are input to the main control I / O port via the main control input circuit, respectively. Further, in the present embodiment, for example, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the jackpot start gate sensor 3004 and the normal drawing start port sensor 3005.

[17-3. Another example of jackpot judgment processing]
First, another example of the jackpot determination process will be described which is different from the jackpot determination process of FIG. 182. If the jackpot flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing in step S122 with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 211 (A). By doing so (step S122), the type of jackpot is determined, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined (step S123). ). In step S122 for the second symbol random number, if the jackpot flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU has the second symbol random number read in step S102 of the second special symbol normal process and FIG. 211 ( Compare with the symbol determination table shown in B). The symbol determination table is stored in, for example, the ROM of the main control MPU.

As shown in FIGS. 211 (A) and 211 (B), the symbol determination table shows the correspondence between the jackpot type in each special random number, the distribution, and the time until the jackpot start gate portion is valid. The "time until the jackpot start gate portion is in the valid state" is the time from when the jackpot symbol is stopped on the symbol display until the jackpot start gate portion 2009 is in the valid state. In this example, the time is in step S189. Is set as the waiting time set in the interval timer. The trigger for the jackpot start gate unit 2009 to change from the valid state to the invalid state is only the start of the jackpot game and the operation of the RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310.

[17-4. Another example of jackpot control processing]
The jackpot control process in this chapter will be described with respect to the differences from the above description using FIGS. 186 to 188. The main control MPU activates the jackpot start gate unit 2009 after the waiting time set in the interval timer in step S401 has elapsed. When the game ball B passes through the jackpot start gate portion 2009 in the valid state, the main control MPU refers to the round distribution table shown in FIG. 212, and refers to the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type determined in step S123 and the jackpot prize. Determine the mouth opening pattern and shift to the big hit game state. Further, there may be an interval of a predetermined time (for example, 0.008 seconds) from the time when the game ball B passes through the big hit start gate portion 2009 to the start of the big hit game (the first opening of the big winning opening).

The round distribution table of FIG. 212 shows, for example, the correspondence between the big hit type, the number of rounds, the distribution, and the big winning opening opening pattern. In the large winning opening opening pattern table shown in FIG. 213, the operation schedule of the large winning opening 2005 in each round of each large winning opening opening pattern is described. The round distribution table and the large winning opening opening pattern table are stored in, for example, the ROM of the main control MPU.

For example, when "6R time reduction symbol 1" is stopped as the first special symbol, the jackpot start gate portion 2009 becomes effective 5.000 seconds after the stop, and the game ball B is in the jackpot start gate portion in the effective state. After passing through 2009, the main control MPU refers to the round distribution table and shifts to the big hit game state of the number of rounds 6 and the big winning opening opening pattern A corresponding to "6R time reduction symbol 1".

An example of the operation schedule in the large winning opening opening pattern of FIG. 213 will be described. In the example of FIG. 213, there are operation schedules a to e as the operation schedule of the large winning openings 2005 for each round in the large winning opening opening pattern.

In the operation schedule a, the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.000 seconds) and then closed for a predetermined time (for example, 2.000 seconds). In the operation schedule b, the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 1.840 seconds) and then closed for a predetermined time (for example, 2.000 seconds). In the operation schedule c, the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 1.840 seconds) and then closed for a predetermined time (for example, 2.000 seconds). In the operation schedule d, the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (2.000 seconds) and then closed for a predetermined time (for example, 2.000 seconds). In the operation schedule e, the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 1.840 seconds), closed for a predetermined time (for example, 2.000 seconds), opened for a long time (for example, 25.000 seconds), and then for a predetermined time (for example, 25.000 seconds). For example, 2.000 seconds) to close.

It should be noted that the time when a predetermined time (for example, 8,000 seconds) has elapsed from the opening of the large winning opening in the operation schedule b and the operation schedule e is the timing for setting the valid state flag in step S420 (that is, the game ball B is set at the second entrance 2008). It is the timing when the state is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state by being accepted). The time when a predetermined time elapses from the setting of the valid state flag or the end of the round in which the valid state flag is set is the timing to reset the valid state flag.

Further, when a predetermined time (for example, 8,000 seconds) has elapsed from the opening of the large winning opening in the operation schedule b and the operation schedule e (that is, the timing at which the valid state flag is set), the main control MPU takes the second inlet / outlet in step S436. The process of controlling 2008 to the open state is executed. The main control MPU closes the second inlet 2008 in step S434 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second inlet 2008 was opened or at the end of the round in which the second inlet 2008 is opened. Executes the process to control.

Therefore, in the round in which the big winning opening 2005 is opened according to the operation schedule e, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a so as to circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed), the big hit game state. It is possible to shift to a high probability state after the end of. That is, the player can use "6R time reduction symbol 3", "6R time reduction symbol 4", "16R time reduction symbol 5", "4R time reduction symbol 1", "4R time reduction symbol 2", and "16R time reduction symbol 2". In the jackpot game state corresponding to "Character 3" and "Symbol 4 with 16R time reduction", by continuously executing "right-handed", there is an extremely high probability of shifting to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state. Can be done.

In addition, a plurality of types of time saving flags in the description of FIG. 187 may exist. For example, there may be a time saving flag A corresponding to a time saving state having a large number of continuations (for example, 130 times) and a time saving flag B corresponding to a time saving state having a small number of continuations of the time saving state (for example, 100 times). For example, if the main control MPU determines in step S425 that the second inlet / outlet passage flag is set, the main control MPU sets the high probability flag and the time saving flag A in step S426, and the second inlet / outlet passage flag is set. If it is determined that the time saving flag B is not set, only the time saving flag B is set in step S426.

Further, FIG. 187 describes an example in which the time saving flag and the high probability flag are set after all the rounds are completed, but the main control MPU is the round in which the operation schedule b and the operation schedule e are executed (that is, the operation schedule e). At the end of the round in which the second inlet 2008 is controlled to be open), the process of steps S425 to S427 may be executed.

Further, the main control MPU may set the time saving flag A and the high probability flag in advance at the start of the big hit game. In this case, if the main control MPU determines that the second inlet / outlet passage flag is set in step S425, the main control MPU does not execute the process of step S426, and the second inlet / outlet passage flag is set in step S425. If it is determined that the time saving flag is not set, the time saving flag A and the high probability flag are reset in step S426, and the time saving flag B is set.

Further, the main control MPU may set the time saving flag B at the start of the big hit game. In this case, if the main control MPU determines in step S425 that the second inlet / outlet passage flag is set, it resets the time saving flag B in step S426 and sets the time saving flag A and the high probability flag. If it is determined in step S425 that the second entrance passage flag is not set, the process of step S426 is not executed.

[17-5: Big hit game]
The jackpot game in this chapter will be described below. When the game ball B wins at the normal symbol start opening, a predetermined number (for example, one, two, or three) of game balls, which is smaller than that at the time of winning the big winning opening 2005, shall be paid out.

Upon receiving the jackpot start command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays on the effect display device 1600 a display indicating that the jackpot game has been won. When the standby time set in the interval timer in step S401 has elapsed (that is, when the jackpot start gate unit 2009 is enabled), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays a display prompting a predetermined operation on the effect display device 1600. .. Specifically, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays a so-called right-handed prompt in order to allow the game ball B to enter the jackpot start gate portion 2009 to start the jackpot game.

If the jackpot start gate portion 2009 is in the effective state and the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is detected before the game ball B enters the jackpot start gate unit 2009, the peripheral control IC 1510a The CPU may execute an effect suggesting the number of rounds, which is determined by the round distribution table after the game ball B enters the jackpot start gate portion 2009. It is desirable that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not execute the effect of prompting the operation of the operation unit for executing the effect of suggesting the number of rounds. When the effect of prompting the operation of the operation unit is executed, the player may prioritize the operation of the operation unit over the right-handed execution by the operation of the handle 182, which may cause a delay in the progress of the game. Because. That is, it is desirable that the effect of encouraging the operation of the operation unit is a hidden effect.

Further, in the distribution pattern table of FIG. 212, the types of symbols and the number of rounds correspond to each other on a one-to-one basis. In such a case, even if the jackpot start gate portion 2009 is in the valid state and the number of rounds has not been determined before the game ball B enters the jackpot start gate portion 2009, the type of the jackpot symbol In some cases, the number of rounds can be specified. In such a case, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a executes an effect of urging the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect suggesting the number of rounds described above, and when the operation unit is operated, the jackpot symbol It is also possible to suggest and confirm the number of rounds corresponding to one-to-one for each type (for example, 16R confirmation effect, etc.).

Further, when the big hit start gate portion 2009 is in the effective state and the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is detected before the game ball B enters the big hit start gate unit 2009, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a May allow selection of music during a jackpot game, or change of an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 during a jackpot game. Further, it is desirable that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not output the start opening winning sound when the game ball B wins a prize in any of the starting openings when the jackpot start gate portion 2009 is in the effective state. When the jackpot start gate portion 2009 is in the valid state, it should be prioritized that the game ball B is entered into the jackpot start gate portion 2009 rather than winning the game ball B at any of the starting ports. This is to clearly convey to others.

Further, when the game ball passes through the jackpot start gate portion 2009, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may display a display indicating the number of rounds determined by the round distribution table on the effect display device 1600. The display may be a display showing a specific number of rounds, or may be an effect showing the number of balls such as "super big hit" and "big hit".

For example, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a wins a "super big hit" with a large number of balls, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a once executes an effect indicating a "big hit" with a small number of balls, and then a promotion effect indicating a "super big hit". May be executed. In this case, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is, for example, before the end of the "big hit" and "super big hit" branch rounds (4 rounds and 6 rounds in this embodiment), for example, during the branch round or from the branch round. Perform a production that shows "super jackpot" during the previous round.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may perform an effect of recognizing that the "big hit" has been promoted to the "super big hit" by the light emission of various light guide plates and the operation of various movable bodies. Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state in a specific round (4R in the big winning opening opening pattern table shown in FIG. 213), so that the big hit When an effect suggesting that the game state is controlled to a high probability state (for example, a probabilistic promotion effect) is executed after the end of the game state, it is desirable to execute the effect before the specific round.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has a sound effect output when the game ball B wins the big winning opening 2005 and a general winning opening 2001 (not limited to the winning opening, but other general winning openings) during the big hit game. The sound effect output when the game ball B wins the prize (which may include the mouth) may be determined to be the same sound effect. This makes the player feel that more game balls have won the Grand Prize 2005 than the maximum number of prizes in the Grand Prize 2005 in one round without any disadvantage to the hole. Can be done.

Further, in this case, during the period when the big winning opening 2005 is not open (including other than the big hit gaming state), the sound effect output when the game ball B wins the general winning opening 2001 is the big winning opening 2005. It is desirable that the sound effect is different from the sound effect output when the game ball B wins a prize. Further, even if the game ball B wins a prize in the general winning opening 2001, the sound effect may not be output.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is used when the game ball B wins a prize in the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the normal drawing starting port 2010, or the like instead of the general winning opening 2001 during the big hit game. The output sound effect and the sound effect output when the game ball B wins the general winning opening 2001 may be determined to be the same sound effect.

Referring to FIG. 209, the normal drawing start opening 2010 is a position on the path through which the game ball B launched toward the big winning opening 2005 in the game area 5a passes, and on the path preceding the big winning opening 2005. (That is, it is located upstream of the big winning opening 2005). That is, a part of the game ball B launched toward the big winning opening 2005 is configured to win a prize in the normal drawing starting opening 2010. Therefore, even if the player performs a right-handed strike at a short firing interval (for example, the shortest interval of 0.6 seconds) during the jackpot game, the specified number (for example) in one opening of the big winning opening 2005 (for example). It is possible to suppress winning of 10) or more large winning openings 2005.

Further, when the game ball B wins in the normal drawing start opening 2010, as described above, a smaller number (for example, one or three) of game balls is paid out as compared with the case where the big winning opening 2005 is won. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game balls paid out in one round become excessive. As a result, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest without imposing an excessive burden on the hall. In addition, in order to further reduce the burden on the hole, it is desirable that the number of payouts of the game ball when the game ball B wins the starting port 2010 is one. Further, this makes it possible to suppress the number of payouts of the game balls per unit time during the big hit game and prolong the time of the big hit game state without making the total number of payouts of the game balls during the big hit game excessive. ..

However, in the round of the operation schedule in which the big winning opening 2005 is open for a long time, the number of game balls B is less than the specified number (for example, 10) in one opening of the big winning opening 2005, and the game ball B wins the big winning opening 2005. In 2005, there is a risk that the player will make a complaint. Therefore, in the operation schedule in which the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time, the position of the normal drawing start opening 2010, the opening time of the large winning opening 2005, and the opening time of the large winning opening 2005 are set so that the specified number of game balls B win the large winning opening 2005. Winning probability of the normal symbol during the big hit game and opening time of the second starting door 2411 (Specifically, for example, the second starting door 2411 is opened by setting the winning probability of the normal symbol to 0 during the big hit game. In addition, it is necessary to set in advance such as (such as shortening the opening time of the second starting door 2411 although the winning probability of the normal symbol is not 0 during the big hit game). The opening time (for example, 29.000 seconds) / firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) is the number of game balls B heading toward the big winning opening 2005 in one opening time of the big winning opening 2005, for example. It is desirable that the setting is made so that more than half will win the big prize opening 2005.

Further, the starting port for opening the winning opening with the opening device (for example, the second starting opening 2004 with the second starting opening door 2411 and the large winning opening 2005 with the large winning opening door 2413) is used. It is desirable that all the winning openings have prize balls. If there is no prize ball even if the game ball B enters the starting port for performing the lottery, even if the lottery result for opening the opening device is obtained, for example, the game ball B owned by the player In the case of the last one ball, a situation occurs in which the game ball B cannot be won in the open winning opening. As described above, since the starting opening for performing the lottery for opening the winning opening with the opening device is the winning opening with all the prize balls, the player newly opens the game ball B in such a situation. It is possible to avoid the situation of additional purchase.

Further, it is desirable that the starting port 2010 and the second starting port 2004 are composed of, for example, one unit and are located close to each other. Further, as shown in FIG. 209, the normal drawing start port 2010 is a second start port on the path through which the game ball B launched toward the big winning opening 2005 in the game area 5a passes, and on the path. It is located upstream of the door 2411.

Although the obstacle nail is not shown in FIG. 209, the game ball B that does not enter the normal figure start port 2010 and flows downward in the normal figure start port 2010 is guided to the second start port 2004. , Obstacle nails are placed. Temporarily, the second starting port 2004 is arranged on the path through which the game ball B launched toward the big winning opening 2005 in the game area 5a passes, and upstream of the normal drawing starting port 2010 on the path. Then, when the game ball B enters the second start port 2004, the entry of the game ball B into the normal start port 2010 is hindered, and as a result, the second start is performed even though the time is shortened. There is a possibility that the opening frequency of the mouth 2004 is low. In order to prevent the occurrence of such a situation, as described above, the normal drawing start opening 2010 is on the path through which the game ball B launched toward the large winning opening 2005 in the game area 5a passes. It is desirable that it is located upstream of the second starting door 2411 on the route. On the other hand, if the gaming machine has the idea of allowing the player to enjoy the time saving state for a long time, the positional relationship between the starting port 2010 and the second starting port 2004 may be reversed.

Further, it is desirable that the number of prize balls at the starting port 2010 and the number of prize balls at the second starting port 2004 are the same (for example, one). It is assumed that the number of prize balls at one starting port (for example, the second starting port 2004) is set to be large (for example, set to two). In this case, the starting port 2010 and the second starting port 2004 are located close to each other, and the player cannot easily determine which starting port the game ball B has won, so the prize ball assumed by the player. There is a possibility that the number of prize balls actually paid out from the pachinko machine 1 is smaller than the number. Specifically, for example, the player misunderstands that the game ball B has won the second starting port 2004 even though the game ball B has won the prize at the starting port 2010, that is, the number of players is two. However, there is a possibility that only one prize ball will be paid out from the pachinko machine 1. When such a situation occurs, there is a possibility that a player may complain that the number of prize balls is insufficient for the hole. As described above, such a situation can be avoided by setting the number of prize balls at the starting port 2010 and the second starting port 2004 located in the vicinity to be the same.

Further, the example in which the Fuzu starting port 2010 and the second starting port 2004 are composed of one unit has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the members constituting the Fuzu starting port 2010 and the big winning opening 2005 are not limited to this. It may be composed of one unit. In this case, the normal drawing start port 2010 is arranged on the path through which the game ball B launched toward the big winning opening 2005 in the game area 5a passes, and upstream of the big winning opening door 2413 on the path. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the number of payouts of the game balls per unit time during the big hit game and to prolong the time of the big hit game state.

On the other hand, the general winning opening 2010 is on the path through which the game ball B, which is launched toward the large winning opening 2005 in the game area 5a but does not win the large winning opening 2005, and on the path, is a large winning prize. It may be arranged downstream of the mouth door 2413. In such a case, while the big winning opening door 2413 is open, the game ball B launched toward the big winning opening 2005 does not go to the normal starting opening 2010, but in the interval between rounds, the big winning opening The game ball B launched toward 2005 heads for the normal drawing start port 2010. As a result, the jackpot game state can be smoothly advanced, and the normal lottery can be performed at an early stage in the time-saving state that transitions after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, for example, the member constituting the Fuzu starting port 2010 and the member constituting the center accessory 2500 may be composed of one unit, or the member constituting the Fuzu starting port 2010 and the large winning opening 2005 may be formed. The constituent members and the constituent members of the center accessory 2500 may be configured as one unit. The mounting process can be shortened by appropriately integrating at least two of the normal starting port 2010, the large winning opening 2005, the center accessory 2500, and the second starting port 2004.

Further, when a plurality of jackpot games are won across only the advantageous gaming states (high probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state, and high probability time saving state) after the end of the big hit game state, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is used. When the cumulative number of game balls paid out in the multiple big hit games reaches a predetermined number (for example, a multiple of 2500, or 2500 or more and the last three digits are "000"), the cumulative number of payouts is reached. The display indicating that the predetermined number has been reached may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

If the second special symbol fluctuates continuously from the time saving state after the time saving state ends and the big hit game is won in the fluctuation, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a wins the big hit game in the advantageous gaming state after the big hit game ends. It may be regarded as having been done. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may use the cumulative number of payouts including the number of payouts of the game balls in the jackpot game for the cumulative display.

Specifically, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, a cumulative display such as "2500 acquisition !!" on the effect display device 1600 for a predetermined time (for example) when the cumulative number of game balls to be paid out reaches 2500. 2-3 seconds) Display. If a new prize is awarded to the large winning opening 2005 while the cumulative display is displayed on the effect display device 1600, it is desirable that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not count up the cumulative display. However, even in this case, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is performing a count display for counting the total number of game balls paid out in one big hit game, the cumulative display is not counted up. It is desirable to count up the count display.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a receives the jackpot end command from the main control MPU at the end of the final round of the jackpot game, and executes the ending effect of the jackpot game. Therefore, immediately before the end of the big hit game (for example, when the remaining two game balls B win the big prize opening 2005 in the final round of the big hit game, the big hit game ends), the game ball B goes to the big winning opening 2005. When the cumulative number of payouts reaches a predetermined number due to winning (for example, when the remaining one game ball B wins the big prize opening 2005 in the final round of the big hit game, the big hit game ends). The ending effect may start immediately after the cumulative display is displayed, and the cumulative display may not be displayed for a predetermined time. However, even in this case, in order to give the player an uplifting feeling, it is desirable that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a executes the cumulative display without changing the display time.

However, when the remaining one game ball B wins the big prize opening 2005 in the final round of the big hit game, the big hit game ends, and the game ball wins the big winning opening 2005, so that the cumulative number of payouts is a predetermined number. When is reached, the cumulative display is not displayed on the effect display device 1600. That is, the cumulative display is an effect of displaying the cumulative number of payouts in a plurality of big hit games, and is an effect indicating that the current state is a state in which the winning of the big winning opening 2005 is permitted.

In the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, when the remaining one game ball B wins the big prize opening 2005 in the final round of the big hit game, the big hit game ends, and the game ball B wins the big winning opening 2005. Even when the cumulative number of payouts reaches a predetermined number, the cumulative display may be displayed in the area on the effect display device 1600 that does not overlap with the area where the ending effect is displayed. If the ending effect can be recognized, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may display a part or all of the cumulative display on the area where the ending effect is displayed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned explanation of the cumulative display, "a state in which the big hit game ends when the remaining two game balls B win the big winning opening 2005 in the final round of the big hit game" is described as "a big prize in the final round of the big hit game". It should be read as "a state in which the remaining opening time of the mouth 2005 is included in the predetermined range (for example, more than 1.0 second and 2.0 seconds or less)", and "the remaining one game ball B is the big winning mouth in the final round of the big hit game". "A state in which the jackpot game ends when a prize is won in 2005" may be read as "a state in which the remaining opening time of the jackpot 2005 in the final round of the jackpot game is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 1.0 second or less)". .. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may use not only the effect display device 1600 but also various movable bodies, various lamps, various speakers, various light guide plates, and the like in the effect during the big hit game.

Further, although the obstacle nail is not shown in FIG. 209, the branch of whether or not the right-handed game ball B wins the normal figure start opening 2010 is realized by the obstacle nail planted in the game area 5a. ing. The game ball B that did not win the prize at the normal start port 2010 was led to the second start port 2004, and the game ball B that was led to the second start port 2004 but did not win the second start port 2004 was a big prize. Guided to Mouth 2005. In addition, the game ball B that did not win the prize in the Fuzu start opening 2010 touches the obstacle nail from the time when it arrives right beside from the center of the member constituting the Fuzu start opening 2010 until it passes through the big prize opening door 2413. There is no such thing. The game ball B, which was led to the big winning opening 2005 but did not win the big winning opening 2005, has a general winning opening 2001 (Fig. 209) whose entrance is tilted in the 2 o'clock direction when the game machine is viewed from the front. An obstacle nail is planted so as to lead to the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the first starting opening 2002, hereinafter, this general winning opening 2001 is also referred to as the last fort winning opening).

Here, the number of winnings to each winning opening in the time saving state and the number of winnings to each winning opening in the jackpot game state will be described. In the following description, the number of prize balls when the game ball B wins in the starting port 2010 is one, and the number of prize balls when the game ball B wins in the second starting port 2004 is one, large. The number of prize balls when the game ball B wins in the winning opening 2005 is 15, and the number of prize balls when the game ball B wins in the last fort winning opening is 3.

First, the number of winnings to each winning opening in the time saving state will be described. In order to increase the number of fluctuations of the special symbol per unit time in the time-saving state compared to the non-time-saving state, it is necessary that an obstacle nail is planted in the second starting port 2004 so as to appropriately win the game ball B. There is. Further, in order to open the second starting port 2004 in a short time state, it is necessary to plant an obstacle nail so that the game ball B can be appropriately won in the starting port 2010 as well.

When the player hits the game ball B to the right at a short firing interval (for example, the shortest interval of 0.6 seconds), the game ball B wins, for example, about 35 per minute in the normal drawing start port 2010. Obstacle nails have been planted to do so. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period during which the normal lottery is not performed in a time-saving state. Therefore, the second starting port 2004 is opened appropriately, and the second starting port 2004 is also moderately opened (for example, when the player hits the game ball B to the right at a short firing interval, about 50 balls per minute). Ball B will win a prize.

If the number of game balls paid out is larger than the number of game balls B launched (so-called ball ejection rate exceeds 1) in the time-saving state, it becomes an excessive burden on the hole. When the player hits the game ball B to the right at a short firing interval, the number of game balls B launched in one minute is approximately 100, so both the normal start opening 2010 and the second start opening 2004 are awarded. The number of non-playing ball B is 15 (out of 100 game balls B launched in 1 minute, 35 game balls B win a prize at the start opening 2010, and the remaining 65 game balls B. Because 50 game balls B out of B win a prize in the second starting port 2004). In addition, the total number of payouts by the game ball B to the normal drawing start port 2010 per minute and the number of payouts by the game ball B to the second start port 2004 per minute is 85.

Obstacle nails are planted so that the remaining 15 game balls B head toward the final fort winning opening. Since the number of game balls paid out when the game ball B wins at the last fort winning opening is 3, 5 or more of these 15 game balls B will be the last fort winning opening. If you win a prize, the ball output rate in the short time state will exceed 1. Therefore, the game ball B heading toward the last fort winning opening (that is, the game ball B that was hit right in a short time state and did not win any of the normal starting opening 2010 and the second starting opening 2004). It is desirable that obstacle nails are planted so that the ratio of the game ball B winning the final fort winning opening to B) is, for example, less than 1/5.

If the number of payouts is one when the game ball B wins at the last fort winning opening, the payout rate will never exceed 1 in a short time state, which increases the burden on the hall. There is no such thing. However, there are some players whose interests are reduced by knowing that the ball output rate never exceeds 1. Therefore, in order to keep the player with some expectation for the payout rate, the number of payouts when the game ball B wins at the last fort winning opening is more than 1 (for example, 2 or 3). Is desirable.

Next, the number of winnings to each winning opening in the big hit game state will be described. Since the normal drawing start port 2010 is a non-movable winning opening (that is, a winning opening that is always open), the normal drawing per minute when the player hits the game ball B to the right at a short firing interval in the big hit game state. The number of game balls B to win a prize in the starting port 2010 is 35, which is the same as in the time saving state. Even in the big hit game state, the normal lottery is performed based on the winning of the game ball B in the normal drawing start opening 2010, but the second starting opening is only for a very short time even if the normal lottery is not won or the normal lottery is won. Since 2004 does not open, it is difficult for the game ball B to enter the second starting port 2004 in the big hit game state.

Therefore, among the game balls B that the player hits to the right at short firing intervals, almost all or all of the game balls B (65 per minute in the above example) that did not win the prize at the start opening 2010 of the normal figure are big prizes. Although it will go to the mouth 2005, not all the game balls heading to the big prize opening 2005 will win the big prize mouth. This is because there is an interval between rounds. When the time of this inter-round interval is, for example, 2.000 seconds, about 80% of the game balls heading for the big prize opening 2005 win the big prize opening 2005, and the other game balls are the last fort. Obstacle nails are planted toward the winning opening.

That is, in the time-saving state, when the player hits the game ball B to the right at a short firing interval, 35 pieces per minute at the start port 2010, 50 pieces per minute at the second start port 2004, and a big winning opening. In 2005, 0 game balls per minute and less than 3 game balls per minute will be won at the last fort winning opening. On the other hand, in the big hit game state, when the player hits the game ball B to the right at a short firing interval, 35 pieces per minute at the start port 2010 and 0 pieces per minute at the second start port 2004, a big prize. 52 games (65 x 80%) per minute will be awarded to the mouth 2005, and less than 3 game balls B will be won per minute to the last fort winning mouth.

That is, the number of the game balls B winning the second starting port 2004 in the time saving state and the number of the game balls B winning the big winning opening 2005 in the big hit game state are almost the same. Therefore, the number of winnings of the game ball B to the starting port 2010, the number of winnings of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004, and the number of winnings of the game ball B to the last fort winning opening in the time saving state. The ratio of, is the number of winning balls B to the starting port 2010, the number of winning balls B to the big winning opening 2005, and the number of winning balls B to the last fort winning opening in the big hit game state. It is almost the same as the ratio of the number of prizes. In other words, the ratio of the number of winning balls B to each winning opening is almost the same, although the types of winning openings that the game ball B wins are partially different between the time saving state and the big hit game state.

Further, as described above, the Fuzu start port 2010 is located upstream of the second start port 2004, but in a time-saving state, the number of game balls B that win a prize at the Fuzu start port 2010 per minute It is desirable that obstacle nails are planted so that the number of game balls B winning in the second starting port 2004 per minute is larger. This is because even if the game ball B wins the game ball B in the normal drawing start opening 2010, the lottery for opening the big winning opening 2005 (that is, the special lottery for the big hit) is not performed.

In addition, when the player hits the game ball B to the right at a short firing interval in a short time state, the total number of the game balls B heading to the big winning opening 2005 and the last fort winning opening per minute (15 in the above example). The number of game balls B (35 in the above example) that wins the game ball B per minute when the player hits the game ball B to the right at a short firing interval in the big hit game state. ) Is also a feature. If this is the opposite, the time of the jackpot game state will be shortened, the player will not be able to entertain the jackpot game state for a long time, and the number of balls of the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004 in the time saving state will be reduced. This is because there is a possibility that the number of games will be reduced and the time-saving game state will be delayed.

The total number of game balls B heading to the big winning opening 2005 and the last fort winning opening per minute when the player hits the game ball B to the right at a short firing interval in a short time state (15 in the above example). ), The number of game balls B winning in the normal starting port 2010 per minute when the player hits the game ball B to the right at a short firing interval in the big hit game state (35 in the above example). Even if there are more players, the number of winnings of the game ball B in one opening of the big winning opening 2005 does not become less than the specified number (for example, 10) in the big hit game state (in the above example). If the game ball B (65 pieces, but the upper limit is 90 pieces) heads for the big prize opening 2005, the number of game balls acquired by the player in the big hit game state does not decrease.

Further, it is desirable that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a predetermined effect when the game ball B wins the game ball B in the normal drawing start port 2010 only in the case of the big hit game state. As a predetermined effect, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs, for example, the same sound as the winning sound output when the game ball B wins the big winning opening 2005, or the game ball B wins the big winning opening 2005. A winning sound different from the winning sound output when the game is played is output, or the effect display device 1600 teaches that the game ball B has won a prize at the starting port 2010.

It is said that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 15101a appeals to the player that the game ball B has won the prize at the starting port 2010 in this way, so that many game balls B have won the prize at the jackpot game state. The player can realize the fact, and by extension, the interest is maintained. It is more preferable that the peripheral control IC 1510a causes various lamps to emit light, various movable bodies to move, and various light guide plates to emit light in accordance with the above-mentioned predetermined effect.

In addition to this, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts the normal drawing when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state (from the start of the right-handed instruction to the start of the ending effect of the jackpot game). When the cumulative number of winnings of the game ball B to the mouth 2010 reaches a predetermined number, a privilege may be given to the player. The predetermined number is preferably a value smaller than the cumulative total of the game balls B that win the big prize opening 2005 in one big hit game, for example, 50 pieces. For example, in a 16-round big hit game, when the specified number of winnings per round (when the game ball B with the specified number of winnings wins the big winning opening 2005, the opening of the big winning opening 2005 in one round ends) is 10. Since 16 × 10 = 160 game balls B win the big prize opening 2005 in one big hit game, the predetermined number is 160 or less.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, for example, increases the number of songs in the big hit game that can be selected at the time of the next big hit winning, or holds the special symbol change in the big hit game state. Performs an effect that suggests whether or not the jackpot has been won, or makes the stage effect (background) displayed after the end of the jackpot game state a special dedicated stage, and expects whether or not the jackpot has been won. The advance notice effect and reach effect are released (that is, the advance notice effect and the reach effect appear only when the cumulative number of winnings of the game ball B to the normal drawing start port 2010 reaches a predetermined number in the jackpot game state. It is a possible production). When such a privilege can be given, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, a message such as "if the cumulative number exceeds a predetermined number ..." on the effect display device 1600 or the like in the big hit game state. Even better.

[18. L5 production]
[18-1: Pseudo-ream production]
Hereinafter, the L5 effect, which is an example of the specific effect in the present embodiment, will be described. First, the pseudo-continuous production will be described. The pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the operation of changing the decorative symbol and ending the change of the decorative symbol is executed a plurality of times during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. .. The phrase "terminating the variation of the decorative symbol" includes, for example, a mode in which a part or all of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the player is made to recognize that the variation of the decorative symbol has been completed once. That is, the pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which one change of the decorative pattern makes it appear as if the change has been performed a plurality of times. It should be noted that the pseudo-series effect in which the operation is performed twice is also referred to as a pseudo-series effect, and the pseudo-series effect in which the operation is performed three times is also referred to as a pseudo-series effect. Further, during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display, the second operation is also referred to as pseudo 1 and the third operation is also referred to as pseudo 2. At the start of the second and subsequent operations in the pseudo-continuous effect, the number of times may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In this chapter, it is assumed that there is only one fluctuation pattern table at the time of big hit, that is, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of big hit is common to all kinds of big hits. Further, in this chapter, it is assumed that there is only one fluctuation pattern table at the time of out-of-reach, that is, the fluctuation pattern table is common in the out-of-reach and the out-of-reach. However, as described with reference to FIG. 183, the fluctuation pattern table is used for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). Multiple types may be provided. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 183, the variation pattern table at the time of loss may be provided separately with the variation pattern table at the time of reach and loss and the variation pattern table at the time of loss without reach.

First, an example of the jackpot determination process in this chapter will be described as being different from the jackpot determination process of FIG. 180. If the main control MPU determines in step S115 that the selected jackpot determination table is out of alignment as a result of comparison between the selected jackpot determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, the main control MPU determines in steps S117 to S119. The jackpot judgment process is terminated without executing the process of.

Subsequently, an example of the first variation pattern setting process in this chapter will be described as being different from the first variation pattern setting process of FIG. 183. When the main control MPU determines that the big hit flag is set in step S141, the main control MPU selects the fluctuation pattern table at the time of big hit in step S142. Further, when the main control MPU determines that the jackpot flag is not set in step S141, the main control MPU selects the fluctuation pattern table at the time of deviation in step S145 without executing the processes of steps S143 and S144.

FIG. 214 is an example of a fluctuation pattern table at the time of a big hit. FIG. 215 is an example of a fluctuation pattern table at the time of disconnection. In the variation pattern table, for example, a variation number that identifies the variation pattern, a variation pattern, an effect content executed by the variation pattern, a variation time of the variation pattern, and a distribution in which the variation pattern is selected, are displayed. Correspondence is described.

The effect content in the variation pattern table indicates the content of the SP reach or the movie reach in the variation pattern in which the SP reach or the movie reach is executed. In addition, it is assumed that the expectation of a big hit is high in the order of barbell reach which is movie reach, mahjong reach which is SP reach 2, rock-paper-scissors reach which is SP reach 1, and normal reach. For example, in the variation pattern of "normal reach + pseudo 1 series", the variation of the decorative symbol during one variation of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is executed twice, and the second decorative symbol is used. It is a fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach effect is executed in a fluctuation.

In step S148, the main control MPU sets the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer, but changes the fluctuation time according to the determined fluctuation pattern and the number of start storages at the start of the fluctuation. May be good. For example, when the determined fluctuation pattern is a predetermined fluctuation pattern (for example, no reach) and the number of start storages is large (for example, the number of start storages is 3 or more), the main control MPU shortens the fluctuation time. You may.

[18-2: About look-ahead production]
Hereinafter, the look-ahead effect will be described. The look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests the result of a special lottery in the change before the change display of the special symbol is started. FIG. 216 is an example of a look-ahead effect table. The look-ahead effect table shows, for example, the correspondence between the variable number and the distribution of the look-ahead effect.

In the look-ahead effect table, "none" indicates that the look-ahead effect is not executed, and "hold change" indicates a so-called hold look-ahead effect that suggests the result of the special lottery by, for example, the color of the hold display in the effect display device 1600. "Stop symbol same color" indicates a so-called same-color symbol look-ahead effect of stopping a decorative symbol of the same color on the effect display device 1600, and "L5" indicates an L5 effect described later.

In the effect control process of step S602, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect according to the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU and the distribution indicated by the look-ahead effect table. When executing the look-ahead effect, it is determined which look-ahead effect is to be executed. In the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, for example, a pending variation prior to the target variation that determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect, or a variation in which the variation during execution develops into reach is a predetermined variation pattern (for example). In the case of a variation pattern in which SP reach or movie reach is executed), execution of the look-ahead effect in the target variation may be prohibited regardless of the distribution of the look-ahead effect table.

Needless to say, even in such a case, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not have to prohibit the look-ahead effect. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a executes the hold look-ahead effect while the effect display device 1600 is not performing the hold display as in the execution of SP reach, movie reach, or the like. When the hold display is restarted on the effect display device 1600, the hold color may be changed and displayed. At that time, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a special sound indicating that the look-ahead effect has been executed, instead of the normal sound output when the look-ahead effect is not executed when the game ball B wins a prize at the start opening. good. Further, in this state, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a decides to execute the so-called same-color symbol look-ahead, there may be a case where the same-color symbol cannot be obtained due to the decorative symbol that stops at the out-of-reach. In this case, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may execute a process of changing the type of the look-ahead effect to be executed or prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead effect.

[18-3: L5 production]
Hereinafter, an example in which the L5 effect is executed as the look-ahead effect will be described. The L5 effect is a look-ahead effect in which the jackpot expectation index (consisting of L1 to L5) displayed on the effect display device 1600 is gradually promoted. The jackpot expectation is higher in the order of L5, L4, L3, L2, L1 (initial state). In the L5 effect, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation index displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not demoted in the middle while the L5 effect continues. Further, in the L5 production, when the jackpot expectation index is promoted to a specific stage, the jackpot may be confirmed or the probability change may be confirmed. In the L5 production, only the jackpot expectation index in the middle stage may be the jackpot confirmed or the probability variation confirmed (specifically, for example, L4 is the jackpot, the jackpot confirmed, or the probability variation confirmed). However, none of L5 need to be fixed).

In the L5 effect, when the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L5, a predetermined effect with a high jackpot expectation (barbell reach, which is a movie reach in the present embodiment) is executed. It should be noted that a specific effect suggesting that the barbell reach is executed when the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L5 (for example, a success effect that can raise the barbell or a next notice effect of a specific reach effect (corresponding). The barbell reach may be executed after the effect)) that announces that a specific reach effect will be executed.

It is desirable that the L5 effect is executed with the fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is not shortened even when the number of start storages at the start of the fluctuation is large. Specifically, the L5 effect may be executed only for the fluctuation pattern in which the SP reach 1 and 2 and the movie reach are executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-ream always occurs, and the like.

However, in the fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is shortened when the number of start storages at the start of the fluctuation is large, the L5 effect of Gase may be executed. Gase's L5 production is, for example, a production in which the jackpot expectation index is promoted only to a predetermined value or less (for example, L3 or less) and does not develop into a reach production, and a jackpot expectation index that suggests promotion of the jackpot expectation index. Includes an effect in which the index remains in the initial state (L1) and does not develop into a reach effect. However, even in the L5 effect of Gase, when the jackpot expectation index is promoted to a predetermined value or more, for example, an effect with a high jackpot expectation such as a reach effect or a pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

In this chapter, the jackpot expectation index is expressed by the numerical value displayed on the effect display device 1600 as in L1 to L5, but it is not always necessary to use the numerical value, and the jackpot expectation index may be various, for example. Emission colors of light guide plates and various lamps, sounds from various speakers, or various effects displayed on the effect display device 1600 (colors and sizes of characters and images displayed on the effect display device 1600, or effects such as dialogue). It may be expressed by the content).

With reference to the variation patterns in FIGS. 214 and 215, the variation in which the barbell reach is performed is the variation with variation numbers 10, 11, 12, 24, 25, 26. Since the barbell reach is not executed by the fluctuation in the other fluctuation pattern, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not promote the jackpot expectation index to L5 when executing the L5 effect for the fluctuation in the other fluctuation pattern (that is, the maximum). Control the production (so that it is promoted only up to L4).

FIG. 217 is an example of the L5 effect promotion pattern table. The L5 effect promotion pattern table shows, for example, the correspondence between the promotion pattern indicating the promotion timing of the jackpot expectation index in the L5 effect and the distribution of the promotion patterns. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S602 that the L5 effect is to be executed as the look-ahead effect, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a selects the promotion pattern of the L5 effect according to the distribution of the L5 effect promotion pattern table.

It should be noted that the retention 1 variation in the L5 effect promotion pattern table is the variation immediately before the variation determined to be executed as the look-ahead effect (hereinafter, also referred to as the L5 target variation), and is the L5 target variation. Indicates the fluctuation, which was pending at the time of winning, corresponding to. The 2nd change in the L5 effect promotion pattern table indicates the change immediately before the 1st change and the change held at the time of winning corresponding to the L5 target change. The 3rd change in the L5 effect promotion pattern table indicates the change immediately before the 2nd change, which is the change held at the time of winning corresponding to the L5 target change.

If there is no hold of the 3rd change at the time of winning corresponding to the L5 target change, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a assumes that the column of "at the start of the 3rd change" of the L5 effect promotion pattern table does not exist. , Determine the promotion pattern. The same applies to the case where there is no hold of the hold 2 change at the time of winning corresponding to the L5 target change, and the case where there is no hold of the hold 1 change at the time of winning corresponding to the L5 target change. Further, an L5 effect promotion pattern table corresponding to each of the pending states at the time of winning corresponding to the L5 target variation may be prepared in advance.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the L5 target fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern that does not execute the pseudo-ream, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the "pseudo 1 start time" column and the "pseudo 2 start time" of the L5 effect promotion pattern table. Determine the promotion pattern assuming that there is no column for. When the variation pattern of the L5 target variation is a pseudo-series variation pattern (that is, a variation pattern that executes pseudo 1 but does not execute pseudo 2), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the "L5 effect promotion pattern table" to ". The promotion pattern is determined assuming that the column "at the start of pseudo 2" does not exist. Further, an L5 effect promotion pattern table corresponding to each variation pattern of the L5 target variation may be prepared in advance.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the L5 target fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern that does not execute the pseudo-ream and a pattern in which the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L5 is selected, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts the L5 target fluctuation. By the time the jackpot expectation index is confirmed to be promoted to L5, another effect may be performed. Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the L5 target fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern that does not execute the pseudo-ream, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation time is relatively short, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a provides a dedicated effect for promotion to L5. It may be performed at the same time as the start of the L5 target fluctuation.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the L5 target fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern that does not execute barbell reach, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a selects a promotion pattern in which the jackpot expectation index is not promoted to L5 from the L5 effect promotion pattern table. .. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 217, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a selects one of the promotion patterns of the numbers 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, and 10. In this case, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads, for example, "at the time of barbell reach development" in the L5 promotion pattern table as "at the time of reach development".

When there is a hold corresponding to the holding 1 fluctuation, the holding 2 fluctuation, and the holding 3 fluctuation at the time of winning the L5 target fluctuation, and the fluctuation number of the fluctuation pattern of the L5 coping fluctuation is 12 (movie reach + pseudo 2 consecutive). , Let us consider an example in which the promotion pattern of No. 5 in the L5 effect promotion pattern table is selected. In this case, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays the jackpot expectation degree L1 in the initial state on the effect display device 1600 at the time of winning the L5 target variation, and displays the jackpot expectation degree L1 on the effect display device 1600 until the end of the maintenance 3 variation. do.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a raises the jackpot expectation on the effect display device 1600 to L2 at the start of the maintenance 2 fluctuation, and displays the jackpot expectation L2 on the effect display device until just before the start of pseudo 1 of the L5 target variation. .. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a raises the jackpot expectation on the effect display device 1600 to L3 at the start of pseudo 1, raises the jackpot expectation on the effect display device 1600 to L4 at the start of pseudo 2, and at the time of barbell reach development. Raise the jackpot expectation on the production display device 1600 to L5. Although an example of raising the jackpot expectation index at a predetermined timing has been described, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a executes a predetermined pulling effect (such as a shutter effect by the back second light guide plate 3160) at the timing, and the raising is performed. Needless to say, the jackpot expectation index may be raised after going through the production.

In addition, there is a promotion pattern that develops into a barbell reach with a high jackpot expectation even if the jackpot expectation index does not reach L5, such as the promotion patterns of numbers 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, and 10 in FIG. 217. It is preferable to do so. This is because even if the jackpot expectation index is not promoted to L5, the player can have a sense of expectation for the jackpot and can suppress the decline in the interest of the game. It is desirable that the total distribution of promotion patterns that develop into barbell reach even if the jackpot expectation index is not promoted to L5 is 50% or less of the total.

Further, in the example of FIG. 217, the jackpot expectation index at the time of L5 target variable winning is L1 in all promotion patterns, but there is a promotion pattern in which the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L2 or higher at the time of L5 target variable winning. May be good.

Further, in the example of FIG. 217, the jackpot expectation index develops to L5 at the earliest at the start of the L5 target fluctuation, but before the start of the L5 target fluctuation (for example, at the start of the maintenance 1 fluctuation and the start of the maintenance 2 fluctuation). There may be a promotion pattern in which the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L5 at the time, at the start of the 3rd change, or at the time of winning the L5 target change. When the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L5 before the start of the L5 target fluctuation, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a provides a dedicated effect when the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L5 before the start of the L5 target fluctuation. It may be executed from the start of the target change.

[18-4: Specific example 1 of L5 production]
Hereinafter, a specific example of the L5 effect will be described. In FIGS. 218A and 218B, the variation pattern of the L5 target variation is a variation pattern in which barbell reach and pseudo-double are executed, and the promotion pattern with the number 3 in the L5 effect promotion pattern table of FIG. 217 is selected. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline example of the L5 production.

The effect display device 1600 includes a jackpot expectation index display area 1660. In addition, it is assumed that the color suggesting each jackpot expectation index is predetermined. In the following, it is assumed that L1 is associated with white, L2 is associated with blue, L3 is associated with green, L4 is associated with red, and L5 is associated with gold.

In the jackpot expectation index display area 1660, information indicating the current jackpot expectation index is displayed. In the jackpot expectation index display area 1660, for example, "L1", "L2", "L3", and "L4" are displayed on the circle, and "L5" is displayed in the center of the circle. It is assumed that the highlighted jackpot expectation index at the position in the 12 o'clock direction on the circle in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660 is the value of the current jackpot expectation index.

Further, when the current jackpot expectation index is L5, "L5" in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660 remains centered and "L5" is highlighted. In the following, it is assumed that the highlighting is performed using the color corresponding to the above-mentioned jackpot expectation index.

In the L5 production of the promotion pattern of No. 3, the jackpot expectation index remains L1 until immediately before the start of the L5 target fluctuation. Therefore, at the start of the L5 target fluctuation, "L1" is displayed at the position in the 12 o'clock direction on the circle in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660, and only "L1" is highlighted (the white star shape corresponding to L1). It is displayed in the figure). As the highlighting of the jackpot expectation index, for example, the jackpot expectation index may be enlarged or blinked.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has a pseudo-ream symbol (the left decorative symbol in FIG. 218A is "5", the middle decorative symbol is "6", and the right decoration is a symbol indicating that the re-variation in the pseudo-ream effect starts. The symbol "7") is stopped on the effect display device 1600 in the L5 target variation. As shown in FIG. 218A, a predetermined combination of decorative symbols may be used as a pseudo-continuous symbol, or a dedicated symbol that is not included in the decorative symbol (numerical symbol) may be stopped as a pseudo-continuous symbol.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the back second light guide plate 3160 to emit light in blue, which is a color corresponding to L2, which is a jackpot expectation index after promotion at the start of pseudo 1, after the pseudo-interlocking symbol is stopped. ..

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a gradually increases the light emitting region of the back second light guide plate 3160 in the light emission of the back second light guide plate 3160 in the L5 effect (as in the examples of FIGS. 203 and 204). For example, the light emitting region of the back second light guide plate 3160 may be sequentially emitted light (so that the shutter is closed). In this case, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sequentially emits light in the light emitting region with a color corresponding to the jackpot expectation index before promotion, and after all the light emitting regions emit light, the jackpot after promotion of all the light emitting regions. It may emit light in a color corresponding to the expectation index.

Further, in the example of the L5 effect of FIGS. 218A and 218B, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a emits light in all the light emitting regions of the back second light guide plate 3160 overlapping the decorative design and the hold display on the effect display device 1600. However, it is not necessary to emit light in the light emitting area overlapping the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 or the light emitting area overlapping the hold display on the effect display device 1600.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a emits light in the light emission of the back second light guide plate 3160 in the L5 effect so that the area on the effect display device 1600 overlapping the light emitting area cannot be visually recognized by the player. It may be controlled so that the area on the effect display device 1600 overlapping the light emitting area is made to emit light so as to be visible to the player.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a emits light so that the area on the effect display device 1600 that overlaps the light emitting area is visible to the player, a predetermined display is made in the area visible to the player on the effect display device 1600. (For example, predetermined characters, title logo, etc.) may be performed. Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a emits light so that the area on the effect display device 1600 overlapping the light emitting area can be visually recognized by the player, the CPU emits light to the back second light guide plate 3160 as in the example of FIG. The characters "Change!" May be displayed on the effect display device 1600 as well as assisting the displayed characters "Change!".

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the light emission of the back second light guide plate 3160 at the start of pseudo 1, so that "L2" is located in the 12 o'clock direction on the circle in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660. Rotate the circle and highlight "L2" (displayed in the blue star-shaped figure corresponding to L2).

It should be noted that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a gradually reduces the light emitting region of the back second light guide plate 3160 as in the examples of FIGS. 203 and 204 when the light emission of the back second light guide plate 3160 is stopped in the L5 effect. (For example, the shutter may be opened), the light emission in the light emitting region may be sequentially stopped.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is used when the jackpot expectation index is promoted (for example, when the back second light guide plate 3160 emits light, when the back second light guide plate 3160 stops emitting light, or in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660. At the time of rotation of the circle, etc.), a display (“L2!” In FIG. 218A) indicating that the jackpot expectation has been promoted may be performed in a region other than the jackpot expectation index display region 1660 of the effect display device 1600.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may move various movable bodies when the jackpot expectation index is promoted, or may cause various lamps to emit light in a color corresponding to, for example, the jackpot expectation index after promotion. good. Further, when the jackpot expectation index is promoted, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may output a predetermined sound effect corresponding to each jackpot expectation index from various speakers.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the pseudo-linked symbol on the effect display device 1600 again. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the back second light guide plate 3160 to emit light in green, which is a color corresponding to L3, which is a jackpot expectation index after promotion at the start of pseudo 2, after the pseudo-interlocking symbol is stopped. ..

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the light emission of the back second light guide plate 3160 at the start of pseudo 2, so that "L3" is located in the 12 o'clock direction on the circle in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660. Rotate the circle and highlight "L3" (displayed in the green star-shaped figure corresponding to L3).

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol in the reach state in the effect display device 1600. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the back second light guide plate 3160 to emit light in gold, which is a color corresponding to L5, which is a jackpot expectation index after promotion at the time of barbell reach development, after the reach symbol is stopped. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the light emission of the back second light guide plate 3160 before the start of the barbell reach, and highlights “L4” and “L5” in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660 (“L4””. Is displayed in the red star-shaped figure corresponding to L4, and "L5" is displayed in the golden star-shaped figure corresponding to L5).

Here, since the jackpot expectation index has been promoted to L5, L4 having a jackpot expectation lower than L5 has also been promoted (meaning that the player has exceeded L4), and L4 is also highlighted. When it is confirmed that the jackpot expectation is promoted to L5, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a continuously displays the index indicating the jackpot expectation until the barbell reach is started as shown in FIG. 218B. However, when it is confirmed that the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L5, the jackpot expectation degree in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660 is performed after highlighting L5 for a predetermined time (for example, a short time of about 2 seconds). The display of the index may be erased (for example, the display may be erased by an effect such that the chain bursts on the area where the jackpot expectation index is displayed), and the dedicated effect may be executed.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a promotes the jackpot expectation index to "L5", the display by the effect display device 1600, the light emission by various lamps, the sound by various speakers, and the operation of various movable bodies are all temporarily performed. May be stopped. This makes it possible for the player to have a surprise and a sense of expectation for a big hit. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control 1510a causes various lamps to emit light in the same color (for example, red), and then causes a predetermined pattern (for example, the sixth pattern 3162 in FIG. 141 or the third pattern in FIG. 143) on the back second light guide plate 3160. 3211 etc.) may be displayed.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts barbell reach in the effect display device 1600. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays a display (“L5 promoted” in FIG. 218B) indicating the final promotion state of the jackpot expectation in an area other than the jackpot expectation index display area 1660 of the effect display device 1600. It may be performed on the above, for example, until the L5 target variation is completed.

[18-5: Specific example 2 of L5 production]
Hereinafter, another example of the L5 effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 219A, 219B, and 219C. In FIGS. 219A, 219B, and 219C, the variation pattern of the L5 target variation is a variation pattern in which barbell reach and pseudo-double are executed, and the promotion pattern numbered 13 in the L5 effect promotion pattern table of FIG. 217 is It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline example of the selected L5 effect. Further, it is assumed that at the time of winning the prize corresponding to the L5 target variation, the variation corresponding to the insurance 1 fluctuation, the insurance 2 fluctuation, and the insurance 3 fluctuation is suspended.

In the L5 production of the promotion pattern with the number 13, the jackpot expectation index remains L1 until just before the start of the 2nd change. Therefore, "L1" is highlighted (displayed in the white star-shaped figure corresponding to L1) at the position in the 12 o'clock direction on the circle in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660 at the start of the change subject to the maintenance 3. ing.

It should be noted that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a suggests to the player that the jackpot expectation index may be promoted at the timing when the jackpot expectation index is not promoted, such as at the start of the maintenance 3 fluctuation of this promotion pattern. However, the promotion gassing effect, which is an effect in which the jackpot expectation index is not promoted, may be performed by using the effect display device 1600 or the like.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a emits light of the back second light guide plate 3160 to green, which is a color corresponding to L3, which is a jackpot expectation index after promotion at the start of the maintenance 2 fluctuation, after the maintenance 3 fluctuation is completed. Let me.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the light emission of the back second light guide plate 3160 at the start of the holding 2 fluctuation so that "L3" is located in the 12 o'clock direction on the circle in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660. Rotate the circle to highlight "L3" (displayed in the blue star-shaped figure corresponding to L3). In the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, for example, instead of rotating the circle so that L3 is immediately located on the circle in the 12 o'clock direction, L2, which is an intermediate stage between L1 and L3, is once on the circle. You may rotate the circle so that it is located in the 12 o'clock direction, and immediately rotate the circle so that L3 is located in the 12 o'clock direction on the circle.

As described above, the jackpot expectation index is promoted from "L1" to "L3" without going through "L2" at the start of the holding 2 fluctuation. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 219A, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not have to highlight "L2", which is a jackpot expectation index that did not pass through.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not highlight the jackpot expectation index that did not pass through, so that the player can recognize the process of promotion of the jackpot expectation index. In particular, for example, there is a difference between the jackpot expectation when the jackpot expectation index is promoted in order from L1 to L5 and the jackpot expectation when the jackpot expectation index of 1 or more is skipped and promoted to the jackpot expectation index L5. If there is, the player can estimate the degree of expectation for the big hit by recognizing the process of promotion of the degree of expectation index, and can suppress the deterioration of the game interest. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a clearly indicates how the jackpot expectation index was promoted to L5 in the L5 production.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts the maintenance fluctuation. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not perform the promotion effect of the jackpot expectation index at the start of the maintenance 1 fluctuation. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the back second light guide plate 3160 to emit light in gold corresponding to L5, which is a jackpot expectation index after promotion of the L5 target fluctuation, after the end of the maintenance 1 fluctuation.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the light emission of the back second light guide plate 3160 at the start of the L5 target fluctuation, and highlights "L5" in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660 (golden star corresponding to L5). Display in the shape figure). In the example of FIG. 219B, at the start of the L5 target fluctuation, the jackpot expectation index is promoted from "L3" to "L5" without going through "L4", so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has the jackpot expectation. "L4" in the index display area 1660 is not highlighted.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the pseudo-continuous symbol, which is a symbol indicating that the re-variation in the pseudo-continuous effect starts, on the effect display device 1600 in the L5 target variation. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts pseudo 1 in the effect display device 1600.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the pseudo-continuous symbol, which is a symbol indicating that the re-variation in the pseudo-continuous effect starts, on the effect display device 1600 again. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts the pseudo 2 in the effect display device 1600.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the decorative symbol in the reach state in the effect display device 1600. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts barbell reach in the effect display device 1600.

In the L5 effect described with reference to FIGS. 219A, 219B, and 219C, the jackpot expectation index is promoted in the look-ahead effect for the L5 target variation using the hold variation, and the jackpot expectation is further promoted in the L5 target variation. To realize a series of productions. Further, in the L5 effect of the promotion pattern numbers 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 10 of the L5 effect promotion pattern table of FIG. 217, the jackpot expectation index is used in the look-ahead effect of the L5 target variation using the hold variation. It is promoted, and a series of productions in which the jackpot expectation is further promoted in the pseudo-continuous production of the L5 target fluctuation is realized. By realizing a series of these productions, the player can gradually obtain a sense of expectation for a big hit among a plurality of productions, and eventually the interest of the game is improved.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has a case where the jackpot expectation index is promoted in order from L1 to L5, a case where one or more jackpot expectation indexes are skipped and promoted to the jackpot expectation index L5, and a case where the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L5. (For example, the display mode of the effect displayed in FIG. 218B and the display effect of “L5 promoted” displayed in FIGS. 218B and 219B) may be changed.

[18-6: Another example of L5 production promotion pattern table]
An example in which the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines all the promotion timings of the jackpot expectation in the L5 effect at the time of winning a prize corresponding to the L5 target variation using the L5 effect promotion pattern table of FIG. 217 has been described. The CPU may sequentially draw the promotion lottery of the jackpot expectation degree at a predetermined timing by using the L5 effect promotion pattern table shown in FIG. 220.

FIG. 220 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the L5 effect promotion pattern table. Differences from the L5 effect promotion pattern table of FIG. 217 will be described. The L5 effect promotion pattern table of FIG. 220 shows the correspondence between the promotion pattern showing the promotion probability of the jackpot expectation index at the promotion timing of the jackpot expectation and the distribution of the promotion patterns.

For example, when the promotion pattern of No. 1 is selected, there is a 1/20 probability at the start of the maintenance 3 fluctuation, a 1/10 probability at the start of the maintenance 2 fluctuation, and a 1/20 probability at the start of the maintenance 1 fluctuation. The jackpot expectation index is promoted with a probability of 1/10 at the start of the target fluctuation, a probability of 1/10 at the start of pseudo 1, a probability of 1/10 at the start of pseudo 2, and a probability of 1/10 at the start of barbell reach. do.

The promotion pattern of No. 1 in FIG. 220 is difficult to win for the jackpot expectation index promotion at the time of hold digestion, but is easy to win for the jackpot expectation index promotion in the L5 target fluctuation. The promotion pattern of No. 2 in FIG. 220 is easy to win the jackpot expectation index promotion at the time of hold digestion, but is difficult to win the jackpot expectation index promotion in the L5 target fluctuation. The promotion pattern of No. 3 in FIG. 220 is likely to win the promotion of the jackpot expectation index at the time of hold digestion and the promotion of the jackpot expectation index in the L5 target variation. The promotion pattern of No. 4 in FIG. 220 is difficult to win the promotion of the jackpot expectation index at the time of hold digestion and the promotion of the jackpot expectation index in the L5 target variation.

Note that FIG. 220 shows only the promotion pattern in which the jackpot expectation index is not promoted at the time of winning corresponding to the L5 target fluctuation, but the promotion lottery of the jackpot expectation index is performed even at the time of winning corresponding to the L5 target fluctuation. There may be a promotion pattern that is used. As a pattern in which the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L5, the first pattern is promoted to L5 during the L5 target change, and the promotion to L5 is performed after the winning time corresponding to the L5 target change and before the start of the L5 target change. There is a second pattern and a third pattern that is promoted to L5 at the time of winning corresponding to the L5 target fluctuation, but the appearance ratio is higher in the order of the first pattern, the second pattern, and the third pattern. Therefore, it is desirable that the promotion probability and the distribution in each promotion pattern of the L5 effect promotion pattern table are set. This is to keep the player's expectation for the promotion of the jackpot expectation index for a long time.

Further, the promotion probability and the distribution in each promotion pattern of the L5 effect promotion pattern table may be set so that the appearance ratio increases in the order of the second pattern, the first pattern, and the third pattern. Even when the promotion probability and the distribution are set in this way, the player's expectation for the promotion of the jackpot expectation index can be continued for a long time. That is, it is important that the promotion probability and the distribution are set so that the appearance rate of the third pattern is the lowest.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a wins the jackpot expectation index promotion lottery, the jackpot expectation index in the effect display device 1600 may be promoted by only one step, or the lottery for the number of steps to be promoted is performed to produce the effect. The jackpot expectation index in the display device 1600 may be promoted by the number of steps.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may decide whether or not to finally promote the jackpot expectation index to L5 when determining the fluctuation pattern of the L5 target variation. Specifically, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines not to promote the jackpot expectation index to L5 when a fluctuation pattern in which barbell reach is not executed is selected, and selects a fluctuation pattern in which barbell reach is executed. If so, it is determined whether or not to promote the jackpot expectation index to L5 at a predetermined ratio.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a decides not to promote the jackpot expectation index to L5, and the jackpot expectation indicated by the promotion result of the jackpot expectation index promotion lottery becomes L5, the promotion result is irrelevant. Do not execute the promotion effect of the jackpot expectation index. Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a decides not to promote the jackpot expectation index to L5, it is not necessary to execute the jackpot expectation index promotion lottery after the jackpot expectation index reaches L4.

Further, after the jackpot expectation index reaches L5, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may discard the winning result even if the jackpot expectation index promotion lottery is won, or may not execute the jackpot expectation index promotion lottery. desirable. As described above, when the jackpot expectation index reaches L5 before the start of the L5 target fluctuation, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has the jackpot expectation index from the start of the L5 target fluctuation to before the start of the L5 target fluctuation. The special effect in the case of promotion to L5 may be executed from the start of the L5 target change.

[18-7: Specific example of the end of L5 production]
Hereinafter, an example of the end effect in the case where the big hit is not won in the L5 effect will be described with reference to FIG. 221. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a decides to execute the L5 effect that does not win the jackpot based on the determination result notification command received in step S125, it indicates that, for example, the jackpot was not won at the end of the L5 target variation. The display is performed on the effect display device 1600 (“Sorry ...” in FIG. 221).

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, cover the entire jackpot expectation index display area 1660 at the end of the L5 target variation, and then displays the jackpot expectation index display area 1660 in the initial state ( Return to the state where "L1" is displayed at the position in the 12 o'clock direction on the circle in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660 and only "L1" is highlighted).

[19. Secret timer notice production]
[19-1: Specific example of secret timer notice production 1]
Hereinafter, an example of the secret timer advance notice effect, which is a specific effect of the present embodiment, will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 and 223. FIG. 222 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a secret timer advance notice effect. FIG. 223 is an explanatory diagram showing a timetable of the secret timer advance notice effect.

The secret timer notice effect is an effect with a high expectation of winning a big hit after the remaining time indicated by the timer displayed at the start of the secret timer advance effect (for example, an effect indicating that a pseudo-ream is started, an effect of confirming a big hit, etc. It is a production that executes display (voice, etc.) such as "chance!" That raises expectations for big hits. Hereinafter, an example will be described in which the start advance notice effect of the pseudo 1 (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a start advance notice effect) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the remaining time indicated by the timer has elapsed, and then the pseudo 1 is executed. That is, an example will be described in which the effect having a high expectation of winning a big hit is a pseudo-continuous effect.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a refers to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU in step S601, and when it is determined that the variation pattern is such that the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the CPU secret timer according to a predetermined distribution. Decide whether to execute the advance notice effect. Hereinafter, an example will be described in which the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines to execute the secret timer advance notice effect.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays a timer indicating the time until the start notice effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 at the start of the fluctuation. In the examples of FIGS. 222 and 223, the start notice effect is executed 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the pseudo 1 is executed 35 seconds after the start of the fluctuation.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, counting down the remaining time of the timer displayed on the effect display device 1600 every 1 second until 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a hides the timer in the effect display device 1600 when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. From this point, the player counts the remaining time until the start notice effect with his / her own body clock.

Although the description is omitted in FIG. 222 for the sake of simplicity, as shown in the timetable of FIG. 223, for example, another main advance notice effect such as a character effect may be executed in parallel with the secret timer advance notice effect. desirable.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays a predetermined character on the effect display device 1600, for example, from the time when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, an image of the character walking on the effect display device 1600 on the effect display device 1600 at the time when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, an image in which the character jumps on the effect display device 1600 at the time when 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, a timer indicating the remaining time of 3 seconds on the effect display device again at the time when 27 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the character is further displayed from the depth direction of the effect display device 1600. An image that appears to hit the effect display device 1600 is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, for example, after redisplaying the timer on the effect display device 1600, sets the remaining time of the timer displayed on the effect display device 1600 to 1 until 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. Displays a countdown every second. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a redisplays the timer that executes the countdown from the remaining 3 seconds on the effect display device 1600. In this case, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a redisplays the timer on the effect display device 1600, the timer is suddenly redisplayed (that is, without a notice about redisplaying the timer). It can give a surprise to the player.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a hides the timer at the time when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation (that is, when the remaining time of the timer is 0 seconds), and produces a display such as "pseudo-ream !!!". The start notice effect to be displayed on the display device 1600 is executed, and when the character hits the effect display device 1600, the effect display device 1600 displays an image appearing to be broken on the effect display device 1600.

Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has, for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol (in FIG. 222, the left decorative symbol is "5", the middle decorative symbol is "6", and the right decorative symbol is "7" at the time when 31 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation. ”) Is stopped on the effect display device 1600. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts the pseudo 1 at the time when 35 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, for example.

For example, in a normal timer advance notice effect in which the remaining time is continuously counted down without hiding the timer, the player can always surely grasp the remaining seconds, so that it is difficult to feel the unexpectedness of the effect. In addition, the player can infer the effect that occurs when the remaining time of the timer reaches 0 seconds from the flow of other effects executed while such a timer advance notice effect is being executed. Since there is a possibility, it is difficult to feel the unexpectedness of the production (see the column of "time until 0 seconds remaining in the timer" in FIG. 223).

On the other hand, in the secret timer notice effect, the timer is temporarily hidden. Therefore, in the secret timer advance notice effect, when the timer is once hidden (in the example of FIG. 223, 4 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), the player counts the remaining time with his / her own body clock. It is highly possible that the human body clock cannot accurately count the number of seconds. For example, in the example of FIG. 223, when the remaining time of the hidden timer is 5 seconds, the remaining time in the player's body clock is 0 seconds. That is, the player's body clock advances faster than the actual elapsed time.

In the example of FIG. 223, the main notice effect (character effect) is executed in parallel with the timer advance notice effect. The effect executed as the main notice effect when the player's own body clock reaches 0 seconds is an effect in which the character jumps, that is, the player has the player 3 seconds before the jump effect is displayed. Is likely to have expected the timer to reappear and count down. When there are multiple types of jump effects with different expectations, the player can jump with a slightly improved level of character effects (for example, the character wearing an aura) when the remaining time of the timer reaches 0 seconds. It is highly likely that you will expect to see the aura jump effect). When the jackpot expectation of the pseudo-ream effect is higher than the jackpot expectation of the aura jump effect, even if the aura jump effect appears, the player cannot raise the expectation for the jackpot.

However, in the example of FIG. 223, the timer is not redisplayed when the remaining time in the player's body clock reaches 3 seconds, so that the player feels uncomfortable. Furthermore, when the remaining time in the player's body clock reaches 0 seconds, contrary to the player's expectation, a normal jump effect appears instead of an aura jump effect, and the player feels more uncomfortable and hits the jackpot. Expectations improve at once. Since the timer is always displayed in the normal timer advance notice effect, the player appears when the remaining time of the timer becomes 0 due to the flow of the advance notice effect that is progressing in parallel with the timer advance notice effect. The production can be expected to some extent. However, in the secret timer notice, although the effect that appears when the remaining time of the timer becomes 0 is predetermined, the player's body clock goes wrong, which is contrary to the player's expectation. Expectations can be improved.

Also, if the player's body clock is ahead of the actual elapsed time, the timer indicates "3 seconds remaining" even though the player feels that the remaining time of the timer is still available. Is displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the unexpectedness of the effect can be felt.

In the secret timer advance notice effect, the time when the timer is in the non-display state (22 seconds from the lapse of 4 seconds to the lapse of 26 seconds in FIG. 222) is the remaining time after the timer is in the display state again (FIG. 22). It is desirable that it is longer than 3 seconds after 27 seconds in 222. Since the timer is hidden for a long time, there is a high possibility that the difference between the player's body clock and the actual elapsed time will increase, so that the player can feel the unexpectedness of the production. Because it becomes.

That is, when another main advance notice effect (character effect in the example of FIG. 223) is executed when the timer is hidden in the secret timer advance notice effect, the player has the remaining time of his / her own body clock and the other. It is possible to obtain an uplifting feeling by guessing the effect and the effect when the remaining time of the timer becomes 0.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs the effect sound by various speakers, operates various movable bodies, emits light from various lamps, guides various light guide plates, etc. in the other main advance notice effects in the secret timer advance notice effect. It is desirable to execute it at the same time. In this way, by executing various effects in the other main notice effect, the player's attention is directed to the other main notice effect, and the difference between the player's body clock and the actual elapsed time is large. This is because there is a high possibility that the game will be played, and the player will be able to feel the unexpectedness of the production.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a executes the output of the effect sound by the various speakers, the operation of various movable bodies, the light emission of various lamps, the light guidance of various light guide plates, etc. in the other main notice effects. , An effect indicating that the secret timer advance notice effect is being executed while the timer is hidden may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays a display such as "timer advance notice is operating" on the effect display device 1600 while the timer is not displayed. It is desirable that the effect is not an effect indicating the remaining time of the timer. This makes it possible to remember that the secret timer advance notice effect is being executed even when the player is drawn to the other main notice effect.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a normal timer advance notice effect (a timer advance notice effect that continues the countdown without the timer being hidden) may be selectable. In this case, it is desirable that the jackpot winning expectation in the secret timer notice effect is set higher than the jackpot winning expectation in the normal timer notice effect. By doing so, the player can obtain an uplifting feeling at the branch point of whether or not the timer is hidden (when 27 seconds have elapsed in FIG. 222). In addition, due to the high expectation of winning the big hit of the secret timer notice effect, the player may feel an uplifting feeling due to the appearance of the secret timer notice effect, and the difference between the player's body clock and the actual elapsed time may become large. This is because it becomes higher and you can feel the unexpectedness of the production.

In addition, in order to suppress the excessive uplifting feeling of the player when the secret timer notice effect appears and to prevent the deviation between the player's body clock and the actual elapsed time from becoming excessive, the normal timer notice is given. The selection rate of the effect may be set so that the rate at which the secret timer advance effect appears is higher than the rate at which the effect appears.

[19-2: Specific example 2 of secret timer notice production]
224A and 224B are explanatory views showing another example of the secret timer advance notice effect. Differences from FIG. 222 will be described. The secret timer of FIGS. 224A and 224B in that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a executes a preliminary notice effect suggesting that the timer is redisplayed before a predetermined time for redisplaying the timer and restarting the countdown. The advance notice effect is different from the secret timer advance notice effect of FIG. 222. It is desirable that the time for executing the advance notice effect is shorter than the countdown time after the timer is redisplayed (more than 3 seconds in the example of FIG. 224B).

In the example of FIG. 224A, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a executes a preliminary notice effect of displaying the display "Zawazawa ..." on the effect display device 1600 for 1 second in the timer non-display state 24 seconds after the start of fluctuation. do. The advance notice effect may be an effect indicating a time count. Specifically, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may display the effect in the area where the timer is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the advance notice effect, and the heartbeat sound is emitted from various speakers every second. Alternatively, the sound of the second hand advancing may be output.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may temporarily display the timer indicating the remaining time on the effect display device 1600 a predetermined number of times (for example, up to twice) during the timer non-display state period. Specifically, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may redisplay the timer on the effect display device 1600 every 10 seconds after hiding the timer.

In the examples of FIGS. 224A and 224B, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may redisplay the timer indicating the remaining time for only 1 second, for example, 13 seconds and 23 seconds after the start of fluctuation. When the timer indicating the remaining time is temporarily displayed during the timer non-display state period, if the number of display times can be selected from once or twice, one time is selected rather than two times. It is desirable that the ratio is set to be high. This is because as the number of times the timer is temporarily displayed during the timer non-display state period increases, the player's body clock does not go out of order and the unexpectedness of the effect is less likely to be felt.

If the player feels a great uplifting feeling due to the secret timer notice effect, the difference between the player's body clock and the actual elapsed time may become very large, but the peripheral control IC1510a is in the timer non-display state period. By temporarily displaying a timer indicating the remaining time on the effect display device 1600, the deviation is temporarily corrected.

The secret timer advance notice effect, which temporarily displays the timer indicating the remaining time during the timer non-display state period, does not display any timer indicating the remaining time during the timer non-display state period on the effect display device 1600. It is desirable to select a smaller ratio than the preview effect.

In the present embodiment, in the secret timer advance notice effect, an example in which a timer indicating the remaining time is displayed on the effect display device 1600 is shown, but the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a replaces or adds to the timer display. For example, audio indicating the remaining time may be output from various speakers.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may execute the secret timer advance notice effect by using the look-ahead effect. It is assumed that the secret timer advance notice effect is defined in the look-ahead table as the look-ahead effect.

For example, when the hold corresponding to the first variation having the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed is won, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a selects the secret timer advance effect at a predetermined ratio with reference to the look-ahead table. .. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a selects the secret timer advance notice effect as the look-ahead effect, for example, the remaining time of the change during execution, the change time of the pending change, and the start notice in the secret timer advance notice effect of the first change. The sum of the time until the effect is determined as the remaining time of the timer in the initial display of the secret timer advance notice effect, and the timer indicating the remaining time is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, in the pre-reading stage (that is, after the prize corresponding to the first fluctuation and before the start of the first fluctuation), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a concretely displays the timer, such as "a little more timer notice". A display effect indicating that a notice is given, or a display effect indicating that a low-expected notice effect such as "a little more hot notice" is excluded may be executed.

Other contents in the secret timer advance notice effect are the same as those in the secret timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 222. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may temporarily display a timer indicating the remaining time even at the start of the fluctuation in which the start advance notice effect in the secret timer advance notice effect is executed.

[20. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the rear side so as to close the inside of the frame of the transparent frame-shaped front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and a plurality of them are attached to the front surface. Obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the panel plate 1110 of the transparent flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 having the game area 5a formed on the front surface thereof is located on the upper right of the center of the game area 5a in front view. In the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the center of the game area 5a and the opening 1112 pass through the center of the opening 1112 after having an opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 at a position eccentric to the center. The side in the direction in which the opening 1112 is eccentric is designated as the decorative pattern non-forming region 1102, and the opposite side is designated as the decorative pattern forming region 1101 with the line orthogonal to the line connecting the center of the slingshot as the boundary. Since the decorative pattern 1150 for decorating the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is formed on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the pattern forming region 1101, the panel decorative LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 in which light is incident from the side surface of the panel plate 1110 is formed. In the state where the pachinko machine 1 is not emitting light, the light from the light emitting decoration body provided in the pachinko machine 1, the effect display device 1600, etc., the light of the illumination in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, is installed nearby. The appearance of the decorative pattern 1150 changes depending on the light from other pachinko machines, the position of the eyes of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the like. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the inside of the game area 5a having a clearly different impression (atmosphere) from the conventional pachinko machine in which the decorative sheet is attached to the game panel, which strongly attracts the player's interest. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player, and to entertain the player with the decoration of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Then, when the panel decorative LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 is made to emit light, the light incident from the side surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is reflected forward in the decorative pattern 1150 and is visible through the transparent panel plate 1110. Since the decorative pattern 1150 appears to shine and the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 can be light-emittingly decorated, the decorative pattern 1150 can be made to stand out, the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, and the player's appearance can be improved. It can attract a strong interest and enhance the appeal to the player. Further, by illuminating the decorative pattern 1150, the appearance of the decorative pattern 1150 can be different from that when the decorative pattern 1150 is not luminescent, so that the game panel 1100 (panel), which cannot be seen with a conventional pachinko machine, can be seen. Since it is possible to show the light emission of the decoration of the board 1110), the decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 makes the player think that there is something good, such as the arrival of a chance. It is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the decorative pattern 1150 is formed outside the radiation portion 1151 formed in the normal light guide region 1103 within a predetermined range from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 in the game panel 1100, and outside the normal light guide region 1103. It is composed of a radiation unit 1151 and a radiation light guide unit 1152 that reflects light incident from the side surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 forward and guides the light to the radiation unit 1151 away from the normal light guide region 1103. Since the radiating light guide portion 1152 of the decorative pattern 1150 guides the light to the radiating portion 1151 normally formed on the outside of the light guide region 1103, even the radiating portion 1151 far from the panel decorative LED 1130a is a panel. It is possible to illuminate and decorate the entire decorative pattern 1150 with the same brightness as the radiating portion 1151 close to the decorative LED 1130a, and it is possible to uniformly illuminate the entire decorative pattern 1150 and improve the appearance of the luminescent decoration of the decorative pattern 1150. can.

Further, since the radiation light guide unit 1152 can guide the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a to the radiation unit 1151 at a distant position, the panel decoration LED 1130a is partially attached to the outer peripheral side surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Even if it is arranged in, the decorative pattern 1150 can be uniformly luminescently decorated. As a result, it is not necessary to arrange the panel decoration LED 1130a over the entire circumference of the panel plate 1110, and the panel decoration LED 1130a can be arranged at the upper left and lower left positions of the front view where it is easy to secure a space, and is used for panel decoration. It is possible to prevent the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from becoming small in order to secure the arrangement space of the LED 1130a.

Further, in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the center and the opening of the game area 5a (panel plate 1110) pass through the center of the opening 1112 which is eccentrically penetrated to the upper right for mounting the center accessory 2500. With the line orthogonal to the line connecting the center of 1112 as the boundary, the width of the panel plate 1110 is narrow on the side (upper right side) in the direction in which the opening 1112 is eccentric, and the panel on the opposite side (lower left side). Since the width of the plate 1110 is wide and the wide side is the decorative pattern forming region 1101 and the narrow side is the decorative pattern non-forming region 1102, the wide decorative pattern forming region 1101 of the panel plate 1110 is used. Since the decorative pattern 1150 is formed in, the decorative pattern 1150 becomes large and the decorative pattern 1150 can be easily seen, and the decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 can be entertained by the player. Further, since the decorative pattern 1150 is not formed in the narrow decorative pattern non-forming region 1102 of the panel plate 1110, the appearance in the game area 5a is poor even if the decorative pattern 1150 is not formed in the region. It is possible to avoid wastefully forming the decorative pattern 1150 in a narrow and difficult-to-see area, and it is possible to reduce the time and effort required to form the decorative pattern 1150.

Further, since the decorative pattern 1150 is formed on a part of the rear surface (decorative pattern forming region 1101) of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the decorative pattern 1150 is formed on the entire rear surface of the panel plate 1110. It is possible to reduce the time and effort required to form the decorative pattern 1150 and suppress the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 as compared with the case of.

Further, in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the decoration prohibited area 1104 is set as the front view predetermined radius centering on the specific obstacle nail N1 that affects the game content among the plurality of obstacle nails N, and the decoration prohibited area 1104 is avoided. The decorative pattern 1150 is formed as described above. As a result, when innumerable game balls B come into contact with the specific obstacle nail N1, the specific obstacle nail N1 is distorted or tilted, and it becomes impossible to provide a preset flow of the game ball B. In order to prevent this, when the specific obstacle nail N1 is hit to adjust to a preset state, the decoration pattern 1150 is not formed around the specific obstacle nail N1 (decoration prohibited area 1104), so that the specific obstacle nail is not formed. The current state of distortion of the N1 can be easily seen, and the maintenance of the specific obstacle nail N1 can be facilitated. Further, since the decorative pattern 1150 is not formed around the specific obstacle nail N1, even if the specific obstacle nail N1 is hit during maintenance, the impact transmitted from the specific obstacle nail N1 to the panel plate 1110 is a specific obstacle. It will be dampened to some extent by the time it reaches the decorative pattern 1150 near the nail N1, and even if the stress is concentrated, the force will be weakened and the panel plate 1110 will crack or crack. However, it is possible to facilitate the maintenance of the specific obstacle nail N1.

Further, since the decoration prohibited area 1104 is provided, the portion of the panel plate 1110 where the decoration pattern 1150 can be formed can be clarified, so that the decoration pattern 1150 is unnecessary for the specific obstacle nail N1. It is possible to prevent the player from moving away from the nail, and it is possible to easily form a more diverse decorative pattern 1150, and at the same time, it is possible to form a highly decorative decorative pattern 1150, which further enhances the appeal to the player. be able to.

Further, since the decoration prohibited area 1104 is used to avoid the specific obstacle nail N1 and form the decoration pattern 1150, the decoration pattern 1150 is formed behind the portion where the obstacle nail N excluding the specific obstacle nail N1 is planted. Since there will be some overlap, in the obstacle nail N planted so as to overlap with the decorative pattern 1150, the tip of the obstacle nail N is irradiated with light by the decorative pattern 1150 decorated with light emission, and the obstacle is concerned. The tip of the nail N can be made to shine, and the obstacle nail N and the tip can be made to shine.

Further, when the decorative pattern 1150 is light-emitting and decorated by the panel decoration LED 1130a, the light of the light-emitting decoration can also emit light from the portion between the outer periphery and the inner circumference of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. can. Then, since the portion between the outer periphery and the inner circumference of the front component 1000 can be light-emitting-decorated by the light-emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150, the function display unit 1400 and the certificate stamp affixing portion 1012 attached to the portion can be decorated with light-emitting decoration. Since it is possible to irradiate the pasted certificate stamp with light from behind, it is possible to illuminate the function display unit 1400 and the certificate stamp, and the function display that was not emitted by conventional pachinko machines. By luminescent decoration of the unit 1400 and the certificate stamp, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and at the same time, I strongly think that there is something good for the player by luminescent decoration. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, since the decorative pattern 1150 that is always visible has a portion along the outer edge facing the inside of the back-front decorative substrate 3603 in the back-front effect unit 3600 arranged behind the game panel 1100. The portion of the decorative pattern 1150 makes it difficult to recognize the outer edge of the back front decorative substrate 3603 when viewed through the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Further, since the decorative pattern 1150 has a portion along the outer edge of the back front decorative substrate 3603, the decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 and the shape (decoration) of the back front decorative substrate 3603 are similar. Therefore, it is possible to show a decoration with a sense of unity between the back front decorative substrate 3603 and the decoration pattern 1150, and it is possible to show a decoration with a sense of depth, which improves the appearance in the game area 5a in the front view. be able to.

Further, in a state where the light guide plate LED 2612a, the light guide plate LED 3172a, and the light guide plate LED 3221a are not emitting light, the front light guide plate 2610, the back second light guide plate 3160, and the back first light guide plate 3210 are transparent. , The display screen of the effect display device 1600 arranged behind the front light guide plate 2610, the back second light guide plate 3160, and the back first light guide plate 3210 can be visually recognized from the front, and the panel plate of the game panel 1100. The decorative pattern 1150 formed in 1110 can be visually recognized. In this state, when any one of the light guide plate LED 2612a, the light guide plate LED 3172a, and the light guide plate LED 3221a and the panel decoration LED 1130a are made to emit light, the second pattern 2622 of the front light guide plate 2610 and the back second light guide plate 3160 are fired. Since it is possible to show the player a luminescent decoration in which the decoration of any of the six patterns 3162 and the third pattern 3211 of the back first light guide plate 3210 is integrated with the decoration pattern 1150, it has a strong impact on the player. It is possible to give the player a strong interest, and at the same time, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and to raise the expectation for the game. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect display device 1600 is arranged so as to be visible through the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in the center of the game area 5a in front view, which is higher than that of the effect display device 1600. A transparent back first light guide plate 3210 and back second light guide plate 3160 are arranged in front, and a transparent back light guide plate 3210 and back second light guide plate 3160 extend from the outside to the inside position. A decorative lens 3202 in the back and a decorative lens 3152 in the back are arranged. Then, the LED 3171a for the light guide plate of the fifth pattern substrate 3171, the LED 3172a for the light guide plate of the sixth design substrate 3172, the LED 3221a for the light guide plate of the third design substrate 3221, and the LED 3222a for the light guide plate of the fourth design substrate 3222. In the state where the light is not emitted, the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160 are in a transparent state, and the rear effect display device 1600 is passed through the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160. The effect image displayed on the back can be visually recognized, the displayed effect image can be enjoyed, and the back middle decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 are difficult to see.

In this state, when the light guide plate LED 3172a or the light guide plate LED 3221a and the LED 3203a, LED 3221b, LED 3222b, LED 3153a, LED 3171b, and LED 3172b are made to emit light, the light is emitted from the center in the front view game area 5a to the front of the effect display device 1600. , The third pattern 3211 or the sixth pattern 3162 as a specific pattern on which a specific object (broken glass) is drawn is displayed by light emission, and the third pattern is displayed around the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162. The unit base 3151, the back-rear decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back-middle decorative lens 3202 having the same shape as the object of the 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 are luminescently decorated, and the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 emit light. The display and the unit base 3151, the back-rear decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the light-emitting decoration of the back-middle decorative lens 3202 make it difficult to see the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the third pattern 3211 emitted by light emission is displayed. Alternatively, the sixth pattern 3162, the unit base 3151 decorated with light emission, the back-rear decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back-middle decorative lens 3202 are conspicuously visible.

That is, the light emission display of the third pattern 3211 or the sixth pattern 3162 by the back first light guide plate 3210 or the back second light guide plate 3160 and the light emission of the unit base 3151, the back rear decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back middle decorative lens 3202. When the light emitting effect by decoration is executed, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 becomes difficult to see, and instead, the third pattern 3211 or the sixth pattern 3162, the unit base 3151, and the back-rear decorative lens 3152, Since the unit base 3201 and the decorative lens 3202 in the back can be seen conspicuously, it can give a strong impact to the player and make the player think that there is something good for the player, and a sense of expectation for the game. Can be enhanced. At this time, since the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 are separated from each other in the front-rear direction from the unit base 3151, the back-rear decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back-middle decorative lens 3202, the third pattern 3211 In the part where the sixth pattern 3162, the unit base 3151, the back rear decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back middle decorative lens 3202 overlap in the front-rear direction, the overlapping part seems to protrude forward. Or, it looks as if it is retracted backward, and a three-dimensional pattern with a sense of perspective can be emitted and displayed, so that the player can be wondered. The second light guide plate 3160, the unit base 3151, the back rear decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back middle decorative lens 3202 can make it difficult to get tired of the light emission effect, and the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second guide. It is possible to entertain the player with the light emission effect by the light plate 3160, the unit base 3151, the back-rear decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back-middle decorative lens 3202, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game. can.

In addition, a transparent unit base 3151, a back-rear decorative lens 3152, a unit base 3201, and a back-middle decorative lens 3202 formed in the same shape as a specific target portion drawn as the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162. , The third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 are provided in front of and behind the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160 in which light emission is displayed, and at least three members having different positions in the front-rear direction are provided. Therefore, it is possible to further emphasize the perspective when each of them is made to emit light, and it is possible to surely achieve the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, the inner end faces of the back-middle decorative lens 3202 and the back-rear decorative lens 3152 are tilted, and the LED3203a, LED3221b, LED3222b, LED3153a, LED3171b, and LED3172b are used as the back-middle decorative lens 3202 and the back-rear decorative lens. The inside of the back middle decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 is irradiated with light in a direction parallel to the surfaces of the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160 toward the inner end surface of the 3152. Therefore, the light radiated to the inside of the back middle decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 is reflected forward on the inner end surface (outer peripheral edge facing inward) and radiated forward. The outer peripheral edge of the back-middle decorative lens 3202 and the back-rear decorative lens 3152 can be light-emitting-decorated in a band shape, making it easy for the player to recognize the shapes of the back-middle decorative lens 3202 and the back-rear decorative lens 3152. The back middle decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 can be emphasized, and the outer peripheral shapes of the back middle decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 are emphasized, so that the back first light guide plate can be emphasized. It is possible to easily recognize that the positions of the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 of the back second light guide plate 3160 and the back middle decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 are different in the front-rear direction. It is possible to produce a three-dimensional pattern that gives a more perspective.

Further, the inner end faces (outer peripheral edges facing inward) of the back middle decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, and as described above, the back middle decorative lens 3202. Since the reflection direction (or refraction direction) of the outer peripheral edge of the back-rear decorative lens 3152 is different from that of the flat front surface, the light of the illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed or another pachinko machine. Depending on the state of the light shining from the front into the game area 5a, such as the light from the back, the front of the back-middle decorative lens 3202 and the back-rear decorative lens 3152 looks transparent, whereas the back-middle decorative lens 3202 and the back The outer peripheral edge of the rear decorative lens 3152 looks shiny or translucent, which makes it easier for the player to recognize the shape and existence of the back middle decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152. The decorative effect in the game area 5a by the back middle decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 can be enhanced.

Further, after the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160 are arranged apart from each other in the front-rear direction, the objects as the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 drawn on the back are arranged in chronological order. The back first light guide plate 3210 and the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back first in the time-series order of the objects drawn as the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162, or in the reverse order of the time series. By sequentially displaying the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 of the two light guide plates 3160 in sequence, it is possible to show the player a moving light emission effect, so that the player is less likely to get bored and the game is played. It can entertain people and give a strong impact to the player to make them think that there is something good for the player, raising expectations for the game and reducing the interest in the game. It can be suppressed.

In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is provided, by displaying an effect image that is matched with the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 that are light-emittingly displayed, the third pattern 3211, the sixth pattern 3162, and the back side are displayed. A collaborative effect of the decorative lens 3202 or the back-rear decorative lens 3152 and the effect image (for example, the effect that the glass is broken by the light emission display of the third pattern 3211 or the sixth pattern 3162 depending on the character displayed as the effect image, or the first It is possible to perform a production such that the character of the production image appears by breaking the glass due to the light emission display of the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162, etc.), and the various productions make it difficult for the player to get bored. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 in the back-rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is in the standby position, the transparent game panel that partitions the rear end of the game area 5a. Through the 1100 (panel board 1110), the effect display device 1600 for displaying the effect image is located in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and the effect display device 1600 is located at the upper part in front of the effect display device 1600. The back-rear movable decorative body 3120 of the large back-rear effect unit 3100 extending so as to straddle the display screen in the left-right direction is located. In this state, the lock member 3141 is in the locked position, and the lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3120 is in contact with the restricting portion 3141c of the lock member 3141 from above. The movement of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 to the lower side of 3141c is restricted. Further, the lock member 3141 is urged from the release position side to the lock position side by the lock spring 3143 via the transmission slider 3142, and the stopper 3141e abuts on the rotation restricting member 3144 to move from the lock position to the release position. Is restricted from turning to the opposite side.

Then, the lock member 3141 is locked by the downward movement of the slide guide 3134 driven by the back-rear drive motor 3135 of the back-rear movable mechanism 3130 according to the game state that changes due to the game being played in the game area 5a. When the restricting portion 3141c is rotated from the back to the release position, the restricting portion 3141c moves to a position where it does not come into contact with the lock protrusion 3122a of the back-rear movable decoration 3120, and the gravity acting on the back-rear movable decoration 3120 causes an effect display device. It falls (moves) to the lower moving end (lowering position) so as to traverse the front of the 1600. When the slide guide 3134 is moved upward after the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 has fallen, the lock member 3141 is rotated from the release position to the lock position by the urging force of the lock spring 3143. After that, when the back-rear movable decoration 3120 is moved upward by the slide guide 3134 of the back-rear movable mechanism 3130, the lock protrusion 3122a of the back-rear movable decoration 3120 comes into contact with the guide portion 3141d of the lock member 3141 to lock. The member 3141 rotates toward the release position, and the rear-rear movable decorative body 3120 can move upward to a position beyond the restricting portion 3141c of the lock member 3141. Then, when the lock protrusion 3122a of the back-rear movable decoration 3120 moves above the lock member 3141, the lock member 3141 is rotated to the lock position by the urging force of the lock spring 3143, and the back-rear movable decoration 3120 is viewed from the front. It will return to the state of being located at the upper part in the game area 5a.

In this way, when the lock member 3141 is moved from the locked position to the unlocked position by the transmission slider 3142 of the back-back movable mechanism 3130 according to the game state, a large back-back movable decorative body that straddles the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction. Since the 3120 will fall (move) so as to traverse the front side of the effect display device 1600, the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 blocks the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the player can see it. The movement of the back-rear movable decoration 3120 can be noticed, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back-rear movable decoration 3120. Further, by dropping the large back-rear movable decorative body 3120, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back-rear movable decorative body 3120, and the game can be played. It is possible to strongly make the person think that an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous will occur, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

By the way, since the back-rear movable decoration 3120 is sized so as to straddle the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction and both ends in the left-right direction are movably attached by slide shafts 3132, the back-rear movable decoration 3120 Is easy to tilt in the left-right direction (horizontal). On the other hand, when unlocking the back-rear movable decoration body 3120 by the lock member 3141, the restricting portion 3141c of the lock member 3141 is on the opposite side to the downward direction in which the back-rear movable decoration body 3120 tends to move. The lock member 3141 is rotated so as to move to the upper side of the back, so that the lock protrusion 3122a of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is hard to come off from the regulation portion 3141c. As a result, even if the back-rear movable decoration 3120 is tilted, the lock protrusion 3122a does not come off from the regulation portion 3141c, and it is possible to prevent the back-rear movable decoration 3120 from falling downward without permission. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 from falling without permission, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted by the back-rear movable decoration body 3120 without permission. At the same time, the lock can be released at a desired timing according to the game state to drop the back-rear movable decoration 3120, and the effect of the movable effect using the back-rear movable decoration 3120 can be surely exhibited. be able to.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is provided, by displaying the effect image on the effect display device 1600, the player can be entertained by the effect image, and the deterioration of the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. Can be done. Further, by displaying the effect image that matches the movement of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 on the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image, a collaboration effect (for example) between the back-rear movable decoration body 3120 and the effect image is displayed. , The effect that the back-back movable decorative body 3120 is moved by the character displayed as the effect image, the effect that the character is moved by the back-back movable decorative body 3120, etc.) can be performed. A variety of productions make it difficult for players to get bored and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as described above, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is unlocked, the lock member 3141 is rotated so that the restricting portion 3141c moves upward, so that the effect display device 1600 is used. By making the back-rear movable decoration 3120 straddle in the left-right direction, even if the weight of the back-rear movable decoration 3120 increases, the lock protrusion 3122a of the back-rear movable decoration 3120 is disengaged from the regulation portion 3141c. Since it can be made difficult, one lock member 3141 can sufficiently lock the back-rear movable decorative body 3120. Further, since only one lock member 3141 is provided, it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the lock member 3141 as compared with the case where a plurality of lock members 3141 are provided, and the lock member 3141 is provided. The space can be made as small as possible, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 can be made relatively large and conspicuous.

Further, since the lock member 3141 is attached near the upward moving end of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120, the lock member 3141 moves from the restricting portion 3141c (standby position) to the lower moving end (lowering position). The distance can be as long as possible. Therefore, when the back-rear movable decoration 3120 falls a long distance, the player's interest can be easily attracted to the back-rear movable decoration 3120, and a strong impact can be given to the player. , It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the lock member 3141 is attached near the upward moving end of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120, there is a certain distance (space) between the lock member 3141 (regulating portion 3141c) and the upper moving end. ) Is secured, so that when the lock member 3141 is rotated from the lock position to the release position by the back-rear movable mechanism 3130, it is possible to secure a space in which the restricting portion 3141c can move upward, and the lock can be secured. The member 3141 can be reliably rotated to the release position, and the lock member 3141 can lock or unlock the movement of the back-rear movable decorative body 3120.

Further, since the lock member 3141 is provided with a guide portion 3141d extending diagonally, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 is moved upward and returned to the original position, it is locked by the back-rear movable mechanism 3130. Even if the member 3141 is not rotated to the release position side, the lock protrusion 3122a abuts on the guide portion 3141d as the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 moves, so that the lock member 3141 is automatically rotated to the release position side. Can be moved. Therefore, when returning the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 to the original state, it is not necessary to control the back-rear drive motor 3135 of the back-rear movable mechanism 3130, and the load applied to the effect control can be reduced, resulting in an overload. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to entertain the player due to the instability of the production control, which reduces the interest.

Further, since the rotation of the lock member 3141 from the lock position to the side opposite to the release position is restricted by the contact of the stopper 3141e with the rotation restricting member 3144, the lock member 3141 abuts with the restricting portion 3141c at the lock position. Even if a strong force acts downward from the lock protrusion 3122a side of the back-rear movable decoration 3120, the lock member 3141 rotates to the side opposite to the release position, and the lock protrusion 3122a of the back-rear movable decoration 3120 Can be prevented from coming off the regulation portion 3141c, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 can be surely prevented from falling without permission.

Further, the slide guide 3134 is moved downward by the drive of the back-rear drive motor 3135 of the back-rear movable mechanism 3130, and the lock member 3141 is rotated from the lock position to the release position via the transmission slider 3142, and then the back-rear movable. When the slide guide 3134 is moved upward by the back-rear drive motor 3135 in order to return the decorative body 3120 to its original state, the lock member 3141 automatically rotates from the release position to the lock position by the urging force of the lock spring 3143. Therefore, after the lock is released by the back-rear movable mechanism 3130 and the back-rear movable decoration body 3120 is dropped, the lock member 3141 is returned to the lock position by the lock spring 3143 without being returned to the lock position by the back-rear movable mechanism 3130. be able to. Therefore, it is not necessary to drive (control) the back-rear drive motor 3135 of the back-rear movable mechanism 3130 just to return the lock member 3141 to the lock position (original state), so that the load on the effect control can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the player from being entertained by the instability of the production control due to the overload and deteriorating the interest.

Further, since the back-rear movable decoration 3120 is moved (falls) downward by the gravity that is constantly acting, it is necessary to provide a mechanism for moving the back-rear movable decoration 3120 downward. Instead, the configuration related to the movement of the back-rear movable decoration body 3120 can be simplified, the configuration related to the movement can be made compact, and the back-rear movable decoration body 3120 can be made as much as the compact space. It is possible to make it larger, and it is possible to make the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 stand out and attract the player's attention strongly, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the back-rear movable decoration 3120 is provided with the back-rear movable mechanism 3130, the back-rear movable decoration 3120 can be dropped by the lock member 3141 and the back-rear movable mechanism 3130. It will be possible to prevent it. That is, since it is possible to double lock the lock member 3141 and the slide guide 3134 of the back-rear movable mechanism 3130, there is a problem that the back-rear movable decorative body 3120 falls to the lower moving end without permission. It can be prevented, and the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 of FIG. 107 as a result of the lottery based on the establishment of the starting conditions. It is possible to give a profit to the player when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a hit, and as a display device, the effect display device 1600 of FIG. 107, the image information storage means. The peripheral data ROM 1520a of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 of FIG. 168, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 168 are provided as an effect pattern setting means and an image display control means.

Peripheral control IC 1510a as an effect pattern setting means can set an effect pattern related to this lottery from a plurality of patterns based on the result of the lottery. Specifically, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has a plurality of types of effects based on various commands from the main control board 1310 (commands corresponding to the first special lottery result or commands corresponding to the second special lottery result). When any pattern is set (determined) from the patterns, various schedule data corresponding to the set (determined) pattern are set (determined) from among a plurality of types of various schedule data.

The effect display device 1600 as a display device can display an effect image corresponding to the effect of the pattern set by the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Peripheral data ROM 1520a as an image information storage means stores image data such as a background image, a character image, and a pattern image for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600 as image information constituting the effect image. Can be done.

The peripheral control IC 1510a as an image display control means generates drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 as an effect image from the image information stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600. It is something that can be done.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player can be made to recognize the hit expectation degree by the mode of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the process of the effect progress. Specifically, by changing the display mode of the hold display from the execution of the pre-digestion hold display as the hold display to the end of the execution of the post-digest hold display, the decorative design based on the hold display is changed. It is possible to execute a hold notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit for the variable display (variable display of a special symbol).

When the peripheral control IC 1510a as an image display control means performs a hold change suggestion effect accompanied by a grayscale effect as a predetermined condition is satisfied, the peripheral control IC 1510a is an effect corresponding to the effect of the pattern set by the peripheral control IC 1510a as the effect pattern setting means. As an image, it is possible to generate a special effect image that has been subjected to a specific process different from the normal one and display it on the effect display device 1600, and this normal effect image that is not subjected to the specific process. It is possible to make it difficult to identify the aspect of. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a displays all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in the hold change suggestion effect accompanied by the gray scale effect shown in FIGS. 194 (r) to 195 (u). By converting all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIGS. 194 (c) to 195 (f) in the hold change suggestion effect without the gray scale effect into gray scale, FIG. 194 ( r) -The special effect image used for the hold change suggestion effect with the grayscale effect shown in FIGS. 195 (u) and the hold change without the grayscale effect shown in FIGS. 194 (c) to 195 (f). It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the mode from the normal effect image used for the suggestion effect.

As the effect of the pattern set by the peripheral control IC 1510a as the effect pattern setting means progresses, the peripheral control IC 1510a as the image display control means continues to generate a special effect image and display it on the effect display device 1600. By generating a period during which the grayscale effect is performed as a specific period (for example, a frame for one screen is set for a predetermined frame), the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 for this specific period. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify the hit expectation through, and after the end of this specific period, the hit expectation is identified to the player through the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is designed to be easy. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a is used as all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in the hold change suggestion effect accompanied by the gray scale effect shown in FIGS. 194 (r) to 195 (u). All the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIGS. 194 (c) to 195 (f) in the hold change suggestion effect without the gray scale effect are converted to gray scale and are displayed on hold. It is difficult to determine from what color to what color (pending change). As a result, in the grayscale effect, by hiding the suggestion of the expected value by the hold display, the expected value (hit expectation degree) can be made difficult for the player to identify. Then, when the peripheral control IC 1510a proceeds to the effect that develops into the super reach shown in FIG. 196 (g), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is filled with a full-color image from the image whose entire display area is converted to gray scale. Switch to the background image 1645, the left decorative symbol 1650a of the full-color image, the medium decorative symbol 1650b of the full-color image, the right decorative symbol 1650c of the full-color image, and the first hold display 1655a having the white color of the full-color image, and the whole is the original full-color image. The fourth hold display determined as the final color of the hold display in the case of performing the hold change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 194 (b) from the color changed to white in the light emitting decoration of the decoration body 3511. Switch to 1655d red and return to the original color. As a result, after the end of the grayscale effect, the expected value (hit expectation degree) can be easily identified by the player by suggesting the expected value by the hold display.

In this way, while the effect of the pattern set by the peripheral control IC 1510a as the effect pattern setting means progresses, a special effect image is generated by the peripheral control IC 1510a as the image display control means and displayed on the effect display device 1600. By generating a specific period in which the operation is continuously performed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify the hit expectation level through the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 in this specific period. However, after the end of this specific period, the hit expectation degree can be easily identified by the player through the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing a new effect with simple control.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the volume can be adjusted by the player rotating the rotation operation unit 302 during the game production period in which the symbol change or the big hit game is executed. When an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 and a drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302 are performed during the effect period, the volume change prohibition flag is used for a period longer than the period in which those effects are executed. Is turned on, and even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the volume is restricted so that the volume is not adjusted. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally adjusting the volume by the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the volume can be adjusted by the player rotating the rotation operation unit 302 during the game production period in which the symbol change or the big hit game is executed. When the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed during the effect period, the volume change prohibition flag is turned on for at least the period during which the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is executed, and the player Limits the volume adjustment so that the volume is not adjusted even if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated. According to this, when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated for the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303, the player does not intend to erroneously operate the rotation operation unit 302 located in the vicinity of the pressing operation unit 303. It is possible to prevent the volume adjustment from being performed and to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the rotation operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the volume, a volume adjustment bar indicating the adjusted volume is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600. When a predetermined period has elapsed from the reception of the final adjustment, the volume adjustment bar is erased, and the rotation operation unit 302 is operated during the game effect period in which the symbol change or the jackpot game is executed. When the volume change prohibition flag that limits (prohibits) the volume adjustment is turned on, the volume adjustment bar that is displayed when the volume change prohibition flag is turned on is displayed as the volume. Even after the change prohibition flag is turned on, it is displayed continuously. According to this, even if the volume change prohibition flag is turned on while the rotation operation unit 302 is being operated during the game production period, what kind of volume the adjustment is restricted at? As you can see, it is possible to continue to display the volume adjustment bar even after the volume change prohibition flag is turned on, which causes discomfort when the volume adjustment is suddenly restricted. It is possible to reduce the number of games and prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment.

Further, in an example of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal drawing start port 2010 is a large path on the path through which the game ball B launched toward the grand prize opening 2005 in the game area 5a passes, and on the path. It is arranged at a position preceding the winning opening 2005. That is, a part of the game ball B launched toward the big winning opening 2005 is configured to win a prize in the normal drawing starting opening 2010. As a result, even when the player performs a right-handed hit at a short firing interval during the big hit game, it is possible to suppress winning more than a specified number in one opening of the big winning opening 2005. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the game ball B wins the game ball B in the starting port 2010, a smaller number of game balls are paid out as compared with the case where the game ball B wins the big prize opening 2005. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game balls paid out in one round of the big hit game become excessive. As a result, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest without imposing an excessive burden on the hall.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a specific effect (L5 effect), the jackpot expectation index is promoted in the look-ahead effect for the L5 target change using the hold variation, and the jackpot expectation is increased in the L5 target change. A series of productions that are further promoted will be realized. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the specific effect (L5 effect), the jackpot expectation index is promoted in the look-ahead effect for the L5 target change using the hold variation, and in the pseudo-continuous effect of the L5 target change. A series of productions will be realized in which the expectation of the big hit is further promoted. By realizing a series of these productions, the player can gradually obtain a sense of expectation for a big hit among a plurality of productions, and eventually the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a specific effect (secret timer advance notice effect), an effect (timer) having a high expectation different from the main advance notice effect is temporarily hidden on the effect display device 1600, and then sufficiently. After a long time, the effect with high expectation is redisplayed on the effect display device 1600. As a result, the player can feel the unexpectedness of the production, and by extension, the interest of the game is improved. When the timer advance notice effect is different from the main advance notice effect, the timer is temporarily hidden by the effect display device 1600 and then redisplayed to display the player's body clock and the actual time. Since there is a deviation from the elapsed time, the player can particularly feel the unexpectedness of the production.

[21. Another example]
It goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be carried out in various embodiments as long as it belongs to the technical scope of the present invention.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the decorative pattern 1150 is shown to be composed of a plurality of linearly recessed grooves, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern 1150 is recessed in a dot pattern. It may be composed of a plurality of grooves, a plurality of linearly bulging protrusions, a plurality of point-shaped bulging protrusions, and the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the pattern (pattern) of the decorative pattern 1150, a cracked pattern is shown, but the pattern is not limited to this, and the pattern of the decorative pattern 1150 is a wavy pattern or a geometric pattern. , Check pattern, basket pattern, uroko pattern, pattern imitating a character according to the concept of pachinko machine 1, pattern imitating an item according to the concept of pachinko machine 1, imitating a logo according to the concept of pachinko machine 1. It may be a pattern that has been made, a pattern that imitates the background in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment described above, only the decorative pattern 1150 is formed on the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 (game panel 1100), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, "decorative pattern forming region" is shown. The decorative pattern 1150 may be formed in 1101 and the decorated decorative sheet may be attached to the decorative pattern non-forming region 1102, or the decorative pattern 1150 may be avoided in the decorative pattern forming region 1101. You may make it "paste the decorative sheet with the above", or "after forming the decorative pattern 1150 in the decorative pattern forming area 1101, a part of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 so as to cover the decorative pattern 1150 from the rear". Alternatively, a decorative sheet with decoration may be attached to the entire surface. "

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a movable decorative body in which a force for constantly moving to one side in the moving direction acts, a force for constantly moving downward due to gravity acts on the back. Although the rear movable decorative body 3120 is shown, it is not limited to this, and it is attached so as to be movable in the left-right direction, and always tries to move to one side in the moving direction by the urging force of the elastic member. It may be a movable decorative body on which a force is applied, or it may be attached so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and as a movable decorative body on which a force that constantly tries to move upward by the urging force of the elastic member is acting. May be good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the hold change suggestion effect, the final color of the hold display in the circular shape with decoration is determined, and the color of the hold display is changed from the initial color to the final color. The effect of changing the expected value to increase as the hold digestion by the main control board 1310 progressed was progressing, but in addition to the circular hold display, the triangular hold display and the square shape In addition to combining the hold display, the effect of changing the color of the hold display from the initial color to the final color so that the expected value increases as the hold digestion by the main control board 1310 progresses may proceed. In this way, in the grayscale effect, the suggestion of the expected value due to the hold display can be hidden.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control IC 1510a determines the time when the color is changed and the color to be changed by lottery as a mode in which the color of the hold display is changed from the initial color to the final color (hold change pattern). However, various commands to be transmitted to the peripheral control IC 1510a can be determined by lottery on the main control board 1310 side or extracted from a predetermined table on the main control board 1310 side. It may be included.

Further, in the present embodiment described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a ends the process of converting all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 into gray scale by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a at the end of the gray scale effect. As a result, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the background image 1645 of the full-color image, the left decorative symbol 1650a of the full-color image, the medium-decorative symbol 1650b of the full-color image, and the full-color image are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It was configured to switch to the first hold display 1655a having the right decorative pattern 1650c and the white color of the full-color image, and to return (switch) to the original full-color image at once as a whole. Instead of configuring to return (switch) from the grayscale converted image to the full color image at once, configure to gradually cancel the grayscale image and gradually return (switch) to the full color image. May be good. At this time, among the images converted to gray scale, the background image 1645, the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c are gradually released and returned (switched) to the full-color image, and finally, the first. The hold display 1655a may be gradually released and returned (switched) to the full-color image.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the hold change suggestion effect accompanied by the grayscale effect, it is difficult to determine from what color the hold display color has changed (hold change), so that the hold display is displayed. It was configured so that the suggestion of the expected value by could be hidden, but it is not limited to such a pending change, and the expected value (expected value) is used in the one-frame screen data that defines the above-mentioned screen by using the grayscale setting mode. You may try to conceal the production related to the suggestion of degree). For example, when the grayscale effect is not performed and the expected value (expected degree) can be suggested by using the button color by the effect of instructing the operation of the button on the screen, the effect of instructing the operation of this button is gray. By using the scale effect, it can be difficult to determine whether the button is a red button or a blue button.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the grayscale setting mode is used in the screen data of one frame defining the above-mentioned screen so as to conceal the effect regarding the suggestion of the expected value (expected degree). Not limited to such a grayscale setting mode, other setting modes may be used to conceal the effect related to the suggestion of the expected value (expected degree). For example, using the mosaic setting mode described above, it can be difficult to determine whether the display is a red hold display or a blue hold display.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the grayscale setting mode is used in the screen data of one frame defining the above-mentioned screen so as to conceal the effect regarding the suggestion of the expected value (expected degree). Not limited to such a grayscale setting mode, when the production related to the suggestion of the expected value (expected value) is concealed by using other setting modes, the expected value (expected value) that becomes a big hit differs for each setting mode. You may do so. For example, the expected value (expected degree) that is a big hit for the effect set in the mosaic setting mode described above as another setting mode is compared with the expected value (expected value) that is a big hit for the effect set in the grayscale setting mode. Can be set high.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the hold change suggestion effect accompanied by the grayscale effect shown in FIGS. 194 (r) to 195 (u), all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are gray. All the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIGS. 194 (c) to 195 (f) in the hold change suggestion effect without the scale effect were converted to gray scale, but the gray scale effect was used. As a background image 1645, a left decorative symbol 1650a, a middle decorative symbol 1650b, and a right decorative symbol 1650c, a full-color image is recommended in the screen data of one frame that defines the above-mentioned screen without using the gray scale setting mode. , The grayscale setting mode may be used in the one-frame screen data that defines the above-mentioned screen for the hold display, and the effect may be promoted by the grayscale image. As a result, the grayscale effect can be performed on a part of the display area of the effect display device 1600, which is the area to be displayed on hold.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, one effect display device 1600 is provided on the game board 5 as the effect display device, but a plurality of effect display devices may be provided on the game board 5, in addition to the game board 5. A plurality of effect display devices may be provided in the vicinity of the pressing operation unit 303 of the door frame 3 or in the door frame right side decorative body 419 shown in FIG. In this case, for example, when the hold display is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the effect display device 1600 is displayed in the hold change suggestion effect accompanied by the grayscale effect shown in FIGS. 194 (r) to 195 (u). As all the images displayed in the area, all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIGS. 194 (c) to 195 (f) in the hold change suggestion effect without the gray scale effect are gray scaled. On the other hand, for other effect display devices that do not perform such hold display, a full-color image effect is recommended without a grayscale effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the color of the hold display is changed, various speakers (for example, a vibration speaker 354 provided on the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 or the like, and a top) have sound effects corresponding to the color of the hold display. It was supposed to flow from the central speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, etc.), but the same sound effect may be played when the color of the hold display is changed. .. By doing this, in the grayscale production, it can be difficult to determine from what color the color of the hold display has changed from what color by the sound effect, so the grayscale production ends and it develops into super reach. By switching the hold display hidden by the grayscale effect to the final color of the hold display in the effect to be performed, the expected value is released, so that a more innovative effect can be provided to the player.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the color of the hold display is changed, as a sound effect corresponding to the color of the hold display, for example, when the color of the hold display is white, the sound effect flows as "pico". , If the color of the hold display is blue, the sound effect will be played as "pee", if the color of the hold display is yellow, the sound will be played as "pee, pico", and the color of the hold display will be red. In the case of, the sound effect is played as "picopico", but when the color of the hold display is changed, a sound sound that is difficult to distinguish may be played. For example, in addition to the reference time (1 second) as the time to play the sound effect "Pi", the color of the hold display may be lengthened or shortened from white to red in 0.2 second increments. Alternatively, the number of times the sound effect "pi" is repeated may be increased or shortened from white to red in the hold display color, or as a sound effect corresponding to the hold display color. The time for playing the "pi" and the number of times the sound effect "pi" is repeated may be combined. By doing this, in the grayscale production, it can be difficult to determine from what color the color of the hold display has changed from what color by the sound effect, so the grayscale production ends and it develops into super reach. By switching the hold display hidden by the grayscale effect to the final color of the hold display in the effect to be performed, the expected value is released, so that a more innovative effect can be provided to the player.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has been described as an example, but the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the pachinko machine, and a gaming machine other than the pachinko machine, for example, a slot machine (rotary cylinder type). It can also be applied to a game machine) or a fusion game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused (a machine that plays a slot game using a game ball). Here, a slot machine as a rotating drum type gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 208. FIG. 208 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

As shown in FIG. 208, the slot machine 6000 is configured to include a front door 6002 and a main body portion 6004. The front door 6002 and the main body portion 6004 are connected to each other via a hinge (not shown). The front door 6002 can be opened from the main body portion 6004 by inserting the key into the keyway 6005 provided at the right end of the front door 6002 and turning it clockwise with this hinge as the center of rotation.

The upper half of the front door 6002 is provided with the game panel 6006, and the lower half of the front door 6002 is formed with a protrusion protruding forward from the game panel 6006. A medal insertion slot 6008, a bet button 6010, 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006. Further, a storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are arranged in the lower half of the front door 6002, and a saucer 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024. These bet buttons 6010, 6012, start lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, storage settlement button 6022, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. Has been done. The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300, and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at approximately the center of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotating bodies (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 through this display window, an effect device (not shown), and the like are shown. It can be seen through. Three variable rotating bodies (not shown) are attached to and fixed to a main body side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004. On the other hand, the effect device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side mounting member (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the front door 6002.

On these variable rotating bodies, a translucent symbol band on which a plurality of types of symbols (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as symbol information is attached to each tubular frame. ing. Such a tubular variable rotating body is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) and each variable rotating body are connected to each other. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and when the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates, a plurality of types of symbols continuously change from the top to the bottom from the above-mentioned display window. It is designed to look like.

The effect device includes a plurality of movable effect bodies (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and a peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500 controls the operation of a plurality of movable effectors, the drawing control of the effect display device 1600, the light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, etc., based on various commands from the main control board 1310. By performing various controls, the progress of the production is controlled. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 described above. As described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). ), When various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed by metal pan screws, they are grounded to the same ground (GND). It is configured to be a ground (GND).

In the main control board 1310, a predetermined number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008 as a game medium, and the variable display of the symbol information is started based on the operation of the start lever 6014, and the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, and the right The variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information has a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals as a game medium to the tray 6026.

In the fusion game machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes the ball slot 6008', and in the main control board 1310, a predetermined number of game balls are thrown into the ball slot 6008' as a game medium, and the start lever 6014 is operated. Based on this, the variable display of the symbol information is started, and the variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information has a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of the game ball as a game medium to the tray 6026.

1 ... Pachinko machine, 2 ... Outer frame, 3 ... Door frame, 4 ... Main body frame, 5 ... Game board, 5a ... Game area, 1300 ... Main control unit, 1310 ... Main control board, 1500 ... Production control unit, 1501 ... Cover body, 1502 ... Base body, 1503 ... Wiring cover body, 1510 ... Peripheral control board, 1520 ... Peripheral data ROM board, 1530 ... Liquid crystal output board, 1600 ... Production display device.

Claims (1)

Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers triggered by winning a game ball to a predetermined start port,
When the start condition of the symbol change is satisfied, the determination means for determining whether or not the hit is based on the random number, and
A symbol control means that changes the symbol based on the determination result of the determination means and displays the determination result by the determination means on the symbol display device.
An effect determining means for determining an effect to appear from a plurality of effects based on the determination result by the determination means, and
The effect executing means for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means, and the effect executing means.
A gaming machine including an effect display device for displaying an effect executed by the effect executing means.
It is possible to display the countdown display in the countdown display area formed in the effect display device.
The countdown display is such that the value displayed when the countdown display is started is subtracted step by step, and is terminated when the subtraction is performed for the displayed value.
When the countdown display is finished, the countdown end trigger display is displayed.
The first aspect of hiding the countdown display displayed on the effect display device without displaying the countdown end trigger display when the symbol change is being performed, and the effect display device. There is a second aspect of continuing the countdown display without hiding the displayed countdown display.
The countdown display displayed on the effect display device is terminated from the second aspect, in which the countdown display is continued without hiding the countdown display displayed on the effect display device. It is said that the first aspect, in which the trigger display is hidden without being displayed, has a higher degree of expectation for the hit.
When the countdown display displayed on the effect display device is hidden without displaying the countdown end trigger display, and then the non-displayed countdown display is changed. It is possible to redisplay it in
When the first aspect of hiding the countdown display without displaying the countdown end trigger display is executed, the expected degree of hit is the execution mode while the countdown display is hidden. by to perform the special effect different, and Hide to the count-down at a predetermined time before the timing than the timing of the special effect is executed,
The special effect executed while the countdown display is hidden is the time from the start of the symbol variation until the countdown display displayed on the effect display device is hidden. It is an effect that is executed in a state where the countdown display is hidden for a longer period of time.
The special effect executed while the countdown display is hidden is from the time when the countdown display is hidden without displaying the countdown end trigger display until the special effect is started. director der carried out a long time than the time of is,
When the countdown display is hidden, not only the countdown display but also the countdown display area itself formed on the effect display device is hidden .

Images